construction documents the hamlet multi-family … · project manual 90% review construction...

The McCarty Company

DES IGN GROUP, P. A .

Office:533WestMainStreetTupelo,Mississippi38804

Mail:P.O.Box440Tupelo,Mississippi38802

Phone:662.844.4400Fax:662.844.0500

ARCH I T EC T UR E IN T ER IOR DES IGN DES IGN / B U I L D

w ww. m

ccar t ycompany. com

Project Manual

90% REVIEW CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS

THE HAMLET

Multi-Family Housing Apartments

Conway, AR

Project #19022

January 2020

Scope of Work includes a 108-unit, multi-family housing (apartment style) development. Three-story, slab-on-grade, and wood framed structures. The units are distributed thru-out three buildings. The development is located in

Conway, Arkansas. Work also includes mechanical, plumbing, fire protection, and electrical systems.

ARCHITECTURE PLANNING INTERIOR DESIGN

PROJECT NO.: 19022 THE HAMLET CONWAY, AR MULTI-FAMILY HOUSING APARTMENTS

JANUARY 2020 TABLE OF CONTENTS 1 OF 3

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Division Section Title

PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING DOCUMENTS GROUP

DIVISION 00 - PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS 00 0107 00 0115

SEALS PAGE INDEX OF DRAWING SHEETS

00 3119 00 3132

EXISTING CONDITION INFORMATION GEOTECHNICAL DATA

00 6000 FORMS 00 7000 GENERAL CONDITIONS00 8000 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS

SPECIFICATIONS GROUP

General Requirements Subgroup

DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01 1000 SUMMARY 01 2500 SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES01 2600 CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES01 2900 PAYMENT PROCEDURES01 3100 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION01 3200 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION01 4000 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS01 4200 REFERENCES 01 6000 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS01 7300 EXECUTION 01 7700 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES01 7823 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA01 7839 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS01 7900 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING

Facility Construction Subgroup

DIVISION 03 - CONCRETE 03 1000 CONCRETE FORMING AND ACCESSORIES03 2000 CONCRETE REINFORCING03 3000 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE03 5300 CONCRETE TOPPING

DIVISION 04 - MASONRY 04 7300 MANUFACTURED MASONRY VENEER

DIVISION 05 - METALS 05 5000 METAL FABRICATIONS05 5113 METAL PAN STAIRS



DIVISION 06 - WOOD, PLASTICS, AND COMPOSITES 06 1000 06 1753

ROUGH CARPENTRY SHOP-FABRICATED WOOD TRUSSES

06 2000 FINISH CARPENTRY

DIVISION 07 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 07 2100 THERMAL INSULATION07 2500 WEATHER BARRIERS07 3113 ASPHALT SHINGLES 07 4646 FIBER-CEMENT SIDING07 6200 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM07 7100 ROOF SPECIALTIES 07 8413 PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING07 8446 FIRE RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEMS07 9200 JOINT SEALANTS

DIVISION 08 – OPENINGS 08 1115 STEEL DOORS 08 1600 08 5313

MOLDED COMPOSITE DOORS VINYL WINDOWS

DIVISION 09 – FINISHES 09 2900 09 3013

GYPSUM BOARD CERAMIC TILING

09 6519 09 6816 09 8000

RESILIENT TILE FLOORING SHEET CARPETING GYPCRETE

09 9113 09 9123

EXTERIOR PAINTING INTERIOR PAINTING

DIVISION 10 – SPECIALTIES 10 2116 PLASTIC SHOWER COMPARTMENTS10 2800 10 4116

TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES FIRE EXTINGUISHERS

DIVISION 11 – EQUIPMENT 11 3013 RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES

DIVISION 12 – FURNISHING 12 3530 12 3623

RESIDENTIAL CASEWORK PLASTIC-LAMINATE-CLAD COUNTERTOPS

DIVISION 22 – PLUMBING SEE DRAWINGS.

DIVISION 23 – HEATING, VENTILATION AND AIR CONDITIONING SEE DRAWINGS



DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL 26 0500 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL26 0519 LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 26 0526 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS26 0533 RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS26 2400 PANELBOARDS 26 2726 WIRING DEVICES 26 2816 ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS

DIVISION 27 – COMMUNICATIONS 27 2000 DATA AND COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS ROUGH-IN27 4000 TELEVISION CABLE SYSTEM

DIVISION 28 – FIRE PROTECTION 28 4600 FIRE ALARM SYSTEMS – HEADER FIST PAGE28 4605 FIRE PROTECTION SMOKE DETECTORS FOR CLUBHOUSE

DIVISION 31 – EARTHWORK 31 2318 EARTHWORK FOR STRUCTURES31 3116 TERMITE CONTROL SEE DRAWINGS FOR ADDITIONAL EARTHWORK SPECIFICATIONS.

DIVISION 32 - EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS 32 9000 LANDSCAPE DEVELOPMENT32 9200 SODDING SEE DRAWINGS FOR ADDITIONAL EARTHWORK SPECIFICATIONS.

DIVISION 33 – UTILITIES SEE DRAWINGS.

END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS


JANUARY 2020 SEALS PAGE 1 OF 1

DOCUMENT 00000 - SEALS PAGE

1.1 DESIGN PROFESSIONALS OF RECORD

A. Architect:

1. McCarty Architects Professional Association. 2. Kurt Shettles, Architect 3. AR License #9621 4. Responsible for Divisions 01-50 Sections except where indicated as prepared by other

design professionals of record.

B. Civil Engineer:

1. Mapie Engineering and Land Development, Inc. 2. Justin Magie, PE 3. AR License # 4. Responsible for Divisions 31, 32 and 33 except where indicated as prepared by other

design professionals of record. See drawings for specifications.

C. Mechanical Engineer: Plumbing and HVAC:

1. Murphy Engineering, Inc. 2. Jeff Crabtree, PE 3. AR License # 4. Responsible for Division 22 and 23 Sections except where indicated as prepared by other


D. Electrical Engineer:

1. Murphy Engineering, Inc. 2. Dennis Murphy, PE 3. AR License # 4. Responsible for Divisions 26, 27 and 28 except where indicated as prepared by other


END OF DOCUMENT


JANUARY 2020 INDEX OF DRAWING SHEETS - 001115 1 OF 2

DOCUMENT 001115 – INDEX OF DRAWING SHEETS

Drawings consist of the Construction Document Drawings and other drawings listed on the Table of Contents page of the separately bound drawing set titled The Hamlet Multi-Family Housing, dated January 31, 2019, as modified by subsequent Addenda and Contract modifications. List of Drawings: Drawings consist of the following Contract Drawings and other drawings of type indicated:

GENERAL:

G000 COVER SHEET G001 GENERAL INFORMATION

CIVIL:

C1.0 OVERALL SITE PLAN C1.1 DIMENSIONAL CONTROL PLAN C2.0 PAVING PLAN C3.0 GRADING PLAN C3.1 GRADING PLAN C4.0 ON-SITE UTILITY PLAN C4.1 OFF-SITE UTILITY PLAN C5.0 SITE DETAILS C5.1 SITE DETAILS C6.0 WATER SYSTEMS DETAILS C6.1 SEWER SYSTEM DETAILS C7.0 EROSION CONTROL PLAN

ARCHITECTURAL:

AS100 ARCHITECTURAL SITE LAYOUT A001 WINDOW TYPES & DETAILS, DOOR TYPES & SCHEDULE A101 BUILDING 1 FLOOR PLANS A102 BUILDING 2 FLOOR PLANS A103 UNIT A & B FLOOR PLANS A104 UNIT C FLOOR PLAN A105 UNIT C-ADA FLOOR PLAN A106 UNIT D FLOOR PLAN A107 UNIT D-ADA FLOOR PLAN A108 ROOF PLANS A201 BUILDING 1 EXTERIOR ELEVATIONS A202 BUILDING 2 EXTERIOR ELEVATIONS A301 BUILDING 1 & 2 LONGITUDINAL SECTION A302 BUILDING 1 & 2 LATERAL SECTIONS A303 BUILDING 1 & 2 TYPICAL WALL SECTIONS A501 CLUB HOUSE FLOOR PLAN AND WALL SECTION A502 CLUB HOUSE EXTERIOR ELEVATIONS A503 MAIL KIOSK AND DUMPSTER PLANS A601 MILLWORK INTERIOR ELEVATIONS A602 MILLWORK INTERIOR ELEVATIONS


JANUARY 2020 INDEX OF DRAWING SHEETS - 001115 2 OF 2

MECHANICAL

M100 SITE LAYOUT HVAC M201 BUILDING 1 FLOOR PLANS HVAC M202 BUILDING 2 FLOOR PLANS HVAC M301 UNIT A & B FLOOR PLANS HVAC M302 UNIT C FLOOR PLAN HVAC M303 UNIT C-ADA FLOOR PLAN HVAC M304 UNIT D FLOOR PLAN HVAC M305 UNIT D-ADA FLOOR PLAN HVAC M400 CLUB HOUSE HVAC M500 MANUAL - J CALCULATIONS HVAC M600 SCHEDULES & DETAILS - HVAC

FIRE PROTECTION

FP101 BUILDING 1 FIRE SPRINKLER PLAN FP201 BUILDING 2 FIRE SPRINKLER PLAN FP300 NOTES AND DETAILS FIRE SPRINKLER PLAN

ELECTRICAL

E101 UNIT "A" POWER AND LIGHTING PLANS E201 UNIT "B" POWER AND LIGHTING PLANS E301 UNIT "C" POWER AND LIGHTING PLANS E302 UNIT "C-ADA" POWER AND LIGHTING PLANS E401 UNIT "D" POWER AND LIGHTING PLANS E402 UNIT "D-ADA" POWER AND LIGHTING PLANS E501 CLUB HOUSE POWER AND LIGHTING PLANS E502 CLUB HOUSE DATA / COMM PLAN E601 BLDG 1 POWER AND LIGHTING PLANS E602 BLDG 2 POWER AND LIGHTING PLANS E603 BLDG 1 POWER FEEDER PLAN E604 BLDG 2 POWER FEEDER PLAN E701 ELECTRICAL SITE PLAN E801 UNIT FIRE ALARM PLAN E802 BLDG 1 FIRE ALARM PLAN E803 BLDG 2 FIRE ALARM PLAN E901 ELECTRICAL SCHEDULES E902 ELECTRICAL SCHEDULES AND LEGEND E903 ELECTRICAL DETAILS

END OF DOCUMENT 001115


JANUARY 2020 EXISTING CONDITION INFORMATION – 003119 1 OF 1

DOCUMENT 003119 - EXISTING CONDITION INFORMATION

1.1 EXISTING CONDITION INFORMATION

A. This Document with its referenced attachments is part of the Procurement and Contracting Requirements for Project. They provide Owner's information for Bidders' convenience and are intended to supplement rather than serve in lieu of the Bidders' own investigations. They are made available for Bidders' convenience and information but are not a warranty of existing conditions. This Document and its attachments are not part of the Contract Documents.

B. Survey information that includes information on existing conditions, prepared by Central Arkansas Professional Surveyor, dated February 2019, is available upon request.

C. Related Requirements:

1. Document 003132 "Geotechnical Data" for reports and soil-boring data from geotechnical investigations that are made available to bidders.



JANUARY 2020 GEOTECHNICAL DATA – 003132 1 OF 1

DOCUMENT 003132 - GEOTECHNICAL DATA

1.1 GEOTECHNICAL DATA

A. This Document with its referenced attachments is part of the Procurement and Contracting Requirements for Project. They provide Owner's information for Bidders' convenience and are intended to supplement rather than serve in lieu of Bidders' own investigations. They are made available for Bidders' convenience and information but are not a warranty of existing conditions. This Document and its attachments are not part of the Contract Documents.

B. A geotechnical investigation report for the original building, prepared by MTA, dated December 2019 is available upon request.



JANUARY 2020 FORMS – 006000 1 OF 2

DOCUMENT 006000 - FORMS

1.1 FORM OF AGREEMENT AND GENERAL CONDITIONS

A. The following form of Owner/Contractor Agreement and form of the General Conditions shall be used for Project:

1. AIA Document A101, "Standard Form of Agreement between Owner and Contractor, Stipulated Sum."

a. The General Conditions for Project are AIA Document A201, "General Conditions of the Contract for Construction."

2. The General Conditions are incorporated by reference. 3. The Supplementary Conditions for Project are separately prepared and included in the

Project Manual. 4. Owner's document(s) bound following this Document.

1.2 ADMINISTRATIVE FORMS

A. Administrative Forms: Additional administrative forms are specified in Division 01 General Requirements.

B. Copies of AIA standard forms may be obtained from the American Institute of Architects; http://www.aia.org/contractdocs/purchase/index.htm; [email protected]; (800) 942-7732.

C. Preconstruction Forms:

1. Form of Performance Bond and Labor and Material Bond: AIA Document A312, "Performance Bond and Payment Bond."

2. Form of Certificate of Insurance: AIA Document G715, "Supplemental Attachment for ACORD Certificate of Insurance 25-S."

D. Information and Modification Forms:

1. Form for Requests for Information (RFIs): AIA Document G716, "Request for Information (RFI)."

2. Form of Request for Proposal: AIA Document G709, "Work Changes Proposal Request." 3. Change Order Form: AIA Document G701, "Change Order." 4. Form of Architect's Memorandum for Minor Changes in the Work:

AIA Document G707, "Architect's Supplemental Instructions." 5. Form of Change Directive: AIA Document G714, "Construction Change Directive."


JANUARY 2020 FORMS – 006000 2 OF 2

E. Payment Forms:

1. Schedule of Values Form: AIA Document G703, "Continuation Sheet." 2. Payment Application: AIA Document G702/703, "Application and Certificate for

Payment and Continuation Sheet." 3. Form of Contractor's Affidavit: AIA Document G706, "Contractor's Affidavit of Payment

of Debts and Claims." 4. Form of Affidavit of Release of Liens: AIA Document G706A, "Contractor's Affidavit of

Payment of Release of Liens." 5. Form of Consent of Surety: AIA Document G707, "Consent of Surety to Final Payment."



JANUARY 2020 GENERAL CONDITIONS – 007000 1 OF 1

SECTION 007000 - GENERAL CONDITIONS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Scope: The General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, AIA Document A201, 2017

Edition, Articles 1 through 15 inclusive, is a part of this Contract and is incorporated herein as fully as if here set forth. Contractors are presumed to be familiar with this document; however, a copy may be examined in the Architect's office.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS (Not Applicable) PART 3 – EXECUTION (Not Applicable) END OF SECTION 007000


JANUARY 2020 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS – 008000 1 OF 19

SECTION 008000 – SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

A. The following Supplementary Conditions modify the "General Conditions of the Contract for Construction," AIA Document A201, 2017. Where a portion of the General Conditions is modified or deleted by the Supplementary Conditions, the unaltered portions of the General Conditions shall remain in effect. In the event of a conflict between the General Conditions of the Contract for Construction and Section 008000, Section 008000 shall control even if the conflicting provision in the General Conditions of the Contract for Construction is not expressly revised or deleted by reference in Section 008000.

B. The General Conditions may also be supplemented or amplified elsewhere in the Contract Documents by provisions located in, but not necessarily limited to, Division 1 of the Specifications.

1.2 SUPPLEMENTS

ARTICLE 1 - GENERAL PROVISIONS

1.1 BASIC DEFINITIONS

1.1.1 THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS:

Delete the last sentence in Article 1.1.1 and insert the following:

The Contract Documents shall include the Instructions to Bidders, the plans, the specifications, including Divisions 0 through 33, all Addenda and modifications to the plans and/or specifications, the Agreement between Owner and Contractor, the performance and payment bonds, the notice to proceed and any executed change orders. Information and documentation pertaining to soil investigation data, laboratory investigations, soil borings and related information included herein are not part of the Contract Documents. In the event of a conflict between the provisions of Division 0 and any other section of the Contract Documents, such other sections(s) shall govern.

1.1.2 THE CONTRACT

Add the following to the end of Article 1.1.2:

Large scale drawings shall govern over small scale drawings where there are differences or conflicts between such drawings. Where the word “similar” appears on the plans, it shall not be interpreted to mean “identical” and shall require the Contractor to coordinate the actual conditions and dimensions of the location where the “similar” conditions are shown to occur.



1.1.9 MISCELLANEOUS DEFINITIONS

Add the following: The term "products" as used in these Supplementary Conditions includes materials, systems and equipment.

1.2 CORRELATION AND INTENT OF THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS

1.2.4 Add the following Article 1.2.4:

It is the intent of the Contract Documents that the Contractor shall properly execute and complete the Work described by the Contract Documents, and unless otherwise provided in the Contract, the Contractor shall provide all labor, materials, equipment, tools, construction equipment and machinery, water, heat, utilities, transportation, and other facilities and services, whether temporary or permanent and whether or not incorporated in the Work, in full accordance with the Contract Documents and reasonably inferable from them as necessary to produce the intended results.


The Contract Documents shall be interpreted collectively, each part complementing the others and consistent with the intent of the Contract Documents. Unless an item shown or described in the Contract Documents is specifically identified to be furnished or installed by the Owner or others or is identified as “Not In Contract” (N.I.C.), the Contractor’s obligation relative to that item shall be interpreted to include furnishing, assembling, installing, finishing, and/or connecting the item at the Contractor’s expense to produce a product or system that is complete, appropriately tested, and in operable condition ready for use or subsequent construction or operation by the Owner or separate contractors. The omission of words or phrases for brevity of the Contract Documents, the inadvertent omission of words or phrases, or obvious typographical or written errors shall not defeat such interpretation as long as it is reasonably inferable from the Contract Documents as a whole.

Words or phrases used in the Contract Documents which have well-known technical or construction industry meanings are to be interpreted consistent with such recognized meanings unless otherwise indicated.

Except as noted otherwise, references to standard specifications or publications of associations, bureaus, or organizations shall mean the latest edition of the referenced standard specification or publication as of the date of the Advertisement of Bids.

In the case of inconsistency between Drawings and Specifications or within either document not clarified by addendum, the better quality or greater quantity of Work shall be provided in accordance with the Architect’s interpretation.

Generally, portions of the Contract Documents written in longhand take precedence over typed portions, and typed portions take precedence over printed portions.

Any doubt as to the meaning of the Contract Documents or any obscurity as to the wording of them shall be promptly submitted in writing to the Architect for written interpretation, explanation, or clarification.



ARTICLE 2 - OWNER

2.2 EVIDENCE OF THE OWNER’S FINANCIAL ARRANGEMENTS

2.2.1 Add the following to the beginning of Article 2.2.1:

“If the Project is a private project, not funded by public funds, then . . .”

2.2.2 Delete Article 2.2.2 entirely.

2.3 INFORMATION AND SERVICES REQUIRED OF THE OWNER

2.3.1 Delete Article 2.3.1 in its entirety.

2.3.2 Add the following at the end of Article 2.3.2

The term “Architect”, “Engineer” or “Design Professional” as used in the Contract Documents refers to McCarty Architects Professional Association.


2.3.6 Delete Article 2.3.6 in its entirety and insert the following:

The Contractor will be furnished free of charge 1 copy of the plans and specifications, including all Addenda. Additional sets will be furnished at the cost of reproduction, postage and handling.

2.4 OWNER’S RIGHT TO STOP THE WORK

2.4 Delete Article 2.4 in its entirety and insert the following:

2.4 If the Contractor fails to correct Work which is not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents as required by Article 12.2 or fails to carry out Work in accordance with the Contract Documents or fails to perform any of its obligations under the Contract Documents, the Owner may issue a written order to the Contractor to stop the Work, or any portion thereof, until the cause for such order has been eliminated. However, the right of the Owner to stop the Work shall not give rise to a duty on the part of the Owner to exercise this right for the benefit of the Contractor or any other person or entity, except to the extent required by Article 6.1.3.

The rights and remedies under this Article 2.4 are in addition to and do not in any respect limit any other rights of the Owner, including its termination rights under Article 14.

ARTICLE 3 - CONTRACTOR

3.1 GENERAL

3.1.1 Add the following at the end of Article 3.1.1:

The relationship of Contractor to Owner shall be that of independent contractor, and nothing in the Contract Documents is intended to nor should it be construed as creating any other relationship, expressed or implied, between Owner and Contractor.



3.2 REVIEW OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AND FIELD CONDITIONS BY CONTRACTOR


The Owner is entitled to deduct from the Contractor’s pay applications for amounts paid to the Architect for evaluating and responding to the Contractor’s requests for information that are not prepared in accordance with the Contract Documents or where the requested information is available to the Contractor from a careful study and comparison of the Contract Documents, field conditions, other Owner-provided information, Contractor-prepared coordination drawings, or prior Project correspondence or documentation.

3.4 LABOR AND MATERIALS

3.4.2 Add the following to the end of Article 3.4.2:

Some Sections of the Specifications may not allow substitution of materials, products or equipment. Where substitution is allowed the request for substitution will only be considered if made in strict accordance with the requirements of Article 3.4.4 below and Section 016000.


After the Contract has been executed, the Owner and the Architect may consider a request for the substitution of products in place of those specified only under the conditions set forth in Section 016000 of the specifications.

By making requests for substitutions, the Contractor:

.1 Represents that the Contractor has personally investigated the proposed substitute product and determined that it is equal or superior in all respect to that specified;

.2 Represents that the Contractor will provide the same warranty for the substitution that the Contractor would for that specified;

.3 Certifies that the cost data presented is complete and includes all related costs under this Contract except the Architect's redesign costs, and waives all claims for additional costs related to the substitution which subsequently becomes apparent; and

.4 Shall coordinate the installation of the accepted substitute, making such changes as may be required for the Work to be complete in all respects at its costs.

All substitutions shall be submitted within 30 days of the Notice to Proceed, as per Section 016000.


Contractor represents that it has independently investigated, considered and understands the labor conditions in the area surrounding the Project and acknowledges that such conditions may impact the Contractor’s cost and/or time of performance of the Contract. Therefore, Contractor further represents that the Contract Price is based upon Contractor’s independent investigations into such labor conditions and that the Contract time is reasonable and the date of Substantial Completion is obtainable. As a result, Contractor assumes the risk of increased costs, if any, incurred by it arising out of or related to such labor conditions and acknowledges that Contractor and its surety will reimburse Owner for any additional costs Owner incurs arising out of or related to such labor conditions.



3.7 PERMITS, FEES, NOTICES AND COMPLIANCE WITH LAWS


The Contractor shall secure and pay for the building permit and all other permits, fees, licenses, inspections and all other approvals and charges necessary for proper execution and completion of the Work.

3.7.3 Delete the words “knowing it to be” from Article 3.7.3.

3.8.2.3 Add the following to the end of Article 3.8.2.3:

. . . except when installation is specified to be included as part of the allowance in the General Requirements (Division 1 of the Specifications).

3.9 SUPERINTENDENT


The Contractor shall also employ a competent project manager who shall be primarily responsible for the Contractor’s home office activities in connection with the Contract.

The Owner shall have the right, which shall be exercised in a reasonable fashion, to approve the project manager and/or superintendent employed by the Contractor, either before or during the progress of construction.

The superintendent and project manager for the project shall be designated by the Contractor at the pre-construction conference. After Owner’s approval of such project manager and superintendent, they shall not be replaced by the Contractor without the Owner’s prior written consent, which consent is required unless the Contractor submits proof satisfactory to the Owner that the superintendent and/or the project manager should be terminated by the Contractor for cause.

3.10 CONTRACTOR’S CONSTRUCTION AND SUBMITTAL SCHEDULES

3.10.1 Add “but, in any event, no less than submission of a revised schedule with each monthly application for payment pursuant to Section 9.3” between “intervals” and “as” in the fourth sentence.


Time being of the essence, the Contractor shall perform the Work in accordance with the most recent schedule submitted to and approved by the Owner and Architect.

3.12 SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA AND SAMPLES


In reviewing Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples and similar submittals the Architect shall be entitled to rely upon the Contractor’s representation that such information is correct and accurate.




Unless such written notice has been given, the Architect’s approval of a Shop Drawing, Product Data, Sample or similar submittal shall not constitute approval of any changes not requested on the prior submittal.


The Architect’s review of the Contractor’s submittals will be limited to examination of an initial submittal and one (1) resubmittal. The Architect’s review of additional submittals will be made only with the consent of the Owner after notification by the Architect. The Owner shall be entitled to deduct from the Contract Sum amounts paid to the Architect for evaluation of such additional resubmittals.

3.12.10.1 Delete the second sentence entirely and replace with: “The performance and design criteria specified by the Architect in the Contract Documents shall be prepared in accordance with the applicable standard of care.”

3.18 INDEMNIFICATION

3.18.1 Add the word “defend”, before the word “indemnify” in the first line, add the words “or nonperformance” after the word “performance” in the third line and delete the phrase which begins “provided that such claim, damage, loss or expense is attributable to bodily injury, sickness, disease or death, or to injury to or destruction of tangible property (other than the Work itself),” to the end of the sentence.

ARTICLE 4 - ARCHITECT

4.2 ADMINISTRATION OF THE CONTRACT

4.2.4 Delete the last sentence entirely.


ARTICLE 5 - SUBCONTRACTORS

5.2 AWARD OF SUBCONTRACTS AND OTHER CONTRACTS FOR PORTIONS OF THE WORK

5.2.1 Delete the phrase “Unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents, the Contractor, as soon as practicable after award of the Contract,” from the first sentence of Article 5.2.1 and insert the following in lieu thereof:

The Contractor, with its first Application for Payment and as a condition to the Owner’s obligation to make payments to Contractor under Article 9 of the General Conditions as supplemented herein,




The Contractor’s unauthorized substitution of any subcontractor, supplier, person or entity previously identified by Contractor in accordance with Article 5.2.1 shall entitle the Owner to reject the work, materials or product furnished and require removal and replacement at no additional cost to the Owner.

ARTICLE 6 - CONSTRUCTION BY OWNER OR BY SEPARATE CONTRACTORS

6.1 OWNER'S RIGHT TO PERFORM CONSTRUCTION AND TO AWARD SEPARATE CONTRACTS

Delete Articles 6.1.1, 6.1.2, 6.1.3, 6.1.4 in their entirety and insert the following:

6.1 The term “Separate Contractor(s)” shall mean other contractors retained by the Owner under separate agreements. The Owner reserves the right to perform construction or operations related to the Project with the Owner’s own forces and to award separate contracts either in connection with other portions of the Project or other construction or operation on the site. In such event, the Contractor shall coordinate its activities with those of the Owner and of Separate Contractors so as to facilitate the general progress of all work being performed by all parties. Cooperation will be required in the arrangement for the storage of materials, and in the detailed execution of the Work.

The Contractor, including his subcontractors, shall keep informed of the progress and the detailed work of the Owner or Separate Contractors and shall immediately notify the Architect of lack of progress or delays by Separate Contractors which are affecting Contractor’s Work. Failure of Contractor to keep informed of the progress of the work of the Owner or Separate Contractors and/or failure of Contractor to give notice of lack of progress or delays by the Owner or Separate Contractors shall be deemed to be acceptance by Contractor of the status of progress by Separate Contractors for the proper coordination and completion of Contractor’s Work. If, through acts or neglect on the part of the Contractor, the Owner or any Separate Contractors shall suffer loss or damage or assert any claims of whatever nature against the Owner, the Contractor shall defend, indemnify and hold harmless the Owner from any such claims or alleged damages, and the Contractor shall resolve such alleged damages or claims directly with the Separate Contractors.

6.2 MUTUAL RESPONSIBILITY


ARTICLE 7 - CHANGES IN THE WORK

7.1 GENERAL


Except as permitted in Article 7.3, a change in the Contract Sum or the Contract Time shall only be accomplished by written change order. Therefore, the Contractor acknowledges that it is not entitled to a change in the Contract Sum or the Contract Time in the absence of a written change order on the basis of the course of conduct or dealings between the parties and/or the Owner’s express or implied acceptance of alterations or additions to the Work and/or the Owner has been unjustly enriched by the Contractor’s Work or any other basis otherwise allowed by law or the facts and Contractor agrees that any such extra or changed work was performed by it as a volunteer.



7.2 CHANGE ORDERS


Contractor’s execution of a change order constitutes a final settlement to the Contract Sum and construction schedule and the Contract Time for all matters relating to or arising out of the change in the Work that is the subject of the change order including, but not limited to, all direct and indirect costs associated with such change, all extended direct job site and home office overhead expenses and any and all delay and impact cost for the change, whether alone or in combination with other changes, including any impact, ripple or cumulative effect resulting therefrom, if any.


Adjustments to the Contract Sum by change order shall be based upon one of the methods set forth in Article 7.3.3.1, 7.3.3.2, 7.3.3.3 or 7.3.3.4, as appropriate. A reasonable allowance for the combined overhead and profit included in the change order shall be based upon the schedule set forth in Article 7.3.11, as supplemented.


In order to facilitate consideration of change order requests, all such requests, except those involving an amount less than $500 must be accompanied by a complete itemization of costs, including labor, materials and subcontractor costs which shall likewise be itemized. Changes for more than $500 will not be approved without such itemization.

7.3 CONSTRUCTION CHANGE DIRECTIVES

7.3.5 Add “Owner or” between “the” and “Contractor” in both places they appear in this Article.

7.3.8 Delete the first sentence and insert the following:

The amount of credit to be given by the Contractor to the Owner for a deletion or change which results in a net decrease in the Contract Sum shall be the actual net cost plus reasonable allowance for overhead on net cost and profit thereon as approved by the Architect and Owner.


The allowance for overhead and profit combined, including extended direct job and home office overhead and any and all delay, impact, inefficiency, disruption and ripple effect to be included in the total cost to the Owner, shall be based on the following schedule:

.1 For the Contractor, for work performed by the Contractor's own forces, 15 percent of the cost.

.2 For the Contractor, for work performed by the Contractor's subcontractor, 10 percent of the amount due the subcontractor.

.3 For each subcontractor or sub-subcontractor involved, for work performed by that subcontractor or sub-subcontractor's own forces, 15 percent of the cost.

.4 For each subcontractor, for work performed by the subcontractor's sub-subcontractor's, 10 percent of the amount due the sub-subcontractor.

.5 Costs to which overhead and profit is to be applied shall be determined in accordance with Article. 7.3.4.



ARTICLE 8 - TIME

8.2 PROGRESS AND COMPLETION

8.2.1 Add the following to the end of the second sentence:

and that the Contractor is fully capable of properly completing the Work within the Contract Time.

8.3 DELAYS AND EXTENSIONS OF TIME


No delay, interference, hindrance or disruption, from whatever source or cause, in the progress of the Contractor’s Work shall be a basis for an extension of time and/or additional compensation, unless the delay, interference, hindrance or disruption (1) is without the fault and not the responsibility of the Contractor, its subcontractors and/or suppliers and (2) directly affects the overall completion of the Work as reflected on the critical path of the Contractor’s updated and accepted construction schedules. The Contractor expressly agrees that the Owner shall have the benefit of any float in the construction schedule and that delays to construction activities, which do not affect the overall completion of the Work, do not entitle the Contractor to any extension in the Contract Time and/or increase in Contract Sum.


All claims by the Contractor for an increase in the Contract Time must follow the procedures set forth in Articles 15.1.2, 15.1.3, 15.1.5 and 15.1.6, including the requirement that the Contractor give written notice of any claim within twenty-one (21) days after occurrence of the event giving rise to such claim or within twenty-one (21) days after the Contractor first recognizes the condition giving rise to the claim, whichever is earlier.


If the Contractor submits a schedule indicating or otherwise expressing an intent to complete the Work prior to the date of substantial completion, the Owner shall have no liability to the Contractor for any failure by the Contractor to complete the Work prior to the expiration of the Contract Time.

ARTICLE 9 - PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION

9.3 APPLICATION FOR PAYMENTS

9.3.1 Add the following sentence to the end of Article 9.3.1:

The form of Application for Payment will be the current edition of the AIA Document G702, Application and Certification for Payment, supported with AIA Document G703, Continuation Sheet.

9.3.1.3 Add the following Article 9.3.1.3:

In any contract awarded by the state of Mississippi or any agency, unit or department of the State of Mississippi, or by any political subdivision thereof, the amount of retainage that may be withheld is governed by Mississippi law.




Payment for materials stored at some location other than the Project site, may be approved by the Architect and the Owner after the Contractor has submitted the following items:

.1 An acceptable Lease Agreement between the Contractor or one of its subcontractors or suppliers and the owner of the land, or building, where the materials are stored covering the specific area where the materials are located.

.2 Consent of Surety or other acceptable bond to cover the materials stored off-site.

.3 All Perils Insurance coverage for the full value of the materials stored off-site.

.4 A Bill of Sale from the Manufacturer to the Contractor for the stored materials.

.5 A complete list and inventory of materials manufactured, stored and delivered to the storage site and of materials removed from the storage site and delivered to the Project.

.6 A review by the Architect of the materials stored off-site prior to release of payment.

.7 Proof of payment of stored materials verified by the supplier must be submitted to the Architect within thirty (30) days of the Application for Payment on which payment for said materials was made. If proof of payment is not submitted within thirty (30) days, then payment for said materials will be deducted from the next application for payment and withheld until proof of payment is received.

9.5 DECISIONS TO WITHHOLD CERTIFICATION

9.5.1.7 Delete the word “repeated”.


The letter from the Contractor which is required by Article 15.1.6.2 has not been received.

9.6 PROGRESS PAYMENTS


Subject to the conditions of the Contract, the Owner shall make payment to the Contractor in the amount certified within thirty (30) days after receipt of the Certificate for Payment from the Architect. Payment shall not be considered late until thirty (30) days after Owner’s receipt of the approved Certificate for Payment from the Architect.

9.6.1.1 Contractor’s Applications for Payment shall be submitted on or before the 25th day of each month. Any application not submitted on or before this date may not be processed or approved until the following month.

9.6.7 Delete the word “Unless” from the first sentence and insert the phrase “Whether or not.”


The amount retained by the Contractor from each payment to each Subcontractor and material supplier shall not exceed the percentage retained by the Owner from the Contractor for the Subcontractor’s Work.



9.7 FAILURE OF PAYMENT

9.7 In the first sentence, delete the words "or awarded by binding dispute resolution".

9.8 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION


Substantial completion for purposes of this Contract occurs only upon Contractor’s compliance with the following conditions precedent: (a) the Contractor furnishes to the Architect all close-out documents required by the Contract Documents in a form satisfactory to the Architect and the Owner, (b) the Contractor furnishes the manufacturers’ certifications and/or warranties required by the Contract Documents; (c) the Contractor furnishes the Guarantee of Work set forth hereinbelow; and (d) the Architect certifies that the Work is sufficiently complete in accordance with the Contract Documents so that the Owner can occupy or utilize the Work for its intended purpose.

The Guarantee of Work shall be submitted as a separate document signed by Contractor and Contractor’s Surety and shall state the following:

Contractor and Contractor’s Surety hereby guarantee that all Work performed on the Project is free from defective and/or nonconforming materials and workmanship and that for a period of one year from the date of substantial completion or such longer period of time as may be called for in the Contract Documents for such portions of the Work, Contractor or its Surety will repair and/or replace any defective and/or nonconforming materials and workmanship in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents.


The Contractor shall be responsible for the costs of inspections made by the Architect including any and all other related expenses incurred by the Architect for providing services for the Project required by failure of the Contractor to achieve final acceptance / completion of the Project within 15 days after the first occurrence of the below described events:

1. Specified date of Substantial Completion; or 2. Actual date of Substantial Completion.

The costs of the Architect’s additional services shall be deducted by the Owner from the Contractor’s final application for payment to pay the Architect for additional services required by the Contractor’s failure to achieve final completion of the project within the 15 day period described above.

9.8.4 Delete the last sentence of Article 9.8.4 and insert the following:

Warranties required by the Contract Documents shall commence and continue for one (1) year from the date of Substantial Completion except that the roof system shall be warranted for a period of three (3) years from the date of Substantial Completion.




The Contractor shall execute the Certificate of Substantial Completion within 5 days of date of issuance. Contractor’s execution of the Certificate of Substantial Completion constitutes Contractor’s representation that the items on the list accompanying the Certificate can and will be completed by Contractor and his subcontractors within fifteen (15) days of Contractor’s execution of the Certificate. Based upon this representation by Contractor and upon the acknowledgment of the Architect that the listed items remaining can be completed within fifteen (15) days, the Owner agrees to execute the Certificate of Substantial Completion. If Contractor fails to complete the items on the list within fifteen (15) days of Contractor’s execution of the Certificate, then the Owner, at its option and without prejudice to any other rights or remedies it may have under this Contract or otherwise and without notice to Contractor or Surety, may proceed to have same completed and to deduct the reasonable costs thereof from the amounts then due or thereafter to become due to Contractor.


The costs of inspections made by Architect which are not required by Articles 4, 9.8 or 9.10 of the General Conditions and any other inspection required by Article 12 other than the year-end inspection itself, will be the responsibility of the Contractor and will be deducted by the Owner from the Application for Payment submitted after the Owner’s receipt of the Architect’s statement for its costs of additional inspections. These costs are not the result of Contractor’s failure to timely complete the Contract within the specified time and, therefore, such costs are in addition to and not a part of any liquidated damages calculation, if any.


Upon the Owner’s acceptance of the Work as substantially complete and upon Contractor’s compliance with all conditions precedent to substantial completion as stated in Section 00800, Article 9.8.1 and upon application by the Contractor, the Owner will pay to the Contractor all retainage held by the Owner less an amount equal to the greater of (a) two percent (2%) of the Contract Sum, or (b) two hundred percent (200%) of the estimated cost of the Work remaining to be performed by the Contractor in accordance with the Architect’s determination. Final payment, including all retainage, shall be made at the time and in the manner provided for final payment in accordance with the provisions of Article 9.10 and the additional conditions precedent to final acceptance / payment set forth in Section 00800, Article 9.8.5.

9.9 PARTIAL OCCUPANCY OR USE


The Owner’s occupancy or use of any completed or partially completed portions of the Work shall not affect Contractor’s obligation to complete incomplete items on the list attached to the Certificate of Substantial Completion within the time fixed in the Certificate and does not waive Owner’s right to obtain completion of incomplete items at Contractor’s expense upon Contractor’s failure to timely complete same.



9.11 LIQUIDATED DAMAGES

Liquidated Damages. Time being of the essence of this Contract and a matter of material consideration thereof, a reasonable estimate in advance is established to cover losses incurred by the Owner if the Project is not substantially complete on the date set forth in the Contract Documents. The Contractor and his Surety will be liable for and will pay the Owner the sums hereinafter stipulated as fixed and agreed as liquidated damages for each calendar day for delay until the Work is substantially complete. The Contractor and his Surety acknowledge that the Owner’s losses caused by the Contractor’s delay are not readily ascertainable and that the amount estimated per day for liquidated damages is reasonable and is not a penalty.

The amount established per day for liquidated damages is $0.

ARTICLE 10 - PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY

10.1 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS AND PROGRAMS

Add the following to the end of Article 10.1:

The Architect shall not administer the Contractor’s performance of its duties and responsibilities under Article 10 (including Articles 10.1 through 10.6) because the initiation, maintenance and supervision of safety precautions and programs is the sole responsibility of the Contractor as means, methods, techniques, sequences and procedures of construction and, therefore, is not part of the Contractor’s scope of Work which is to be administered by the Architect.

ARTICLE 11 - INSURANCE AND BONDS

11.4 LOSS OF USE, BUSINESS INTERRUPTION, AND DELAY IN COMPLETION INSURANCE

11.4 Delete Article 11.4 in its entirety.

ARTICLE 12 - UNCOVERING AND CORRECTION OF WORK

12.1 UNCOVERING OF WORK

12.1.2 Delete the second sentence of Article 12.1.2 entirely and replace with:

“If such Work is in accordance with the Contract Documents, costs of uncovering and replacement shall, by appropriate Change Order, be at the Owner’s expense.”

12.2 CORRECTION OF WORK

12.2.2 AFTER SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION


Prior to the end of the one-year period, (three years for roof systems), the Architect may schedule a warranty inspection which shall be attended by the Architect, the Owner, the Contractor and all major subcontractors. During this inspection, the parties shall identify all defective and/or



nonconforming items and fix a time within which all defective and/or nonconforming items shall be repaired and/or replaced.

12.2.2.1.1 Add the following Article 12.2.2.1.1:

Within the one-year period (three years for roof systems) provided for in the Guarantee of Work required by Article 9.8.1, if repairs or replacement are requested by Owner in connection with the Work which, in the opinion of the Owner, are rendered necessary as a result of the use of materials, equipment or workmanship which are inferior, defective or not in accordance with the Contract Documents, the Contractor and/or its Surety shall promptly, upon receipt of notice from and without expense to the Owner, place in satisfactory condition in every particular, all such Work, correct all defects therein and make good all damages to the building, site, equipment or contents thereof; and make good any work or materials or the equipment and contents of said buildings or site disturbed in fulfilling any such guarantee. If, after notice or within the time agreed upon by the parties at the warranty inspection, the Contractor and/or its Surety fail to proceed promptly to comply with the terms of the guarantee, the Owner may have the defects corrected in accordance with Article 2.5 and the Contractor and his Surety shall be liable for all expenses incurred. All special guarantees applicable to definite parts of the Work stipulated in the Contract Documents shall be subject to the terms of this paragraph during the first year of the life of such special guarantee.

ARTICLE 13 - MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS

13.5 INTEREST

13.5 Delete Article 13.5 in its entirety and insert the following:

Payments due and unpaid under the Contract Documents shall bear interest as provided by applicable Mississippi law.

13.6 ATTORNEYS’ FEES AND EXPENSES

Add the following Article 13.6 to private projects not funded in whole or in part by public monies.

The prevailing party in any dispute between the parties arising out of or related to this Agreement or the breach thereof, shall be entitled to reasonable attorneys’ and expert witness(es) fees and expenses incurred in pursuing or defending any claim.

ARTICLE 14 - TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION OF THE CONTRACT

14.1 TERMINATION BY THE CONTRACTOR

14.1.1.4 Delete Article 14.1.1.4 in its entirety.

14.1.3 Delete “, as well as reasonable overhead and profit on Work not executed,” between “executed” and “and” in the third line.

14.2 TERMINATION BY THE OWNER FOR CAUSE

14.2.1.1 Delete the word “repeatedly” from Article 14.2.1.1.

14.2.1.3 Delete the word “repeatedly” from Article 14.2.1.3.



14.2.1.5 Add the following Articles 14.2.1.5 and 14.2.1.6:

.5 fails to achieve Substantial Completion of the Project as described in Section 00800, Article 9.8.5, within the time stated therein;

.6 fails to meet any deadline required by the Contract. Contractor acknowledges that time is of the essence of this Contract and that all deadlines required by the Contract are critical to timely completion of the Contract. Therefore, Contractor agrees that its failure to meet any deadline constitutes a substantial and material breach of this Contract, entitling the Owner to terminate the Contract.

14.2.2 Delete the word “certification” in the first sentence and insert the word “advice”.

14.2.4 Delete the phrase “Initial Decision Maker” and insert the word “Architect”.


If the Owner terminates the Contract for cause, and it is determined for any reason that the Contractor was not actually in default under the Contract at the time of termination, the Contractor shall be entitled to recover from the Owner the same amount as the Contractor would be entitled to receive under a termination for convenience as provided by Article 14.4. The foregoing shall constitute the Contractor’s sole and exclusive remedy for termination of the Contract. In no event shall the Contractor be entitled to special, consequential, or exemplary damages, nor shall the Contractor be entitled to anticipated profits resulting from termination of this Contract.

14.4 TERMINATION BY THE OWNER FOR CONVENIENCE

14.4.3 Add after the end of the sentence:

The Contractor shall not be entitled to receive any payment for either overhead or profit on work not performed.

ARTICLE 15 - CLAIMS AND DISPUTES

15.1.2 Delete the phrase “in accordance with the requirements of the final dispute resolution method selected within the Agreement”.

15.1.6 CLAIMS FOR ADDITIONAL TIME


The Contractor must submit each month with his Application for Payment a separate letter stating that he is requesting an extension of time for abnormal adverse weather or that he has no claim for an extension for that period of time. Payment is not due on the Application for Payment until the letter is received. Complete justification, including weather reports, daily reports, correspondence and any other supporting data must be provided for each day for which a request for time extension is made. A letter or statement that the Contractor was delayed is not as adequate justification. The receipt of this request and data by the Architect will not be considered as Owner or Architect approval of a time extension in any way.




A. This Article governs the procedure for determination of time extensions for abnormally adverse or unusually severe weather. In order for the Owner and Architect to award a time extension under this Article, the following conditions must be satisfied:

(1) The weather experienced at the Project site during the Contract period must be found to be abnormally adverse or unusually severe, that is, more severe than the adverse weather anticipated for the Project location during any given month.

(2) The abnormally adverse or unusually severe weather must actually cause a delay to the completion of the Project. The delay must be beyond the control and without the fault or negligence of the Contractor.

B. The following schedule of monthly anticipated adverse weather delays is based on National Oceanic and Atmospheric Administration (NOAA) or similar data for the Project location and will constitute the base line for monthly weather time evaluations. The Contractor’s activity durations in the progress schedule must reflect these anticipated adverse weather delays in all weather dependent activities.

MONTHLY ANTICIPATED ADVERSE WEATHER DAYS BASED ON FIVE (5) DAY WORK WEEK.

JAN FEB MAR APR MAY JUN JUL AUG SEP OCT NOV DEC

(6) (6) (5) (5) (5) (5) (5) (7) (4) (4) (4) (7)

C. Upon acknowledgment of the Notice of Proceed (NTP) and continuing throughout the Contract, the Contractor shall record on the daily report, the occurrence of adverse weather and resultant impact to normally scheduled Work. Actual adverse weather delay days must prevent work on the Project’s critical activities for 50 percent or more of the Contractor’s scheduled work day. The number of actual adverse weather days shall include days impacted by actual adverse weather (even if adverse weather occurred in previous month), be calculated chronologically from the first to the last day of each month, and be recorded as full days. If the number of actual adverse weather delay days exceeds the number of days anticipated in paragraph B, above, the Owner and the Architect will convert any qualifying delays to calendar days, giving full consideration for equivalent fair weather work days, and issue a modification in accordance with the contract.


Claims for increase in the Contract Time shall set forth in detail the facts and circumstances which support such Claim, including but not limited to, the cause of such delay, the date such delay began to affect the critical path, the date such delay ceased to affect the critical path and the number of days of additional time requested. The Contractor shall not be entitled to an increase in the Contract Time for delays which did not affect the critical path or to the extent there were concurrent non-excusable delays. The Contractor may be requested to provide additional documentation to substantiate its Claim, including but not limited to, schedules that indicate all activities affected by such delay.




The Contractor expressly agrees that the Article 15 Claims and Disputes process is the only dispute resolution mechanism that will be recognized by the parties for any claims put forward by the Contractor, notwithstanding any other claimed theory of entitlement on the part of the Contractor or its subcontractors or suppliers against the Owner and/or the Architect or any of their design consultants, including, but not limited to, all claims of breach of contract, breach of warranty, misrepresentation, negligence, professional negligence, and/or any other tort.

15.2 INITIAL DECISION

15.2.4 Add “within thirty (30) days” to the end of Article 15.2.4.

15.3 MEDIATION

15.3.1 Delete the phrase “shall be subject to mediation as a condition precedent to binding dispute resolution” and insert the phrase “may be subject to mediation upon mutual agreement of the Owner and Contractor”.

15.3.2 Delete the word “shall” in the first sentence wherever it appears and insert the word “may”.


15.4 ARBITRATION

15.4.1 Delete the words “parties have” in the first sentence and insert the words “Owner has” and delete the phrase “unless the parties mutually agree” in the first sentence and insert the phrase “unless the Owner chooses”.

15.4.4 CONSOLIDATION OR JOINDER

15.4.4 Delete Article 15.4.4, including subparts .1 - .3, in its entirety and insert the following:

15.4.4.1 The Owner, at its sole discretion, may consolidate any arbitration, if any, conducted under this Agreement with any other arbitration to which it is a party where the Owner determines that the arbitrations to be consolidated substantially involve common questions of law or fact and the Owner, at its sole discretion, may include by joinder persons or entities substantially involved in a common question of law or fact whose presence is required if complete relief is to be accorded in arbitration.

- END -



ADDENDUM TO AIA Document A101 – 2017 Exhibit A

INSURANCE AND BONDS

ARTICLE A.2 OWNER’S INSURANCE

A.2.2 Liability Insurance

Delete this provision entirely and replace with: “The Contractor will pay for and maintain such insurance as will protect the Owner and Architect from their contingent liability to others for damages because of bodily injury, including death, which may arise from operations under this Contract and other liability for damages which the Contractor is required to insure under any provision of this Contract. Certificate of this insurance shall be filed with the Owner and Architect and will be the same limits set forth in this Exhibit A, Article A.3.2.2.”

A.2.3.1 Delete the phrase “Unless this obligation is placed on the Contractor pursuant to Section A.3.3.2.1, the Owner” from the first line and replace with “The Contractor”. Delete the word “Owner’s” from the end of the fourth line and replace with “Contractor’s”. Delete the phrase “Substantial Completion and thereafter as provided in Section A.2.3.1.3, unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents or otherwise agreed in writing by the parties to this Agreement” from the seventh and eighth lines and replace with “final payment has been made as provided in Article 9.10 of the AIA A201-2017 or until no person or entity other than the Owner has an insurable interest in the property required by this Section A.2.3 to be covered, whichever is later.”

A.2.3.1.3 Delete the phrase “Unless the parties agree otherwise, upon Substantial Completion, the Owner” from the first line and replace with “The Contractor”.

A.2.3.1.4 Deductibles and Self-Insured Retentions.

Delete this provision entirely and replace with: “If the property insurance requires minimum deductibles, the Contractor shall pay the deductible and all other costs not covered because of such deductibles. If the Contractor or insurer increases the required minimum deductibles above the amounts so identified or if the Contractor elects to purchase this insurance with voluntary deductible amounts, the Contractor shall be responsible for payment of the additional costs not covered because of such increased or voluntary deductibles.”

A.2.3.1.5 Add this new provision as follows: “The insurance required by this Section A.2.3.1 shall provide coverage for physical damage to property while it is in storage and in transit to the construction site on an ‘all-risks’ completed value form.”

A.2.3.1.6 Add this new provision as follows: “The insurance required by this Section A.2.3.1 shall provide coverage for property owned by the Contractor and used on the Project, including scaffolding and other equipment.”

A.2.3.3 Insurance for Existing Structures

Delete the word “Owner” from the end of the first line and replace with “Contractor”. Delete the word “Owner” from the last sentence and replace with “Contractor”.



A.3.1.1 Certificates of Insurance.

Add the words “and Architect” in the seventh line between “Owner” and “as”. Add the following to the end of the last sentence:

“and the Contractor’s certificate of insurance must state that the Owner and Architect are additional insureds under the referenced CGL policy and that all of Contractor’s contractual liabilities, including but not limited to its indemnity obligations, are covered by such CGL policy.

Any language contained on the certificate of insurance form or elsewhere to the contrary is deemed stricken.

The certificate of insurance must also state that all of Contractor’s contractual liabilities, including but not limited to its indemnity obligations, are covered. Any terms and conditions contained in the certificate of insurance which are contrary to the Contractor’s contractual obligations are hereby stricken from the certificate.”

A.3.1.4 Add this new provision as follows: “Furnish one copy of the certificate herein required for each copy of the Agreement, specifically setting forth evidence of all coverage required. Furnish to the Owner and Architect, copies of any endorsements that are subsequently issued amending coverage or limits. If the coverages are provided on a claims-made basis, the policy date or retroactive date shall predate the Contract and the termination date of the policy, or the applicable extended reporting period shall be no earlier than the termination date of coverages required to be maintained after final payment.”


STANDARD CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE

INSURED (CONTRACTOR NAME/ADDRESS) COMPANIES PROVIDING COVERAGE A PROJECT (NAME/LOCATION) B The Hamlet Multi-Family Housing Conway, Arkansas

C D

OWNER The Hamlet 2019, LP

POLICY TYPE INSURANCE

CO.

POLICY

NUMBER POLICY

PERIOD

LIMITS OF LIABILITY FOR EACH

OCCURRENCE AND AGGREGATE AMOUNT

SPECIFIED PROVIDED GENERAL LIABILITY (Commercial General Liability) General Aggregate Aggregate $2,000,000 $ Products & Completed Operations

Aggregate

$2,000,000

$

Personal & Advertising Injury

Per Occurrence

$1,000,000

$

Bodily Injury & Property Damage

Per Occurrence

$1,000,000

$

Fire Damage Liability Per Occurrence $250,000 $

Medical Expense Per Person $5,000 $ OWNER’S & CONTRACTOR’S PROTECTIVE LIABILITY Bodily Injury & Property Damage

Aggregate

$2,000,000

$

Bodily Injury & Property Damage

Per Occurrence

$1,000,000

$

AUTOMOBILE LIABILITY (Owned, non-owned & hired vehicles) Bodily Injury & Property Damage (Combined Single Limit)

Per Occurrence

$1,000,000

$

EXCESS LIABILITY (Umbrella on projects over $500,000) Bodily Injury & Property Damage

Aggregate $2,000,000 $

(Combined Single Limit) Per Occurrence $1,000,000 $

WORKER'S COMPENSATION EMPLOYERS’ LIABILITY (As required by Statue) EMPLOYERS’ LIABILITY

Accident Per Occurrence $1,000,000 $ Disease Policy Limit $1,000,000 $ Disease Per Employee $1,000,000 $ PROPERTY INSURANCE Builder’s Risk or Installation Floater

Must be equal to Value of the Work.

$

OTHER: (Specify)

$

BESSY

Line

BESSY

Line


CERTIFICATION: I certify that (1) these policies (subject to their terms, conditions and exclusions) have been issued to the insured for the coverages and amounts as indicated by companies licensed in Mississippi, and (2) each policy names the Owner as an additional insured and has been endorsed to require the company to give 30 days written notice to Owner prior to modification, cancellation or non-renewal of above. PRODUCING AGENCY: (Name / Address) | | | (Signature) | | | | (Date) | | (Name and Title of Authorized Representative)

BESSY

Rectangle

BESSY

Rectangle


JANUARY 2020 SUMMARY - 011000 1 OF 4

SECTION 011000 - SUMMARY

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Project information. 2. Work covered by Contract Documents. 3. Work by Owner. 4. Work under separate contracts. 5. Owner-furnished products. 6. Access to site. 7. Work restrictions. 8. Specification and drawing conventions.

1.3 PROJECT INFORMATION

A. Project Identification: The Hamlet Multi-Family Housing

1. Project Location: Donnell Ridge Road, Conway, Arkansas.

B. Owner: The Hamlet 2019, LP

1. Owner's Representative: Britton Jones.

C. Architect: McCarty Architects, P. A. (662) 844-4400.

1. Architect's Representatives: Jay Bryan

D. Architect's Consultants: The Architect has retained the following design professionals who have prepared designated portions of the Contract Documents:

1. Magie Engineering and Land Development, Inc.

a. Justin Magie, Civil Engineer

3. Mechanical & Electrical: Murphy Engineering, Inc.

a. Jeff Crabtree, Mechanical Engineer. b. Dennis Murphy, Electrical Engineer.



1.4 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS

A. The Work of the Project is defined by the Contract Documents and consists of the following:

Scope of Work includes a 108-unit, multi-family housing (apartment style) development. Three-story, slab-on-grade, and wood framed structures. The units are distributed thru-out three buildings. The development is located in Conway, Arkansas. Work also includes mechanical, plumbing, fire protection, and electrical systems.

B. Type of Contract:

1. Project will be constructed under a single prime contract.

1.5 WORK BY OWNER

A. General: Cooperate fully with Owner so work may be carried out smoothly, without interfering with or delaying work under this Contract or work by Owner. Coordinate the Work of this Contract with work performed by Owner.

B. Concurrent Work: Owner will perform the following construction operations at Project site. Those operations will be conducted simultaneously with work under this Contract.

1. Installation of Data / Communications systems. Extent of work for these systems that are a part of the contract work is indicated in the Bid Documents.

2. Landscaping and Irrigation.

1.6 WORK UNDER SEPARATE CONTRACTS

A. General: Cooperate fully with separate contractors so work on those contracts may be carried out smoothly, without interfering with or delaying work under this Contract or other contracts. Coordinate the Work of this Contract with work performed under separate contracts.

1.7 OWNER-FURNISHED PRODUCTS

A. Owner will furnish products indicated. The Work includes receiving, unloading, handling, storing, protecting, and installing Owner-furnished products and making building services connections.

B. Owner-Furnished Products:

1. As listed in Bid Documents.

1.8 ACCESS TO SITE

A. General: Contractor shall have full use of Project site for construction operations during construction period. Contractor's use of Project site is limited only by Owner's right to perform work or to retain other contractors on portions of Project.



1.9 WORK RESTRICTIONS

A. Work Restrictions, General: Comply with restrictions on construction operations.

1. Comply with limitations on use of public streets and with other requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

B. On-Site Work Hours: Limit work in the existing building to normal business working hours of 7:00 a.m. to 5:00 p.m., Monday through Friday, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Weekend Hours: As needed; to be coordinated with Owner. 2. Early Morning Hours: None, unless pre-scheduled. 3. Hours for Utility Shutdowns: Off hours of services; to be coordinated with Owner.

C. Existing Utility Interruptions: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after providing temporary utility services according to requirements indicated:

1. Notify Architect and Owner not less than three days in advance of proposed utility interruptions.

D. Controlled Substances: Use of tobacco products and other controlled substances on Project site is not permitted.

E. Employee Identification: Contractor will provide identification tags for Contractor personnel working on Project site. Require personnel to use identification tags at all times.

F. Employee Screening: Comply with Owner's requirements for drug and background screening of Contractor personnel working on Project site.

1. Maintain list of approved screened personnel with Owner's representative.

1.10 SPECIFICATION AND DRAWING CONVENTIONS

A. Specification Content: The Specifications use certain conventions for the style of language and the intended meaning of certain terms, words, and phrases when used in particular situations. These conventions are as follows:

1. Imperative mood and streamlined language are generally used in the Specifications. The words "shall," "shall be," or "shall comply with," depending on the context, are implied where a colon (:) is used within a sentence or phrase.

2. Specification requirements are to be performed by Contractor unless specifically stated otherwise.

B. Division 01 General Requirements: Requirements of Sections in Division 01 apply to the Work of all Sections in the Specifications.



C. Drawing Coordination: Requirements for materials and products identified on Drawings are described in detail in the Specifications. One or more of the following are used on Drawings to identify materials and products:

1. Terminology: Materials and products are identified by the typical generic terms used in the individual Specifications Sections.

2. Abbreviations: Materials and products are identified by abbreviations published as part of the U.S. National CAD Standard and scheduled on Drawings.

3. Keynoting: Materials and products are identified by reference keynotes referencing Specification Section numbers found in this Project Manual.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)

PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)

END OF SECTION 011000


JANUARY 2020 SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES - 012500 1 OF 3

SECTION 012500 - SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for substitutions.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Substitutions: Changes in products, materials, equipment, and methods of construction from those required by the Contract Documents and proposed by Contractor.

1. Substitutions for Cause: Changes proposed by Contractor that are required due to changed Project conditions, such as unavailability of product, regulatory changes, or unavailability of required warranty terms.

2. Substitutions for Convenience: Changes proposed by Contractor or Owner that are not required in order to meet other Project requirements but may offer advantage to Contractor or Owner.

1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Substitution Requests: Submit three copies of each request for consideration. Identify product or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section number and title and Drawing numbers and titles.

1. Substitution Request Form: Use letterhead or transmittal that includes general contractor information as well as submittal information.

2. Documentation: Show compliance with requirements for substitutions and the following, as applicable:

a. Statement indicating why specified product, fabrication, or installation cannot be provided, if applicable.

b. Coordination information, including a list of changes or revisions needed to other parts of the Work and to construction performed by Owner and separate contractors, that will be necessary to accommodate proposed substitution.

c. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed substitution with those of the Work specified. Include annotated copy of applicable Specification Section. Significant qualities may include attributes such as performance, weight, size, durability, visual effect, sustainable design characteristics, warranties, and specific



features and requirements indicated. Indicate deviations, if any, from the Work specified.

d. Product Data, including drawings and descriptions of products and fabrication and installation procedures.

e. Samples, where applicable or requested. f. Certificates and qualification data, where applicable or requested. g. List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and

addresses and names and addresses of architects and owners. h. Material test reports from a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test

results for compliance with requirements indicated. i. Research reports evidencing compliance with building code in effect for Project. j. Detailed comparison of Contractor's construction schedule using proposed

substitution with products specified for the Work, including effect on the overall Contract Time. If specified product or method of construction cannot be provided within the Contract Time, include letter from manufacturer, on manufacturer's letterhead, stating date of receipt of purchase order, lack of availability, or delays in delivery.

k. Cost information, including a proposal of change, if any, in the Contract Sum. l. Contractor's certification that proposed substitution complies with requirements in

the Contract Documents except as indicated in substitution request, is compatible with related materials, and is appropriate for applications indicated.

m. Contractor's waiver of rights to additional payment or time that may subsequently become necessary because of failure of proposed substitution to produce indicated results.

3. Architect's Action: If necessary, Architect will request additional information or documentation for evaluation within seven days of receipt of a request for substitution. Architect will notify Contractor of acceptance or rejection of proposed substitution within 15 days of receipt of request, or seven days of receipt of additional information or documentation, whichever is later.

a. Forms of Acceptance: Change Order, Construction Change Directive, or Architect's Supplemental Instructions for minor changes in the Work.

b. Use product specified if Architect does not issue a decision on use of a proposed substitution within time allocated.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Compatibility of Substitutions: Investigate and document compatibility of proposed substitution with related products and materials. Engage a qualified testing agency to perform compatibility tests recommended by manufacturers.

1.6 PROCEDURES

A. Coordination: Revise or adjust affected work as necessary to integrate work of the approved substitutions.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SUBSTITUTIONS

A. Substitutions for Cause: Submit requests for substitution immediately on discovery of need for change, but not later than 15 days prior to time required for preparation and review of related submittals.

1. Conditions: Architect will consider Contractor's request for substitution when the following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Architect will return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements:

a. Requested substitution is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce indicated results.

b. Substitution request is fully documented and properly submitted. c. Requested substitution will not adversely affect Contractor's construction schedule. d. Requested substitution has received necessary approvals of authorities having

jurisdiction. e. Requested substitution is compatible with other portions of the Work. f. Requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work. g. Requested substitution provides specified warranty. h. If requested substitution involves more than one contractor, requested substitution

has been coordinated with other portions of the Work, is uniform and consistent, is compatible with other products, and is acceptable to all contractors involved.

B. Substitutions for Convenience: Not allowed unless otherwise indicated.




JANUARY 2020 CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES – 012600 1 OF 3

SECTION 012600 - CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for handling and processing Contract modifications.

B. Related Requirements:

1. Section 012500 "Substitution Procedures" for administrative procedures for handling requests for substitutions made after the Contract award.

1.3 MINOR CHANGES IN THE WORK

A. Architect will issue supplemental instructions authorizing minor changes in the Work, not involving adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time, on AIA Document G710, “Architect’s Supplemental Instructions”.

1.4 PROPOSAL REQUESTS

A. Owner-Initiated Proposal Requests: Architect will issue a detailed description of proposed changes in the Work that may require adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time. If necessary, the description will include supplemental or revised Drawings and Specifications.

1. Work Change Proposal Requests issued by Architect are not instructions either to stop work in progress or to execute the proposed change.

2. Within time specified in Proposal Request after receipt of Proposal Request, submit a quotation estimating cost adjustments to the Contract Sum and the Contract Time necessary to execute the change.

a. Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with total amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey data to substantiate quantities.

b. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade discounts.

c. Include costs of labor and supervision directly attributable to the change. d. Include an updated Contractor's construction schedule that indicates the effect of

the change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and



finish times, and activity relationship. Use available total float before requesting an extension of the Contract Time.

e. Quotation Form: Use forms acceptable to Architect.

B. Contractor-Initiated Proposals: If latent or changed conditions require modifications to the Contract, Contractor may initiate a claim by submitting a request for a change to Architect.

1. Include a statement outlining reasons for the change and the effect of the change on the Work. Provide a complete description of the proposed change. Indicate the effect of the proposed change on the Contract Sum and the Contract Time.

2. Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with total amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey data to substantiate quantities.

3. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade discounts.

4. Include costs of labor and supervision directly attributable to the change. 5. Include an updated Contractor's construction schedule that indicates the effect of the

change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and finish times, and activity relationship. Use available total float before requesting an extension of the Contract Time.

6. Comply with requirements in Section 012500 "Substitution Procedures" if the proposed change requires substitution of one product or system for product or system specified.

7. Proposal Request Form: Use form acceptable to Architect.

1.5 ADMINISTRATIVE CHANGE ORDERS

A. Allowance Adjustment: See Section 012100 "Allowances" for administrative procedures for preparation of Change Order Proposal for adjusting the Contract Sum to reflect actual costs of allowances.

1.6 CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES

A. On Owner's approval of a Work Change Proposal Request, Architect will issue a Change Order for signatures of Owner and Contractor on AIA Document G701.

1.7 CONSTRUCTION CHANGE DIRECTIVE

A. Construction Change Directive: Architect may issue a Construction Change Directive on AIA Document G714. Construction Change Directive instructs Contractor to proceed with a change in the Work, for subsequent inclusion in a Change Order.

1. Construction Change Directive contains a complete description of change in the Work. It also designates method to be followed to determine change in the Contract Sum or the Contract Time.

B. Documentation: Maintain detailed records on a time and material basis of work required by the Construction Change Directive.



1. After completion of change, submit an itemized account and supporting data necessary to substantiate cost and time adjustments to the Contract.





JANUARY 2020 PAYMENT PROCEDURES – 012900 1 OF 5

SECTION 012900 - PAYMENT PROCEDURES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements necessary to prepare and process Applications for Payment.


1. Section 012600 "Contract Modification Procedures" for administrative procedures for handling changes to the Contract.

2. Section 013200 "Construction Progress Documentation" for administrative requirements governing the preparation and submittal of the Contractor's construction schedule.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Schedule of Values: A statement furnished by Contractor allocating portions of the Contract Sum to various portions of the Work and used as the basis for reviewing Contractor's Applications for Payment.

1.4 SCHEDULE OF VALUES

A. Coordination: Coordinate preparation of the schedule of values with preparation of Contractor's construction schedule.

1. Coordinate line items in the schedule of values with other required administrative forms and schedules, including the following:

a. Application for Payment forms with continuation sheets. b. Submittal Schedule. c. Items required to be indicated as separate activities in Contractor’s construction

schedule.

2. Submit the schedule of values to Architect at earliest possible date, but no later than 14 days before the date scheduled for submittal of initial Applications for Payment.

3. Sub-schedules for Phased Work: Where the Work is separated into phases requiring separately phased payments, provide subschedules showing values coordinated with each phase of payment.



B. Format and Content: Use Project Manual table of contents as a guide to establish line items for the schedule of values. Provide at least one line item for each Specification Section.

1. Identification: Include the following Project identification on the schedule of values:

a. Project name and location. b. Name of Architect. c. Architect's Project number. d. Contractor's name and address. e. Date of submittal.

2. Arrange schedule of values consistent with format of AIA Document G703. 3. Provide a breakdown of the Contract Sum in enough detail to facilitate continued

evaluation of Applications for Payment and progress reports. Provide multiple line items for principal subcontract amounts in excess of five percent of the Contract Sum.

4. Round amounts to nearest whole dollar; total shall equal the Contract Sum. 5. Provide a separate line item in the schedule of values for each part of the Work where

Applications for Payment may include materials or equipment purchased or fabricated and stored, but not yet installed.

a. Differentiate between items stored on-site and items stored off-site.

6. Allowances: Provide a separate line item in the schedule of values for each allowance. Show line-item value of unit-cost allowances, as a product of the unit cost, multiplied by measured quantity. Use information indicated in the Contract Documents to determine quantities.

7. Each item in the schedule of values and Applications for Payment shall be complete. Include total cost and proportionate share of general overhead and profit for each item.

a. Temporary facilities and other major cost items that are not direct cost of actual work-in-place should be shown as separate line items in the schedule of values.

8. Closeout Costs. Include separate line items under Contractor and principal subcontracts

for Project closeout requirements in an amount totaling five percent of the Contract Sum and subcontract amount.

9. Schedule of Values Revisions: Revise the schedule of values when Change Orders or Construction Change Directives result in a change in the Contract Sum. Include at least one separate line item for each Change Order and Construction Change Directive.

1.5 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT

A. Each Application for Payment following the initial Application for Payment shall be consistent with previous applications and payments as certified by Architect and paid for by Owner.

1. Initial Application for Payment, Application for Payment at time of Substantial Completion, and Final Application for Payment involve additional requirements.



B. Payment Application Times: The date for each progress payment is indicated in the Agreement between Owner and Contractor. The period of construction work covered by each Application for Payment is the period indicated in the Agreement.

C. Application for Payment Forms: Use AIA Document G702 and AIA Document G703 as form for Applications for Payment.

D. Application Preparation: Complete every entry on form. Notarize and execute by a person authorized to sign legal documents on behalf of Contractor. Architect will return incomplete applications without action.

1. Entries shall match data on the schedule of values and Contractor's construction schedule. Use updated schedules if revisions were made.

2. Include amounts for work completed following previous Application for Payment, whether or not payment has been received. Include only amounts for work completed at time of Application for Payment.

3. Include amounts of Change Orders and Construction Change Directives issued before last day of construction period covered by application.

4. Indicate separate amounts for work being carried out under Owner-requested project acceleration.

E. Stored Materials: Include in Application for Payment amounts applied for materials or equipment purchased or fabricated and stored, but not yet installed. Differentiate between items stored on-site and items stored off-site.

1. Provide certificate of insurance, evidence of transfer of title to Owner, and consent of surety to payment for stored materials.

2. Provide supporting documentation that verifies amount requested, such as paid invoices. Match amount requested with amounts indicated on documentation; do not include overhead and profit on stored materials.

3. Provide summary documentation for stored materials indicating the following:

a. Value of materials previously stored and remaining stored as of date of previous Applications for Payment.

b. Value of previously stored materials put in place after date of previous Application for Payment and on or before date of current Application for Payment.

c. Value of materials stored since date of previous Application for Payment and remaining stored as of date of current Application for Payment.

F. Transmittal: Submit three signed and notarized original copies of each Application for Payment to Architect by a method ensuring receipt within 24 hours. One copy shall include waivers of lien and similar attachments if required.

1. Transmit each copy with a transmittal form listing attachments and recording appropriate information about application.

G. Waivers of Mechanic's Lien: With each Application for Payment, submit waivers of mechanic's lien from entities lawfully entitled to file a mechanic's lien arising out of the Contract and related to the Work covered by the payment.



1. Submit partial waivers on each item for amount requested in previous application, after deduction for retainage, on each item.

2. When an application shows completion of an item, submit conditional final or full waivers.

3. Owner reserves the right to designate which entities involved in the Work must submit waivers.

4. Submit final Application for Payment with or preceded by conditional final waivers from every entity involved with performance of the Work covered by the application who is lawfully entitled to a lien.

5. Waiver Forms: Submit executed waivers of lien on forms acceptable to Owner.

H. Initial Application for Payment: Administrative actions and submittals that must precede or coincide with submittal of first Application for Payment include the following:

1. List of subcontractors. 2. Schedule of values. 3. Contractor's construction schedule (preliminary if not final). 4. Products list (preliminary if not final). 5. Schedule of unit prices. 6. Submittal schedule (preliminary if not final). 7. List of Contractor's staff assignments. 8. List of Contractor's principal consultants. 9. Copies of building permits. 10. Initial progress report. 11. Report of preconstruction conference. 12. Certificates of insurance and insurance policies. 13. Performance and payment bonds.

I. Application for Payment at Substantial Completion: After Architect issues the Certificate of Substantial Completion, submit an Application for Payment showing 100 percent completion for portion of the Work claimed as substantially complete.

1. Include documentation supporting claim that the Work is substantially complete and a statement showing an accounting of changes to the Contract Sum.

2. This application shall reflect Certificate(s) of Substantial Completion issued previously for Owner occupancy of designated portions of the Work.

J. Final Payment Application: After completing Project closeout requirements, submit final Application for Payment with releases and supporting documentation not previously submitted and accepted, including, but not limited, to the following:

1. Evidence of completion of Project closeout requirements. 2. Insurance certificates for products and completed operations where required and proof

that taxes, fees, and similar obligations were paid. 3. Updated final statement, accounting for final changes to the Contract Sum. 4. AIA Document G706 “Contractor’s Affidavit of Payment of Debts and Claims”. 5. AIA Document G706A “Contractor’s Affidavit of Release of Liens”. 6. AIA Document G707 “Consent of Surety to Final Payment. 7. Evidence that claims have been settled.



8. Final meter readings for utilities, a measured record of stored fuel, and similar data as of date of Substantial Completion or when Owner took possession of and assumed responsibility for corresponding elements of the Work.

9. Final liquidated damages settlement statement.





JANUARY 2020 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION – 013100 1 OF 10

SECTION 013100 - PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative provisions for coordinating construction operations on Project including, but not limited to, the following: General coordination procedures.

1. Coordination drawings. 2. Request for Information (RFIs). 3. Digital project management procedures. 4. Project meetings.

B. Each contractor shall participate in coordination requirements. Certain areas of responsibility are assigned to a specific contractor.


1. Section 013200 "Construction Progress Documentation" for preparing and submitting Contractor's construction schedule.

2. Section 017300 "Execution" for procedures for coordinating general installation and field-engineering services, including establishment of benchmarks and control points.

3. Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures" for coordinating closeout of the Contract.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. RFI: Request for Information. Request from Owner, Architect, or Contractor seeking information required by or clarifications of the Contract Documents.

1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Subcontract List: Prepare a written summary identifying individuals or firms proposed for each portion of the Work, including those who are to furnish products or equipment fabricated to a special design. Include the following information in tabular form:

1. Name, address, telephone number, and email address of entity performing subcontract or supplying products.

2. Number and title of related Specification Section(s) covered by subcontract.



B. Key Personnel Names: Within 7 days of starting construction operations, submit a list of key personnel assignments, including superintendent and other personnel in attendance at Project site. Identify individuals and their duties and responsibilities; list addresses and cellular telephone numbers and e-mail addresses. Provide names, addresses, and telephone numbers of individuals assigned as alternates in the absence of individuals assigned to Project.

1. Post copies of list in project meeting room and in temporary field office. Keep list current at all times.

1.5 GENERAL COORDINATION PROCEDURES

A. Coordination: Coordinate construction operations included in different Sections of the Specifications to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work. Coordinate construction operations included in different Sections that depend on each other for proper installation, connection, and operation.

1. Schedule construction operations in sequence required to obtain the best results where installation of one part of the Work depends on installation of other components, before or after its own installation.

2. Coordinate installation of different components to ensure maximum performance and accessibility for required maintenance, service, and repair.

3. Make adequate provisions to accommodate items scheduled for later installation.

B. Coordination: Each contractor shall coordinate its construction operations with those of other contractors and entities to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work. Each contractor shall coordinate its own operations with operations included in different Sections that depend on each other for proper installation, connection, and operation.

1. Schedule construction operations in sequence required to obtain the best results where installation of one part of the Work depends on installation of other components, before or after its own installation.

2. Coordinate installation of different components with other contractors to ensure maximum performance and accessibility for required maintenance, service, and repair.

3. Make adequate provisions to accommodate items scheduled for later installation.

C. Prepare memoranda for distribution to each party involved, outlining special procedures required for coordination. Include such items as required notices, reports, and list of attendees at meetings.

1. Prepare similar memoranda for Owner and separate contractors if coordination of their Work is required.

D. Administrative Procedures: Coordinate scheduling and timing of required administrative procedures with other construction activities to avoid conflicts and to ensure orderly progress of the Work. Such administrative activities include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Preparation of Contractor's construction schedule. 2. Preparation of the schedule of values. 3. Installation and removal of temporary facilities and controls.



4. Delivery and processing of submittals. 5. Progress meetings. 6. Preinstallation conferences. 7. Project closeout activities. 8. Startup and adjustment of systems.

1.6 COORDINATION DRAWINGS

A. Coordination Drawings, General: Prepare coordination drawings according to requirements in individual Sections, and additionally where installation is not completely indicated on Shop Drawings, where limited space availability necessitates coordination, or if coordination is required to facilitate integration of products and materials fabricated or installed by more than one entity.

1. Content: Project-specific information, drawn accurately to a scale large enough to indicate and resolve conflicts. Do not base coordination drawings on standard printed data. Include the following information, as applicable:

a. Use applicable Drawings as a basis for preparation of coordination drawings. Prepare sections, elevations, and details as needed to describe relationship of various systems and components.

b. Coordinate the addition of trade-specific information to coordination drawings by multiple contractors in a sequence that best provides for coordination of the information and resolution of conflicts between installed components before submitting for review.

c. Indicate functional and spatial relationships of components of architectural, structural, civil, mechanical, and electrical systems.

d. Indicate space requirements for routine maintenance and for anticipated replacement of components during the life of the installation.

e. Show location and size of access doors required for access to concealed dampers, valves, and other controls.

f. Indicate required installation sequences. g. Indicate dimensions shown on Drawings. Specifically note dimensions that appear

to be in conflict with submitted equipment and minimum clearance requirements. Provide alternative sketches to Architect indicating proposed resolution of such conflicts. Minor dimension changes and difficult installations will not be considered changes to the Contract.

B. Coordination Drawing Organization: Organize coordination drawings as follows:

1. Floor Plans and Reflected Ceiling Plans: Show architectural and structural elements, and mechanical, plumbing, fire-protection, fire-alarm, and electrical Work. Show locations of visible ceiling-mounted devices relative to acoustical ceiling grid. Supplement plan drawings with section drawings where required to adequately represent the Work.

2. Plenum Space: Indicate subframing for support of ceiling and wall systems, mechanical and electrical equipment, and related Work. Locate components within plenums to accommodate layout of light fixtures and other components indicated on Drawings. Indicate areas of conflict between light fixtures and other components.



3. Mechanical Rooms: Provide coordination drawings for mechanical rooms showing plans and elevations of mechanical, plumbing, fire-protection, fire-alarm, and electrical equipment.

4. Structural Penetrations: Indicate penetrations and openings required for all disciplines. 5. Slab Edge and Embedded Items: Indicate slab edge locations and sizes and locations of

embedded items for metal fabrications, sleeves, anchor bolts, bearing plates, angles, door floor closers, slab depressions for floor finishes, curbs and housekeeping pads, and similar items.

6. Mechanical and Plumbing Work: Show the following:

a. Sizes and bottom elevations of ductwork, piping, and conduit runs, including insulation, bracing, flanges, and support systems.

b. Dimensions of major components, such as dampers, valves, diffusers, access doors, cleanouts and electrical distribution equipment.

c. Fire-rated enclosures around ductwork. d. Fan coil units and all associated components within mechanical closets. e. See Mechanical & Pluming specifications for other requirements.

7. Electrical Work: Show the following:

a. Runs of vertical and horizontal conduit 1-1/4 inches in diameter and larger. b. Light fixture, exit light, emergency battery pack, smoke detector, and other fire-

alarm locations. c. Panel board, switch board, switchgear, transformer, busway, generator, and motor-

control center locations. d. Location of pull boxes and junction boxes, dimensioned from column center lines. e. See Electrical specifications for other requirements.

8. Fire-Protection System: Show the following:

a. Locations of standpipes, mains piping, branch lines, pipe drops, and sprinkler heads.

b. See Fire Protection specifications for other requirements.

9. Review: Architect will review coordination drawings to confirm that in general the Work is being coordinated, but not for the details of the coordination, which are Contractor's responsibility. If Architect determines that coordination drawings are not being prepared in sufficient scope or detail, or are otherwise deficient, Architect will so inform Contractor, who shall make suitable modifications and resubmit.

10. Coordination Drawing Prints: Prepare coordination drawing prints according to requirements in Section 013300 "Submittal Procedures."

C. Coordination Digital Data Files: Prepare coordination digital data files according to the following requirements:

1. File Preparation Format: DWG, Version 2007, operating in Microsoft Windows operating system.

2. File Submittal Format: Submit or post coordination drawing files using PDF format.



1.7 REQUEST FOR INFORMATION (RFI)

A. General: Immediately on discovery of the need for additional information, clarification, or interpretation of the Contract Documents, Contractor shall prepare and submit an RFI in the form specified.

1. Architect will return without response those RFIs submitted to Architect by other entities controlled by Contractor.

2. Coordinate and submit RFIs in a prompt manner so as to avoid delays in Contractor's work or work of subcontractors.

B. Content of the RFI: Include a detailed, legible description of item needing information or interpretation and the following:

1. Project name. 2. Project number. 3. Date. 4. Name of Contractor. 5. Name of Architect. 6. RFI number, numbered sequentially. 7. RFI subject. 8. Specification Section number and title and related paragraphs, as appropriate. 9. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. 10. Field dimensions and conditions, as appropriate. 11. Contractor's suggested resolution. If Contractor's suggested resolution impacts the

Contract Time or the Contract Sum, Contractor shall state impact in the RFI. 12. Contractor's signature. 13. Attachments: Include sketches, descriptions, measurements, photos, Product Data, Shop

Drawings, coordination drawings, and other information necessary to fully describe items needing interpretation.

a. Include dimensions, thicknesses, structural grid references, and details of affected materials, assemblies, and attachments on attached sketches.

C. RFI Forms: AIA Document G716.

1. Attachments shall be electronic files in PDF format.

D. Architect's Action: Architect will review each RFI, determine action required, and respond. Allow seven working days for Architect's response for each RFI. RFIs received by Architect after 1:00 p.m. will be considered as received the following working day.

1. The following Contractor-generated RFIs will be returned without action:

a. Requests for approval of submittals. b. Requests for approval of substitutions. c. Requests for approval of Contractor's means and methods. d. Requests for coordination information already indicated in the Contract

Documents. e. Requests for adjustments in the Contract Time or the Contract Sum.



f. Requests for interpretation of Architect's actions on submittals. g. Incomplete RFIs or inaccurately prepared RFIs.

2. Architect's action may include a request for additional information, in which case Architect's time for response will date from time of receipt by Architect of additional information.

3. Architect's action on RFIs that may result in a change to the Contract Time or the Contract Sum may be eligible for Contractor to submit Change Proposal according to Section 012600 "Contract Modification Procedures."

a. If Contractor believes the RFI response warrants change in the Contract Time or the Contract Sum, notify Architect in writing within 10 days of receipt of the RFI response.

E. RFI Log: Prepare, maintain, and submit a tabular log of RFIs organized by the RFI number. Submit log monthly. Software log with not less than the following:

1. Project name. 2. Name and address of Contractor. 3. Name and address of Architect. 4. RFI number including RFIs that were returned without action or withdrawn. 5. RFI description. 6. Date the RFI was submitted. 7. Date Architect's response was received. 8. Identification of related Minor Change in the Work, Construction Change Directive, and

Proposal Request, as appropriate.

F. On receipt of Architect's action, update the RFI log and immediately distribute the RFI response to affected parties. Review response and notify Architect within seven days if Contractor disagrees with response.

G. PDF Document Preparation: Where PDFs are required to be submitted to Architect, prepare as follows:

1. Assemble complete submittal package into a single indexed file incorporating submittal requirements of a single Specification Section and transmittal form with links enabling navigation to each item.

2. Name file with submittal number or other unique identifier, including revision identifier. 3. Certifications: Where digitally submitted certificates and certifications are required,

provide a digital signature with digital certificate on where indicated.

1.8 PROJECT MEETINGS

A. General: Schedule and conduct meetings and conferences at Project site unless otherwise indicated.

1. Attendees: Inform participants and others involved, and individuals whose presence is required, of date and time of each meeting. Notify Owner and Architect of scheduled meeting dates and times a minimum of 10 working days prior to meeting.



2. Agenda: Prepare the meeting agenda. Distribute the agenda to all invited attendees. 3. Minutes: Entity responsible for conducting meeting will record significant discussions

and agreements achieved. Distribute the meeting minutes to everyone concerned, including Owner and Architect, within three days of the meeting.

B. Preconstruction Conference: Architect will schedule and conduct a preconstruction conference before starting construction, at a time convenient to Owner and Architect, but no later than 15 days after execution of the Agreement.

1. Attendees: Authorized representatives of Owner, Architect, and their consultants; Contractor and its superintendent; major subcontractors; suppliers; and other concerned parties shall attend the conference. Participants at the conference shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work.

2. Agenda: Discuss items of significance that could affect progress, including the following:

a. Tentative construction schedule. b. Phasing. c. Critical work sequencing and long lead items. d. Designation of key personnel and their duties. e. Lines of communications. f. Use of web-based Project software. g. Procedures for processing field decisions and Change Orders. h. Procedures for RFIs. i. Procedures for testing and inspecting. j. Procedures for processing Applications for Payment. k. Distribution of the Contract Documents. l. Submittal procedures. m. Sustainable design requirements. n. Preparation of Record Documents. o. Use of the premises. p. Work restrictions. q. Working hours. r. Owner's occupancy requirements. s. Responsibility for temporary facilities and controls. t. Procedures for moisture and mold control. u. Procedures for disruptions and shutdowns. v. Construction waste management and recycling. w. Parking availability. x. Office, work, and storage areas. y. Equipment deliveries and priorities. z. First aid. aa. Security. bb. Progress cleaning.

3. Minutes: Entity responsible for conducting meeting will record and distribute meeting minutes.



C. Preinstallation Conferences: Conduct a preinstallation conference at Project site before each construction activity when required by other sections and when required for coordination with other construction.

1. Attendees: Installer and representatives of manufacturers and fabricators involved in or affected by the installation and its coordination or integration with other materials and installations that have preceded or will follow, shall attend the meeting. Advise Architect, of scheduled meeting dates.

2. Agenda: Review progress of other construction activities and preparations for the particular activity under consideration, including requirements for the following:

a. Contract Documents. b. Options. c. Related RFIs. d. Related Change Orders. e. Purchases. f. Deliveries. g. Submittals. h. Sustainable design requirements. i. Review of mockups. j. Possible conflicts. k. Compatibility requirements. l. Time schedules. m. Weather limitations. n. Manufacturer's written instructions. o. Warranty requirements. p. Compatibility of materials. q. Acceptability of substrates. r. Temporary facilities and controls. s. Space and access limitations. t. Regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. u. Testing and inspecting requirements. v. Installation procedures. w. Coordination with other work. x. Required performance results. y. Protection of adjacent work. z. Protection of construction and personnel.

3. Record significant conference discussions, agreements, and disagreements, including required corrective measures and actions.

4. Reporting: Distribute minutes of the meeting to each party present and to other parties requiring information.

5. Do not proceed with installation if the conference cannot be successfully concluded. Initiate whatever actions are necessary to resolve impediments to performance of the Work and reconvene the conference at earliest feasible date.

6. Minutes: Contractor conducting meeting will record and distribute meeting minutes.



D. Project Closeout Conference: Schedule and conduct a project closeout conference, at a time convenient to Owner and Architect, but no later than 30 days prior to the scheduled date of Substantial Completion.

1. Conduct the conference to review requirements and responsibilities related to Project closeout.

2. Attendees: Authorized representatives of Owner, Architect, and their consultants; Contractor and its superintendent; major subcontractors; suppliers; and other concerned parties shall attend the meeting. Participants at the meeting shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work.

3. Agenda: Discuss items of significance that could affect or delay Project closeout, including the following:

a. Preparation of Record Documents. b. Procedures required prior to inspection for Substantial Completion and for final

inspection for acceptance. c. Procedures for completing/archiving web-based Project software site data files. d. Submittal of written warranties. e. Requirements for completing sustainable design documentation. f. Requirements for preparing operations and maintenance data. g. Requirements for delivery of material samples, attic stock, and spare parts. h. Requirements for demonstration and training. i. Preparation of Contractor's punch list. j. Procedures for processing Applications for Payment at Substantial Completion and

for final payment. k. Submittal procedures. l. Coordination of separate contracts. m. Owner's partial occupancy requirements. n. Installation of Owner's furniture, fixtures, and equipment. o. Responsibility for removing temporary facilities and controls.

4. Minutes: Entity conducting meeting will record and distribute meeting minutes.

E. Progress Meetings: Conduct progress meetings at monthly intervals.

1. Coordinate dates of meetings with preparation of payment requests. 2. Attendees: In addition to representatives of Owner and Architect, each contractor,

subcontractor, supplier, and other entity concerned with current progress or involved in planning, coordination, or performance of future activities shall be represented at these meetings. All participants at the meeting shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work.

3. Agenda: Review and correct or approve minutes of previous progress meeting. Review other items of significance that could affect progress. Include topics for discussion as appropriate to status of Project.

a. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Review progress since the last meeting. Determine whether each activity is on time, ahead of schedule, or behind schedule, in relation to Contractor's construction schedule. Determine how construction behind schedule will be expedited; secure commitments from parties involved to do so. Discuss whether schedule revisions are required to ensure that current and subsequent activities will be completed within the Contract Time.

1) Review schedule for next period.



b. Review present and future needs of each entity present, including the following:

1) Interface requirements. 2) Sequence of operations. 3) Status of submittals. 4) Status of sustainable design documentation. 5) Deliveries. 6) Off-site fabrication. 7) Access. 8) Site use. 9) Temporary facilities and controls. 10) Progress cleaning. 11) Quality and work standards. 12) Status of correction of deficient items. 13) Field observations. 14) Status of RFIs. 15) Status of Proposal Requests. 16) Pending changes. 17) Status of Change Orders. 18) Pending claims and disputes. 19) Documentation of information for payment requests.

4. Minutes: Entity responsible for conducting the meeting will record and distribute the meeting minutes to each party present and to parties requiring information.

a. Schedule Updating: Revise Contractor's construction schedule after each progress meeting where revisions to the schedule have been made or recognized. Issue revised schedule concurrently with the report of each meeting.





JANUARY 2020 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION – 013200 1 OF 7

SECTION 013200 - CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for documenting the progress of construction during performance of the Work, including the following:

1. Startup construction schedule. 2. Contractor's Construction Schedule. 3. Construction schedule updating reports. 4. Daily construction reports. 5. Material location reports. 6. Site condition reports. 7. Unusual event reports.


1. Section 014000 "Quality Requirements" for submitting a schedule of tests and inspections.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Activity: A discrete part of a project that can be identified for planning, scheduling, monitoring, and controlling the construction Project. Activities included in a construction schedule consume time and resources.

1. Critical Activity: An activity on the critical path that must start and finish on the planned early start and finish times.

2. Predecessor Activity: An activity that precedes another activity in the network. 3. Successor Activity: An activity that follows another activity in the network.

B. Cost Loading: The allocation of the schedule of values for completing an activity as scheduled. The sum of costs for all activities must equal the total Contract Sum.

C. CPM: Critical path method, which is a method of planning and scheduling a construction project where activities are arranged based on activity relationships. Network calculations determine when activities can be performed and the critical path of Project.



D. Critical Path: The longest connected chain of interdependent activities through the network schedule that establishes the minimum overall Project duration and contains no float.

E. Event: The starting or ending point of an activity.

F. Float: The measure of leeway in starting and completing an activity.

1. Float time is not for the exclusive use or benefit of either Owner or Contractor, but is a jointly owned, expiring Project resource available to both parties as needed to meet schedule milestones and Contract completion date.

2. Free float is the amount of time an activity can be delayed without adversely affecting the early start of the successor activity.

3. Total float is the measure of leeway in starting or completing an activity without adversely affecting the planned Project completion date.

G. Resource Loading: The allocation of manpower and equipment necessary for completing an activity as scheduled.


A. Format for Submittals: Submit required submittals in the following format:

1. Working electronic copy of schedule file, where indicated. 2. PDF file. 3. Two paper copies, of sufficient size to display entire period or schedule, as required.

B. Startup construction schedule.

1. Submittal of cost-loaded, startup construction schedule will not constitute approval of schedule of values for cost-loaded activities.

C. Startup Network Diagram: Of size required to display entire network for entire construction period. Show logic ties for activities.

D. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Initial schedule, of size required to display entire schedule for entire construction period.

1. Submit a working digital copy of schedule, using software indicated, and labeled to comply with requirements for submittals.

E. Construction Schedule Updating Reports: Submit with Applications for Payment.

F. Daily Construction Reports: Submit at weekly intervals.

G. Material Location Reports: Submit at monthly intervals.

H. Site Condition Reports: Submit at time of discovery of differing conditions.

I. Unusual Event Reports: Submit at time of unusual event.




A. Prescheduling Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Section 013100 "Project Management and Coordination." Review methods and procedures related to the preliminary construction schedule and Contractor's Construction Schedule, including, but not limited to, the following:

1. Review software limitations and content and format for reports. 2. Verify availability of qualified personnel needed to develop and update schedule. 3. Discuss constraints, including phasing, work stages, area separations, interim milestones,

and partial Owner occupancy. 4. Review delivery dates for Owner-furnished products. 5. Review schedule for work of Owner's separate contracts. 6. Review submittal requirements and procedures. 7. Review time required for review of submittals and resubmittals. 8. Review requirements for tests and inspections by independent testing and inspecting

agencies. 9. Review time required for Project closeout and Owner startup procedures. 10. Review and finalize list of construction activities to be included in schedule. 11. Review procedures for updating schedule.

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate Contractor's Construction Schedule with the schedule of values, submittal schedule, progress reports, payment requests, and other required schedules and reports.

1. Secure time commitments for performing critical elements of the Work from entities involved.

2. Coordinate each construction activity in the network with other activities and schedule them in proper sequence.

1.7 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE, GENERAL

A. Computer Scheduling Software: Prepare schedules using current version of a program that has been developed specifically to manage construction schedules.

B. Time Frame: Extend schedule from date established for the Notice to Proceed to date of final completion.

1. Contract completion date shall not be changed by submission of a schedule that shows an early completion date, unless specifically authorized by Change Order.

C. Activities: Treat each floor or separate area as a separate numbered activity for each main element of the Work. Comply with the following:

1. Activity Duration: Define activities so no activity is longer than 20 days, unless specifically allowed by Architect.



2. Procurement Activities: Include procurement process activities for the following long lead items and major items, requiring a cycle of more than 60 days, as separate activities in schedule. Procurement cycle activities include, but are not limited to, submittals, approvals, purchasing, fabrication, and delivery.

3. Submittal Review Time: Include review and resubmittal times indicated in Section 013300 "Submittal Procedures" in schedule. Coordinate submittal review times in Contractor's Construction Schedule with submittal schedule.

4. Startup and Testing Time: Include no fewer than 21 days for startup and testing. 5. Substantial Completion: Indicate completion in advance of date established for

Substantial Completion and allow time for Architect's administrative procedures necessary for certification of Substantial Completion.

6. Punch List and Final Completion: Include not more than 15 days for completion of punch list items and final completion.

D. Milestones: Include milestones indicated in the Contract Documents in schedule, including, but not limited to, the Notice to Proceed, Substantial Completion, and final completion.

E. Upcoming Work Summary: Prepare summary report indicating activities scheduled to occur or commence prior to submittal of next schedule update. Summarize the following issues:

1. Unresolved issues. 2. Unanswered Requests for Information. 3. Rejected or unreturned submittals. 4. Notations on returned submittals. 5. Pending modifications affecting the Work and the Contract Time.

F. Contractor's Construction Schedule Updating: At monthly intervals, update schedule to reflect actual construction progress and activities. Issue schedule one week before each regularly scheduled progress meeting.

1. Revise schedule immediately after each meeting or other activity where revisions have been recognized or made. Issue updated schedule concurrently with the report of each such meeting.

2. Include a report with updated schedule that indicates every change, including, but not limited to, changes in logic, durations, actual starts and finishes, and activity durations.

3. As the Work progresses, indicate final completion percentage for each activity.

G. Recovery Schedule: When periodic update indicates the Work is 14 or more calendar days behind the current approved schedule, submit a separate recovery schedule indicating means by which Contractor intends to regain compliance with the schedule. Indicate changes to working hours, working days, crew sizes, equipment required to achieve compliance, and date by which recovery will be accomplished.

H. Distribution: Distribute copies of approved schedule to Architect, Owner, separate contractors, testing and inspecting agencies, and other parties identified by Contractor with a need-to-know schedule responsibility.

1. Post copies in Project meeting rooms and temporary field offices.



2. When revisions are made, distribute updated schedules to the same parties and post in the same locations. Delete parties from distribution when they have completed their assigned portion of the Work and are no longer involved in performance of construction activities.

1.8 CPM SCHEDULE REQUIREMENTS

A. General: Prepare network diagrams using AON (activity-on-node) format.

B. Startup Network Diagram: Submit diagram within 14 days of date established for the Notice to Proceed. Outline significant construction activities for the first 90 days of construction. Include skeleton diagram for the remainder of the Work and a cash requirement prediction based on indicated activities.

C. CPM Schedule: Prepare Contractor's Construction Schedule using a time-scaled CPM network analysis diagram for the Work.

1. Develop network diagram in sufficient time to submit CPM schedule so it can be accepted for use no later than 30 days after date established for the Notice to Proceed.

a. Failure to include any work item required for performance of this Contract shall not excuse Contractor from completing all work within applicable completion dates, regardless of Architect’s approval of the schedule.

2. Conduct educational workshops to train and inform key Project personnel, including subcontractors' personnel, in proper methods of providing data and using CPM schedule information.

3. Establish procedures for monitoring and updating CPM schedule and for reporting progress. Coordinate procedures with progress meeting and payment request dates.

4. Use "one workday" as the unit of time for individual activities. Indicate nonworking days and holidays incorporated into the schedule to coordinate with the Contract Time.

D. CPM Schedule Preparation: Prepare a list of all activities required to complete the Work. Using the startup network diagram, prepare a skeleton network to identify probable critical paths.

1. Activities: Indicate the estimated time duration, sequence requirements, and relationship of each activity in relation to other activities. Include estimated time frames for the following activities:

a. Preparation and processing of submittals. b. Mobilization and demobilization. c. Purchase of materials. d. Delivery. e. Fabrication. f. Utility interruptions. g. Installation. h. Work by Owner that may affect or be affected by Contractor's activities. i. Testing and inspection. j. Punch list and final completion. k. Activities occurring following final completion.



2. Critical Path Activities: Identify critical path activities, including those for interim completion dates. Scheduled start and completion dates shall be consistent with Contract milestone dates.

3. Processing: Process data to produce output data on a computer-drawn, time-scaled network. Revise data, reorganize activity sequences, and reproduce as often as necessary to produce the CPM schedule within the limitations of the Contract Time.

4. Format: Mark the critical path. Locate the critical path near center of network; locate paths with most float near the edges.

a. Subnetworks on separate sheets are permissible for activities clearly off the critical path.

E. Contract Modifications: For each proposed contract modification and concurrent with its submission, prepare a time-impact analysis using a network fragment to demonstrate the effect of the proposed change on the overall Project schedule.

F. Initial Issue of Schedule: Prepare initial network diagram from a sorted activity list indicating straight "early start-total float." Identify critical activities. Prepare tabulated reports showing the following:

1. Contractor or subcontractor and the Work or activity. 2. Description of activity. 3. Main events of activity. 4. Immediate preceding and succeeding activities. 5. Early and late start dates. 6. Early and late finish dates. 7. Activity duration in workdays. 8. Total float or slack time. 9. Average size of workforce. 10. Dollar value of activity (coordinated with the schedule of values).

G. Schedule Updating: Concurrent with making revisions to schedule, prepare tabulated reports showing the following:

1. Identification of activities that have changed. 2. Changes in early and late start dates. 3. Changes in early and late finish dates. 4. Changes in activity durations in workdays. 5. Changes in the critical path. 6. Changes in total float or slack time. 7. Changes in the Contract Time.

1.9 REPORTS

A. Daily Construction Reports: Prepare a daily construction report recording the following information concerning events at Project site:

1. List of subcontractors at Project site. 2. Approximate count of personnel at Project site.



3. Equipment at Project site. 4. Material deliveries. 5. High and low temperatures and general weather conditions, including presence of rain or

snow. 6. Testing and inspection. 7. Accidents. 8. Meetings and significant decisions. 9. Unusual events. 10. Stoppages, delays, shortages, and losses. 11. Emergency procedures. 12. Orders and requests of authorities having jurisdiction. 13. Change Orders received and implemented. 14. Construction Change Directives received and implemented. 15. Services connected and disconnected. 16. Equipment or system tests and startups. 17. Partial completions and occupancies. 18. Substantial Completions authorized.

B. Site Condition Reports: Immediately on discovery of a difference between site conditions and the Contract Documents, prepare and submit a detailed report. Submit with a Request for Information. Include a detailed description of the differing conditions, together with recommendations for changing the Contract Documents.

C. Unusual Event Reports: When an event of an unusual and significant nature occurs at Project site, whether or not related directly to the Work, prepare and submit a special report. List chain of events, persons participating, responses by Contractor's personnel, evaluation of results or effects, and similar pertinent information. Advise Owner in advance when these events are known or predictable.

1. Submit unusual event reports directly to Owner within one day of an occurrence. Distribute copies of report to parties affected by the occurrence.





JANUARY 2020 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS – 014000 1 OF 11

SECTION 014000 - QUALITY REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for quality assurance and quality control.

B. Testing and inspection services are required to verify compliance with requirements specified or indicated. These services do not relieve Contractor of responsibility for compliance with the Contract Document requirements.

1. Specific quality-assurance and quality-control requirements for individual work results are specified in their respective Specification Sections. Requirements in individual Sections may also cover production of standard products.

2. Specified tests, inspections, and related actions do not limit Contractor's other quality-assurance and quality-control procedures that facilitate compliance with the Contract Document requirements.

3. Requirements for Contractor to provide quality-assurance and quality-control services required by Architect, Owner, or authorities having jurisdiction are not limited by provisions of this Section.

4. Specific test and inspection requirements are not specified in this Section.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Experienced: When used with an entity or individual, "experienced" unless otherwise further described means having successfully completed a minimum of five previous projects similar in nature, size, and extent to this Project; being familiar with special requirements indicated; and having complied with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Field Quality-Control Tests: Tests and inspections that are performed on-site for installation of the Work and for completed Work.

C. Installer/Applicator/Erector: Contractor or another entity engaged by Contractor as an employee, Subcontractor, or Sub-subcontractor, to perform a particular construction operation, including installation, erection, application, assembly, and similar operations.

1. Use of trade-specific terminology in referring to a trade or entity does not require that certain construction activities be performed by accredited or unionized individuals, or that requirements specified apply exclusively to specific trade(s).



D. Mockups: Full-size physical assemblies that are constructed on-site either as freestanding temporary built elements or as part of permanent construction. Mockups are constructed to verify selections made under Sample submittals; to demonstrate aesthetic effects and qualities of materials and execution; to review coordination, testing, or operation; to show interface between dissimilar materials; and to demonstrate compliance with specified installation tolerances. Mockups are not Samples. Unless otherwise indicated, approved mockups establish the standard by which the Work will be judged.

1. Room Mockups: Mockups of typical interior spaces complete with wall, floor, and ceiling finishes; doors; windows; millwork; casework; specialties; furnishings and equipment; and lighting.

E. Preconstruction Testing: Tests and inspections performed specifically for Project before products and materials are incorporated into the Work, to verify performance or compliance with specified criteria.

F. Product Tests: Tests and inspections that are performed by a nationally recognized testing laboratory (NRTL) according to 29 CFR 1910.7, by a testing agency accredited according to NIST's National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program (NVLAP), or by a testing agency qualified to conduct product testing and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, to establish product performance and compliance with specified requirements.

G. Source Quality-Control Tests: Tests and inspections that are performed at the source; for example, plant, mill, factory, or shop.

H. Testing Agency: An entity engaged to perform specific tests, inspections, or both. Testing laboratory shall mean the same as testing agency.

I. Quality-Assurance Services: Activities, actions, and procedures performed before and during execution of the Work to guard against defects and deficiencies and substantiate that proposed construction will comply with requirements.

J. Quality-Control Services: Tests, inspections, procedures, and related actions during and after execution of the Work to evaluate that actual products incorporated into the Work and completed construction comply with requirements. Contractor's quality-control services do not include contract administration activities performed by Architect.

1.4 DELEGATED-DESIGN SERVICES

A. Performance and Design Criteria: Where professional design services or certifications by a design professional are specifically required of Contractor by the Contract Documents, provide products and systems complying with specific performance and design criteria indicated.

1. If criteria indicated are not sufficient to perform services or certification required, submit a written request for additional information to Architect.



1.5 CONFLICTING REQUIREMENTS

A. Conflicting Standards and Other Requirements: If compliance with two or more standards or requirements are specified and the standards or requirements establish different or conflicting requirements for minimum quantities or quality levels, comply with the most stringent requirement. Refer conflicting requirements that are different, but apparently equal, to Architect for direction before proceeding.

B. Minimum Quantity or Quality Levels: The quantity or quality level shown or specified shall be the minimum provided or performed. The actual installation may comply exactly with the minimum quantity or quality specified, or it may exceed the minimum within reasonable limits. To comply with these requirements, indicated numeric values are minimum or maximum, as appropriate, for the context of requirements. Refer uncertainties to Architect for a decision before proceeding.


A. Shop Drawings: For integrated exterior mockups.

1. Include plans, sections, and elevations, indicating materials and size of mockup construction.

2. Indicate manufacturer and model number of individual components. 3. Provide axonometric drawings for conditions difficult to illustrate in two dimensions.

B. Delegated-Design Services Submittal: In addition to Shop Drawings, Product Data, and other required submittals, submit a statement signed and sealed by the responsible design professional, for each product and system specifically assigned to Contractor to be designed or certified by a design professional, indicating that the products and systems are in compliance with performance and design criteria indicated. Include list of codes, loads, and other factors used in performing these services.


A. Contractor's Quality-Control Plan: For quality-assurance and quality-control activities and responsibilities.

B. Qualification Data: For Contractor's quality-control personnel.

C. Contractor's Statement of Responsibility: When required by authorities having jurisdiction, submit copy of written statement of responsibility submitted to authorities having jurisdiction before starting work on the following systems:

1. Seismic-force-resisting system, designated seismic system, or component listed in the Statement of Special Inspections.

2. Main wind-force-resisting system or a wind-resisting component listed in the Statement of Special Inspections.



D. Testing Agency Qualifications: For testing agencies specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include proof of qualifications in the form of a recent report on the inspection of the testing agency by a recognized authority.

E. Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Prepare in tabular form and include the following:

1. Specification Section number and title. 2. Entity responsible for performing tests and inspections. 3. Description of test and inspection. 4. Identification of applicable standards. 5. Identification of test and inspection methods. 6. Number of tests and inspections required. 7. Time schedule or time span for tests and inspections. 8. Requirements for obtaining samples. 9. Unique characteristics of each quality-control service.

F. Reports: Prepare and submit certified written reports and documents as specified.

G. Permits, Licenses, and Certificates: For Owner's record, submit copies of permits, licenses, certifications, inspection reports, releases, jurisdictional settlements, notices, receipts for fee payments, judgments, correspondence, records, and similar documents established for compliance with standards and regulations bearing on performance of the Work.

1.8 CONTRACTOR'S QUALITY-CONTROL PLAN

A. Quality-Control Plan, General: Submit quality-control plan within 10 days of Notice to Proceed, and not less than five days prior to preconstruction conference. Submit in format acceptable to Architect. Identify personnel, procedures, controls, instructions, tests, records, and forms to be used to carry out Contractor's quality-assurance and quality-control responsibilities. Coordinate with Contractor's Construction Schedule.

B. Quality-Control Personnel Qualifications: Engage qualified personnel trained and experienced in managing and executing quality-assurance and quality-control procedures similar in nature and extent to those required for Project.

1. Project quality-control manager may also serve as Project superintendent.

C. Submittal Procedure: Describe procedures for ensuring compliance with requirements through review and management of submittal process. Indicate qualifications of personnel responsible for submittal review.

D. Testing and Inspection: In quality-control plan, include a comprehensive schedule of Work requiring testing or inspection, including the following:

1. Contractor-performed tests and inspections including Subcontractor-performed tests and inspections. Include required tests and inspections and Contractor-elected tests and inspections. Distinguish source quality-control tests and inspections from field quality-control tests and inspections.

2. Special inspections required by authorities having jurisdiction and indicated on the Statement of Special Inspections.

3. Owner-performed tests and inspections indicated in the Contract Documents.



E. Continuous Inspection of Workmanship: Describe process for continuous inspection during construction to identify and correct deficiencies in workmanship in addition to testing and inspection specified. Indicate types of corrective actions to be required to bring work into compliance with standards of workmanship established by Contract requirements and approved mockups.

F. Monitoring and Documentation: Maintain testing and inspection reports including log of approved and rejected results. Include work Architect has indicated as nonconforming or defective. Indicate corrective actions taken to bring nonconforming work into compliance with requirements. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

1.9 REPORTS AND DOCUMENTS

A. Test and Inspection Reports: Prepare and submit certified written reports specified in other Sections. Include the following:

1. Date of issue. 2. Project title and number. 3. Name, address, telephone number, and email address of testing agency. 4. Dates and locations of samples and tests or inspections. 5. Names of individuals making tests and inspections. 6. Description of the Work and test and inspection method. 7. Identification of product and Specification Section. 8. Complete test or inspection data. 9. Test and inspection results and an interpretation of test results. 10. Record of temperature and weather conditions at time of sample taking and testing and

inspection. 11. Comments or professional opinion on whether tested or inspected Work complies with

the Contract Document requirements. 12. Name and signature of laboratory inspector. 13. Recommendations on retesting and re-inspecting.

B. Manufacturer's Technical Representative's Field Reports: Prepare written information documenting manufacturer's technical representative's tests and inspections specified in other Sections. Include the following:

1. Name, address, telephone number, and email address of technical representative making report.

2. Statement on condition of substrates and their acceptability for installation of product. 3. Statement that products at Project site comply with requirements. 4. Summary of installation procedures being followed, whether they comply with

requirements and, if not, what corrective action was taken. 5. Results of operational and other tests and a statement of whether observed performance

complies with requirements. 6. Statement whether conditions, products, and installation will affect warranty. 7. Other required items indicated in individual Specification Sections.



C. Factory-Authorized Service Representative's Reports: Prepare written information documenting manufacturer's factory-authorized service representative's tests and inspections specified in other Sections. Include the following:

1. Name, address, telephone number, and email address of factory-authorized service representative making report.

2. Statement that equipment complies with requirements. 3. Results of operational and other tests and a statement of whether observed performance

complies with requirements. 4. Statement whether conditions, products, and installation will affect warranty. 5. Other required items indicated in individual Specification Sections.


A. General: Qualifications paragraphs in this article establish the minimum qualification levels required; individual Specification Sections specify additional requirements.

B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing products or systems similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units. As applicable, procure products from manufacturers able to meet qualification requirements, warranty requirements, and technical or factory-authorized service representative requirements.

C. Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing products similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units.

D. Installer Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in installing, erecting, applying, or assembling work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance.

E. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed for installations of the system, assembly, or product that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project.

F. Specialists: Certain Specification Sections require that specific construction activities shall be performed by entities who are recognized experts in those operations. Specialists shall satisfy qualification requirements indicated and shall be engaged for the activities indicated.

G. Testing Agency Qualifications: An NRTL, an NVLAP, or an independent agency with the experience and capability to conduct testing and inspection indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 329; and with additional qualifications specified in individual Sections; and, where required by authorities having jurisdiction, that is acceptable to authorities.



H. Manufacturer's Technical Representative Qualifications: An authorized representative of manufacturer who is trained and approved by manufacturer to observe and inspect installation of manufacturer's products that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project.

I. Factory-Authorized Service Representative Qualifications: An authorized representative of manufacturer who is trained and approved by manufacturer to inspect installation of manufacturer's products that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project.

J. Preconstruction Testing: Where testing agency is indicated to perform preconstruction testing for compliance with specified requirements for performance and test methods, comply with the following:

1. Contractor responsibilities include the following:

a. Provide test specimens representative of proposed products and construction. b. Submit specimens in a timely manner with sufficient time for testing and analyzing

results to prevent delaying the Work. c. Provide sizes and configurations of test assemblies, mockups, and laboratory

mockups to adequately demonstrate capability of products to comply with performance requirements.

d. Build site-assembled test assemblies and mockups using installers who will perform same tasks for Project.

e. When testing is complete, remove test specimens and test assemblies, and mockups; do not reuse products on Project.

2. Testing Agency Responsibilities: Submit a certified written report of each test, inspection, and similar quality-assurance service to Architect, with copy to Contractor. Interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether tested and inspected work complies with or deviates from the Contract Documents.

K. Mockups: Before installing portions of the Work requiring mockups, build mockups for each form of construction and finish required to comply with the following requirements, using materials indicated for the completed Work:

1. Build mockups of size indicated. 2. Build mockups in location indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by Architect. 3. Notify Architect seven days in advance of dates and times when mockups will be

constructed. 4. Employ supervisory personnel who will oversee mockup construction. Employ workers

that will be employed to perform same tasks during the construction at Project. 5. Demonstrate the proposed range of aesthetic effects and workmanship. 6. Obtain Architect's approval of mockups before starting corresponding work, fabrication,

or construction.

a. Allow seven days for initial review and each re-review of each mockup.

7. Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for judging the completed Work.

8. Demolish and remove mockups when directed unless otherwise indicated.



L. Room Mockups: Construct room mockups according to approved Shop Drawings incorporating required materials and assemblies, finished according to requirements. Provide required lighting and additional lighting where required to enable Architect to evaluate quality of the Work. Comply with requirements in "Mockups" Paragraph.

1.11 QUALITY CONTROL

A. Owner Responsibilities: Where quality-control services are indicated as Owner's responsibility, Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform these services.

1. Owner will furnish Contractor with names, addresses, and telephone numbers of testing agencies engaged and a description of types of testing and inspection they are engaged to perform.

2. Payment for these services will be made from testing and inspection allowances, as authorized by Change Orders.

3. Costs for retesting and reinspecting construction that replaces or is necessitated by work that failed to comply with the Contract Documents will be charged to Contractor, and the Contract Sum will be adjusted by Change Order.

B. Contractor Responsibilities: Tests and inspections not explicitly assigned to Owner are Contractor's responsibility. Perform additional quality-control activities, whether specified or not, to verify and document that the Work complies with requirements.

1. Unless otherwise indicated, provide quality-control services specified and those required by authorities having jurisdiction. Perform quality-control services required of Contractor by authorities having jurisdiction, whether specified or not.

2. Engage a qualified testing agency to perform quality-control services.

a. Contractor shall not employ same entity engaged by Owner, unless agreed to in writing by Owner.

3. Notify testing agencies at least 24 hours in advance of time when Work that requires testing or inspection will be performed.

4. Where quality-control services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each quality-control service.

5. Testing and inspection requested by Contractor and not required by the Contract Documents are Contractor's responsibility.

6. Submit additional copies of each written report directly to authorities having jurisdiction, when they so direct.

C. Retesting/Reinspecting: Regardless of whether original tests or inspections were Contractor's responsibility, provide quality-control services, including retesting and reinspecting, for construction that replaced Work that failed to comply with the Contract Documents.

D. Testing Agency Responsibilities: Cooperate with Architect and Contractor in performance of duties. Provide qualified personnel to perform required tests and inspections.

1. Notify Architect and Contractor promptly of irregularities or deficiencies observed in the Work during performance of its services.



2. Determine the locations from which test samples will be taken and in which in-situ tests are conducted.

3. Conduct and interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether tested and inspected work complies with or deviates from requirements.

4. Submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each test, inspection, and similar quality-control service through Contractor.

5. Do not release, revoke, alter, or increase the Contract Document requirements or approve or accept any portion of the Work.

6. Do not perform duties of Contractor.

E. Manufacturer's Field Services: Where indicated, engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect field-assembled components and equipment installation, including service connections. Report results in writing as specified in Section 013300 "Submittal Procedures."

F. Manufacturer's Technical Services: Where indicated, engage a manufacturer's technical representative to observe and inspect the Work. Manufacturer's technical representative's services include participation in preinstallation conferences, examination of substrates and conditions, verification of materials, observation of Installer activities, inspection of completed portions of the Work, and submittal of written reports.

G. Associated Contractor Services: Cooperate with agencies and representatives performing required tests, inspections, and similar quality-control services, and provide reasonable auxiliary services as requested. Notify agency sufficiently in advance of operations to permit assignment of personnel. Provide the following:

1. Access to the Work. 2. Incidental labor and facilities necessary to facilitate tests and inspections. 3. Adequate quantities of representative samples of materials that require testing and

inspection. Assist agency in obtaining samples. 4. Facilities for storage and field curing of test samples. 5. Delivery of samples to testing agencies. 6. Preliminary design mix proposed for use for material mixes that require control by testing

agency. 7. Security and protection for samples and for testing and inspection equipment at Project

site.

H. Coordination: Coordinate sequence of activities to accommodate required quality-assurance and quality-control services with a minimum of delay and to avoid necessity of removing and replacing construction to accommodate testing and inspection.

1. Schedule times for tests, inspections, obtaining samples, and similar activities.

I. Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Prepare a schedule of tests, inspections, and similar quality-control services required by the Contract Documents as a component of Contractor's quality-control plan. Coordinate and submit concurrently with Contractor's Construction Schedule. Update as the Work progresses.

1. Distribution: Distribute schedule to Owner, Architect, testing agencies, and each party involved in performance of portions of the Work where tests and inspections are required.



1.12 SPECIAL TESTS AND INSPECTIONS

A. Special Tests and Inspections: Engage a qualified testing agency to conduct special tests and inspections required by authorities having jurisdiction as indicated in individual Specification Sections and as follows:

1. Verifying that manufacturer maintains detailed fabrication and quality-control procedures and reviewing the completeness and adequacy of those procedures to perform the Work.

2. Notifying Architect and Contractor promptly of irregularities and deficiencies observed in the Work during performance of its services.

3. Submitting a certified written report of each test, inspection, and similar quality-control service to Architect with copy to Contractor and to authorities having jurisdiction.

4. Submitting a final report of special tests and inspections at Substantial Completion, which includes a list of unresolved deficiencies.

5. Interpreting tests and inspections and stating in each report whether tested and inspected work complies with or deviates from the Contract Documents.

6. Retesting and reinspecting corrected work.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 TEST AND INSPECTION LOG

A. Test and Inspection Log: Prepare a record of tests and inspections. Include the following:

1. Date test or inspection was conducted. 2. Description of the Work tested or inspected. 3. Date test or inspection results were transmitted to Architect. 4. Identification of testing agency or special inspector conducting test or inspection.

B. Maintain log at Project site. Post changes and revisions as they occur. Provide access to test and inspection log for Architect's reference during normal working hours.

1. Submit log at Project closeout as part of Project Record Documents.

3.2 REPAIR AND PROTECTION

A. General: On completion of testing, inspection, sample taking, and similar services, repair damaged construction and restore substrates and finishes.

1. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Specification Sections or matching existing substrates and finishes. Restore patched areas and extend restoration into adjoining areas with durable seams that are as invisible as possible. Comply with the Contract Document requirements for cutting and patching in Section 017300 "Execution."



B. Protect construction exposed by or for quality-control service activities.

C. Repair and protection are Contractor's responsibility, regardless of the assignment of responsibility for quality-control services.



JANUARY 2020 REFERENCES – 014200 1 OF 3

SECTION 014200 - REFERENCES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. General: Basic Contract definitions are included in the Conditions of the Contract.

B. "Approved": When used to convey Architect's action on Contractor's submittals, applications, and requests, "approved" is limited to Architect's duties and responsibilities as stated in the Conditions of the Contract.

C. "Directed": A command or instruction by Architect. Other terms including "requested," "authorized," "selected," "required," and "permitted" have the same meaning as "directed."

D. "Indicated": Requirements expressed by graphic representations or in written form on Drawings, in Specifications, and in other Contract Documents. Other terms including "shown," "noted," "scheduled," and "specified" have the same meaning as "indicated."

E. "Regulations": Laws, ordinances, statutes, and lawful orders issued by authorities having jurisdiction, and rules, conventions, and agreements within the construction industry that control performance of the Work.

F. "Furnish": Supply and deliver to Project site, ready for unloading, unpacking, assembly, installation, and similar operations.

G. "Install": Unload, temporarily store, unpack, assemble, erect, place, anchor, apply, work to dimension, finish, cure, protect, clean, and similar operations at Project site.

H. "Provide": Furnish and install, complete and ready for the intended use.

I. "Project Site": Space available for performing construction activities. The extent of Project site is shown on Drawings and may or may not be identical with the description of the land on which Project is to be built.

1.3 INDUSTRY STANDARDS

A. Applicability of Standards: Unless the Contract Documents include more stringent requirements, applicable construction industry standards have the same force and effect as if bound or copied directly into the Contract Documents to the extent referenced. Such standards are made a part of the Contract Documents by reference.



B. Publication Dates: Comply with standards in effect as of date of the Contract Documents unless otherwise indicated.

C. Copies of Standards: Each entity engaged in construction on Project should be familiar with industry standards applicable to its construction activity. Copies of applicable standards are not bound with the Contract Documents.

1. Where copies of standards are needed to perform a required construction activity, obtain copies directly from publication source.

1.4 ABBREVIATIONS AND ACRONYMS

A. Industry Organizations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities indicated in Gale's "Encyclopedia of Associations: National Organizations of the U.S." or in Columbia Books' "National Trade & Professional Associations of the United States."

B. Code Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. Names, telephone numbers, and Web sites are subject to change and are believed to be accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents.

ICC International Code Council (888) 422-7233 www.iccsafe.org

C. Federal Government Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. Names, telephone numbers, and Web sites are subject to change and are believed to be accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents.

COE Army Corps of Engineers (202) 761-0011 www.usace.army.mil DOE Department of Energy (202) 586-9220 www.energy.gov EPA Environmental Protection Agency (202) 272-0167 www.epa.gov FAA Federal Aviation Administration (866) 835-5322 www.faa.gov FCC Federal Communications Commission (888) 225-5322 www.fcc.gov FDA Food and Drug Administration (888) 463-6332 www.fda.gov GSA General Services Administration (800) 488-3111



www.gsa.gov NIST National Institute of Standards and Technology (301) 975-6478 www.nist.gov OSHA Occupational Safety & Health Administration (800) 321-6742 www.osha.gov (202) 693-1999 USDA Department of Agriculture (202) 720-2791 www.usda.gov

D. Standards and Regulations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the standards and regulations in the following list. Names, telephone numbers, and Web sites are subject to change and are believed to be accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents.

ADAAG Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) (800) 872-2253 Architectural Barriers Act (ABA) (202) 272-0080 Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities Available from U.S. Access Board www.access-board.gov

CFR Code of Federal Regulations (866) 512-1800 Available from Government Printing Office (202) 512-1800 www.gpoaccess.gov/cfr/index.html FED-STD Federal Standard (See FS)





JANUARY 2020 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS – 016000 1 OF 5

SECTION 016000 - PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for selection of products for use in Project; product delivery, storage, and handling; manufacturers' standard warranties on products; special warranties; and comparable products.


1. Section 012500 "Substitution Procedures" for requests for substitutions. 2. Section 014200 "References" for applicable industry standards for products specified.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Products: Items obtained for incorporating into the Work, whether purchased for Project or taken from previously purchased stock. The term "product" includes the terms "material," "equipment," "system," and terms of similar intent.

1. Named Products: Items identified by manufacturer's product name, including make or model number or other designation shown or listed in manufacturer's published product literature that is current as of date of the Contract Documents.

2. New Products: Items that have not previously been incorporated into another project or facility. Products salvaged or recycled from other projects are not considered new products.

3. Comparable Product: Product that is demonstrated and approved by Architect through submittal process to have the indicated qualities related to type, function, dimension, in-service performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics that equal or exceed those of specified product.

B. Basis-of-Design Product Specification: A specification in which a single manufacturer's product is named and accompanied by the words "basis-of-design product," including make or model number or other designation. In addition to the basis-of-design product description, product attributes and characteristics may be listed to establish the significant qualities related to type, function, in-service performance and physical properties, weight, dimension, durability, visual characteristics, and other special features and requirements for purposes of evaluating comparable products of additional manufacturers named in the specification.



C. Subject to Compliance with Requirements: Where the phrase "Subject to compliance with requirements" introduces a product selection procedure in an individual Specification Section, provide products qualified under the specified product procedure. In the event that a named product or product by a named manufacturer does not meet the other requirements of the specifications, select another named product or product from another named manufacturer that does meet the requirements of the specifications. Submit a comparable product request, if applicable.


A. Comparable Product Request Submittal: Submit request for consideration of each comparable product. Identify basis-of-design product or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section number and title and Drawing numbers and titles.

1. Include data to indicate compliance with the requirements specified in "Comparable Products" Article.

2. Architect's Action: If necessary, Architect will request additional information or documentation for evaluation within seven days of receipt of a comparable product request. Architect will notify Contractor of approval or rejection of proposed comparable product request within 15 days of receipt of request, or seven days of receipt of additional information or documentation, whichever is later.

a. Form Approval of Submittal: As specified in Section 013300 "Submittal Procedures."

b. Use product specified if Architect does not issue a decision on use of a comparable product request within time allocated.

B. Basis-of-Design Product Specification Submittal: Comply with requirements in Section 013300 "Submittal Procedures." Show compliance with requirements.


A. Compatibility of Options: If Contractor is given option of selecting between two or more products for use on Project, select product compatible with products previously selected, even if previously selected products were also options.

1. Each contractor is responsible for providing products and construction methods compatible with products and construction methods of other contractors.

2. If a dispute arises between contractors over concurrently selectable but incompatible products, Architect will determine which products shall be used.

1.6 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver, store, and handle products using means and methods that will prevent damage, deterioration, and loss, including theft and vandalism. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.



B. Delivery and Handling:

1. Schedule delivery to minimize long-term storage at Project site and to prevent overcrowding of construction spaces.

2. Coordinate delivery with installation time to ensure minimum holding time for items that are flammable, hazardous, easily damaged, or sensitive to deterioration, theft, and other losses.

3. Deliver products to Project site in an undamaged condition in manufacturer's original sealed container or other packaging system, complete with labels and instructions for handling, storing, unpacking, protecting, and installing.

4. Inspect products on delivery to determine compliance with the Contract Documents and to determine that products are undamaged and properly protected.

C. Storage:

1. Store products to allow for inspection and measurement of quantity or counting of units. 2. Store materials in a manner that will not endanger Project structure. 3. Store products that are subject to damage by the elements, under cover in a weathertight

enclosure above ground, with ventilation adequate to prevent condensation. 4. Protect foam plastic from exposure to sunlight, except to extent necessary for period of

installation and concealment. 5. Comply with product manufacturer's written instructions for temperature, humidity,

ventilation, and weather-protection requirements for storage. 6. Protect stored products from damage and liquids from freezing. 7. Provide a secure location and enclosure at Project site for storage of materials and

equipment by Owner's construction forces. Coordinate location with Owner.

1.7 PRODUCT WARRANTIES

A. Warranties specified in other Sections shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties required by the Contract Documents. Manufacturer's disclaimers and limitations on product warranties do not relieve Contractor of obligations under requirements of the Contract Documents.

1. Manufacturer's Warranty: Written warranty furnished by individual manufacturer for a particular product and specifically endorsed by manufacturer to Owner.

2. Special Warranty: Written warranty required by the Contract Documents to provide specific rights for Owner.

B. Special Warranties: Prepare a written document that contains appropriate terms and identification, ready for execution.

1. Manufacturer's Standard Form: Modified to include Project-specific information and properly executed.

2. Specified Form: When specified forms are included with the Specifications, prepare a written document using indicated form properly executed.

3. See other Sections for specific content requirements and particular requirements for submitting special warranties.



C. Submittal Time: Comply with requirements in Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures."

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PRODUCT SELECTION PROCEDURES

A. General Product Requirements: Provide products that comply with the Contract Documents, are undamaged and, unless otherwise indicated, are new at time of installation.

1. Provide products complete with accessories, trim, finish, fasteners, and other items needed for a complete installation and indicated use and effect.

2. Standard Products: If available, and unless custom products or nonstandard options are specified, provide standard products of types that have been produced and used successfully in similar situations on other projects.

3. Owner reserves the right to limit selection to products with warranties meeting requirements of the Contract Documents.

4. Where products are accompanied by the term "as selected," Architect will make selection.

5. Descriptive, performance, and reference standard requirements in the Specifications establish salient characteristics of products.

6. Or Equal: For products specified by name and accompanied by the term "or equal," or "or approved equal," or "or approved," comply with requirements in "Comparable Products" Article to obtain approval for use of an unnamed product.

B. Product Selection Procedures:

1. Sole Product: Where Specifications name a single manufacturer and product, provide the named product that complies with requirements. Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor's convenience will not be considered.

2. Sole Manufacturer/Source: Where Specifications name a single manufacturer or source, provide a product by the named manufacturer or source that complies with requirements. Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor's convenience will not be considered.

3. Limited List of Products: Where Specifications include a list of names of both manufacturers and products, provide one of the products listed that complies with requirements. Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor's convenience will not be considered.

4. Non-Limited List of Products: Where Specifications include a list of names of both available manufacturers and products, provide one of the products listed, or an unnamed product, which complies with requirements.

5. Limited List of Manufacturers: Where Specifications include a list of manufacturers' names, provide a product by one of the manufacturers listed that complies with requirements. Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor's convenience will not be considered.

6. Non-Limited List of Manufacturers: Where Specifications include a list of available manufacturers, provide a product by one of the manufacturers listed, or a product by an unnamed manufacturer, which complies with requirements.



7. Basis-of-Design Product: Where Specifications name a product, or refer to a product indicated on Drawings, and include a list of manufacturers, provide the specified or indicated product or a comparable product by one of the other named manufacturers. Drawings and Specifications indicate sizes, profiles, dimensions, and other characteristics that are based on the product named. Comply with requirements in "Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed product by one of the other named manufacturers.

C. Visual Matching Specification: Where Specifications require "match Architect's sample," provide a product that complies with requirements and matches Architect's sample. Architect's decision will be final on whether a proposed product matches.

1. If no product available within specified category matches and complies with other specified requirements, comply with requirements in Section 012500 "Substitution Procedures" for proposal of product.

D. Visual Selection Specification: Where Specifications include the phrase "as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range" or similar phrase, select a product that complies with requirements. Architect will select color, gloss, pattern, density, or texture from manufacturer's product line that includes both standard and premium items.

2.2 COMPARABLE PRODUCTS

A. Conditions for Consideration of Comparable Products: Architect will consider Contractor's request for comparable product when the following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Architect may return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements:

1. Evidence that proposed product does not require revisions to the Contract Documents, is consistent with the Contract Documents, will produce the indicated results, and is compatible with other portions of the Work. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed product with those named in the Specifications. Significant product qualities include attributes such as type, function, in-service performance and physical properties, weight, dimension, durability, visual characteristics, and other specific features and requirements.

2. Evidence that proposed product provides specified warranty. 3. List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and addresses and

names and addresses of architects and owners, if requested. 4. Samples, if requested.

B. Submittal Requirements: Approval by the Architect of Contractor's request for use of comparable product is not intended to satisfy other submittal requirements. Comply with specified submittal requirements.




JANUARY 2020 EXECUTION – 017300 1 OF 10

SECTION 017300 - EXECUTION

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes general administrative and procedural requirements governing execution of the Work including, but not limited to, the following:

1. Construction layout. 2. Field engineering and surveying. 3. Installation of the Work. 4. Cutting and patching. 5. Coordination of Owner-installed products. 6. Progress cleaning. 7. Starting and adjusting. 8. Protection of installed construction. 9. Correction of the Work.


1. Division 1 Section "Summary" for limits on use of Project site. 2. Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures" for submitting final property survey with

Project Record Documents, recording of Owner-accepted deviations from indicated lines and levels, replacing defective work, and final cleaning.

3. Division 7 Section "Penetration Firestopping" for patching penetrations in fire-rated construction.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Cutting: Removal of in-place construction necessary to permit installation or performance of subsequent work.

B. Patching: Fitting and repair work required to restore construction to original conditions after installation of subsequent work.




A. Cutting and Patching Plan: Submit plan describing procedures at least 10 days prior to the time cutting and patching will be performed. Include the following information:

1. Extent: Describe reason for and extent of each occurrence of cutting and patching. 2. Changes to In-Place Construction: Describe anticipated results. Include changes to

structural elements and operating components as well as changes in building appearance and other significant visual elements.

3. Products: List products to be used for patching and firms or entities that will perform patching work.

4. Dates: Indicate when cutting and patching will be performed. 5. Utilities and Mechanical and Electrical Systems: List services and systems that cutting

and patching procedures will disturb or affect. List services and systems that will be relocated and those that will be temporarily out of service. Indicate length of time permanent services and systems will be disrupted.

a. Include description of provisions for temporary services and systems during interruption of permanent services and systems.

B. Landfill Receipts: Submit copy of receipts issued by a landfill facility, licensed to accept hazardous materials, for hazardous waste disposal.


A. Cutting and Patching: Comply with requirements for and limitations on cutting and patching of construction elements.

1. Structural Elements: When cutting and patching structural elements, notify Architect of locations and details of cutting and await directions from Architect before proceeding. Shore, brace, and support structural elements during cutting and patching. Do not cut and patch structural elements in a manner that could change their load-carrying capacity or increase deflection.

2. Operational Elements: Do not cut and patch operating elements and related components in a manner that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended or that results in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety. Operational elements include the following:

a. Primary operational systems and equipment. b. Fire separation assemblies. c. Air or smoke barriers. d. Fire-suppression systems. e. Plumbing piping systems. f. Mechanical systems piping and ducts. g. Control systems. h. Communication systems. i. Fire-detection and -alarm systems. j. Conveying systems. k. Electrical wiring systems.



l. Operating systems of special construction.

3. Other Construction Elements: Do not cut and patch other construction elements or components in a manner that could change their load-carrying capacity, that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended, or that results in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety. Other construction elements include but are not limited to the following:

a. Water, moisture, or vapor barriers. b. Membranes and flashings. c. Exterior curtain-wall construction. d. Sprayed fire-resistive material. e. Equipment supports. f. Piping, ductwork, vessels, and equipment. g. Noise- and vibration-control elements and systems.

4. Visual Elements: Do not cut and patch construction in a manner that results in visual evidence of cutting and patching. Do not cut and patch exposed construction in a manner that would, in Architect's opinion, reduce the building's aesthetic qualities. Remove and replace construction that has been cut and patched in a visually unsatisfactory manner.

B. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Obtain and maintain on-site manufacturer's written recommendations and instructions for installation of products and equipment.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. General: Comply with requirements specified in other Sections.

B. In-Place Materials: Use materials for patching identical to in-place materials. For exposed surfaces, use materials that visually match in-place adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible.

1. If identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used, use materials that, when installed, will provide a match acceptable to Architect for the visual and functional performance of in-place materials.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Existing Conditions: The existence and location of underground and other utilities and construction indicated as existing are not guaranteed. Before beginning sitework, investigate and verify the existence and location of underground utilities, and other construction affecting the Work.



1. Before construction, verify the location and invert elevation at points of connection of sanitary sewer, storm sewer, and water-service piping; underground electrical services; and other utilities.

2. Furnish location data for work related to Project that must be performed by public utilities serving Project site.

B. Examination and Acceptance of Conditions: Before proceeding with each component of the Work, examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer or Applicator present where indicated, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. Record observations.

1. Examine roughing-in for mechanical and electrical systems to verify actual locations of connections before equipment and fixture installation.

2. Examine walls, floors, and roofs for suitable conditions where products and systems are to be installed.

3. Verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with existing finishes or primers.

C. Written Report: Where a written report listing conditions detrimental to performance of the Work is required by other Sections, include the following:

1. Description of the Work. 2. List of detrimental conditions, including substrates. 3. List of unacceptable installation tolerances. 4. Recommended corrections.

D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Proceeding with the Work indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Existing Utility Information: Furnish information to local utility that is necessary to adjust, move, or relocate existing utility structures, utility poles, lines, services, or other utility appurtenances located in or affected by construction. Coordinate with authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Field Measurements: Take field measurements as required to fit the Work properly. Recheck measurements before installing each product. Where portions of the Work are indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work.

C. Space Requirements: Verify space requirements and dimensions of items shown diagrammatically on Drawings.

D. Review of Contract Documents and Field Conditions: Immediately on discovery of the need for clarification of the Contract Documents caused by differing field conditions outside the control of Contractor, submit a request for information to Architect according to requirements in Section 013100 "Project Management and Coordination."



3.3 CONSTRUCTION LAYOUT

A. Verification: Before proceeding to lay out the Work, verify layout information shown on Drawings, in relation to the property survey and existing benchmarks. If discrepancies are discovered, notify Architect promptly.

B. Site Improvements: Locate and lay out site improvements, including pavements, grading, fill and topsoil placement, utility slopes, and rim and invert elevations.

C. Building Lines and Levels: Locate and lay out control lines and levels for structures, building foundations, column grids, and floor levels, including those required for mechanical and electrical work. Transfer survey markings and elevations for use with control lines and levels. Level foundations and piers from two or more locations.

D. Record Log: Maintain a log of layout control work. Record deviations from required lines and levels. Include beginning and ending dates and times of surveys, weather conditions, name and duty of each survey party member, and types of instruments and tapes used. Make the log available for reference by Architect.

3.4 FIELD ENGINEERING

A. Identification: Owner will identify existing benchmarks, control points, and property corners.

B. Reference Points: Locate existing permanent benchmarks, control points, and similar reference points before beginning the Work. Preserve and protect permanent benchmarks and control points during construction operations.

1. Do not change or relocate existing benchmarks or control points without prior written approval of Architect. Report lost or destroyed permanent benchmarks or control points promptly. Report the need to relocate permanent benchmarks or control points to Architect before proceeding.

2. Replace lost or destroyed permanent benchmarks and control points promptly. Base replacements on the original survey control points.

C. Benchmarks: Establish and maintain a minimum of two permanent benchmarks on Project site, referenced to data established by survey control points. Comply with authorities having jurisdiction for type and size of benchmark.

1. Record benchmark locations, with horizontal and vertical data, on Project Record Documents.

2. Where the actual location or elevation of layout points cannot be marked, provide temporary reference points sufficient to locate the Work.

3. Remove temporary reference points when no longer needed. Restore marked construction to its original condition.



3.5 INSTALLATION A. General: Locate the Work and components of the Work accurately, in correct alignment and

elevation, as indicated.

1. Make vertical work plumb and make horizontal work level. 2. Where space is limited, install components to maximize space available for maintenance

and ease of removal for replacement. 3. Conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring in finished areas unless otherwise indicated. 4. Maintain minimum headroom clearance of 96 inches in all spaces.

B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations for installing products in applications indicated.

C. Install products at the time and under conditions that will ensure the best possible results. Maintain conditions required for product performance until Substantial Completion.

D. Conduct construction operations so no part of the Work is subjected to damaging operations or loading in excess of that expected during normal conditions of occupancy.

E. Sequence the Work and allow adequate clearances to accommodate movement of construction items on site and placement in permanent locations.

F. Tools and Equipment: Where possible, select tools or equipment that minimize production of excessive noise levels.

G. Templates: Obtain and distribute to the parties involved templates for work specified to be factory prepared and field installed. Check Shop Drawings of other portions of the Work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and installing products to comply with indicated requirements.

H. Attachment: Provide blocking and attachment plates and anchors and fasteners of adequate size and number to securely anchor each component in place, accurately located and aligned with other portions of the Work. Where size and type of attachments are not indicated, verify size and type required for load conditions.

1. Mounting Heights: Where mounting heights are not indicated, mount components at heights directed by Architect.

2. Allow for building movement, including thermal expansion and contraction. 3. Coordinate installation of anchorages. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions

for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation.

I. Joints: Make joints of uniform width. Where joint locations in exposed work are not indicated, arrange joints for the best visual effect. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints.



J. Repair or remove and replace damaged, defective, or nonconforming Work.

1. Comply with Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures" for repairing or removing and replacing defective Work.

3.6 CUTTING AND PATCHING

A. Cutting and Patching, General: Employ skilled workers to perform cutting and patching. Proceed with cutting and patching at the earliest feasible time, and complete without delay.

1. Cut in-place construction to provide for installation of other components or performance of other construction, and subsequently patch as required to restore surfaces to their original condition.

B. Existing Warranties: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or damaged during installation or cutting and patching operations, by methods and with materials so as not to void existing warranties.

C. Temporary Support: Provide temporary support of work to be cut.

D. Protection: Protect in-place construction during cutting and patching to prevent damage. Provide protection from adverse weather conditions for portions of Project that might be exposed during cutting and patching operations.

E. Adjacent Occupied Areas: Where interference with use of adjoining areas or interruption of free passage to adjoining areas is unavoidable, coordinate cutting and patching according to requirements in Section 011000 "Summary."

F. Existing Utility Services and Mechanical/Electrical Systems: Where existing services/systems are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, bypass such services/systems before cutting to minimize interruption to occupied areas.

G. Cutting: Cut in-place construction by sawing, drilling, breaking, chipping, grinding, and similar operations, including excavation, using methods least likely to damage elements retained or adjoining construction. If possible, review proposed procedures with original Installer; comply with original Installer's written recommendations.

1. In general, use hand or small power tools designed for sawing and grinding, not hammering and chopping. Cut holes and slots neatly to minimum size required, and with minimum disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings when not in use.

2. Finished Surfaces: Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces. 3. Concrete and Masonry: Cut using a cutting machine, such as an abrasive saw or a

diamond-core drill. 4. Excavating and Backfilling: Comply with requirements in applicable Sections where

required by cutting and patching operations. 5. Mechanical and Electrical Services: Cut off pipe or conduit in walls or partitions to be

removed. Cap, valve, or plug and seal remaining portion of pipe or conduit to prevent entrance of moisture or other foreign matter after cutting.



6. Proceed with patching after construction operations requiring cutting are complete.

H. Patching: Patch construction by filling, repairing, refinishing, closing up, and similar operations following performance of other work. Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as practicable. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Sections, where applicable.

1. Inspection: Where feasible, test and inspect patched areas after completion to demonstrate physical integrity of installation.

2. Exposed Finishes: Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish restoration into retained adjoining construction in a manner that will minimize evidence of patching and refinishing.

a. Clean piping, conduit, and similar features before applying paint or other finishing materials.

b. Restore damaged pipe covering to its original condition.

3. Floors and Walls: Where walls or partitions that are removed extend one finished area into another, patch and repair floor and wall surfaces in the new space. Provide an even surface of uniform finish, color, texture, and appearance. Remove in-place floor and wall coverings and replace with new materials, if necessary, to achieve uniform color and appearance.

a. Where patching occurs in a painted surface, prepare substrate and apply primer and intermediate paint coats appropriate for substrate over the patch, and apply final paint coat over entire unbroken surface containing the patch. Provide additional coats until patch blends with adjacent surfaces.

4. Ceilings: Patch, repair, or rehang in-place ceilings as necessary to provide an even-plane surface of uniform appearance.

5. Exterior Building Enclosure: Patch components in a manner that restores enclosure to a weathertight condition and ensures thermal and moisture integrity of building enclosure.

I. Cleaning: Clean areas and spaces where cutting and patching are performed. Remove paint, mortar, oils, putty, and similar materials from adjacent finished surfaces.

3.7 OWNER-INSTALLED PRODUCTS

A. Site Access: Provide access to Project site for Owner's construction personnel.

B. Coordination: Coordinate construction and operations of the Work with work performed by Owner's construction personnel.

1. Construction Schedule: Inform Owner of Contractor's preferred construction schedule for Owner's portion of the Work. Adjust construction schedule based on a mutually agreeable timetable. Notify Owner if changes to schedule are required due to differences in actual construction progress.

2. Preinstallation Conferences: Include Owner's construction personnel at preinstallation conferences covering portions of the Work that are to receive Owner's work. Attend



preinstallation conferences conducted by Owner's construction personnel if portions of the Work depend on Owner's construction.

3.8 PROGRESS CLEANING

A. General: Clean Project site and work areas daily, including common areas. Enforce requirements strictly. Dispose of materials lawfully.

1. Comply with requirements in NFPA 241 for removal of combustible waste materials and debris.

2. Do not hold waste materials more than seven days during normal weather or three days if the temperature is expected to rise above 80 deg F.

3. Containerize hazardous and unsanitary waste materials separately from other waste. Mark containers appropriately and dispose of legally, according to regulations.

a. Use containers intended for holding waste materials of type to be stored.

4. Coordinate progress cleaning for joint-use areas where Contractor and other contractors are working concurrently.

B. Site: Maintain Project site free of waste materials and debris.

C. Work Areas: Clean areas where work is in progress to the level of cleanliness necessary for proper execution of the Work.

1. Remove liquid spills promptly. 2. Where dust would impair proper execution of the Work, broom-clean or vacuum the

entire work area, as appropriate.

D. Installed Work: Keep installed work clean. Clean installed surfaces according to written instructions of manufacturer or fabricator of product installed, using only cleaning materials specifically recommended. If specific cleaning materials are not recommended, use cleaning materials that are not hazardous to health or property and that will not damage exposed surfaces.

E. Concealed Spaces: Remove debris from concealed spaces before enclosing the space.

F. Exposed Surfaces in Finished Areas: Clean exposed surfaces and protect as necessary to ensure freedom from damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.

G. Waste Disposal: Do not bury or burn waste materials on-site. Do not wash waste materials down sewers or into waterways. Comply with waste disposal requirements in Section 015000 "Temporary Facilities and Controls."

H. During handling and installation, clean and protect construction in progress and adjoining materials already in place. Apply protective covering where required to ensure protection from damage or deterioration at Substantial Completion.



I. Clean and provide maintenance on completed construction as frequently as necessary through the remainder of the construction period. Adjust and lubricate operable components to ensure operability without damaging effects.

J. Limiting Exposures: Supervise construction operations to ensure that no part of the construction, completed or in progress, is subject to harmful, dangerous, damaging, or otherwise deleterious exposure during the construction period.

3.9 STARTING AND ADJUSTING

A. Start equipment and operating components to confirm proper operation. Remove malfunctioning units, replace with new units, and retest.

B. Adjust equipment for proper operation. Adjust operating components for proper operation without binding.

C. Test each piece of equipment to verify proper operation. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.

D. Manufacturer's Field Service: Comply with qualification requirements in Section 014000 "Quality Requirements."

3.10 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION

A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure installed Work is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.

B. Protection of Existing Items: Provide protection and ensure that existing items to remain undisturbed by construction are maintained in condition that existed at commencement of the Work.

C. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for temperature and relative humidity.



JANUARY 2020 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES - 017700 1 OF 6

SECTION 017700 - CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for contract closeout, including, but not limited to, the following:

1. Substantial completion procedures. 2. Final completion procedures. 3. Warranties. 4. Final cleaning. 5. Repair of the Work.


1. Section 017300 "Execution" for progress cleaning of Project site. 2. Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data" for operation and maintenance

manual requirements. 3. Section 017839 "Project Record Documents" for submitting record Drawings, record

Specifications, and record Product Data. 4. Section 017900 "Demonstration and Training" for requirements for instructing Owner's

personnel.


A. Product Data: For cleaning agents.

B. Contractor's List of Incomplete Items: Initial submittal at Substantial Completion.

C. Certified List of Incomplete Items: Final submittal at Final Completion.

1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Certificates of Release: From authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Certificate of Insurance: For continuing coverage.

C. Field Report: For pest control inspection.



1.5 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS

A. Schedule of Maintenance Material Items: For maintenance material submittal items specified in other Sections.

1.6 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION PROCEDURES

A. Contractor's List of Incomplete Items: Prepare and submit a list of items to be completed and corrected (Contractor's punch list), indicating the value of each item on the list and reasons why the Work is incomplete.

B. Submittals Prior to Substantial Completion: Complete the following a minimum of 10 days prior to requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial Completion. List items below that are incomplete at time of request.

1. Certificates of Release: Obtain and submit releases from authorities having jurisdiction permitting Owner unrestricted use of the Work and access to services and utilities. Include occupancy permits, operating certificates, and similar releases.

2. Submit closeout submittals specified in other Division 01 Sections, including project record documents, operation and maintenance manuals, and similar final record information.

3. Submit closeout submittals specified in individual Sections, including specific warranties, final certifications, and similar documents.

4. Submit maintenance material submittals specified in individual Sections, including tools, spare parts, extra materials, and similar items, and deliver to location designated by Architect. Label with manufacturer's name and model number where applicable.

a. Schedule of Maintenance Material Items: Prepare and submit schedule of maintenance material submittal items, including name and quantity of each item and name and number of related Specification Section. Obtain Architect’s signature for receipt of submittals.

5. Submit test/adjust/balance records. 6. Submit changeover information related to Owner's occupancy, use, operation, and

maintenance.

C. Procedures Prior to Substantial Completion: Complete the following a minimum of 10 days prior to requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial Completion. List items below that are incomplete at time of request.

1. Advise Owner of pending insurance changeover requirements. 2. Advise Owner's personnel of changeover in security provisions. 3. Complete startup and testing of systems and equipment. 4. Perform preventive maintenance on equipment used prior to Substantial Completion. 5. Instruct Owner's personnel in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of products,

equipment, and systems. Submit demonstration and training video recordings specified in Section 017900 "Demonstration and Training."

6. Advise Owner of changeover in heat and other utilities.



7. Participate with Owner in conducting inspection and walkthrough with local emergency responders.

8. Terminate and remove temporary facilities from Project site, along with mockups, construction tools, and similar elements.

9. Complete final cleaning requirements, including touchup painting. 10. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred exposed finishes to eliminate visual

defects.

D. Inspection: Submit a written request for inspection to determine Substantial Completion a minimum of 10 days prior to date the work will be completed and ready for final inspection and tests. On receipt of request, Architect will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Architect will prepare the Certificate of Substantial Completion after inspection or will notify Contractor of items, either on Contractor's list or additional items identified by Architect, that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued.

1. Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as incomplete is completed or corrected.

2. Results of completed inspection will form the basis of requirements for final completion.

1.7 FINAL COMPLETION PROCEDURES

A. Submittals Prior to Final Completion: Before requesting final inspection for determining final completion, complete the following:

1. Submit a final Application for Payment according to Section 012900 "Payment Procedures."

2. Certified List of Incomplete Items: Submit certified copy of Architect's Substantial Completion inspection list of items to be completed or corrected (punch list), endorsed and dated by Architect. Certified copy of the list shall state that each item has been completed or otherwise resolved for acceptance.

3. Certificate of Insurance: Submit evidence of final, continuing insurance coverage complying with insurance requirements.

4. Submit pest-control final inspection report.

B. Inspection: Submit a written request for final inspection to determine acceptance a minimum of 10 days prior to date the work will be completed and ready for final inspection and tests. On receipt of request, Architect will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements.

1. Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as incomplete is completed or corrected.

1.8 LIST OF INCOMPLETE ITEMS (PUNCH LIST)

A. Organization of List: Include name and identification of each space and area affected by construction operations for incomplete items and items needing correction including, if necessary, areas disturbed by Contractor that are outside the limits of construction.



1. Organize list of spaces in sequential order, starting with exterior areas first and proceeding from lowest floor to highest floor.

2. Organize items applying to each space by major element, including categories for ceiling, individual walls, floors, equipment, and building systems.

3. Include the following information at the top of each page:

a. Project name. b. Date. c. Name of Architect. d. Name of Contractor. e. Page number.

4. Submit list of incomplete items in any of the following formats:

a. MS Excel electronic file. Architect will return annotated file. b. PDF electronic file. Architect will return annotated file. c. One paper copy.

1.9 SUBMITTAL OF PROJECT WARRANTIES

A. Time of Submittal: Submit written warranties on request of Architect for designated portions of the Work where commencement of warranties other than date of Substantial Completion is indicated, or when delay in submittal of warranties might limit Owner's rights under warranty.

B. Organize warranty documents into an orderly sequence based on the table of contents of Project Manual.

1. Bind warranties and bonds in heavy-duty, three-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders, thickness as necessary to accommodate contents, and sized to receive 8-1/2-by-11-inch paper.

2. Provide heavy paper dividers with plastic-covered tabs for each separate warranty. Mark tab to identify the product or installation. Provide a typed description of the product or installation, including the name of the product and the name, address, and telephone number of Installer.

3. Identify each binder on the front and spine with the typed or printed title "WARRANTIES," Project name, and name of Contractor.

4. Warranty Electronic File: Scan warranties and bonds and assemble complete warranty and bond submittal package into a single indexed electronic PDF file with links enabling navigation to each item. Provide bookmarked table of contents at beginning of document.

C. Provide additional copies of each warranty to include in operation and maintenance manuals.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Cleaning Agents: Use cleaning materials and agents recommended by manufacturer or fabricator of the surface to be cleaned. Do not use cleaning agents that are potentially hazardous to health or property or that might damage finished surfaces.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 FINAL CLEANING

A. General: Perform final cleaning. Conduct cleaning and waste-removal operations to comply with local laws and ordinances and Federal and local environmental and antipollution regulations.

B. Cleaning: Employ experienced workers or professional cleaners for final cleaning. Clean each surface or unit to condition expected in an average commercial building cleaning and maintenance program. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting inspection for certification of Substantial Completion for entire Project or for a designated portion of Project:

a. Clean Project site, yard, and grounds, in areas disturbed by construction activities, including landscape development areas, of rubbish, waste material, litter, and other foreign substances.

b. Sweep paved areas broom clean. Remove petrochemical spills, stains, and other foreign deposits.

c. Rake grounds that are neither planted nor paved to a smooth, even-textured surface.

d. Remove tools, construction equipment, machinery, and surplus material from Project site.

e. Remove snow and ice to provide safe access to building. f. Clean exposed exterior and interior hard-surfaced finishes to a dirt-free condition,

free of stains, films, and similar foreign substances. Avoid disturbing natural weathering of exterior surfaces. Restore reflective surfaces to their original condition.

g. Remove debris and surface dust from limited access spaces, including roofs, plenums, shafts, trenches, equipment vaults, manholes, attics, and similar spaces.

h. Sweep concrete floors broom clean in unoccupied spaces. i. Vacuum carpet and similar soft surfaces, removing debris and excess nap; clean

according to manufacturer's recommendations if visible soil or stains remain. j. Clean transparent materials, including mirrors and glass in doors and windows.

Remove glazing compounds and other noticeable, vision-obscuring materials. Polish mirrors and glass, taking care not to scratch surfaces.

k. Remove labels that are not permanent.



l. Wipe surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment, elevator equipment, and similar equipment. Remove excess lubrication, paint and mortar droppings, and other foreign substances.

m. Clean plumbing fixtures to a sanitary condition, free of stains, including stains resulting from water exposure.

n. Replace disposable air filters and clean permanent air filters. Clean exposed surfaces of diffusers, registers, and grills.

o. Clean ducts, blowers, and coils if units were operated without filters during construction or that display contamination with particulate matter on inspection.

p. Clean light fixtures, lamps, globes, and reflectors to function with full efficiency. q. Leave Project clean and ready for occupancy.

C. Pest Control: Comply with pest control requirements in Section 015000 "Temporary Facilities and Controls." Prepare written report.

D. Construction Waste Disposal: Comply with waste disposal requirements in Section 015000 "Temporary Facilities and Controls."

3.2 REPAIR OF THE WORK

A. Complete repair and restoration operations before requesting inspection for determination of Substantial Completion.

B. Repair or remove and replace defective construction. Repairing includes replacing defective parts, refinishing damaged surfaces, touching up with matching materials, and properly adjusting operating equipment. Where damaged or worn items cannot be repaired or restored, provide replacements. Remove and replace operating components that cannot be repaired. Restore damaged construction and permanent facilities used during construction to specified condition.

1. Remove and replace chipped, scratched, and broken glass, reflective surfaces, and other damaged transparent materials.

2. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred or exposed finishes and surfaces. Replace finishes and surfaces that that already show evidence of repair or restoration.

a. Do not paint over "UL" and other required labels and identification, including mechanical and electrical nameplates. Remove paint applied to required labels and identification.

3. Replace parts subject to operating conditions during construction that may impede operation or reduce longevity.

4. Replace burned-out bulbs, bulbs noticeably dimmed by hours of use, and defective and noisy starters in fluorescent and mercury vapor fixtures to comply with requirements for new fixtures.



JANUARY 2020 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA – 017823 1 OF 8

SECTION 017823 - OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for preparing operation and maintenance manuals, including the following:

1. Operation and maintenance documentation directory manuals. 2. Emergency manuals. 3. Systems and equipment operation manuals. 4. Systems and equipment maintenance manuals. 5. Product maintenance manuals.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. System: An organized collection of parts, equipment, or subsystems united by regular interaction.

B. Subsystem: A portion of a system with characteristics similar to a system.


A. Submit operation and maintenance manuals indicated. Provide content for each manual as specified in individual Specification Sections, and as reviewed and approved at the time of Section submittals. Submit reviewed manual content formatted and organized as required by this Section.

1. Architect will comment on whether content of operation and maintenance submittals is acceptable.

2. Where applicable, clarify and update reviewed manual content to correspond to revisions and field conditions.

B. Format: Submit operation and maintenance manuals in the following format:

1. PDF electronic file. Assemble each manual into a composite electronically indexed file. Submit on digital media acceptable to Architect.

2. One paper copy. Include a complete operation and maintenance directory.



C. Final Manual Submittal: Submit each manual in final form prior to requesting inspection for Substantial Completion and at least 15 days before commencing demonstration and training. Architect will return copy with comments.

1. Correct or revise each manual to comply with Architect's comments. Submit copies of each corrected manual within 15 days of receipt of Architect's comments and prior to commencing demonstration and training.

D. Comply with Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures" for schedule for submitting operation and maintenance documentation.

1.5 FORMAT OF OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS

A. Manuals, Electronic Files: Submit manuals in the form of a multiple file composite electronic PDF file for each manual type required.

1. Electronic Files: Use electronic files prepared by manufacturer where available. Where scanning of paper documents is required, configure scanned file for minimum readable file size.

2. File Names and Bookmarks: Bookmark individual documents based on file names. Name document files to correspond to system, subsystem, and equipment names used in manual directory and table of contents. Group documents for each system and subsystem into individual composite bookmarked files, then create composite manual, so that resulting bookmarks reflect the system, subsystem, and equipment names in a readily navigated file tree. Configure electronic manual to display bookmark panel on opening file.

B. Manuals, Paper Copy: Submit manuals in the form of hard-copy, bound and labeled volumes.

1. Binders: Heavy-duty, three-ring, vinyl-covered, binders, in thickness necessary to accommodate contents, sized to hold 8-1/2-by-11-inch paper; with clear plastic sleeve on spine to hold label describing contents and with pockets inside covers to hold folded oversize sheets.

a. If two or more binders are necessary to accommodate data of a system, organize data in each binder into groupings by subsystem and related components. Cross-reference other binders if necessary to provide essential information for proper operation or maintenance of equipment or system.

b. Identify each binder on front and spine, with printed title "OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL," Project title or name, and subject matter of contents, and indicate Specification Section number on bottom of spine. Indicate volume number for multiple-volume sets.

2. Dividers: Heavy-paper dividers with plastic-covered tabs for each section of the manual. Mark each tab to indicate contents. Include typed list of products and major components of equipment included in the section on each divider, cross-referenced to Specification Section number and title of Project Manual.

3. Protective Plastic Sleeves: Transparent plastic sleeves designed to enclose diagnostic software storage media for computerized electronic equipment. Enclose title pages and directories in clear plastic sleeves.



4. Supplementary Text: Prepared on 8-1/2-by-11-inch white bond paper. 5. Drawings: Attach reinforced, punched binder tabs on drawings and bind with text.

a. If oversize drawings are necessary, fold drawings to same size as text pages and use as foldouts.

b. If drawings are too large to be used as foldouts, fold and place drawings in labeled envelopes and bind envelopes in rear of manual. At appropriate locations in manual, insert typewritten pages indicating drawing titles, descriptions of contents, and drawing locations.

1.6 REQUIREMENTS FOR EMERGENCY, OPERATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS

A. Organization of Manuals: Unless otherwise indicated, organize each manual into a separate section for each system and subsystem, and a separate section for each piece of equipment not part of a system. Each manual shall contain the following materials, in the order listed:

1. Title page. 2. Table of contents. 3. Manual contents.

B. Title Page: Include the following information:

1. Subject matter included in manual. 2. Name and address of Project. 3. Name and address of Owner. 4. Date of submittal. 5. Name and contact information for Contractor. 6. Name and contact information for Construction Manager. 7. Name and contact information for Architect. 8. Name and contact information for Commissioning Authority. 9. Names and contact information for major consultants to the Architect that designed the

systems contained in the manuals. 10. Cross-reference to related systems in other operation and maintenance manuals.

C. Table of Contents: List each product included in manual, identified by product name, indexed to the content of the volume, and cross-referenced to Specification Section number in Project Manual.

1. If operation or maintenance documentation requires more than one volume to accommodate data, include comprehensive table of contents for all volumes in each volume of the set.

D. Manual Contents: Organize into sets of manageable size. Arrange contents alphabetically by system, subsystem, and equipment. If possible, assemble instructions for subsystems, equipment, and components of one system into a single binder.

E. Identification: In the documentation directory and in each operation and maintenance manual, identify each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment with same designation used in the Contract Documents. If no designation exists, assign a designation according to ASHRAE Guideline 4, "Preparation of Operating and Maintenance Documentation for Building Systems."



1.7 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DOCUMENTATION DIRECTORY MANUAL

A. Operation and Maintenance Documentation Directory: Prepare a separate manual that provides an organized reference to emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. List items and their location to facilitate ready access to desired information. Include the following:

1. List of Systems and Subsystems: List systems alphabetically. Include references to operation and maintenance manuals that contain information about each system.

2. List of Equipment: List equipment for each system, organized alphabetically by system. For pieces of equipment not part of system, list alphabetically in separate list.

3. Tables of Contents: Include a table of contents for each emergency, operation, and maintenance manual.

1.8 EMERGENCY MANUALS

A. Emergency Manual: Assemble a complete set of emergency information indicating procedures for use by emergency personnel and by Owner's operating personnel for types of emergencies indicated.

B. Content: Organize manual into a separate section for each of the following:

1. Type of emergency. 2. Emergency instructions. 3. Emergency procedures.

C. Type of Emergency: Where applicable for each type of emergency indicated below, include instructions and procedures for each system, subsystem, piece of equipment, and component:

1. Fire. 2. Flood. 3. Gas leak. 4. Water leak. 5. Power failure. 6. Water outage. 7. System, subsystem, or equipment failure. 8. Chemical release or spill.

D. Emergency Instructions: Describe and explain warnings, trouble indications, error messages, and similar codes and signals. Include responsibilities of Owner's operating personnel for notification of Installer, supplier, and manufacturer to maintain warranties.

E. Emergency Procedures: Include the following, as applicable:

1. Instructions on stopping. 2. Shutdown instructions for each type of emergency. 3. Operating instructions for conditions outside normal operating limits. 4. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems. 5. Special operating instructions and procedures.



1.9 SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT OPERATION MANUALS

A. Systems and Equipment Operation Manual: Assemble a complete set of data indicating operation of each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system. Include information required for daily operation and management, operating standards, and routine and special operating procedures.

1. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to assemble and prepare information for each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system.

2. Prepare a separate manual for each system and subsystem, in the form of an instructional manual for use by Owner's operating personnel.

B. Content: In addition to requirements in this Section, include operation data required in individual Specification Sections and the following information:

1. System, subsystem, and equipment descriptions. Use designations for systems and equipment indicated on Contract Documents.

2. Performance and design criteria if Contractor has delegated design responsibility. 3. Operating standards. 4. Operating procedures. 5. Operating logs. 6. Wiring diagrams. 7. Control diagrams. 8. Piped system diagrams. 9. Precautions against improper use. 10. License requirements including inspection and renewal dates.

C. Descriptions: Include the following:

1. Product name and model number. Use designations for products indicated on Contract Documents.

2. Manufacturer's name. 3. Equipment identification with serial number of each component. 4. Equipment function. 5. Operating characteristics. 6. Limiting conditions. 7. Performance curves. 8. Engineering data and tests. 9. Complete nomenclature and number of replacement parts.

D. Operating Procedures: Include the following, as applicable:

1. Startup procedures. 2. Equipment or system break-in procedures. 3. Routine and normal operating instructions. 4. Regulation and control procedures. 5. Instructions on stopping. 6. Normal shutdown instructions. 7. Seasonal and weekend operating instructions.



8. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems. 9. Special operating instructions and procedures.

E. Systems and Equipment Controls: Describe the sequence of operation, and diagram controls as installed.

F. Piped Systems: Diagram piping as installed, and identify color coding where required for identification.

1.10 SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT MAINTENANCE MANUALS

A. Systems and Equipment Maintenance Manuals: Assemble a complete set of data indicating maintenance of each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system. Include manufacturers' maintenance documentation, preventive maintenance procedures and frequency, repair procedures, wiring and systems diagrams, lists of spare parts, and warranty information.

1. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to assemble and prepare information for each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system.

2. Prepare a separate manual for each system and subsystem, in the form of an instructional manual for use by Owner's operating personnel.

B. Content: For each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system, include source information, manufacturers' maintenance documentation, maintenance procedures, maintenance and service schedules, spare parts list and source information, maintenance service contracts, and warranties and bonds as described below.

C. Source Information: List each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment included in manual, identified by product name and arranged to match manual's table of contents. For each product, list name, address, and telephone number of Installer or supplier and maintenance service agent, and cross-reference Specification Section number and title in Project Manual and drawing or schedule designation or identifier where applicable.

D. Manufacturers' Maintenance Documentation: Include the following information for each component part or piece of equipment:

1. Standard maintenance instructions and bulletins; include only sheets pertinent to product or component installed. Mark each sheet to identify each product or component incorporated into the Work. If data include more than one item in a tabular format, identify each item using appropriate references from the Contract Documents. Identify data applicable to the Work and delete references to information not applicable.

a. Prepare supplementary text if manufacturers' standard printed data are not available and where the information is necessary for proper operation and maintenance of equipment or systems.

2. Drawings, diagrams, and instructions required for maintenance, including disassembly and component removal, replacement, and assembly.

3. Identification and nomenclature of parts and components. 4. List of items recommended to be stocked as spare parts.



E. Maintenance Procedures: Include the following information and items that detail essential maintenance procedures:

1. Test and inspection instructions. 2. Troubleshooting guide. 3. Precautions against improper maintenance. 4. Disassembly; component removal, repair, and replacement; and reassembly instructions. 5. Aligning, adjusting, and checking instructions. 6. Demonstration and training video recording, if available.

F. Maintenance and Service Schedules: Include service and lubrication requirements, list of required lubricants for equipment, and separate schedules for preventive and routine maintenance and service with standard time allotment.

1. Scheduled Maintenance and Service: Tabulate actions for daily, weekly, monthly, quarterly, semiannual, and annual frequencies.

2. Maintenance and Service Record: Include manufacturers' forms for recording maintenance.

G. Spare Parts List and Source Information: Include lists of replacement and repair parts, with parts identified and cross-referenced to manufacturers' maintenance documentation and local sources of maintenance materials and related services.

H. Maintenance Service Contracts: Include copies of maintenance agreements with name and telephone number of service agent.

I. Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds.

1. Include procedures to follow and required notifications for warranty claims.

J. Drawings: Prepare drawings supplementing manufacturers' printed data to illustrate the relationship of component parts of equipment and systems and to illustrate control sequence and flow diagrams. Coordinate these drawings with information contained in record Drawings to ensure correct illustration of completed installation.

1. Do not use original project record documents as part of maintenance manuals.

1.11 PRODUCT MAINTENANCE MANUALS

A. Product Maintenance Manual: Assemble a complete set of maintenance data indicating care and maintenance of each product, material, and finish incorporated into the Work.

B. Content: Organize manual into a separate section for each product, material, and finish. Include source information, product information, maintenance procedures, repair materials and sources, and warranties and bonds, as described below.



C. Source Information: List each product included in manual, identified by product name and arranged to match manual's table of contents. For each product, list name, address, and telephone number of Installer or supplier and maintenance service agent, and cross-reference Specification Section number and title in Project Manual and drawing or schedule designation or identifier where applicable.

D. Product Information: Include the following, as applicable:

1. Product name and model number. 2. Manufacturer's name. 3. Color, pattern, and texture. 4. Material and chemical composition. 5. Reordering information for specially manufactured products.

E. Maintenance Procedures: Include manufacturer's written recommendations and the following:

1. Inspection procedures. 2. Types of cleaning agents to be used and methods of cleaning. 3. List of cleaning agents and methods of cleaning detrimental to product. 4. Schedule for routine cleaning and maintenance. 5. Repair instructions.

F. Repair Materials and Sources: Include lists of materials and local sources of materials and related services.

G. Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds.

1. Include procedures to follow and required notifications for warranty claims.





JANUARY 2020 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS – 017839 1 OF 4

SECTION 017839 - PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for project record documents, including the following:

1. Record Drawings. 2. Record Specifications. 3. Record Product Data. 4. Miscellaneous record submittals.


1. Section 017300 "Execution" for final property survey. 2. Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures" for general closeout procedures. 3. Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data" for operation and maintenance

manual requirements.


A. Record Drawings: Comply with the following:

1. Number of Copies: Submit copies of record Drawings as follows:

a. Final Submittal:

1) Submit PDF electronic files of scanned record prints and one sets of prints. 2) Print each drawing whether or not changes and additional information were

recorded.

B. Record Specifications: Submit one annotated PDF electronic files of Project's Specifications, including addenda and contract modifications.

C. Record Product Data: Submit one annotated PDF electronic files and directories of each submittal.

1. Where record Product Data are required as part of operation and maintenance manuals, submit duplicate marked-up Product Data as a component of manual.



D. Miscellaneous Record Submittals: See other Specification Sections for miscellaneous record-keeping requirements and submittals in connection with various construction activities. Submit one paper copies and one annotated PDF electronic files and directories of each submittal.

1.4 RECORD DRAWINGS

A. Record Prints: Maintain one set of marked-up paper copies of the Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings, incorporating new and revised drawings as modifications are issued.

1. Preparation: Mark record prints to show the actual installation where installation varies from that shown originally. Require individual or entity who obtained record data, whether individual or entity is Installer, subcontractor, or similar entity, to provide information for preparation of corresponding marked-up record prints.

a. Give particular attention to information on concealed elements that would be difficult to identify or measure and record later.

b. Accurately record information in an acceptable drawing technique. c. Record data as soon as possible after obtaining it. d. Record and check the markup before enclosing concealed installations. e. Cross-reference record prints to corresponding photographic documentation.

2. Content: Types of items requiring marking include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Dimensional changes to Drawings. b. Revisions to details shown on Drawings. c. Depths of foundations. d. Locations and depths of underground utilities. e. Revisions to routing of piping and conduits. f. Revisions to electrical circuitry. g. Actual equipment locations. h. Duct size and routing. i. Locations of concealed internal utilities. j. Changes made by Change Order or Change Directive. k. Changes made following Architect's written orders. l. Details not on the original Contract Drawings. m. Field records for variable and concealed conditions. n. Record information on the Work that is shown only schematically.

3. Mark the Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings completely and accurately. Use personnel proficient at recording graphic information in production of marked-up record prints.

4. Mark record sets with erasable, red-colored pencil. Use other colors to distinguish between changes for different categories of the Work at same location.

5. Mark important additional information that was either shown schematically or omitted from original Drawings.

6. Note Construction Change Directive numbers, alternate numbers, Change Order numbers, and similar identification, where applicable.



B. Format: Identify and date each record Drawing; include the designation "PROJECT RECORD DRAWING" in a prominent location.

1. Record Prints: Organize record prints into manageable sets. Bind each set with durable paper cover sheets. Include identification on cover sheets.

2. Format: Annotated PDF electronic file with comment function enabled. 3. Record Digital Data Files: Organize digital data information into separate electronic files

that correspond to each sheet of the Contract Drawings. Name each file with the sheet identification. Include identification in each digital data file.

4. Identification: As follows:

a. Project name. b. Date. c. Designation "PROJECT RECORD DRAWINGS." d. Name of Architect. e. Name of Contractor.

1.5 RECORD SPECIFICATIONS

A. Preparation: Mark Specifications to indicate the actual product installation where installation varies from that indicated in Specifications, addenda, and contract modifications.

1. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that cannot be readily identified and recorded later.

2. Mark copy with the proprietary name and model number of products, materials, and equipment furnished, including substitutions and product options selected.

3. Record the name of manufacturer, supplier, Installer, and other information necessary to provide a record of selections made.

4. For each principal product, indicate whether record Product Data has been submitted in operation and maintenance manuals instead of submitted as record Product Data.

5. Note related Change Orders and record Drawings where applicable.

B. Format: Submit record Specifications as scanned PDF electronic file(s) of marked-up paper copy of Specifications.

1.6 RECORD PRODUCT DATA

A. Recording: Maintain one copy of each submittal during the construction period for project record document purposes. Post changes and revisions to project record documents as they occur; do not wait until end of Project.

B. Preparation: Mark Product Data to indicate the actual product installation where installation varies substantially from that indicated in Product Data submittal.

1. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that cannot be readily identified and recorded later.



2. Include significant changes in the product delivered to Project site and changes in manufacturer's written instructions for installation.

3. Note related Change Orders, record Specifications, and record Drawings where applicable.

C. Format: Submit record Product Data as scanned PDF electronic file(s) of marked-up paper copy of Product Data.

1. Include record Product Data directory organized by Specification Section number and title, electronically linked to each item of record Product Data.

1.7 MISCELLANEOUS RECORD SUBMITTALS

A. Assemble miscellaneous records required by other Specification Sections for miscellaneous record keeping and submittal in connection with actual performance of the Work. Bind or file miscellaneous records and identify each, ready for continued use and reference.

B. Format: Submit miscellaneous record submittals as scanned PDF electronic file(s) of marked-up miscellaneous record submittals.

1. Include miscellaneous record submittals directory organized by Specification Section number and title, electronically linked to each item of miscellaneous record submittals.

1.8 MAINTENANCE OF RECORD DOCUMENTS

A. Recording: Maintain one copy of each submittal during the construction period for project record document purposes. Post changes and revisions to project record documents as they occur; do not wait until end of Project.

B. Maintenance of Record Documents: Store record documents in the field office apart from the Contract Documents used for construction. Do not use project record documents for construction purposes. Maintain record documents in good order and in a clean, dry, legible condition, protected from deterioration and loss. Provide access to project record documents for Architect's reference during normal working hours.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

PART 3 - EXECUTION



JANUARY 2020 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING – 017900 1 OF 6

SECTION 017900 - DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for instructing Owner's personnel, including the following:

1. Instruction in operation and maintenance of systems, subsystems, and equipment. 2. Demonstration and training video recordings.


A. Instruction Program: Submit outline of instructional program for demonstration and training, including a list of training modules and a schedule of proposed dates, times, length of instruction time, and instructors' names for each training module. Include learning objective and outline for each training module.

1. Indicate proposed training modules using manufacturer-produced demonstration and training video recordings for systems, equipment, and products in lieu of video recording of live instructional module.

B. Qualification Data: For instructor.

C. Attendance Record: For each training module, submit list of participants and length of instruction time.

D. Evaluations: For each participant and for each training module, submit results and documentation of performance-based test.


A. Demonstration and Training Video Recordings: Submit two copies within seven days of end of each training module.

1. Identification: On each copy, provide an applied label with the following information:

a. Name of Project. b. Name and address of videographer.



c. Name of Architect. d. Name of Construction Manager. e. Name of Contractor. f. Date of video recording.

2. Transcript: Prepared and bound in format matching operation and maintenance manuals. Mark appropriate identification on front and spine of each binder. Include a cover sheet with same label information as the corresponding video recording. Include name of Project and date of video recording on each page.

3. Transcript: Prepared in PDF electronic format. Include a cover sheet with same label information as the corresponding video recording and a table of contents with links to corresponding training components. Include name of Project and date of video recording on each page.

4. At completion of training, submit complete training manual(s) for Owner's use prepared in same paper and PDF file format required for operation and maintenance manuals specified in Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data."


A. Instructor Qualifications: A factory-authorized service representative, complying with requirements in Section 014000 "Quality Requirements," experienced in operation and maintenance procedures and training.

B. Videographer Qualifications: A professional videographer who is experienced photographing demonstration and training events similar to those required.

C. Preinstruction Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Section 013100 "Project Management and Coordination." Review methods and procedures related to demonstration and training including, but not limited to, the following:

1. Inspect and discuss locations and other facilities required for instruction. 2. Review and finalize instruction schedule and verify availability of educational materials,

instructors' personnel, audiovisual equipment, and facilities needed to avoid delays. 3. Review required content of instruction. 4. For instruction that must occur outside, review weather and forecasted weather conditions

and procedures to follow if conditions are unfavorable.

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate instruction schedule with Owner's operations. Adjust schedule as required to minimize disrupting Owner's operations and to ensure availability of Owner's personnel.

B. Coordinate instructors, including providing notification of dates, times, length of instruction time, and course content.

C. Coordinate content of training modules with content of approved emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. Do not submit instruction program until operation and maintenance data have been reviewed and approved by Architect.



1.7 INSTRUCTION PROGRAM

A. Program Structure: Develop an instruction program that includes individual training modules for each system and for equipment not part of a system, as required by individual Specification Sections.

B. Training Modules: Develop a learning objective and teaching outline for each module. Include a description of specific skills and knowledge that participant is expected to master. For each module, include instruction for the following as applicable to the system, equipment, or component:

1. Basis of System Design, Operational Requirements, and Criteria: Include the following:

a. System, subsystem, and equipment descriptions. b. Performance and design criteria if Contractor is delegated design responsibility. c. Operating standards. d. Regulatory requirements. e. Equipment function. f. Operating characteristics. g. Limiting conditions. h. Performance curves.

2. Documentation: Review the following items in detail:

a. Emergency manuals. b. Systems and equipment operation manuals. c. Systems and equipment maintenance manuals. d. Product maintenance manuals. e. Project Record Documents. f. Identification systems. g. Warranties and bonds. h. Maintenance service agreements and similar continuing commitments.

3. Emergencies: Include the following, as applicable:

a. Instructions on meaning of warnings, trouble indications, and error messages. b. Instructions on stopping. c. Shutdown instructions for each type of emergency. d. Operating instructions for conditions outside of normal operating limits. e. Sequences for electric or electronic systems. f. Special operating instructions and procedures.

4. Operations: Include the following, as applicable:

a. Startup procedures. b. Equipment or system break-in procedures. c. Routine and normal operating instructions. d. Regulation and control procedures. e. Control sequences. f. Safety procedures.



g. Instructions on stopping. h. Normal shutdown instructions. i. Operating procedures for emergencies. j. Operating procedures for system, subsystem, or equipment failure. k. Seasonal and weekend operating instructions. l. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems. m. Special operating instructions and procedures.

5. Adjustments: Include the following:

a. Alignments. b. Checking adjustments. c. Noise and vibration adjustments. d. Economy and efficiency adjustments.

6. Troubleshooting: Include the following:

a. Diagnostic instructions. b. Test and inspection procedures.

7. Maintenance: Include the following:

a. Inspection procedures. b. Types of cleaning agents to be used and methods of cleaning. c. List of cleaning agents and methods of cleaning detrimental to product. d. Procedures for routine cleaning. e. Procedures for preventive maintenance. f. Procedures for routine maintenance. g. Instruction on use of special tools.

8. Repairs: Include the following:

a. Diagnosis instructions. b. Repair instructions. c. Disassembly; component removal, repair, and replacement; and reassembly

instructions. d. Instructions for identifying parts and components. e. Review of spare parts needed for operation and maintenance.

1.8 PREPARATION

A. Assemble educational materials necessary for instruction, including documentation and training module. Assemble training modules into a training manual organized in coordination with requirements in Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data."

B. Set up instructional equipment at instruction location.



1.9 INSTRUCTION

A. Facilitator: Engage a qualified facilitator to prepare instruction program and training modules, to coordinate instructors, and to coordinate between Contractor and Owner for number of participants, instruction times, and location.

B. Engage qualified instructors to instruct Owner's personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain systems, subsystems, and equipment not part of a system.

1. Architect will furnish an instructor to describe basis of system design, operational requirements, criteria, and regulatory requirements.

2. Owner will furnish an instructor to describe Owner's operational philosophy. 3. Owner will furnish Contractor with names and positions of participants.

C. Scheduling: Provide instruction at mutually agreed-on times. For equipment that requires seasonal operation, provide similar instruction at start of each season.

1. Schedule training with Owner with at least seven days' advance notice.

D. Training Location and Reference Material: Conduct training on-site in the completed and fully operational facility using the actual equipment in-place. Conduct training using final operation and maintenance data submittals.

E. Evaluation: At conclusion of each training module, assess and document each participant's mastery of module by use of a demonstration performance-based test.

F. Cleanup: Collect used and leftover educational materials and remove from Project site. Remove instructional equipment. Restore systems and equipment to condition existing before initial training use.

1.10 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING VIDEO RECORDINGS

A. General: Engage a qualified commercial videographer to record demonstration and training video recordings. Record each training module separately. Include classroom instructions and demonstrations, board diagrams, and other visual aids, but not student practice.

1. At beginning of each training module, record each chart containing learning objective and lesson outline.

B. Digital Video Recordings: Provide high-resolution, digital video in MPEG format, produced by a digital camera with minimum sensor resolution of 12 megapixels and capable of recording in full HD mode with vibration reduction technology.

1. Submit video recordings on thumb drive. 2. File Hierarchy: Organize folder structure and file locations according to Project Manual

table of contents. Provide complete screen-based menu. 3. File Names: Utilize file names based on name of equipment generally described in video

segment, as identified in Project specifications.



4. Contractor and Installer Contact File: Using appropriate software, create a file for inclusion on the equipment demonstration and training recording that describes the following for each Contractor involved on the Project, arranged according to Project Manual table of contents:

a. Name of Contractor/Installer. b. Business address. c. Business phone number. d. Point of contact. e. Email address.

C. Recording: Mount camera on tripod before starting recording, unless otherwise necessary to adequately cover area of demonstration and training. Display continuous running time.

1. Film training session(s) in segments not to exceed 15 minutes.

a. Produce segments to present a single significant piece of equipment per segment. b. Organize segments with multiple pieces of equipment to follow order of Project

Manual table of contents. c. Where a training session on a particular piece of equipment exceeds 15 minutes,

stop filming and pause training session. Begin training session again upon commencement of new filming segment.

D. Light Levels: Verify light levels are adequate to properly light equipment. Verify equipment markings are clearly visible prior to recording.

1. Furnish additional portable lighting as required.

E. Narration: Describe scenes on video recording by audio narration by microphone while video recording is recorded. Include description of items being viewed.

F. Transcript: Provide a transcript of the narration. Display images and running time captured from videotape opposite the corresponding narration segment.

G. Preproduced Video Recordings: Provide video recordings used as a component of training modules in same format as recordings of live training.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

PART 3 - EXECUTION



JANUARY 2020 CONCRETE FORMING AND ACCESSORIES – 03 10 00 1 OF 5

SECTION 03 10 00: CONCRETE FORMING AND ACCESSORIES PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED SECTIONS A. Division 01 Sections B. Section 03 20 00 - Concrete Reinforcing. C. Section 03 30 00 - Cast-in-Place Concrete. 1.2 REFERENCES ACI 117 – Standard Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials. ACI 301 – Standard Specifications for Structural Concrete. ACI 318 – Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete. ACI 347 – Guide to Formwork for Concrete. ASTM D1751 – Standard Specification for Preformed Expansion Joint Filler for Concrete Paving

and Structural Construction (Nonextruding and Resilient Bituminous Types). ASTM E96 – Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials. ASTM E154 – Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Retarders Used in Contact with Earth

Under Concrete Slabs, on Walls, or as Ground Cover. ASTM E1643 – Standard Practice for Selection, Design, Installation, and Inspection of Water

Vapor Retarders Used in Contact with Earth or Granular Fill Under Concrete Slabs. ASTM E1745 – Standard Specification for Water Vapor Retarders Used in Contact with Soil or

Granular Fill Under Concrete Slabs. ASTM E1993 – Standard Specification for Bituminous Water Vapor Retarders Used in Contact

with Soil or Granular Fill Under Concrete Slabs. ASTM F1249 – Standard Test Method for Water Vapor Transmission Rate Through Plastic Film

and Sheeting Using a Modulated Infrared Sensor. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Architectural Concrete: All concrete members exposed to public view are classified as

Architectural Concrete and shall comply with the Architectural Concrete provisions in this specification and ACI 301.

1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit locations of construction joints in framed construction for approval.



B. Submit manufacturer’s data for:

1. Vapor Retarder 2. Expansion/Isolation Joint Filler. 3. Waterstops.

1.5 DESIGN OF FORMWORK A. Design of formwork, shoring, and reshoring and its removal is the Contractor's responsibility. B. Design of formwork, shoring, and reshoring shall conform to ACI 117, ACI 301, ACI 318, and

ACI 347. C. Design formwork in a manner such that existing or new construction is not overloaded. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 FORM MATERIALS A. Form Material: Wood, plywood, metal, fiberglass or a combination of these, with sufficient

strength to prevent distortion. B. Form Definitions

1. Standard Forms: No form-facing material required. Standard forms are acceptable everywhere except for Architectural Concrete elements.

2. Architectural Concrete Forms: Form-facing material shall be plywood, tempered concrete-form-grade hardboard, metal (unrusted) or plastic that will produce a smooth, uniform texture on the concrete. Do not use form-facing material with raised grain, torn edges, worn edges, patches, dents, or other defects that will impair the texture of the exposed concrete surfaces. Intent is that when the forms are removed, the exposed concrete surfaces will be free from all blemishes. Architectural concrete forms are required for all concrete elements indicated as Architectural Concrete.

2.2 FORMWORK ACCESSORIES A. Formwork Accessories: Commercially manufactured products, including ties and hangers. Do not

use nonfabricated wire form ties. 2.3 FORM RELEASE AGENT A. Form release agent shall not bond with, stain, nor adversely affect concrete surfaces. 2.4 VAPOR RETARDER A. Vapor Retarder

1. Polyethylene sheet, not less than 10 mils thick, complying with ASTM E1745, Class A, B, and C.

2. Maximum Permeance: ASTM E96: 0.04 perms (US).



3. Seam Tape: High Density Polyethylene Tape with pressure sensitive adhesive; minimum width of 4 inches.

4. Pipe Boots: Construct pipe boots from vapor barrier material and seam tape in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

2.5 EXPANSION / ISOLATION JOINT FILLER A. Expansion / Isolation Joint Filler: ASTM D1751, asphalt impregnated premolded fiberboard, 1/4-

inch thick by full thickness of slab or joint, unless indicated otherwise in the Drawings. 2.6 CONSTRUCTION JOINTS A. Slabs On Grade: Key-type steel forms by Vulcan “Screed Joint”, Burke “Keyed Kold Joint” or

approved equal.

2.7 WATERSTOPS A. Waterstops at construction joints and contraction joints indicated in the Drawings shall be sized to

suit the joints. B. Waterstops: Preformed, non-expansive, plastic adhesive waterstops such as Synko-Flex,

manufactured by Henry Company, or approved equal. 2.8 DOVETAIL ANCHORS A. Dovetail Anchors: 24 gage galvanized steel dovetail anchoring slots with filler strips and 16 gage

galvanized dovetail anchors, unless otherwise noted in Drawings. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. Erect formwork in accordance with ACI 301 and ACI 347. B. Finished work shall comply with tolerances of ACI 117. C. Provide 3/4-inch chamfer at all formed corners. 3.2 FOUNDATION ELEMENTS A. Form foundation elements if soil or other conditions are such that earth trench forms are

unsuitable. B. Sides of perimeter grade beams, foundation walls, and turned-down slabs shall be formed. C. Maintain minimum coverage of reinforcing steel. 3.3 VAPOR RETARDER A. Where indicated on Drawings, place vapor retarder over granular subbase and behind expansion /

isolation joints at walls. Place electrical conduits and ducts in granular subbase.



B. Install vapor retarder in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions and ASTM E1643.

1. Lap vapor retarder six inches minimum at splices and seal with seam tape. 2. Lap vapor retarder over footings and seal to walls. 3. Seal all pipe penetrations with pipe boot. 4. No penetration of vapor retarder is permitted except for reinforcing steel and permanent

utilities. 5. Do not puncture vapor retarder; repair damaged areas by cutting patches of vapor retarder,

overlapping damaged area 6 inches and taping all four sides. C. Install waterproof and vaporproof membrane in accordance with manufacturer’s

recommendations. 3.4 FORM PREPARATION A. Seal form joints to prevent leakage. B. Thoroughly clean forms and adjacent surfaces to receive concrete. Remove chips, wood, sawdust,

dirt or other debris just before concrete is placed. C. Before reinforcement is placed, coat contact surfaces of form with form release agent in

accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations. Do not allow excess form release agent to accumulate in forms or come in contact with concrete surfaces against which fresh concrete will be placed.

3.5 INSERTS AND EMBEDMENT ITEMS A. Install and secure in position required inserts, embeds, hangers, sleeves, anchors, and nailers. B. Locate anchor bolts/rods in position in accordance with approved setting drawings and secure to

prevent displacement during concrete placement. 3.6 PROVISIONS FOR OTHER TRADES A. Install openings in concrete formwork to accommodate work of other trades. Determine size and

location of openings and recesses from trades requiring such items. Obtain approval from Structural Engineer for openings not shown in Drawings.

B. Accurately place and securely support items built into forms. 3.7 CONSTRUCTION JOINTS A. Slabs On Grade: Install key-type steel forms in accordance with manufacturer’s

recommendations. B. Framed Construction:

1. Install construction joints in accordance with ACI 318. 2. Obtain Architect/Structural Engineer's prior approval for use and location of joints. 3. Provide 1½-inch deep key-type construction joints at end of each placement for framed slabs,

beams, walls, and footings. Bevel forms for easy removal.



4. Remove loose particles and latency from surface prior to placing the next lift. Chip the surface to a depth sufficient to expose sound concrete.

3.8 WATERSTOPS A. Prepare surface and install strip applied waterstops in accordance with manufacturer’s

recommendations. 3.9 DOVETAILS A. Install continuous vertical dovetail anchoring slots with filler strips at intersections of concrete

and masonry walls unless indicated otherwise on Drawings. 3.10 FORMWORK REMOVAL A. Remove formwork carefully in such manner and at such time as to ensure complete safety of

structure. Do not remove formwork, shoring, or reshoring until members have acquired sufficient strength to support their weight and the load thereon safely.

B. For conventionally reinforced framed slabs, formwork shall remain in place for a minimum of 5

days after concrete placement. C. For Architectural Concrete elements, remove forms as early as permissible and in such a manner

as to not damage exposed surfaces. 3.11 FINISHES OF FORMED SURFACES A. Standard Form Finish: Patch tie holes and defects. Chip or rub off fins exceeding ¼ inch in

height. Leave surface with the texture imparted by the forms. B. Architectural Concrete Finish: Patch tie holes and defects. Remove all fins completely. Produce

finish on newly hardened concrete no later than the day following formwork removal. Wet the surface and rub it with carborundum or other abrasive until uniform color and texture are produced. Use no cement grout other than cement paste drawn from the concrete itself by the rubbing process.

END OF SECTION


JANUARY 2020 CONCRETE REINFORCING – 03 20 00 1 OF 3

SECTION 03 20 00: CONCRETE REINFORCING PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED SECTIONS A. Division 1 Sections B. Section 03 10 00 – Concrete Forming and Accessories. D. Section 03 30 00 – Cast-in-Place Concrete. 1.2 REFERENCES ACI 117 – Standard Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials. ACI 301 – Standard Specifications for Structural Concrete. ACI 315 – Details and Detailing of Concrete Reinforcement. ACI 318 – Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete. ASTM A185 – Standard Specification for Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement, Plain, for Concrete

Reinforcement. ASTM A615 – Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Billet-Steel Bars for Concrete

Reinforcement. ASTM A706 – Standard Specification for Low-Alloy Steel Deformed and Plain Bars for

Concrete Reinforcement. AWS D1.4 – Structural Weld Code - Reinforcing Steel. AWS D12.1 – Recommended Practices for Welding Reinforcing Steel Metal Inserts, and

Connections in Reinforced Concrete Construction. CRSI – Manual of Standard Practice. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings:

1. Indicate size, spacing, location and quantities of reinforcing steel and wire fabric, bending and cutting schedules, splice lengths, stirrup spacing, supporting and spacing devices. Detail reinforcing steel in accordance with ACI 315 and CRSI Standards.

2. Written description of reinforcement without adequate sections, elevations, and details is not acceptable.

3. Reproduction of Drawings for shop drawings is not permitted. Electronic drawing files will not be provided to the Contractor.



B. Submit manufacturer's data for tension and compression splicers. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Coordinate and schedule in a timely manner with the Structural Testing/Inspection Agency the

following quality related items:

1. Verify reinforcing steel for quantity, size, location, and support. 2. Verify proper reinforcing steel concrete coverage.

1.5 STORAGE AND PROTECTING A. Store reinforcing steel above ground so that it remains clean. Maintain steel surfaces free from

materials and coatings that might impair bond. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS

A. Deformed Reinforcing Steel: ASTM A615, (Grade 60 minimum). B. Welded Steel Wire Fabric: ASTM A185. 2.2 ACCESSORY MATERIALS A. Annealed Steel Tie Wire: 16½ gage minimum. B. Bar Supports: Plastic-tipped steel Class I bar supports conforming to CRSI Specifications.

Concrete brick may be used to support reinforcement to obtain proper clearance from earth. 2.3 SPLICERS A. Tension Splicers: Capable of developing 125% of the reinforcing steel ASTM specified

minimum yield strength. B. Compression Splicers: Mechanical type such that the compression stress is transmitted by end

bearing held in concentric contact. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 FABRICATION A. Fabricate reinforcing steel in accordance with ACI 318 and CRSI standards. B. Bend bars cold. Do not heat or flame cut bars. No field bending of bars partially embedded in

concrete is permitted, unless specifically approved Structural Engineer and checked by Testing and Inspection Agency for cracks.

C. Weld only as indicated. Perform welding in accordance with AWS D1.4 and AWS D12.1.



D. Tag reinforcing steel for easy identification. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Before placing concrete, clean reinforcement of foreign particles and coatings. B. Place, support, and secure reinforcement against displacement in accordance with ACI 318 and

CRSI standards. Do not deviate from alignment or measurement. C. Place concrete beam reinforcement support parallel to main reinforcement. D. Locate welded wire reinforcement in the top third of slabs. Overlap mesh one lap plus two inches

at side and end joints. E. Furnish and install dowels or mechanical splices at intersections of walls, columns and piers to

permit continuous reinforcement or development lengths at such intersections. F. Maintain cover and tolerances in accordance with ACI and CRSI Specifications, unless indicated

otherwise on Drawings. 3.3 SPLICES A. Do not splice reinforcement except as indicated on Drawings. B. Tension couplers may be used and installed in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.

END OF SECTION


JANUARY 2020 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE – 03 30 00 1 OF 7

SECTION 03 30 00: CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED SECTIONS A. Division 1 Sections B. Section 03 10 00 – Concrete Forming and Accessories. C. Section 03 20 00 – Concrete Reinforcing. 1.2 REFERENCES ACI 117 – Standard Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials. ACI 214 – Recommended Practice for Evaluation of Strength Test Results of Concrete. ACI 301 – Specifications for Structural Concrete. ACI 302.1 – Guide for Concrete Floor and Slab Construction. ACI 304 – Recommended Practice for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting and Placing Concrete. ACI 305 – Hot Weather Concreting. ACI 306 – Cold Weather Concreting. ACI 308 – Guide to Concrete Curing. ACI 309 – Recommended Practice for Consolidation of Concrete. ACI 318 – Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete. ASTM C31 – Standard Practice for Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the Field. ASTM C33 – Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates. ASTM C39 – Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete

Specimens. ASTM C94 – Standard Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete. ASTM C138 – Standard Test Method for Density (Unit Weight), Yield, and Air Content

(Gravimetric) of Concrete. ASTM C143 – Standard Test Method for Slump of Hydraulic-Cement Concrete. ASTM C150 – Standard Specification for Portland Cement.



ASTM C172 – Standard Practice for Sampling Freshly Mixed Concrete. ASTM C173 – Standard Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the

Volumetric Method. ASTM C230 – Standard Specification for Flow Table for Use in Tests of Hydraulic Cement. ASTM C260 – Standard Specification for Air-Entraining Admixtures for Concrete. ASTM C309 – Standard Specification for Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds for Curing

Concrete. ASTM C494 – Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete. ASTM C618 – Standard Specification for Coal Fly Ash and Raw or Calcined Natural Pozzolan

for Use in Concrete. ASTM E1155 – Standard Test Method for Determining FF Floor Flatness and FL Floor Levelness

Numbers. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submit three copies of the concrete mix designs. Include the following:

1. Documentation of mix design proportions complying with ACI 318, Chapter 5. 2. Type and quantities of materials including admixtures 3. Slump 4. Air content 5. Water/cement ratio 6. Fresh unit weight 7. Aggregates sieve analysis 8. Design compressive strength 9. Location of placement in structure 10. Method of placement 11. Method of curing 12. Seven-day and 28-day compressive strengths

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Structural Testing/Inspection Agency shall perform the following quality related items:

1. Examine concrete in truck to verify that concrete appears properly mixed. 2. Perform a slump test as deemed necessary for each concrete load. Record if water or

admixtures are added to the concrete at the job site. Perform additional slump tests after job site adjustments.

3. Mold four specimens per set for compressive strength testing; one set for each 75 cubic yards of each mix design placed in any one day. For each set molded, record:

a. Slump b. Air content c. Unit weight d. Temperature, ambient and concrete



e. Location of placement f. Any pertinent information, such as addition of water, addition of admixtures, etc.

Perform one 7-day and two 28-day compressive strength tests. (Use one as a spare to be

broken as directed by the Structural Engineer if compressive strengths do not appear adequate.)

4. Report in writing, as directed by the Architect, on the same day that tests are performed.

Reports of compressive strength tests shall contain the project identification name and number, date of concrete placement, name of concrete testing agency, concrete design compressive strength, location of concrete placement in structure, concrete mix proportions and materials, compressive breaking strength and type of break.

B. The ready-mixed concrete plant shall be certified for conformance with the requirements of the

National Ready Mix Concrete Association. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 CONCRETE MIX DESIGN A. Establish concrete mix design proportions in accordance with ACI 318, Chapter 5. B. Concrete Strength: See Notes in Drawings.

C. Slump

1. Design concrete with a slump between four and ten inches. 2. If a slump greater than five inches is desired, use a mid-range or high-range water reducer.

D. Water/Cementitious Materials Ratio (w/cm): See Notes in Drawings. E. Entrained Air Content: See Notes in Drawings. F. Fresh Unit Weight

1. Normal weight concrete: Fresh unit weight of 137 to 148 pcf. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Materials designated by specific manufacturer's trade names are approved, subject to compliance

with the quality and performance indicated by the manufacturer. Instructions and recommendations, published by the manufacturer of such materials are included in and are a part of these Specifications.

2.3 CEMENT A. Cement: Type I Portland cement complying with ASTM C150, unless noted otherwise. Use one

brand only. 2.4 AGGREGATE



A. Fine Aggregate: Fine aggregate complying with ASTM C33. B. Coarse Aggregate: Gravel or crushed stone complying with ASTM C33 for normal weight

concrete. Size coarse aggregate in accordance with ACI 318. 2.5 WATER A. Water: Potable water free of deleterious substances complying with ACI 318. 2.6 AIR ENTRAINING AGENT A. Air Entraining Agent: Air entraining agent complying with ASTM C260. 2.7 WATER REDUCER A. Water Reducer: Water reducing agent complying with ASTM C494. 2.8 MID-RANGE/HIGH-RANGE WATER REDUCER A. Mid-range/High-range Water Reducer: Mid-range and high-range water reducers (plasticizers)

complying with ASTM C494. 2.9 CHLORIDE A. Chlorides: Chlorides of any form shall not be used in concrete. 2.10 CURING COMPOUND A. Curing Compound: Vertical Surfaces Only – A water-based, “odorless,” acrylic curing compound

with a minimum solid content of 20 percent may be used at the Contractor's option complying with ASTM 309. (All slabs are to be moist cured.)

2.11 FLY ASH A. Fly Ash: Class F fly ash with a loss on ignition of less than five percent or Class C fly ash with a

loss on ignition of less than one percent complying with ASTM C618. 2.12 ACCELERATORS A. Accelerators: Non-chloride accelerators complying with ASTM C494. 2.13 RETARDERS A. Retarders: Retarders complying with ASTM C494. 2.14 CONTRACTION JOINT SEALANT A. Contraction Joint Sealant: Semi-rigid, epoxy joint filler. PART 3 EXECUTION



3.1 GENERAL

A. Prepare place of deposit, mix, convey, and place in accordance with ACI 301 and ACI 304. B. Wet forms before placing concrete.

C. Deposit concrete as near as practical to final position. D. Do no flowing of concrete with vibrators. E. Place slabs in accordance with ACI 302. F. Place and finish concrete members to comply with tolerances in ACI 117. G. Do not use aluminum equipment in placing and finishing concrete. 3.2 SLABS-ON-GRADE

A. Place concrete for slabs-on-grade on properly prepared granular subbase with vapor barrier. B. Place thickened slabs for partitions integral with floor slabs. 3.3 MID-RANGE / HIGH-RANGE WATER REDUCERS A. Mid-range or high-range water reducers are to be added at dosage recommended by the

manufacturer. The slump of the concrete shall be one to four inches at the time the water reducers are added. Do not permit fresh concrete containing superplasticizers to come in contact with fresh concrete not containing superplasticizers.

3.4 ADDITION OF WATER AT JOB SITE A. Water may be added at the jobsite if neither the maximum permissible water/cement ratio nor the

maximum slump is exceeded. All concrete delivery trucks will have actual batch weight tickets available that clearly indicate the quantity of water that may be added at the jobsite that will not exceed the maximum water/cement ratio.

3.5 TIME LIMIT A. Deposit concrete within one and one-half hours after batching. 3.6 VIBRATION A. Consolidate concrete in accordance with ACI 301 and ACI 309. 3.7 CURING A. Begin curing procedures immediately following the commencement of the finishing operation. B. Cure concrete in accordance with ACI 308. Keep the concrete surface moist. Place burlap,

burlene, or similar vapor barrier on the surface. Maintain moist concrete surface for a minimum three days.



C. If an acrylic curing compound is used for vertical surfaces, apply in accordance with

manufacturer’s recommendations, to the surfaces of concrete not protected (for five days) by formwork.

3.8 WEATHER PROVISIONS A. Perform cold weather concreting in accordance with ACI 306. B. Perform hot weather concreting in accordance with ACI 305. C. Protect concrete from drying and excessive temperature for the first seven days. D. Protect fresh concrete from wind. 3.9 CONTRACTION JOINTS A. Obtain Architect's approval for location of contraction joints. Do not use contraction joints in

framed floors or composite slabs, unless noted in Drawings. B. Provide contraction joints in slabs-on-grade to form a regular grid with a maximum spacing as

noted in the Drawings. The long dimension of the grid shall not exceed 1.5 times the short dimension of the grid. Contraction joints may be saw cut if cut within 24 hours after placement of concrete. Saw cuts shall be a depth equal to one-fourth the slab thickness by one-eighth inch wide. Alternately, contraction joints may be provided by preformed plastic strip inserts.

C. Provide contraction joints in concrete walls at approximately 30'-0" centers, or as noted in the

Drawings; coordinate location with Architect. Contraction joints shall be formed as a V-groove on both faces of the wall, 3/4-inch minimum depth.

3.10 CUTTING CONCRETE A. Obtain Architect's written approval prior to cutting concrete for installation of other work. 3.11 PATCHWORK AND REPAIRS A. Notify Architect of any defective areas in concrete to be patched or repaired. Repair and patch

defective areas with non-shrink grout. Cut out defective areas over 2 inches in diameter to solid concrete but not less than a depth of one inch. Make edges of cuts perpendicular to the concrete surface.

3.12 CONCRETE FINISHES

A. Finish Concrete in accordance with ACI 301.

B. All slabs shall be troweled finish, unless noted otherwise.

C. Finish slabs to the following flatness and levelness tolerances:

1. FF25/FL20 minimum overall for composite of all measured values and FF17/FL12 minimum for any individual floor section.



2. Slabs to receive wood flooring: FF45/FL30 minimum overall for composite of all measured values and FF30/FL20 minimum for any individual floor section.

3. Architect will identify which sections of slabs are to be tested for flatness and levelness. a. FL values are applicable only if testing is performed within 72 hours of concrete

placement, before tensioning of tendons, and before removal of formwork. b. FF values are applicable to all types of slab construction and are not subject to any time

constraints. 3.13 CONTRACTION JOINT AND CRACK SEALANT A. Remove dirt and debris from joints. Joints shall be dry and free from all substances that inhibit

bond. Install sealant to prevent three-sided bonding. B. Coordinate filling contraction joints and cracks with Architectural flooring specifications.

END OF SECTION


JANUARY 2020 CONCRETE TOPPING – 035300 1 OF 4

SECTION 035300 - CONCRETE TOPPING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Emery-aggregate concrete floor topping. 2. Iron-aggregate concrete floor topping.


A. Product Data: For each type of product.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CONCRETE FLOOR TOPPINGS

A. Emery-Aggregate Concrete Floor Topping: Factory-prepared and dry-packaged mixture of graded, crushed emery aggregate containing not less than 50 percent aluminum oxide, not less than 24 percent ferric oxide, and not more than 8 percent silica; portland cement or blended hydraulic cement; plasticizers; and other admixtures to which only water needs to be added at Project site.

1. Compressive Strength (28 Days): 10,000 psi; ASTM C109/C109M.

B. Iron-Aggregate Concrete Floor Topping: Factory-prepared and dry-packaged mixture of graded iron aggregate, portland cement, plasticizers, and other admixtures to which only water needs to be added at Project site.

1. Compressive Strength (28 Days): 12,000 psi; ASTM C109/C109M.

2.2 CURING MATERIALS

A. Evaporation Retarder: Waterborne, monomolecular film forming; manufactured for application to fresh concrete.

B. Absorptive Cover: AASHTO M 182, Class 2, burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf, weighing approximately 9 oz./sq. yd. when dry.

C. Moisture-Retaining Cover: ASTM C171, polyethylene film or white burlap-polyethylene sheet.

D. Water: Potable.



E. Clear, Waterborne, Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C309, Type 1, Class B, 25 percent solids content, minimum.

2.3 RELATED MATERIALS

A. Semirigid Joint Filler: Two-component, semirigid, 100 percent solids epoxy resin with a Type A Shore durometer hardness of 80 according to ASTM D2240.

B. Joint-Filler Strips: ASTM D1751, asphalt-saturated cellulosic fiber.

C. Portland Cement: ASTM C150/C150M, Type I or II.

D. Sand: ASTM C404, fine aggregate passing No. 16 sieve.

E. Water: Potable.

F. Acrylic-Bonding Agent: ASTM C1059/C1059M, Type II, non-redispersible, acrylic emulsion or styrene butadiene.

G. Epoxy Adhesive: ASTM C881/C881M, Type V, two-component epoxy resin, capable of humid curing and bonding to damp surfaces, of class and grade to suit requirements.

2.4 MIXING

A. Bonding Slurry: Mix portland cement with water to a thick paint consistency.

B. Bonding Slurry: Mix 1 part portland cement and 1-1/2 parts sand with water and an acrylic-bonding agent according to manufacturer's written instructions to a thick paint consistency.

C. Floor Topping: Mix concrete floor topping materials and water in appropriate drum-type batch machine mixer or truck mixer according to manufacturer's written instructions.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Existing Concrete: Remove existing surface treatments and deteriorated and unsound concrete. Mechanically abrade base slabs to produce a heavily scarified surface profile with an amplitude of 1/4 inch.

1. Prepare and clean existing base slabs according to concrete floor topping manufacturer's written instructions. Fill voids, cracks, and cavities in base slabs.

2. Saw cut contraction and construction joints in existing concrete to a depth of 1/2 inch and fill with semirigid joint filler.

3. To both sides of joint edges and at perimeter of existing base slab, install concrete nails in manufacturer's recommended staggered pattern.



B. Install joint-filler strips where topping abuts vertical surfaces.

3.2 FLOOR TOPPING APPLICATION

A. Start floor topping application in presence of manufacturer's technical representative.

B. Monolithic Floor Topping: After textured-float finish is applied to fresh concrete of base slabs specified in Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete," place concrete floor topping while concrete is still plastic.

C. Deferred Floor Topping: Within 72 hours of placing base slabs, mix and scrub bonding slurry into dampened concrete to a thickness of 1/16 to 1/8 inch, without puddling. Place floor topping while slurry is still tacky.

D. Existing Concrete: Apply epoxy-bonding adhesive, mixed according to manufacturer's written instructions, and scrub into dry base slabs to a thickness of 1/16 to 1/8 inch, without puddling. Place floor topping while adhesive is still tacky.

E. Place concrete floor topping continuously in a single layer, tamping and consolidating to achieve tight contact with bonding surface. Do not permit cold joints or seams to develop within pour strip.

1. Screed surface with a straightedge and strike off to correct elevations. 2. Slope surfaces uniformly where indicated. 3. Begin initial floating, using bull floats to form a uniform and open-textured surface plane

free of humps or hollows.

F. Finishing: Consolidate surface with power-driven floats as soon as concrete floor topping can support equipment and operator. Restraighten, cut down high spots, and fill low spots. Repeat float passes and restraightening until concrete floor topping surface has a uniform, smooth, granular texture.

1. Hard Trowel Finish: After floating surface, apply first trowel finish and consolidate concrete floor topping by power-driven trowel without allowing blisters to develop. Continue troweling passes and restraighten until surface is smooth and uniform in texture.

G. Construction Joints: Construct joints true to line with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete floor topping, at locations indicated or as approved by Architect.

1. Coat face of construction joint with epoxy adhesive at locations where concrete floor topping is placed against hardened or partially hardened concrete floor topping.

H. Contraction Joints: Form weakened-plane contraction joints with power saws equipped with shatterproof abrasive or diamond-rimmed blades. Cut 1/8-inch wide joints into concrete floor topping when cutting action will not tear, abrade, or otherwise damage surface and before random contraction cracks develop.

1. Form joints in concrete floor topping over contraction joints in base slabs unless otherwise indicated.



2. Construct contraction joints for a combined depth equal to topping thickness and not less than one-fourth of base-slab thickness.

3. Construct contraction joints for a depth equal to one-half of concrete floor topping thickness, but not less than 1/2 inch deep.

3.3 PROTECTING AND CURING

A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete floor topping from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperatures.

B. Evaporation Retarder: Apply evaporation retarder to concrete floor topping surfaces in hot, dry, or windy conditions before and during finishing operations. Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions after placing, screeding, and bull floating or darbying floor topping, but before float finishing.

C. Begin curing immediately after finishing concrete floor topping. Cure by one or a combination of the following methods, according to concrete floor topping manufacturer's written instructions:

1. Moisture Curing: Keep surfaces continuously moist for not less than seven days. 2. Moisture-Retaining-Cover Curing: Cover concrete surfaces with moisture-retaining cover

for not less than seven days. 3. Curing Compound: Apply uniformly in two coats in continuous operations by power

spray or roller according to manufacturer's written instructions.

3.4 JOINT FILLING

A. Prepare and clean contraction joints and install semirigid joint filler, according to manufacturer's written instructions, once topping has fully cured.

B. Install semirigid joint filler full depth of contraction joints. Overfill joint and trim semirigid joint filler flush with top of joint after hardening.

3.5 REPAIR

A. Defective Topping: Repair and patch defective concrete floor topping areas, including areas that have not bonded to concrete substrate.



JANUARY 2020 MANUFACTURED MASONRY VENEER – 047300 1 OF 6

SECTION 047300 – MANUFACTURED MASONRY VENEER

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Related Requirements:

1. Division 6 Section “Rough Carpentry” 2. Division 7 Section “Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim” 3. Division 7 Section “Joint Sealants”

1.3 REFERENCES

A. American National Standards Institute (ANSI):

1. ANSI A118.4 – Specifications for Latex-Portland Cement Mortar.

B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):

1. ASTM C 39 – Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete Specimens.

2. ASTM C 67 – Standard Test Methods for Sampling and Testing Brick and Structural Clay Tile.

3. ASTM C 144 – Standard Specification for Aggregate for Masonry Mortar. 4. ASTM C 177 – Standard Test Method for Steady-State Head Flux Measurements and

Thermal Transmission Properties by Means of the Guarded-Hot-Plate Apparatus. 5. ASTM C 207 – Standard Specification for Hydrated Lime for Masonry Purposes. 6. ASTM C 270 – Standard Specification for Mortar for Unit Masonry. 7. ASTM C 482 – Standard Test Method for Bond Strength of Ceramic Tile to Portland

Cement. 8. ASTM C 567 – Standard Test Method for Determining Density of Structural Lightweight

Concrete. 9. ASTM C 847 – Standard Specification for Metal Lath. 10. ASTM C 932 – Standard Specification for Surface-Applied Bonding Compounds for

Exterior Plastering. 11. ASTM C 979 – Standard Specification for Pigments for Integrally Colored Concrete. 12. ASTM C 1032 – Standard Specification for Woven Wire Plaster Base. 13. ASTM C 1059 – Standard Specification for Latex Agents for Bonding Fresh To Hardened

Concrete.



14. ASTM D 226 – Standard Specification for Asphalt-Saturated Organic Felt Used in Roofing and Waterproofing.

15. ASTM C1063 – Standard Specification for Installation of Lathing and Furring to Receive Interior and Exterior Portland Cement-Based Plaster

16. ASTM C1329 – Standard specification for Portland cement 17. ASTM C578 – Standard Specification for Rigid, Cellular Polystyrene Thermal Insulation 18. ASTM C1289 – Standard Specification for Faced Rigid Cellular Polyisocyanurate Thermal

Insulation Board 19. ASTM E2556 / E2556M – Standard Specification for Vapor Permeable Flexible Sheet

Water-Resistive Barriers Intended for Mechanical Attachment

C. Other Standards:

1. ICC AC38 Acceptance Criteria for Water Resistive Barriers

D. Underwriter’s Laboratory (UL): Building Materials Directory.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Reference Section 01 33 00. Submittal Procedures; submit following items:

1. Product Data. 2. Samples:

a. Standard sample board consisting of small-scale pieces of veneer units showing full range of textures and colors.

b. Full range of mortar colors.

3. Verification Samples: Following initial sample selection submit “laid-up” sample board using the selected stone and mortar materials and showing the full range of colors expected in the finished Work; minimum sample size: 3 by 3 feet

4. Quality Assurance/Control Submittals:

a. Qualifications:

1) Proof of manufacturer qualifications. 2) Proof of installer qualifications.

b. Regulatory Requirements: Evaluation reports. c. Veneer manufacturer’s installation instructions. d. Installation instructions for other materials.

B. Closeout Submittals: Reference Section Closeout Submittals; submit following items:

1. Maintenance Instructions. 2. Special Warranties.




A. Qualifications:

1. Manufacturer Qualifications: Eldorado Stone, LLC. 2. Installer Qualifications: Experienced mason familiar with installation procedures and

related local, state and federal codes masonry.

B. Field Sample:

1. Prepare 4 by 4 foot sample at a location on the structure as selected by the Architect. Use approved selection sample materials and colors.

2. Obtain Architect’s approval. 3. Protect and retain sample as a basis for approval of completed manufactured stone work.

Approved sample may be incorporated into completed work.

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Follow manufacturer’s instructions.

1.7 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS

A. Environmental Requirements: When air temperature is 40 degrees F (4.5 degrees C) or below, consult local building code for Cold-Weather Construction requirements.

1.8 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer’s standard warranty coverage against defects in materials when installed in accordance with manufacturer’s installation instructions.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURER

A. Basis of Design: Eldorado Stone, LLC, 1370 Grand Ave., Bldg B, San Marcos, California 92069, Telephone: (800) 925-1491, Website: www.eldoradostone.com, Email: [email protected].

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Stone Veneer:

1. Profile: Selected from manufacturer’s full range. 2. Stone Accents: Wainscot Sill.

a. Color: Selected from manufacturer’s full range. b. Texture: Chiseled Edge



3. Stone Accents: Ashlar Trim Stone 4. Veneer Unit properties: Precast veneer units consisting of portland cement, lightweight

aggregates, and mineral oxide pigments. 5. Compressive Strength: ASTM C 192 and ASTM C 39, 5 sample average: greater than

1,800 psi (12.4MPa). 6. Shear Bond: ASTM C 482: 50 psi (345kPa), minimum. 7. Freeze-Thaw Test: ASTM C 67: Less than 3 percent weight loss and no disintegration. 8. Thermal Resistance: ASTM C 177: 0.473 at 1.387 inches thick 9. Weight per square foot: 2012 IBC and 2012 IRC, ASTM C1670, 15 pounds, saturated.

B. Weather Barrier: ASTM D 226, Type 1, No. 15, non-perforated asphalt-saturated felt paper or ICC AC-38, synthetic house wrap.

C. Reinforcing: ASTM C 847, 2.5lb/yd2 (1.4kg/m2) galvanized expanded metal lath or ASTM C 847, 3.4lb (1.8 kg/m2) galvanized 3/8” rib lath complying with code agency requirements for the type of substrate over which stone veneer is installed.

D. Mortar:

1. Cement: Portland cement complying with ASTM C 1329. 2. Lime: ASTM C 207. 3. Sand: ASTM C 144, natural or manufactured sand. 4. Color Pigment: ASTM C 979, mineral oxide pigments. 5. Water: Potable. 6. Pre-Packaged Latex-Portland Cement Mortar: ANSI A118.4.

E. Bonding Agent: Exterior integral bonding agent meeting [ASTM C 932] [ASTM C 1059 Type II]

F. Water Repellent: Water based silane or siloxane masonry water repellent.

2.3 MORTAR MIXES

A. Standard Installation (Grouted Joints):

1. Mix mortar in accordance with ASTM C 270, 2. Polymer modified mortar complying with ANSI A118.4

a. Add color pigment in grout joint mortar in accordance with pigment manufacturer’s instructions not to exceed 10% by weight of cement.

B. Jointless/Dry-Stacked Installation:

1. Polymer modified mortar complying with ANSI A118.4 2. Mortar prepared to comply with ASTM C270. Type S mortar.

a. Add color pigment in accordance with pigment manufacturer’s instructions.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates upon which work will be installed.

B. Coordinate with responsible entity to perform corrective work on unsatisfactory substrates.

C. Commencement of work by installer is acceptance of substrate.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Protection: Protect adjacent work from contact with mortar.

B. Surface Preparation: Prepare substrate in accordance with manufacturer’s installation instructions for the type of substrate being covered.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Install and clean stone in accordance with manufacturer’s installation instructions for Standard Installation (Grouted Joint) or Jointless/Dry-Stacked installation as specified above.

B. Apply repellent in accordance with repellent manufacturer’s application instructions.

3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Manufacturer’s Field Services: Manufacturer’s Field Service Representative shall make two periodic site visits review of on-going installation process but is not responsible for any errors or omissions that are not observed or are previously completed.

3.5 CLEANING

A. Remove protective coverings from adjacent work.

B. Cleaning Veneer Units:

1. Wash with soft bristle brush and water/granulated detergent solution. 2. Rinse immediately with clean water.

C. Removing Efflorescence:

1. Allow veneer to dry thoroughly. 2. Scrub with soft bristle brush and clean water.



3. Rinse immediately with clean water; allow to dry. 4. If efflorescence is still visible, contact ES Customer Service for assistance.

END OF SECTION


JANUARY 2020 METAL FABRICATIONS – 055000 1 OF 12

SECTION 055000 - METAL FABRICATIONS

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY


1. Steel framing and supports for mechanical and electrical equipment. 2. Steel framing and supports for applications where framing and supports are not specified

in other Sections. 3. Elevator machine beams and hoist beams. 4. Steel shapes for supporting elevator door sills. 5. Shelf angles for brick masonry applications. 6. Loose steel lintels for brick masonry and miscellaneous supports and framework for cast

stone applications. 7. Metal ladders. 8. Metal bollards. 9. Metal downspout boots. 10. Stainless steel skirts for housekeeping sinks. 11. Steel pipe and tube railings. 12. Steel grating for areaways.

B. Products furnished, but not installed, under this Section include the following:

1. Loose steel lintels for brick masonry and miscellaneous supports and framework for cast stone.

2. Anchor bolts, steel pipe sleeves, slotted-channel inserts, and wedge-type inserts indicated to be cast into concrete or built into unit masonry.

3. Steel weld plates and angles for casting into concrete for applications where they are not specified in other Sections.


1. Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for installing anchor bolts, steel pipe sleeves, slotted-channel inserts, wedge-type inserts, and other items cast into concrete.

2. Section 042113 “Brick Masonry" for installing shelf angles, loose lintels, anchor bolts, and other items built into unit masonry.



1.3 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate selection of shop primers with topcoats to be applied over them. Comply with paint and coating manufacturers' written recommendations to ensure that shop primers and topcoats are compatible with one another.

B. Coordinate installation of metal fabrications that are anchored to or that receive other work. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation.


A. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details. Show anchorage and accessory items. Provide Shop Drawings for the following:

1. Steel framing and supports for applications where framing and supports are not specified in other Sections.

2. Elevator machine beams and hoist beams. 3. Steel shapes for supporting elevator door sills. 4. Metal ladders. 5. Steel grates for areaways.

B. Delegated-Design Submittal: For ladders, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.


A. Qualification Data: For professional engineer.

B. Mill Certificates: Signed by stainless-steel manufacturers, certifying that products furnished comply with requirements.

C. Welding certificates.

D. Paint Compatibility Certificates: From manufacturers of topcoats applied over shop primers, certifying that shop primers are compatible with topcoats.

E. Research/Evaluation Reports: For post-installed anchors, from ICC-ES.


A. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."

B. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following:

1. AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."



2. AWS D1.2/D1.2M, "Structural Welding Code - Aluminum."

1.7 AWS D1.6/D1.6M, "Structural Welding Code - Stainless Steel."

1.8 FIELD CONDITIONS

A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls and other construction contiguous with metal fabrications by field measurements before fabrication.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in Section 014000 "Quality Requirements," to design ladders.

2.2 METALS

A. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces unless otherwise indicated. For metal fabrications exposed to view in the completed Work, provide materials without seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or blemishes.

B. Recycled Content of Steel Products: Postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content not less than 25 percent.

C. Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 240/A 240M or ASTM A 666, Type 304.

D. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.

E. Abrasive-Surface Floor Plate: Steel plate with abrasive material metallically bonded to steel.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. IKG Industries, a division of Harsco Corporation. b. SlipNOT Metal Safety Flooring.

F. Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500/A 500M, cold-formed steel tubing.

G. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Standard Weight (Schedule 40) unless otherwise indicated.

H. Cast Iron: Either gray iron, ASTM A 48/A 48M, or malleable iron, ASTM A 47/A 47M, unless otherwise indicated.

I. Aluminum Castings: ASTM B 26/B 26M, Alloy 443.0-F.



2.3 FASTENERS

A. General: Unless otherwise indicated, provide Type 304 or Type 316 stainless-steel fasteners for exterior use and zinc-plated fasteners with coating complying with ASTM B 633 or ASTM F 1941, Class Fe/Zn 5, at exterior walls. Select fasteners for type, grade, and class required.

1. Provide stainless-steel fasteners for fastening aluminum. 2. Provide stainless-steel fasteners for fastening stainless steel.

B. Steel Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head bolts, ASTM A 307, Grade A; with hex nuts, ASTM A 563; and, where indicated, flat washers.

C. Anchor Bolts: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36, of dimensions indicated; with nuts, ASTM A 563; and, where indicated, flat washers.

1. Hot-dip galvanize or provide mechanically deposited, zinc coating where item being fastened is indicated to be galvanized.

D. Anchors, General: Anchors capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to six times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry and four times the load imposed when installed in concrete, as determined by testing according to ASTM E 488/E 488M, conducted by a qualified independent testing agency.

E. Cast-in-Place Anchors in Concrete: Either threaded type or wedge type unless otherwise indicated; galvanized ferrous castings, either ASTM A 47/A 47M malleable iron or ASTM A 27/A 27M cast steel. Provide bolts, washers, and shims as needed, all hot-dip galvanized per ASTM F 2329.

F. Post-Installed Anchors: Torque-controlled expansion anchors.

1. Material for Interior Locations: Carbon-steel components zinc plated to comply with ASTM B 633 or ASTM F 1941 (ASTM F 1941M), Class Fe/Zn 5, unless otherwise indicated.

2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

A. Universal Shop Primer: Fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free, universal modified-alkyd primer complying with MPI#79 and compatible with topcoat.

1. Use primer containing pigments that make it easily distinguishable from zinc-rich primer.

B. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187/D 1187M.

C. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout complying with ASTM C 1107/C 1107M. Provide grout specifically recommended by manufacturer for interior and exterior applications.



D. Concrete: Comply with requirements in Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for normal-weight, air-entrained, concrete with a minimum 28-day compressive strength of 3000 psi.

E. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint complying with SSPC-Paint 20 and compatible with paints specified to be used over it.

2.5 FABRICATION, GENERAL

A. Shop Assembly: Preassemble items in the shop to greatest extent possible. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation.

B. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 inch unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed surfaces.

C. Form bent-metal corners to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or otherwise impairing work.

D. Form exposed work with accurate angles and surfaces and straight edges.

E. Weld corners and seams continuously to comply with the following:

1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals.

2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove welding flux immediately. 4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no

roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent surface.

F. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners or welds where possible. Where exposed fasteners are required, use Phillips flat-head (countersunk) fasteners unless otherwise indicated. Locate joints where least conspicuous.

G. Fabricate seams and other connections that are exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water. Provide weep holes where water may accumulate.

H. Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap metal fabrications as indicated to receive finish hardware, screws, and similar items.

I. Provide for anchorage of type indicated; coordinate with supporting structure. Space anchoring devices to secure metal fabrications rigidly in place and to support indicated loads.

J. Where units are indicated to be cast into concrete or built into masonry, equip with integrally welded steel strap anchors, 1/8 by 1-1/2 inches, with a minimum 6-inch embedment and 2-inch hook, not less than 8 inches from ends and corners of units and 24 inches o.c., unless otherwise indicated.



2.6 MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS

A. General: Provide steel framing and supports not specified in other Sections as needed to complete the Work.

B. Fabricate units from steel shapes, plates, and bars of welded construction unless otherwise indicated. Fabricate to sizes, shapes, and profiles indicated and as necessary to receive adjacent construction.

1. Furnish inserts for units installed after concrete is placed.

C. Fabricate supports for operable partitions from continuous steel beams of sizes recommended by partition manufacturer with attached bearing plates, anchors, and braces as recommended by partition manufacturer. Drill or punch bottom flanges of beams to receive partition track hanger rods; locate holes where indicated on operable partition Shop Drawings.

D. Galvanize miscellaneous framing and supports where indicated.

2.7 SHELF ANGLES

A. Fabricate shelf angles from steel angles of sizes indicated and for attachment to concrete framing. Provide horizontally slotted holes to receive 3/4-inch bolts, spaced not more than 6 inches from ends and 24 inches o.c., unless otherwise indicated.

1. Provide mitered and welded units at corners. 2. Provide open joints in shelf angles at expansion and control joints. Make open joint

approximately 2 inches larger than expansion or control joint.

B. Galvanize and prime shelf angles located in exterior walls.

C. Furnish wedge-type concrete inserts, complete with fasteners, to attach shelf angles to cast-in-place concrete.

2.8 METAL LADDERS

A. General:

1. For elevator pit and attic access ladders, comply with ASME A17.1/CSA B44.

B. Steel Ladders:

1. Space siderails 18 inches apart unless otherwise indicated. 2. Siderails: Continuous, 1/2-by-2-1/2-inch steel flat bars, with eased edges. 3. Rungs: 3/4-inch- diameter steel bars. 4. Fit rungs in centerline of siderails; plug-weld and grind smooth on outer rail faces. 5. Provide nonslip surfaces on top of each rung, either by coating rung with aluminum-

oxide granules set in epoxy-resin adhesive or by using a type of manufactured rung coatedwith aluminum-oxide grout.



6. Support each ladder at top and bottom and not more than 60 inches o.c. with welded or bolted steel brackets.

7. Prime ladders, including brackets and fasteners, with zinc-rich primer.

2.9 MISCELLANEOUS STEEL TRIM

A. Unless otherwise indicated, fabricate units from steel shapes, plates, and bars of profiles shown with continuously welded joints and smooth exposed edges. Miter corners and use concealed field splices where possible.

B. Provide cutouts, fittings, and anchorages as needed to coordinate assembly and installation with other work.

1. Provide with integrally welded steel strap anchors for embedding in concrete or masonry construction.

C. Prime exterior miscellaneous steel trim with zinc-rich primer.

2.11 METAL BOLLARDS

A. Fabricate metal bollards from Schedule 40 steel pipe.

B. Prime bollards with zinc-rich primer. Provide galvanized bollards as indicated on drawings.

2.14 LOOSE STEEL LINTELS

A. Fabricate loose steel lintels from steel angles and shapes of size indicated for openings and recesses in masonry walls and partitions at locations indicated. Fabricate in single lengths for each opening unless otherwise indicated. Weld adjoining members together to form a single unit where indicated.

B. Size loose lintels to provide bearing length at each side of openings equal to 1/12 of clear span, but not less than 8 inches unless otherwise indicated.

C. Galvanize and prime loose steel lintels located in exterior walls.

2.16 STEEL WELD PLATES AND ANGLES

A. Provide steel weld plates and angles not specified in other Sections, for items supported from concrete construction as needed to complete the Work. Provide each unit with no fewer than two integrally welded steel strap anchors for embedding in concrete.

2.17 FINISHES, GENERAL

A. Finish metal fabrications after assembly.



B. Finish exposed surfaces to remove tool and die marks and stretch lines, and to blend into surrounding surface.

2.18 STEEL AND IRON FINISHES

A. Shop prime iron and steel items not indicated to be galvanized unless they are to be embedded in concrete, sprayed-on fireproofing, or masonry, or unless otherwise indicated.

1. Shop prime with zinc-rich primer.

B. Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare surfaces to comply with requirements indicated below:

1. Exterior Items: SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning." 2. Items Indicated to Receive Zinc-Rich Primer: SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial

Blast Cleaning." 3. Other Items: SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning."

C. Shop Priming: Apply shop primer to comply with SSPC-PA 1, "Paint Application Specification No. 1: Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting of Steel," for shop painting.

1. Stripe paint corners, crevices, bolts, welds, and sharp edges.

D. Galvanizing: Hot-dip galvanize items as indicated to comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M for steel and iron hardware and with ASTM A 123/A 123M for other steel and iron products.

1. Do not quench or apply post galvanizing treatments that might interfere with paint adhesion.

2.18 STEEL PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS

A. Structural Performance: Railings, including attachment to building construction, shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated:

1. Handrails and Top Rails of Guards:

a. Uniform load of 50 lbf/ ft. applied in any direction. b. Concentrated load of 200 lbf applied in any direction. c. Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act concurrently.

2. Infill of Guards:

a. Concentrated load of 50 lbf applied horizontally on an area of 1 sq. ft. b. Infill load and other loads need not be assumed to act concurrently.

B. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes.

1. Temperature Change: 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F.



C. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth surfaces, without seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, stains, discolorations, or blemishes.

D. Brackets, Flanges, and Anchors: Cast or formed metal of same type of material and finish as supported rails unless otherwise indicated.

1. Provide type of bracket with flange tapped for concealed anchorage to threaded hanger bolt and that provides 1-1/2-inch (38-mm) clearance from inside face of handrail to finished wall surface.

E. Tubing: ASTM A 500 (cold formed) or ASTM A 513.

F. Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type F or Type S, Grade A, Standard Weight (Schedule 40), unless another grade and weight are required by structural loads.

1. Provide galvanized finish for exterior installations and where indicated.

G. Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.

H. Cast Iron: Either gray iron, ASTM A 48/A 48M, or malleable iron, ASTM A 47/A 47M, unless otherwise indicated.

I. Expanded Metal: ASTM F 1267, Type II (expanded and flattened), Class 1 (uncoated).

J. Galvanized Railings:

1. Hot-dip galvanize exterior steel railings, including hardware, after fabrication. 2. Comply with ASTM A 123/A 123M for hot-dip galvanized railings. 3. Comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M for hot-dip galvanized hardware. 4. Do not quench or apply post galvanizing treatments that might interfere with paint

adhesion. 5. Fill vent and drain holes that are exposed in the finished Work, unless indicated to remain

as weep holes, by plugging with zinc solder and filing off smooth.

K. For galvanized railings, provide hot-dip galvanized fittings, brackets, fasteners, sleeves, and other ferrous components.

L. Preparing Galvanized Railings for Shop Priming: After galvanizing, thoroughly clean railings of grease, dirt, oil, flux, and other foreign matter, and treat with etching cleaner.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing metal fabrications. Set metal fabrications accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; with edges and surfaces level, plumb, true, and free of rack; and measured from established lines and levels.



B. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. Weld connections that are not to be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of exterior units that have been hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and are for bolted or screwed field connections.

C. Field Welding: Comply with the following requirements:


2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove welding flux immediately. 4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no

roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent surface.

D. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where metal fabrications are required to be fastened to in-place construction. Provide threaded fasteners for use with concrete and masonry inserts, toggle bolts, through bolts, lag screws, wood screws, and other connectors.

E. Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items that are to be built into concrete, masonry, or similar construction.

F. Corrosion Protection: Coat concealed surfaces of aluminum that come into contact with grout, concrete, masonry, wood, or dissimilar metals with the following:

1. Extruded Aluminum: Two coats of clear lacquer.

3.2 INSTALLING MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS

A. General: Install framing and supports to comply with requirements of items being supported, including manufacturers' written instructions and requirements indicated on Shop Drawings.

B. Anchor supports for overhead doors and overhead grilles securely to, and rigidly brace from, building structure.

C. Support steel girders on solid grouted masonry, concrete, or steel pipe columns. Secure girders with anchor bolts embedded in grouted masonry or concrete or with bolts through top plates of pipe columns.

1. Where grout space under bearing plates is indicated for girders supported on concrete or masonry, install as specified in "Installing Bearing and Leveling Plates" Article.

D. Install pipe columns on concrete footings with grouted baseplates. Position and grout column baseplates as specified in "Installing Bearing and Leveling Plates" Article.

1. Grout baseplates of columns supporting steel girders after girders are installed and leveled.



3.3 INSTALLING METAL BOLLARDS

A. Fill metal-capped bollards solidly with concrete and allow concrete to cure seven days before installing.

B. Anchor bollards in concrete with pipe sleeves preset and anchored into concrete. Fill annular space around bollard solidly with nonshrink grout; mixed and placed to comply with grout manufacturer's written instructions. Slope grout up approximately 1/8 inch toward bollard.

C. Fill bollards solidly with concrete, mounding top surface to shed water.

3.4 INSTALLING NOSINGS, TREADS, AND THRESHOLDS

A. Center nosings on tread widths unless otherwise indicated.

B. For nosings embedded in concrete steps or curbs, align nosings flush with riser faces and level with tread surfaces.

C. Seal thresholds exposed to exterior with elastomeric sealant complying with Section 079200 "Joint Sealants" to provide a watertight installation.

3.5 INSTALLING STEEL PIPE & TUBE RAILINGS

A. Railing Connections

1. Nonwelded Connections: Use mechanical or adhesive joints for permanently connecting railing components. Seal recessed holes of exposed locking screws using plastic cement filler colored to match finish of railings.

2. Welded Connections: Use fully welded joints for permanently connecting railing components. Comply with requirements for welded connections in "Fabrication" Article whether welding is performed in the shop or in the field.

3. Expansion Joints: Install expansion joints at locations indicated but not farther apart than required to accommodate thermal movement. Provide slip-joint internal sleeve extending 2 inches beyond joint on either side, fasten internal sleeve securely to one side, and locate joint within 6 inches of post.

B. Anchoring Posts

1. Use metal sleeves preset and anchored into concrete for installing posts. After posts are inserted into sleeves, fill annular space between post and sleeve with nonshrink, nonmetallic grout or anchoring cement, mixed and placed to comply with anchoring material manufacturer's written instructions.

2. Form or core-drill holes not less than 5 inches deep and 3/4 inch larger than OD of post for installing posts in concrete. Clean holes of loose material, insert posts, and fill annular



space between post and concrete with nonshrink, nonmetallic grout or anchoring cement, mixed and placed to comply with anchoring material manufacturer's written instructions.

3. Cover anchorage joint with flange of same metal as post, welded to post after placing anchoring material.

4. Leave anchorage joint exposed with anchoring material flush with adjacent surface. 5. Anchor posts to metal surfaces with oval flanges, angle type, or floor type as required by

conditions, connected to posts and to metal supporting members as follows:

a. For steel pipe railings, weld flanges to post and bolt to metal supporting surfaces.

C. Install removable railing sections, where indicated, in slip-fit metal sockets cast in concrete.

3.6 ATTACHING RAILINGS

A. Anchor railing ends at walls with round flanges anchored to wall construction and welded to railing ends.

B. Anchor railing ends to metal surfaces with flanges bolted to metal surfaces and welded to railing ends.

C. Attach railings to wall with wall brackets, except where end flanges are used. Locate brackets as indicated or, if not indicated, at spacing required to support structural loads.

D. Secure wall brackets and railing end flanges to building construction as follows:

1. For concrete and solid masonry anchorage, use drilled-in expansion shields and hanger or lag bolts.

2. For hollow masonry anchorage, use toggle bolts.

3.7 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A. Painting: Cleaning and painting of field welds, bolted connections, abraded areas and primed metal surfaces are specified in Section 099113 "Exterior Painting" and Section 099123 "Interior Painting."

B. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas, and repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780/A 780M.

3.8 PROTECTION

A. Protect finishes of railings from damage during construction period with temporary protective coverings approved by railing manufacturer. Remove protective coverings at time of Substantial Completion.



JANUARY 2020 METAL PAN STAIRS – 055113 1 OF 9

SECTION 055113 - METAL PAN STAIRS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Preassembled steel stairs with concrete-filled treads. 2. Steel tube railings attached to metal stairs. 3. Steel tube handrails attached to walls adjacent to metal stairs. 4. Railing gates at the level of exit discharge.


1. Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for concrete fill for stair treads and platforms.

1.3 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate selection of shop primers with topcoats to be applied over them. Comply with paint and coating manufacturers' written recommendations to ensure that shop primers and topcoats are compatible with one another.

B. Coordinate installation of anchorages for metal stairs. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation.

C. Coordinate locations of hanger rods and struts with other work so that they do not encroach on required stair width and are within the fire-resistance-rated stair enclosure.


A. Product Data: For metal pan stairs and the following:

1. Prefilled metal-pan-stair treads. 2. Paint products. 3. Abrasive nosings.

B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.



C. Samples for Verification: For each type and finish of nosing.

D. Delegated-Design Submittal: For stairs and railings, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.


A. Welding certificates.

B. Paint Compatibility Certificates: From manufacturers of topcoats applied over shop primers certifying that shop primers are compatible with topcoats.


A. Installer Qualifications: Fabricator of products.

B. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following:

1. AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel." 2. AWS D1.3/D1.3M, "Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel."

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Alfab, Inc. 2. American Stair, Inc. 3. Lapeyre Stair Inc. 4. Pacific Stair Corporation. 5. Worthington Metal Fabricators.


A. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in Section 014000 "Quality Requirements," to design stairs and railings.

B. Structural Performance of Stairs: Metal stairs shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated:

1. Uniform Load: 100 lbf/sq. ft. 2. Concentrated Load: 300 lbf applied on an area of 4 sq. in.



3. Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act concurrently. 4. Stair Framing: Capable of withstanding stresses resulting from railing loads in addition to

loads specified above. 5. Limit deflection of treads, platforms, and framing members to L/360 or 1/4 inch,

whichever is less.

C. Structural Performance of Railings: Railings shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated:

1. Handrails and Top Rails of Guards:

a. Uniform load of 50 lbf/ft. applied in any direction. b. Concentrated load of 200 lbf applied in any direction. c. Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act concurrently.

2. Infill of Guards:

a. Concentrated load of 50 lbf applied horizontally on an area of 1 sq. ft.. b. Infill load and other loads need not be assumed to act concurrently.

D. Seismic Performance of Stairs: Metal stairs shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7.

1. Component Importance Factor: 1.5.

2.3 METALS

A. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces unless otherwise indicated. For components exposed to view in the completed Work, provide materials without seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or blemishes.

B. Recycled Content of Steel Products: Postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content not less than 25 percent.

C. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.

D. Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500 (cold formed).

E. Uncoated, Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, structural steel, Grade 25, unless another grade is required by design loads; exposed.

2.4 ABRASIVE NOSINGS

A. Extruded Units: Aluminum units with abrasive filler consisting of aluminum oxide, silicon carbide, or a combination of both, in an epoxy-resin binder. Fabricate units in lengths necessary to accurately fit openings or conditions.



1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. ACL Industries, Inc. b. Armstrong Products, Inc. c. Balco, Inc. d. Wooster Products Inc.

2. Provide ribbed units, with abrasive filler strips projecting 1/16 inch above aluminum extrusion.

3. Nosings: Square-back units, 3 inches wide, without lip.

B. Provide anchors for embedding units in concrete, either integral or applied to units, as standard with manufacturer.

C. Apply bituminous paint to concealed surfaces of cast-metal units set into concrete.

D. Apply clear lacquer to concealed surfaces of extruded units set into concrete.

2.5 FASTENERS

A. General: Provide zinc-plated fasteners with coating complying with ASTM B 633 or ASTM F 1941, Class Fe/Zn 12 for exterior use, and Class Fe/Zn 5 where built into exterior walls. Select fasteners for type, grade, and class required.

B. Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head bolts, ASTM A 307, Grade A; with hex nuts, ASTM A 563; and, where indicated, flat washers.

C. Anchor Bolts: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36, of dimensions indicated; with nuts, ASTM A 563; and, where indicated, flat washers.

1. Provide mechanically deposited or hot-dip, zinc-coated anchor bolts for stairs indicated to be shop primed with zinc-rich primer.

D. Post-Installed Anchors: Torque-controlled expansion anchors capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to six times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry and four times the load imposed when installed in concrete, as determined by testing according to ASTM E 488/E 488M, conducted by a qualified independent testing agency.

1. Material for Interior Locations: Carbon-steel components zinc plated to comply with ASTM B 633 or ASTM F 1941, Class Fe/Zn 5, unless otherwise indicated.


A. Universal Shop Primer: Fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free, universal modified-alkyd primer complying with MPI#79 and compatible with topcoat.

1. Use primer containing pigments that make it easily distinguishable from zinc-rich primer.



B. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187/D 1187M.

C. Concrete Materials and Properties: Comply with requirements in Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for normal-weight, air-entrained, ready-mix concrete with a minimum 28-day compressive strength of 3000 psi unless otherwise indicated.

D. Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 185/A 185M, 6 by 6 inches, W1.4 by W1.4, unless otherwise indicated.


A. Provide complete stair assemblies, including metal framing, hangers, struts, railings, clips, brackets, bearing plates, and other components necessary to support and anchor stairs and platforms on supporting structure.

1. Join components by welding unless otherwise indicated. 2. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces.

B. Preassembled Stairs: Assemble stairs in shop to greatest extent possible. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation.

C. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 inch unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed surfaces.

D. Form bent-metal corners to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or otherwise impairing work.

E. Form exposed work with accurate angles and surfaces and straight edges.

F. Weld connections to comply with the following:


2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove welding flux immediately. 4. Weld exposed corners and seams continuously unless otherwise indicated. 5. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds to comply with NOMMA's "Voluntary

Joint Finish Standards" for Type 3 welds: partially dressed weld with spatter removed.

G. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners where possible. Where exposed fasteners are required, use Phillips flat-head (countersunk) screws or bolts unless otherwise indicated. Locate joints where least conspicuous.

2.8 STEEL-FRAMED STAIRS

A. Stair Framing:



1. Fabricate stringers of steel channels.

a. Provide closures for exposed ends of channel stringers. b. Fabricate stringers for stairs using steel tubes per structural drawings.

2. Construct platforms of steel channel (or tube) headers and miscellaneous framing members as needed to comply with performance requirements.

3. Weld stringers to headers; weld framing members to stringers and headers. 4. Where masonry walls support metal stairs, provide temporary supporting struts designed

for erecting steel stair components before installing masonry.

B. Metal Pan Stairs: Form risers, subtread pans, and subplatforms to configurations shown from steel sheet of thickness needed to comply with performance requirements, but not less than 0.067 inch.

1. Steel Sheet: Uncoated cold-rolled steel sheet. 2. Directly weld metal pans to stringers; locate welds on top of subtreads where they are

concealed by concrete fill. Do not weld risers to stringers. 3. Attach risers and subtreads to stringers with brackets made of steel angles or bars. Weld

brackets to stringers and attach metal pans to brackets by welding, riveting, or bolting. 4. Attach abrasive nosings to risers. 5. Provide subplatforms of configuration indicated or, if not indicated, the same as

subtreads. Weld subplatforms to platform framing.

a. Smooth Soffit Construction: Construct subplatforms with flat metal under surfaces to produce smooth soffits.

2.9 STAIR RAILINGS

A. Steel Tube Railings: Fabricate railings to comply with requirements indicated for design, dimensions, details, finish, and member sizes, including wall thickness of tube, post spacings, and anchorage, but not less than that needed to withstand indicated loads.

1. Rails and Posts: 1-5/8-inch- diameter top and bottom rails and 1-1/2-inch- square posts. 2. Picket Infill: 1/2-inch- round pickets spaced less than 4 inches clear.

B. Welded Connections: Fabricate railings with welded connections. Cope components at connections to provide close fit, or use fittings designed for this purpose. Weld all around at connections, including at fittings.

1. Finish welds to comply with NOMMA's "Voluntary Joint Finish Standards" for Type 2 welds: completely sanded joint, some undercutting and pinholes are okay as shown in NAAMM AMP 521.

C. Form changes in direction of railings as follows:

1. By radius bends or by inserting prefabricated elbow fittings of radius indicated.



D. For changes in direction made by bending, use jigs to produce uniform curvature for each repetitive configuration required. Maintain cross section of member throughout entire bend without buckling, twisting, cracking, or otherwise deforming exposed surfaces of components.

E. Close exposed ends of railing members with prefabricated end fittings.

F. Provide wall returns at ends of wall-mounted handrails unless otherwise indicated. Close ends of returns unless clearance between end of rail and wall is 1/4 inch or less.

G. Connect posts to stair framing by direct welding unless otherwise indicated.

H. Brackets, Flanges, Fittings, and Anchors: Provide wall brackets, end closures, flanges, miscellaneous fittings, and anchors for interconnecting components and for attaching to other work. Furnish inserts and other anchorage devices for connecting to concrete or masonry work.

1. For nongalvanized railings, provide nongalvanized ferrous-metal fittings, brackets, fasteners, and sleeves, except galvanize anchors embedded in exterior masonry and concrete construction.

2. Provide type of bracket with predrilled hole for exposed bolt anchorage and that provides 1-1/2-inch clearance from inside face of handrail to finished wall surface.

I. Fillers: Provide fillers made from steel plate, or other suitably crush-resistant material, where needed to transfer wall bracket loads through wall finishes to structural supports. Size fillers to suit wall finish thicknesses and to produce adequate bearing area to prevent bracket rotation and overstressing of substrate.

2.10 FINISHES

A. Finish metal stairs after assembly.

B. Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare uncoated ferrous-metal surfaces to comply with SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning."

C. Apply shop primer to uncoated surfaces of metal stair components, except those with galvanized finishes and those to be embedded in concrete or masonry unless otherwise indicated. Comply with SSPC-PA 1, "Paint Application Specification No. 1: Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting of Steel," for shop painting.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLING METAL PAN STAIRS

A. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary for securing metal stairs to in-place construction. Include threaded fasteners for concrete and masonry inserts, through-bolts, lag bolts, and other connectors.



B. Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing metal stairs. Set units accurately in location, alignment, and elevation, measured from established lines and levels and free of rack.

C. Install metal stairs by welding stair framing to steel structure or to weld plates cast into concrete unless otherwise indicated.

D. Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items that are to be built into concrete, masonry, or similar construction.

E. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. Weld connections that are not to be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of exterior units that have been hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and are for bolted or screwed field connections.

F. Field Welding: Comply with requirements for welding in "Fabrication, General" Article.

G. Place and finish concrete fill for treads and platforms to comply with Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete."

1. Install abrasive nosings with anchors fully embedded in concrete. Center nosings on tread width.

3.2 INSTALLING RAILINGS

A. Adjust railing systems before anchoring to ensure matching alignment at abutting joints. Space posts at spacing indicated or, if not indicated, as required by design loads. Plumb posts in each direction. Secure posts and rail ends to building construction as follows:

1. Anchor posts to steel by welding to steel supporting members. 2. Anchor handrail ends to concrete and masonry with steel round flanges welded to rail

ends and anchored with postinstalled anchors and bolts.

B. Attach handrails to wall with wall brackets. Locate brackets as indicated or, if not indicated, at spacing required to support structural loads. Secure wall brackets to building construction as follows:

1. For concrete and solid masonry anchorage, use drilled-in expansion shields and hanger or lag bolts.

2. For hollow masonry anchorage, use toggle bolts.


A. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint, and paint exposed areas with same material as used for shop painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-painted surfaces.


JANUARY 2020 ROUGH CARPENTRY – 06 10 00 1 OF 6

SECTION 06 10 00: ROUGH CARPENTRY PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 06 17 53 – Shop-Fabricated Wood Trusses. 1.2 REFERENCES AF&PA – National Design Specification for Wood Construction with 2005 Supplement. ALSC – American Lumber Standards Committee: Softwood Lumber Standards. ANSI A208.1 – Mat-Formed Wood Particleboard. ANSI/AHA A135.4 – Basic Hardboard. APA – American Plywood Association. ASTM D2559 – Standard Specification for Adhesives for Structural Laminated Wood Products

for Use Under Exterior (Wet Use) Exposure Conditions. ASTM D3498 – Standard Specification for Adhesives for Field-Gluing Plywood to Lumber

Framing for Floor Systems. AWPA C1 – All Timber Products Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process. AWPA C2 – Lumber, Timber, Bridge Ties and Mine Ties – Preservative Treatment by Pressure

Process. AWPA C9 – Plywood - Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process. AWPA C20 – Structural Lumber Fire-Retardant Treatment by Pressure Process. AWPA C27 – Plywood – Fire-Retardant Treatment by Pressure Process. PS 2 – Performance Standard for Wood-Based Structural-Use Panels. PS 20 – American Softwood Lumber Standard SPIB – Southern Pine Inspection Bureau. WCLIB – West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau. WWPA – Western Wood Products Association. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Structural panels are all-veneer plywood, composite panels containing a combination of veneer

and wood-based material, or mat-formed panels such as oriented strand board and waferboard.



1.4 SUBMITTALS A. For treated materials, submit certification by treating plant stating chemicals and process used,

net amount of preservative retained and conformance with applicable standards.

B. For all dimensioned lumber, submit letters of certificate stating the species and grade of lumber used.

C. For all structural sheathing, submit letters of certificate stating the structural panels meet specified

requirements. D. Submit product data for metal framing anchors, connectors, and construction adhesives.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with National Design Specification For Wood Construction. B. Perform Work in accordance with the following agencies:

1. Lumber Grading Agency: Certified by ALSC. 2. Plywood Grading Agency: Certified by APA.

C. Identify all wood products by official grade mark, except for wood products exposed to view submit manufacturer’s certificate that lumber meets specified requirements.

1. Lumber: Grade stamp to contain symbol of inspection agency, mill number or name, grade of lumber, species or species grouping or combination designation, rules under which graded, where applicable and condition of seasoning at time of manufacture.

2. Structural Panel: Panel grade, span rating, exposure durability classification, product standard thickness, and mill number.

D. Structural Testing/Inspection Agency shall perform the following quality related items:

1. Verify spacing, size, grade, and species of wood members. 2. Verify attachment pattern, construction adhesive (if applicable) and orientation of structural

panels. 3. Verify shear wall hold-down size, installation, and locations. 4. Verify exterior wall and shear wall sill plate attachment. 5. Verify anchorage and connection details of beams and headers.

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, and handle all materials in such a manner to protect against damage and the

weather. B. Protect the installed work and materials of all other trades. C. In the advent of damage, immediately make all repairs and replacements necessary to the

approval of the Architect and at no additional cost to the Owner.



PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 LUMBER

A. Lumber: Solid sawn and finger-jointed lumber manufactured to comply with PS 20 “American

Softwood Lumber Standards” and with the applicable grading rules of inspection agencies certified by American Lumber Standards Committee’s (ALSC) Broad of Review listed:

1. Redwood Inspection Service (RIS). 2. Southern Pine Inspection Bureau (SPIB). 3. West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau (WCLIB). 4. Western Wood Products Association (WWPA). 5. National Lumber Grades Authority (NLGA – Canadian)

B. Nominal sizes are indicated, except as shown by detail dimensions. Provide actual size as

required by PS 20, for moisture content specified for each use. C. Dressed lumber: S4S, unless otherwise indicated. D. Moisture Content: Seasoned lumber, 15% maximum moisture content at time of dressing, unless

noted otherwise on the Drawings. 2.2 ENGINEERED WOOD PRODUCTS A. Parallel Strand Lumber (PSL): Meet the properties specified on the Drawings. B. Laminated Veneer Lumber (LVL): Meet the properties specified on the Drawings. C. Laminated Strand Lumber (LSL): Meet the properties specified on the Drawings. 2.3 STRUCTURAL PANELS A. Structural panels: Conform to PS 2, with a span rating to suit the joist, stud, rafter, or truss

spacing, and an Exposure Durability Classification of Exposure 1 unless noted otherwise. B. Floor panels: Tongue and groove APA rated Sturd-I-Floor. C. Wall panels: APA rated sheathing. D. Roof panels: APA rated sheathing. 2.4 ACCESSORIES A Fasteners: Size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified in this article for

material and manufacture. Galvanized with a hot-dip zinc coating in accordance with ASTM A153 or made of AISI Type 304 stainless steel for lumber which is exposed to weather, in contact with the ground, or has been chemically treated.

B. Common Wire Nails: Meet the requirements of FS FF-N-105.

C. Drywall Screws: Hardened steel, bugle head with length three times thickness of sheathing.



D. Construction Adhesive: Meet the requirements of ASTM D3498. E. Joist Hangers and Framing Anchors: Manufactured by Simpson Strong Tie or approved equal. F. Steel Bolts: Steel bolts in conformance with ASTM A307, Grade A with ASTM A 563 hex nuts

and flat washers. G. For backing panels to electrical or telephone equipment, provide fire-retardant treated structural

panel with exterior glue. 2.5 PRESERVATIVE TREATMENT A. Where lumber or structural panel is indicated as "treated", or is specified herein to be treated,

comply with the applicable requirements of the AWPA Standards C2 (Lumber) and C9 (Plywood). Mark each treated item with the AWPA Quality Mark requirements.

B. Pressure-treat above-ground items with water-borne preservatives listed in AWPA P5. Treat

indicated items and the following:

1. Wood cants, nailers, curbs, blocking, stripping, and similar members in connection with roofing, flashing, vapor barriers and waterproofing.

2. Wood sills, sleepers, blocking, furring, stripping and similar concealed members in contact with masonry or concrete.

C. Complete fabrication of treated items prior to treatment, wherever possible. If cut after treatment,

apply one coat of same chemical used for treatment in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

D. Allow preservative to dry prior to erecting members. Inspect each piece of lumber or structural

panel after drying and discard damaged or defective pieces. E. Provide lumber or structural panels with a retained chemical level as follows:

1. 0.25 pcf for above ground use. 2. 0.40 pcf intended for ground contact and fresh water use.

PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL

A. Set structural members level and plumb, in correct position. B. Make provisions for erection loads, and for sufficient temporary bracing to maintain structure

safe, plumb, and in true alignment until completion of erection and installation of permanent bracing.

C. Discard unit of material with defects that might impair quality of work, and units that are too

small to fabricate work with minimum joints or optimum joint arrangement.



D. Installer must examine the substrate structure and the conditions under which the carpentry Work is to be installed and notify the Contractor in writing of conditions detrimental to the Work. Do not proceed with the installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the installer.

E. Coordinate carpentry Work with other Work; scribe and cope as required for accurate fit.

Correlate location of furring, nailers, blocking, grounds and similar supports to allow proper attachment of other Work.

3.2 JOIST FRAMING A. Provide framing of sizes and spacings shown. B. Install with crown edge up and support ends of each member with not less than 1-7/8 inches of

bearing on support. C. Attach to wood bearing members by toe nailing or galvanized metal connectors. Provide blocking

of joist at ends of joists unless nailed to header or supported by metal joist hanger. D. Do not notch joists. E. Do not bore holes in PSL which violate manufacturer’s recommendations. F. Provide bridging between joists. G. Framing shall be kept at least 2 inches clear from chimneys and 4 inches away from fireplace

walls.

3.3 STRUCTURAL PANELS A. Place floor panels perpendicular to framing members with ends staggered and sheet ends over

firm bearing. Attach to framing with construction adhesive and nails. B. Place wall sheathing with long dimension parallel to wall studs, with ends over firm bearing.

Provide solid blocking at ends of sheets. Secure to wood framing with nails of size and spacing shown on Drawings.

C. Place roof sheathing perpendicular to framing members with ends staggered and sheet ends over

firm bearing. Secure to wood framing with nails of size and spacing shown on Drawings. D. Oriented strand board with laminated face shall be attached to wood with laminated face against

wood framing. 3.4 WOOD GROUND, NAILERS, BLOCKING AND SLEEPERS

A. Provide wherever shown and where required for screening or attachment of other Work. Form to

shapes as shown and cut as required for true line and level of Work to be attached. Coordinate location with other Work involved.

B. Attach to substrate as required to support applied loading. Countersink bolts and nuts flush with

surfaces, unless otherwise shown. Build into masonry during installation of masonry Work. Where possible, anchor to formwork before concrete placement.



C. Provide permanent grounds of dressed, preservative treated, key-beveled lumber not less than

1-1/2" (38mm) wide and of thickness required to bring face of ground to exact thickness of finish material involved. Remove temporary grounds when no longer required.

3.5 WOOD FURRING A. Install plumb and level with closure strips at edges and openings. Shim with wood as required for

tolerance of finished Work.

3.6 MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING A. Firestops:

1. Stud walls: Two inches thick by depth of member blocking at each floor level, top story ceiling level, and soffits as required.

2. Floor and ceiling framing: Two inches thick by depth of wood member blocking, fitted to fill openings from one space to another to prevent drafts.

B. Framing for mechanical Work:

1. Frame members for passage of pipes and ducts to avoid cutting structural members. 2. Reinforce framing members where damaged by cutting.

C. Blocking: Locate blocking to facilitate installation of finish materials, casework, fixtures, specialty items and trim railings.

END OF SECTION


JANUARY 2020 SHOP-FABRICATED WOOD TRUSSES – 06 17 53 1 OF 4

SECTION 06 17 53: SHOP-FABRICATED WOOD TRUSSES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Division 1 Sections

B. Section 06 10 00 - Rough Carpentry.

1.2 REFERENCES

AF&PA – National Design Specification for Wood Construction with 2005 Supplement.

ANSI/TPI 1 – National Design Standard for Metal Plate Connected Wood Truss Construction.

ASTM A653 – Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process.

ASTM E84 – Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.

TPI DSB – Recommended Design Specification for Temporary Bracing of Metal Plate Connected Wood Trusses.

1.3 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS

A. Design of wood trusses, including header truss units at openings or change of framing, is the sole responsibility of the Contractor.

B. Fabricated wood trusses shall be designed by a Structural Engineer licensed in the Project state.

C. Design shall comply with the National Design Specification for Wood Construction (NDS), ANSI/TPI 1, and the requirements of the Building Code.

D. For trusses spanning 60 feet or greater, temporary installation restraint/bracing and permanent individual truss member restraint/bracing shall be designed by the wood truss Engineer for the specific project conditions.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

B. Shop Drawings:

1. Shall include truss design drawings that show for each truss, as a minimum, the following:

a. Slope or depth, span and spacing. b. Location of all joints and support locations. c. Number of plies if greater than one. d. Required bearing widths.



e. Design loads as applicable, including:

1) Top chord dead and live load. 2) Bottom chord dead and live load. 3) Additional loads and locations. 4) Environmental design criteria and loads (wind, rain, snow, seismic, etc.)

f. Other lateral loads, including drag strut loads. g. Adjustments to wood member and metal connector plate design value for conditions of

use. h. Maximum reaction force and direction, including maximum uplift reaction forces where

applicable. i. Metal-connector-plate type, size, and thickness or gage, and the dimensional location of

each metal connector plate except where symmetrically located relative to the joint interface.

j. Size, species, and grade for each wood member. k. Truss-to-truss connections and truss field assembly requirements. l. Calculated span-to-deflection ratio and maximum vertical and horizontal deflection for

live and total load as applicable. m. Maximum axial tension and compression forces in the truss members. n. Required permanent individual truss member restraint location and the method and

details of restraint/bracing.

2. Shall include truss placement drawings that identifies the proposed location for each individually designated truss and references the corresponding truss design drawing.

3. Shall include instructions for erection. 4. Shall be sealed by an Engineer licensed in the Project state.

C. Submit erector’s qualifications.


A. Identify all wood products by official grade mark.

B. Structural Testing/Inspection Agency shall perform the following quality related items:

1. Verify that general arrangement and installation of wood trusses is in accordance with the approved wood truss shop drawings and the Contract Documents.

2. Verify that trusses and truss connections are not damaged. 3. Verify wood truss bearing lengths at all support points. 4. Verify wood truss anchorage details at all support points. 5. Verify that truss members have not been cut or modified.

1.6 ERECTOR’S QUALIFICATIONS

A. Erector shall have a minimum of 5 years experience in the erection of wood trusses similar in complexity to this Project as evidenced by 10 completed projects.



1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Deliver, handle and store trusses with care and in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and TPI recommendations to avoid damage from bending, overturning or other cause for which trusses are not designed to resist or endure.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 LUMBER

A. Lumber: Lumber shall be identified by the grade mark of a lumber grading or inspection agency accredited by the Board of Review of the American Lumber Standard Committee (ALSC).

B. Lumber Moisture Content: Moisture content shall be no less than 7 percent nor greater than 19 percent at time of fabrication.

2.2 CONNECTOR PLATES

A. Connector Plates: Connector plates to comply with the AF&PA National Design Specification for Wood Construction and ANSI/TPI 1.

B. Connector Plates: Minimum thickness of 0.036 inch (20 gage) with G60 coating complying with ASTM A653.

C. Connector Plates with Fire Retardant Lumber: Connector plates are to be a minimum thickness of 0.036 inch (20 gage), stainless steel.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 FABRICATION

A. Cut truss members to accurate lengths, angles and sizes to produce close fitting joints with proper wood-to-wood bearing in assembled units.

B. Fabricate metal connector plates to size, configuration, thickness and anchorage details required for types of joint designs indicated.

C. Assemble truss members in design configuration indicated on the structural drawings using jigs or other means to ensure uniformity and accuracy of assembly with close fitting joints. Position members to produce design camber indicated.

D. Connect truss members by means of metal connector plates accurately located and securely fastened to wood members by means indicated or approved.



3.2 ERECTION

A. Erect and brace trusses in accordance with the approved shop drawings and TPI DSB.

3.3 BEARING

A. Anchor trusses securely at all bearing points to comply with methods and details indicated.

3.4 TRUSS MODIFICATIONS

A. Truss members and components shall not be cut, notched, drilled, spliced, or otherwise altered in any way without written concurrence of the truss manufacturer and Structural Engineer.

END OF SECTION


JANUARY 2020 FINISH CARPENTRY – 062000 1 OF 3

SECTION 062000 - FINISH CARPENTRY

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Interior trim.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. MDF: Medium-density fiberboard.

B. MDO: Plywood with a medium-density overlay on the face.

C. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride.


A. Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product.

B. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL

A. Softwood Plywood: DOC PS 1.

B. Hardboard: ANSI A135.4.

2.2 INTERIOR TRIM

A. Lumber for Opaque Finish (Painted Finish):

1. Species and Grade: Popular or Pine 2. Maximum Moisture Content: 10 percent. 3. Finger Jointing: Allowed. 4. Face Surface: Surfaced smooth.




A. Fasteners for Interior Finish Carpentry: Nails, screws, and other anchoring devices of type, size, material, and finish required for application indicated to provide secure attachment, concealed where possible.

B. Low-Emitting Materials: Adhesives shall comply with testing and product requirements of the California Department of Public Health's "Standard Method for the Testing and Evaluation of Volatile Organic Chemical Emissions from Indoor Sources Using Environmental Chambers."

C. Multipurpose Construction Adhesive: Formulation, complying with ASTM D 3498.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Clean substrates of projections and substances detrimental to application.

B. Before installing interior finish carpentry, condition materials to average prevailing humidity in installation areas for a minimum of 24 hours unless longer conditioning is recommended by manufacturer.


A. Install interior finish carpentry level, plumb, true, and aligned with adjacent materials.

1. Use concealed shims where necessary for alignment. 2. Scribe and cut interior finish carpentry to fit adjoining work. Refinish and seal cuts as

recommended by manufacturer. 3. Where face fastening is unavoidable, countersink fasteners, fill surface flush, and sand

unless otherwise indicated. 4. Install to tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches for level and plumb. Install adjoining interior

finish carpentry with 1/32-inch maximum offset for flush installation and 1/16-inch maximum offset for reveal installation.

5. Coordinate interior finish carpentry with materials and systems in or adjacent to it. Provide cutouts for mechanical and electrical items that penetrate interior finish carpentry.

3.3 STANDING AND RUNNING TRIM INSTALLATION

A. Install trim with minimum number of joints as is practical, using full-length pieces from maximum lengths of lumber available.

1. Do not use pieces less than 24 inches long, except where necessary. 2. Stagger joints in adjacent and related standing and running trim.



3. Miter at returns, miter at outside corners, and cope at inside corners to produce tight-fitting joints with full-surface contact throughout length of joint.

4. Use scarf joints for end-to-end joints. 5. Plane backs of casings to provide uniform thickness across joints where necessary for

alignment. 6. Match color and grain pattern of trim for transparent finish (stain or clear finish) across

joints. 7. Install trim after gypsum-board joint finishing operations are completed. 8. Install without splitting; drill pilot holes before fastening where necessary to prevent

splitting. 9. Fasten to prevent movement or warping.

END OF SECTION


JANUARY 2020 THERMAL INSULATION – 072100 1 OF 5

SECTION 072100 - THERMAL INSULATION

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Extruded polystyrene foam-plastic board. 2. Glass-fiber blanket insulation. 3. Spray polyurethane foam insulation.

B. Related Sections:

1. Section 078446 "Fire-Resistive Joint Systems" for insulation installed as part of a perimeter fire-resistive joint system.

2. Section 092900 "Gypsum Board" for installation in wood-framed assemblies of insulation specified by referencing this Section.


A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.


A. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, for each product.

B. Evaluation Reports: For foam-plastic insulation, from ICC-ES.


A. Surface-Burning Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products according to ASTM E 84 by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.




A. Protect insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration due to moisture, soiling, and other sources. Store inside and in a dry location. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for handling, storing, and protecting during installation.

B. Protect foam-plastic board insulation as follows:

1. Do not expose to sunlight except to necessary extent for period of installation and concealment.

2. Protect against ignition at all times. Do not deliver foam-plastic board materials to Project site until just before installation time.

3. Quickly complete installation and concealment of foam-plastic board insulation in each area of construction.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GLASS-FIBER BLANKET INSULATION


1. CertainTeed Corporation. 2. Johns Manville. 3. Owens Corning.

B. Recycled Content: Postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content not less than 25 percent.

C. Unfaced, Glass-Fiber Blanket Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type I; with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 50, respectively, per ASTM E 84; passing ASTM E 136 for combustion characteristics.

D. Sustainability Requirements: Provide glass-fiber blanket insulation as follows:

1. Free of Formaldehyde: Insulation manufactured with 100 percent acrylic binders and no formaldehyde.

2. Low Emitting: Insulation tested according to ASTM D 5116 and shown to emit less than 0.05-ppm formaldehyde.

2.2 SPRAY POLYURETHANE FOAM INSULATION

A. Closed-Cell Polyurethane Foam Insulation: ASTM C 1029, Type II, with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 75 and 450, respectively, per ASTM E 84.


a. BASF Corporation.



b. Dow Chemical Company (The). c. Gaco Western Inc. d. Henry Company.

2. Minimum density of 1.5 lb/cu. ft., thermal resistivity of 6.2 deg F x h x sq. ft./Btu x in. at 75 deg F.

a. Aged R-value per inch thickness: 5

3. Apply to building areas with exposure to an unprotected and variable thermal environment, not otherwise protected by an adequate insulating barrier. Examples include but are not necessarily limited to: a. Underside of uninsulated elevated exterior building floor slabs above soffits. b. Other areas indicated on the drawings.

2.3 INSULATION FASTENERS

A. Power actuated carbon steel fasteners and retainer washer with recessed seat for screw head.

1. Attach directly to metal stud framing. 2. Tape all joints between insulation boards and fasteners / washers with pressure sensitive

tape.

2.4 ACCESSORIES

A. Insulation for Miscellaneous Voids:

1. Glass-Fiber Insulation: ASTM C 764, Type II, loose fill; with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 5, per ASTM E 84.

2. Spray Polyurethane Foam Insulation: ASTM C 1029, Type II, closed cell, with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 75 and 450, respectively, per ASTM E 84.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Clean substrates of substances that are harmful to insulation or that interfere with insulation attachment.


A. Comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions applicable to products and applications indicated.

B. Install insulation that is undamaged, dry, and unsoiled and that has not been left exposed to ice, rain, or snow at any time.



C. Extend insulation to envelop entire area to be insulated. Cut and fit tightly around obstructions and fill voids with insulation. Remove projections that interfere with placement.

D. Provide sizes to fit applications indicated and selected from manufacturer's standard thicknesses, widths, and lengths. Apply single layer of insulation units to produce thickness indicated unless multiple layers are otherwise shown or required to make up total thickness.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF CAVITY-WALL INSULATION

A. Foam-Plastic Board Insulation: Power actuated carbon steel fasteners and retaining washers as recommended by manufacturer. Fit courses of insulation between wall ties and other obstructions, with edges butted tightly in both directions. Press units firmly against inside substrates.

1. Tape all fasteners, joints, ruptures, and penetrations with pressure sensitive tape. 2. This installation will serve as a component of the wall air & weather barrier.

3.4 INSTALLATION OF INSULATION FOR FRAMED CONSTRUCTION

A. Apply insulation units to substrates by method indicated, complying with manufacturer's written instructions. If no specific method is indicated, bond units to substrate with adhesive or use mechanical anchorage to provide permanent placement and support of units.

B. Glass-Fiber or Mineral-Wool Blanket Insulation: Install in cavities formed by framing members according to the following requirements:

1. Use insulation widths and lengths that fill the cavities formed by framing members. If more than one length is required to fill the cavities, provide lengths that will produce a snug fit between ends.

2. Place insulation in cavities formed by framing members to produce a friction fit between edges of insulation and adjoining framing members.

3. For metal-framed wall cavities where cavity heights exceed 96 inches, support unfaced blankets mechanically.

C. Spray-Applied Insulation: Apply spray-applied insulation according to manufacturer's written instructions. Do not apply insulation until installation of pipes, ducts, conduits, wiring, and electrical outlets in walls is completed and windows, electrical boxes, and other items not indicated to receive insulation are masked. After insulation is applied, make flush with face of studs by using method recommended by insulation manufacturer.

D. Miscellaneous Voids: Install insulation in miscellaneous voids and cavity spaces where required to prevent gaps in insulation using the following materials:

1. Spray Polyurethane Insulation: Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions.

3.5 PROTECTION

A. Protect installed insulation and vapor barriers from damage due to harmful weather exposures, physical abuse, and other causes. Provide temporary coverings or enclosures where insulation is



subject to abuse and cannot be concealed and protected by permanent construction immediately after installation.



JANUARY 2020 WEATHER BARRIERS – 072500 1 OF 3

SECTION 072500 - WEATHER BARRIERS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Building wrap. 2. Flexible flashing. 3. Drainage material.




A. Evaluation Reports: For water-resistive barrier and flexible flashing, from ICC-ES.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 WATER-RESISTIVE BARRIER

A. Building Wrap: ASTM E 1677, Type I air barrier; with flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of less than 25 and 450, respectively, when tested according to ASTM E 84; UV stabilized; and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Basis-of-Design: Dupont – Tyvek Home Wrap. 2. Water-Vapor Permeance: Not less than 56 perms per ASTM E 96/E 96M, Desiccant

Method (Procedure A). 3. Flame Propagation Test: Materials and construction shall be as tested according to

NFPA 285.

B. Building-Wrap Tape: Pressure-sensitive plastic tape recommended by building-wrap manufacturer for sealing joints and penetrations in building wrap.

2.2 FLEXIBLE FLASHING

A. Butyl Rubber Flashing: Composite, self-adhesive, flashing product consisting of a pliable, butyl rubber compound, bonded to a high-density polyethylene film, aluminum foil, or spunbonded polyolefin to produce an overall thickness of not less than 0.025 inch.



1. Flame Propagation Test: Materials and construction shall be as tested according to NFPA 285.

B. Rubberized-Asphalt Flashing: Composite, self-adhesive, flashing product consisting of a pliable, rubberized-asphalt compound, bonded to a high-density polyethylene film, aluminum foil, or spunbonded polyolefin to produce an overall thickness of not less than 0.025 inch.

1. Flame Propagation Test: Materials and construction shall be as tested according to

NFPA 285.

2.3 DRAINAGE MATERIAL

A. Drainage Material: Product shall maintain a continuous open space between water-resistive barrier and exterior cladding to create a drainage plane and shall be used under adhered masonry veneer.

1. Flame Propagation Test: Materials and construction shall be as tested according to

NFPA 285.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 WATER-RESISTIVE BARRIER INSTALLATION

A. Cover sheathing with water-resistive barrier as follows:

1. Cut back barrier 1/2 inch on each side of the break in supporting members at expansion- or control-joint locations.

2. Apply barrier to cover vertical flashing with a minimum 4-inch overlap unless otherwise indicated.

B. Building Paper: Apply horizontally with a 2-inch overlap and a 6-inch end lap; fasten to sheathing with galvanized staples or roofing nails.

C. Building Wrap: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and warranty requirements.

1. Seal seams, edges, fasteners, and penetrations with tape. 2. Extend into jambs of openings and seal corners with tape.

3.2 FLEXIBLE FLASHING INSTALLATION

A. Apply flexible flashing where indicated to comply with manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Lap seams and junctures with other materials at least 4 inches except that at flashing flanges of other construction, laps need not exceed flange width.

2. Lap flashing over water-resistive barrier at bottom and sides of openings.



3. Lap water-resistive barrier over flashing at heads of openings.

3.3 DRAINAGE MATERIAL INSTALLATION

A. Install drainage material over building wrap and flashing to comply with manufacturer's written instructions.



JANUARY 2020 ASPHALT SHINGLES – 073113 1 OF 7

SECTION 073113 - ASPHALT SHINGLES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Asphalt shingles. 2. Underlayment. 3. Ridge vents


1. Section 061000 "Rough Carpentry for wood framing.

1.3 DEFINITION

A. Roofing Terminology: See ASTM D 1079 and glossary of NRCA's "The NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing Manual" for definitions of terms related to roofing work in this Section.



B. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of asphalt shingle ridge and hip cap shingles and ridge vent indicated.

1. Include similar Samples of trim and accessories involving color selection.

C. Samples for Verification: For the following products, of sizes indicated, to verify color selected:

1. Asphalt Shingle: Full size. 2. Ridge and Hip Cap Shingles: Full size. 3. Ridge Vent: 12-inch- long Sample.




A. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer.

B. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, for asphalt shingles.

C. Research/Evaluation Reports: For each type of asphalt shingle required, from the ICC.

D. Warranties: Sample of special warranties.


A. Maintenance Data: For each type of asphalt shingle to include in maintenance manuals.


A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Asphalt Shingles: 100 sq. ft of each type, in unbroken bundles.


A. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved for installation of units required for this Project.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain ridge and hip cap shingles, ridge vents, and felt underlayment] from single source from single manufacturer.

C. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.


A. Store roofing materials in a dry, well-ventilated, weathertight location according to asphalt shingle manufacturer's written instructions. Store underlayment rolls on end on pallets or other raised surfaces. Do not double stack rolls.

1. Handle, store, and place roofing materials in a manner to avoid significant or permanent damage to roof deck or structural supporting members.

B. Protect unused underlayment from weather, sunlight, and moisture when left overnight or when roofing work is not in progress.



1.10 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install asphalt shingles until spaces are enclosed and weathertight, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, and temporary HVAC system is operating and maintaining ambient temperature and humidity conditions at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.

1.11 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace asphalt shingles that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Manufacturing defects. b. Structural failures including failure of asphalt shingles to self-seal after a

reasonable time.

2. Material Warranty Period: 30 years from date of Substantial Completion. 3. Workmanship Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GLASS-FIBER-REINFORCED ASPHALT SHINGLES

A. Laminated-Strip Asphalt Shingles: ASTM D 3462, laminated, multi-ply overlay construction, glass-fiber reinforced, mineral-granule surfaced, and self-sealing.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

a. Atlas Roofing Corporation. b. CertainTeed Corporation. c. Elk Premium Building Products, Inc.; an ElkCorp company. d. Emco Building Products Corp. e. GAF Materials Corporation. f. IKO. g. Malarkey Roofing Products. h. Owens Corning. i. PABCO Roofing Products. j. TAMKO Roofing Products, Inc.

2. Butt Edge: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 3. Strip Size: Manufacturer's standard. 4. Algae Resistance: Granules treated to resist algae discoloration. 5. Color and Blends: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.



B. Hip and Ridge Shingles: Manufacturer's standard units to match asphalt shingles.

2.2 UNDERLAYMENT MATERIALS

A. Felt: ASTM D 226 or ASTM D 4869, Type I, asphalt-saturated organic felts, nonperforated.


a. ALCO-NVC Inc. b. Atlas Roofing Corporation. c. Carlisle Coatings & Waterproofing, Inc. d. CertainTeed Corporation. e. GAF Materials Corporation. f. Henry Company. g. IKO. h. Johns Manville. i. Owens Corning.

2.3 RIDGE VENTS

A. Rigid Ridge Vent: Manufacturer's standard, rigid section high-density polypropylene or other UV-stabilized plastic ridge vent with nonwoven geotextile filter strips and external deflector baffles; for use under ridge shingles.


a. Air Vent, Inc.; a Gibraltar Industries company. b. Cor-A-Vent, Inc. c. GAF Materials Corporation. d. Lomanco, Inc. e. Mid-America Building Products. f. Obdyke, Benjamin Incorporated. g. Owens Corning. h. RGM Products, Inc. i. Trimline Building Products.

2.4 ACCESSORIES

A. Asphalt Roofing Cement: ASTM D 4586, Type II, asbestos free.

B. Roofing Nails: ASTM F 1667; aluminum, stainless-steel, copper, or hot-dip galvanized-steel wire shingle nails, minimum 0.120-inch- diameter, smooth shank, sharp-pointed, with a minimum 3/8-inch- diameter flat head and of sufficient length to penetrate 3/4 inch into solid wood decking or extend at least 1/8 inch through OSB or plywood sheathing.

1. Where nails are in contact with metal flashing, use nails made from same metal as flashing.



C. Felt Underlayment Nails: Aluminum, stainless-steel, or hot-dip galvanized-steel wire with low-profile capped heads or disc caps, 1-inch minimum diameter.

2.5 METAL FLASHING AND TRIM

A. Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with recommendations in SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" that apply to design, dimensions, metal, and other characteristics of the item.

1. Cricket and Backer Flashings: Fabricate with concealed flange extending a minimum of 24 inches beneath upslope asphalt shingles and 6 inches beyond each side of penetration and 6 inches above the roof plane.

2. Drip Edges: Fabricate in lengths not exceeding 10 feet with 2-inch roof-deck flange and 1-1/2-inch fascia flange with 3/8-inch drip at lower edge.

B. Vent Pipe Flashings: ASTM B 749, Type L51121, at least 1/16 inch thick. Provide lead sleeve sized to slip over and turn down into pipe, soldered to skirt at slope of roof, and extending at least 4 inches from pipe onto roof.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

1. Examine roof sheathing to verify that sheathing joints are supported by framing and blocking or metal clips and that installation is within flatness tolerances.

2. Verify that substrate is sound, dry, smooth, clean, sloped for drainage, and completely anchored; and that provision has been made for flashings and penetrations through asphalt shingles.

B. Prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance of the Work.

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 UNDERLAYMENT INSTALLATION

A. General: Comply with underlayment manufacturer's written installation instructions applicable to products and applications indicated unless more stringent requirements apply.



B. Single-Layer Felt Underlayment: Install on roof deck parallel with and starting at the eaves. Lap sides a minimum of 2 inches over underlying course. Lap ends a minimum of 4 inches. Stagger end laps between succeeding courses at least 72 inches. Fasten with felt underlayment nails.

1. Install felt underlayment on roof deck not covered by self-adhering sheet underlayment. Lap sides of felt over self-adhering sheet underlayment not less than 3 inches in direction to shed water. Lap ends of felt not less than 6 inches over self-adhering sheet underlayment.

2. Install fasteners at no more than 36 inch o.c.

3.3 METAL FLASHING INSTALLATION

A. General: Install metal flashings and other sheet metal to comply with requirements in Section 076200 "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim."

1. Install metal flashings according to recommendations in ARMA's "Residential Asphalt Roofing Manual" and asphalt shingle recommendations in NRCA's "The NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing Manual."

B. Cricket & Backer Flashings: Install against the roof-penetrating element extending concealed flange beneath upslope asphalt shingles and beyond each side.

C. Rake Drip Edges: Install rake drip edge flashings over underlayment and fasten to roof deck.

D. Eave Drip Edges: Install eave drip edge flashings below underlayment and fasten to roof sheathing.

E. Pipe Flashings: Form flashing around pipe penetrations and asphalt shingles. Fasten and seal to asphalt shingles as recommended by manufacturer.

3.4 ASPHALT SHINGLE INSTALLATION

A. General: Install asphalt shingles according to manufacturer's written instructions, recommendations in ARMA's "Residential Asphalt Roofing Manual," and asphalt shingle recommendations in NRCA's "The NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing Manual."

B. Install starter strip along lowest roof edge, consisting of an asphalt shingle strip at least 7 inches wide with self-sealing strip face up at roof edge.

1. Extend asphalt shingles 1/2 inch over fasciae at eaves and rakes. 2. Install starter strip along rake edge.

C. Install first and remaining courses of asphalt shingles stair-stepping diagonally across roof deck with manufacturer's recommended offset pattern at succeeding courses, maintaining uniform exposure.



D. Install first and remaining courses of asphalt shingles stair-stepping diagonally across roof deck with manufacturer's recommended offset pattern at succeeding courses, maintaining uniform exposure.

E. Install asphalt shingles by single-strip column or racking method, maintaining uniform exposure. Install full-length first course followed by cut second course, repeating alternating pattern in succeeding courses.

F. Fasten asphalt shingle strips with amount of fastner’s per manufacturer’s recommendation roofing nails located according to manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Where roof slope exceeds 20:12, seal asphalt shingles with asphalt roofing cement spots after fastening with additional roofing nails.

2. Where roof slope is less than 4:12, seal asphalt shingles with asphalt roofing cement spots.

3. When ambient temperature during installation is below 50 deg F, seal asphalt shingles with asphalt roofing cement spots.

G. Closed-Cut Valleys: Extend asphalt shingle strips from one side of valley 12 inches beyond center of valley. Use one-piece shingle strips without joints in valley. Fasten with extra nail in upper end of shingle. Install asphalt shingle courses from other side of valley and cut back to a straight line 2 inches short of valley centerline. Trim upper concealed corners of cut-back shingle strips.

1. Do not nail asphalt shingles within 6 inches of valley center. 2. Set trimmed, concealed-corner asphalt shingles in a 3-inch- wide bed of asphalt roofing

cement.

H. Ridge Vents: Install continuous ridge vents over asphalt shingles according to manufacturer's written instructions. Fasten with roofing nails of sufficient length to penetrate sheathing.

I. Ridge and Hip Cap Shingles: Maintain same exposure of cap shingles as roofing shingle exposure. Lap cap shingles at ridges to shed water away from direction of prevailing winds. Fasten with roofing nails of sufficient length to penetrate sheathing.

1. Fasten ridge cap asphalt shingles to cover ridge vent without obstructing airflow.



JANUARY 2020 FIBER-CEMENT SIDING – 074646 1 OF 3

SECTION 074646 - FIBER-CEMENT SIDING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes fiber-cement siding and soffit.



B. Samples: For fiber-cement siding and soffit including related accessories.


A. Product certificates.

B. Product test reports.

C. Research/evaluation reports.

D. Sample warranty.


A. Maintenance data.


A. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and to set quality standards for fabrication and installation.

1. Build mockup of typical wall area as shown on Drawings. 2. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the

completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.

1.6 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace products that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: 50 years from date of Substantial Completion.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 FIBER-CEMENT SIDING

A. General: ASTM C 1186, Type A, Grade II, fiber-cement board, noncombustible when tested according to ASTM E 136; with a flame-spread index of 25 or less when tested according to ASTM E 84.

1. Basis-of-Design: James Hardie – HardieZone 10.

B. Labeling: Provide fiber-cement siding that is tested and labeled according to ASTM C 1186 by a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

C. Nominal Thickness: Not less than 5/16 inch.

D. HardiePlank – Lap Siding (6” exposure).

E. HardieShingle – Staggered Edge Panel.

F. HardiePanel – Vertical Siding.

G. HardieTrim – sizes as indicated on drawings.

2.2 FIBER-CEMENT SOFFIT (VENTED)

A. General: ASTM C 1186, Type A, Grade II, fiber-cement board, noncombustible when tested according to ASTM E 136; with a flame-spread index of 25 or less when tested according to ASTM E 84.

1. Basis-of-Design: James Hardie – HardieSoffit.

B. Nominal Thickness: Not less than 5/16 inch.

C. Pattern: 24-inch wide sheets with smooth texture.

D. Factory Priming: Manufacturer's standard acrylic primer.

2.3 ACCESSORIES

A. Siding Accessories, General: Provide starter strips, edge trim, outside and inside corner caps, and other items as recommended by siding manufacturer for building configuration.

B. Flashing: Provide stainless-steel flashing complying with Section 076200 "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" at window and door heads and where indicated.

C. Fasteners:



1. For fastening to wood, use siding nails of sufficient length to penetrate a minimum of 1 inch into substrate.

2. For fastening to metal, use ribbed bugle-head screws of sufficient length to penetrate a minimum of 1/4 inch, or three screw-threads, into substrate.

3. For fastening fiber cement, use hot-dip galvanized fasteners.

D. Insect Screening for Soffit Vents: Aluminum, 18-by-16 mesh or PVC-coated, glass-fiber fabric, 18-by-16 mesh.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. General: Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions applicable to products and applications indicated unless more stringent requirements apply.

1. Install fasteners no more than 24 inches o.c.

B. Install joint sealants as specified in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants" and to produce a weathertight installation.


A. Remove damaged, improperly installed, or otherwise defective materials and replace with new materials complying with specified requirements.

B. Clean finished surfaces according to manufacturer's written instructions and maintain in a clean condition during construction.



JANUARY 2020 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM – 076200 1 OF 12

SECTION 076200 - SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Manufactured through-wall flashing with counterflashing. 2. Manufactured reglets with counterflashing. 3. Formed roof-drainage sheet metal fabrications. 4. Formed low-slope roof sheet metal fabrications. 5. Formed wall sheet metal fabrications.

1.3 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate sheet metal flashing and trim layout and seams with sizes and locations of penetrations to be flashed, and joints and seams in adjacent materials.

B. Coordinate sheet metal flashing and trim installation with adjoining roofing and wall materials, joints, and seams to provide leakproof, secure, and noncorrosive installation.

1.4 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS

A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.

1. Review construction schedule. Verify availability of materials, Installer's personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays.

2. Review special roof details, roof drainage, roof-penetration flashing, equipment curbs, and condition of other construction that affect sheet metal flashing and trim.

3. Review requirements for insurance and certificates if applicable. 4. Review sheet metal flashing observation and repair procedures after flashing installation.



1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for each manufactured product and accessory.



B. Shop Drawings: For sheet metal flashing and trim.

1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and attachment details. 2. Detail fabrication and installation layouts, expansion-joint locations, and keyed details.

Distinguish between shop- and field-assembled work. 3. Include identification of material, thickness, weight, and finish for each item and location

in Project. 4. Include details for forming, including profiles, shapes, seams, and dimensions. 5. Include details for joining, supporting, and securing, including layout and spacing of

fasteners, cleats, clips, and other attachments. Include pattern of seams. 6. Include details of termination points and assemblies. 7. Include details of expansion joints and expansion-joint covers, including showing

direction of expansion and contraction from fixed points. 8. Include details of roof-penetration flashing. 9. Include details of edge conditions, including eaves, ridges, valleys, rakes, crickets, and

counterflashings as applicable. 10. Include details of special conditions. 11. Include details of connections to adjoining work. 12. Detail formed flashing and trim at scale of not less than 3 inches per 12 inches.

C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of sheet metal and accessory indicated with factory-applied finishes.

D. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish.

1. Sheet Metal Flashing: 12 inches long by actual width of unit, including finished seam and in required profile. Include fasteners, cleats, clips, closures, and other attachments.

2. Trim, Metal Closures, Expansion Joints, Joint Intersections, and Miscellaneous Fabrications: 12 inches long and in required profile. Include fasteners and other exposed accessories.

3. Unit-Type Accessories and Miscellaneous Materials: Full-size Sample. 4. Anodized Aluminum Samples: Samples to show full range to be expected for each color

required.


A. Qualification Data: For fabricator.

B. Product Certificates: For each type of coping and roof edge flashing that is SPRI ES-1 tested and FM Approvals approved.

C. Product Test Reports: For each product, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency.

D. Sample Warranty: For special warranty.




A. Maintenance Data: For sheet metal flashing and trim, and its accessories, to include in maintenance manuals.


A. Fabricator Qualifications: Employs skilled workers who custom fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim similar to that required for this Project and whose products have a record of successful in-service performance.

1. For copings and roof edge flashings that are SPRI ES-1 tested and FM Approvals approved, shop shall be listed as able to fabricate required details as tested and approved.

B. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals, to demonstrate aesthetic effects, and to set quality standards for fabrication and installation.

1. Build mockup of typical roof edge, including gutter, fascia and fascia trim, approximately 10 feet long, including supporting construction cleats, seams, attachments, underlayment, and accessories.

2. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations in writing.

3. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.


A. Do not store sheet metal flashing and trim materials in contact with other materials that might cause staining, denting, or other surface damage. Store sheet metal flashing and trim materials away from uncured concrete and masonry.

B. Protect strippable protective covering on sheet metal flashing and trim from exposure to sunlight and high humidity, except to extent necessary for period of sheet metal flashing and trim installation.

1.10 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty on Finishes: Manufacturer agrees to repair finish or replace sheet metal flashing and trim that shows evidence of deterioration of factory-applied finishes within specified warranty period.

1. Exposed Panel Finish: Deterioration includes, but is not limited to, the following:

a. Color fading more than 5 Hunter units when tested according to ASTM D 2244. b. Chalking in excess of a No. 8 rating when tested according to ASTM D 4214. c. Cracking, checking, peeling, or failure of paint to adhere to bare metal.



2. Finish Warranty Period: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. General: Sheet metal flashing and trim assemblies shall withstand wind loads, structural movement, thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather without failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction. Completed sheet metal flashing and trim shall not rattle, leak, or loosen, and shall remain watertight.

B. Sheet Metal Standard for Flashing and Trim: Comply with NRCA's "The NRCA Roofing Manual" and SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" requirements for dimensions and profiles shown unless more stringent requirements are indicated.

C. FM Approvals Listing: Manufacture and install copings and roof edge flashings that are listed in FM Approvals' "RoofNav" and approved for windstorm classification per structure classification. Identify materials with name of fabricator and design approved by FM Approvals.

D. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes to prevent buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of joint sealants, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. Base calculations on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss.

1. Temperature Change: 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces.

E. Expansion Provisions: Where lapped or bayonet-type expansion provisions in work cannot be used or would not be sufficiently water/weatherproof, form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch deep, filled with mastic sealant (concealed within joints).

2.2 SHEET METALS

A. General: Protect mechanical and other finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying strippable, temporary protective film before shipping.

B. Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B 209, alloy as standard with manufacturer for finish required, with temper as required to suit forming operations and performance required; with smooth, flat surface.

1. Color Anodic Finish, Coil Coated: AAMA 611, AA-M12C22A42/A44, Class I, 0.018 mm or thicker.

a. Color: As selected by Architect from full range of industry colors and color densities.



b. Color Range: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.

2. Exposed Coil-Coated Finish:

a. Two-Coat Fluoropolymer: AAMA 2605. Fluoropolymer finish containing not less than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in color coat. Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions.

3. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 4. Concealed Finish: Pretreat with manufacturer's standard white or light-colored acrylic or

polyester backer finish, consisting of prime coat and wash coat with minimum total dry film thickness of 0.5 mil.

2.3 UNDERLAYMENT MATERIALS

A. Felt: ASTM D 226/D 226M, Type II (No. 30), asphalt-saturated organic felt; nonperforated.

B. Slip Sheet: Rosin-sized building paper, 3 lb/100 sq. ft. minimum.


A. General: Provide materials and types of fasteners, solder, protective coatings, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required for complete sheet metal flashing and trim installation and as recommended by manufacturer of primary sheet metal or manufactured item unless otherwise indicated.

B. Fasteners: Wood screws, annular threaded nails, self-tapping screws, self-locking rivets and bolts, and other suitable fasteners designed to withstand design loads and recommended by manufacturer of primary sheet metal or manufactured item.

1. General: Blind fasteners or self-drilling screws, gasketed, with hex-washer head.

a. Exposed Fasteners: Heads matching color of sheet metal using plastic caps or factory-applied coating. Provide metal-backed EPDM or PVC sealing washers under heads of exposed fasteners bearing on weather side of metal.

b. Blind Fasteners: High-strength aluminum or stainless-steel rivets suitable for metal being fastened.

c. Spikes and Ferrules: Same material as gutter; with spike with ferrule matching internal gutter width.

2. Fasteners for Aluminum Sheet: Aluminum or Series 300 stainless steel.

C. Sealant Tape: Pressure-sensitive, 100 percent solids, polyisobutylene compound sealant tape with release-paper backing. Provide permanently elastic, nonsag, nontoxic, nonstaining tape 1/2 inch wide and 1/8 inch thick.



D. Elastomeric Sealant: ASTM C 920, elastomeric silicone polymer sealant; of type, grade, class, and use classifications required to seal joints in sheet metal flashing and trim and remain watertight.

E. Butyl Sealant: ASTM C 1311, single-component, solvent-release butyl rubber sealant; polyisobutylene plasticized; heavy bodied for hooked-type expansion joints with limited movement.

F. Epoxy Seam Sealer: Two-part, noncorrosive, aluminum seam-cementing compound, recommended by aluminum manufacturer for exterior nonmoving joints, including riveted joints.

G. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion according to ASTM D 1187.

H. Asphalt Roofing Cement: ASTM D 4586, asbestos free, of consistency required for application.

2.5 MANUFACTURED SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM

A. Through-Wall, Ribbed, Sheet Metal Flashing: Manufacture through-wall sheet metal flashing for embedment in masonry, with ribs at 3-inch intervals along length of flashing to provide integral mortar bond. Manufacture through-wall flashing with snaplock receiver on exterior face to receive counterflashing.

1. Copper: 10-oz. weight minimum for fully concealed flashing; 16 oz. weight elsewhere.

a. Equal to Keystone Flashing Company

B. Reglets: Units of type, material, and profile required, formed to provide secure interlocking of separate reglet and counterflashing pieces, and compatible with flashing indicated with factory-mitered and -welded corners and junctions and with interlocking counterflashing on exterior face, of same metal as reglet.

1. Equal to FRY Reglet Architectural Metals. 2. Material: Aluminum, 0.024 inch. 3. Surface-Mounted Type: Provide with slotted holes for fastening to substrate, with

neoprene or other suitable weatherproofing washers, and with channel for sealant at top edge.

4. Masonry Type: Provide with offset top flange for embedment in masonry mortar joint. 5. Accessories:

a. Flexible-Flashing Retainer: Provide resilient plastic or rubber accessory to secure flexible flashing in reglet where clearance does not permit use of standard metal counterflashing or where Drawings show reglet without metal counterflashing.

b. Counterflashing Wind-Restraint Clips: Provide clips to be installed before counterflashing to prevent wind uplift of counterflashing's lower edge.

6. Finish: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.




A. General: Custom fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with details shown and recommendations in cited sheet metal standard that apply to design, dimensions, geometry, metal thickness, and other characteristics of item required. Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim in shop to greatest extent possible. 1. Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim in thickness or weight needed to comply with

performance requirements, but not less than that specified for each application and metal. 2. Obtain field measurements for accurate fit before shop fabrication. 3. Form sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates without excessive oil canning,

buckling, and tool marks; true to line, levels, and slopes; and with exposed edges folded back to form hems.

4. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible. Do not use exposed fasteners on faces exposed to view.

B. Fabrication Tolerances: Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim that is capable of installation to a tolerance of 1/4 inch in 20 feet on slope and location lines indicated on Drawings and within 1/8-inch offset of adjoining faces and of alignment of matching profiles.

C. Expansion Provisions: Form metal for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim. 1. Form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch deep, filled

with butyl sealant concealed within joints. 2. Use lapped expansion joints only where indicated on Drawings.

D. Sealant Joints: Where movable, nonexpansion-type joints are required, form metal to provide for proper installation of elastomeric sealant according to cited sheet metal standard.

E. Fabricate cleats and attachment devices from same material as accessory being anchored or from compatible, noncorrosive metal.

F. Seams: Fabricate nonmoving seams with flat-lock seams. Tin edges to be seamed, form seams, and solder.

G. Seams for Aluminum: Fabricate nonmoving seams with flat-lock seams. Form seams and seal with epoxy seam sealer.

H. Do not use graphite pencils to mark metal surfaces.

2.7 ROOF-DRAINAGE SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS

A. Hanging Gutters: Fabricate to cross section required, complete with end pieces, outlet tubes, and other accessories as required. Fabricate in minimum 96-inch long sections. Furnish flat-stock gutter brackets and flat-stock gutter spacers and straps fabricated from same metal as gutters, of size recommended by cited sheet metal standard but with thickness not less than twice the gutter thickness. Fabricate expansion joints, expansion-joint covers, and gutter accessories from same metal as gutters. Shop fabricate interior and exterior corners. 1. Gutter Profile: As indicated on drawings.



2. Expansion Joints: Butt type with cover plate. 3. Accessories: Valley baffles. 4. Gutters with Girth up to 15 Inches: Fabricate from the following materials:

a. Aluminum: 0.032 inch thick.

B. Downspouts: Fabricate rectangular downspouts to dimensions indicated, complete with mitered elbows. Furnish with metal hangers from same material as downspouts and anchors. Shop fabricate elbows.

1. Fabricated Hanger Style: Fig 1-35B according to SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual."

2. Fabricate from the following materials:


2.8 LOW-SLOPE ROOF SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS

A. Roof Edge Flashing and Fascia Cap: Fabricate in minimum 96-inch long, but not exceeding 12-foot long sections. Furnish with 6-inch wide, joint cover plates. Shop fabricate interior and exterior corners.

1. Joint Style: Butted with expansion space and 6-inch wide, concealed backup plate. 2. Fabricate from the Following Materials:


B. Copings: Fabricate in minimum 96-inch long, but not exceeding 12-foot long, sections. Fabricate joint plates of same thickness as copings. Furnish with continuous cleats to support edge of external leg and drill elongated holes for fasteners on interior leg. Miter corners, solder or weld watertight. Shop fabricate interior and exterior corners.

1. Coping Profile: As indicated on drawings and according to SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual."

2. Joint Style: Butted with expansion space and 6-inch wide, concealed backup plate. 3. Fabricate from the Following Materials:


C. Base Flashing: Shop fabricate interior and exterior corners. Fabricate from the following materials:

1. Aluminum: 0.040 inch thick.

D. Counterflashing: Shop fabricate interior and exterior corners. Fabricate from the following materials:




E. Flashing Receivers: Fabricate from the following materials:


2.9 WALL SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS

A. Through-Wall Flashing: Fabricate continuous flashings in minimum 96-inch long, but not exceeding 12-foot long, sections, under copings, and at shelf angles. Fabricate discontinuous lintel, sill, and similar flashings to extend 6 inches beyond each side of wall openings; and form with 2-inch high, end dams. Fabricate from the following materials:

1. Copper: 16 oz./sq. ft.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, substrate, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

1. Verify compliance with requirements for installation tolerances of substrates. 2. Verify that substrate is sound, dry, smooth, clean, sloped for drainage, and securely

anchored. 3. Verify that air- or water-resistant barriers have been installed over sheathing or backing

substrate to prevent air infiltration or water penetration.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 UNDERLAYMENT INSTALLATION

A. Felt Underlayment: Install felt underlayment, wrinkle free, using adhesive to minimize use of mechanical fasteners under sheet metal flashing and trim. Apply in shingle fashion to shed water, with lapped joints of not less than 2 inches.

B. Apply slip sheet, wrinkle free, before installing sheet metal flashing and trim.


A. General: Anchor sheet metal flashing and trim and other components of the Work securely in place, with provisions for thermal and structural movement. Use fasteners, solder, protective coatings, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required to complete sheet metal flashing and trim system.

1. Install sheet metal flashing and trim true to line, levels, and slopes. Provide uniform, neat seams with minimum exposure of solder, welds, and sealant.



2. Install sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates and to result in watertight performance. Verify shapes and dimensions of surfaces to be covered before fabricating sheet metal.

3. Space cleats not more than 12 inches apart. Attach each cleat with at least two fasteners. Bend tabs over fasteners.

4. Install exposed sheet metal flashing and trim with limited oil canning, and free of buckling and tool marks.

5. Torch cutting of sheet metal flashing and trim is not permitted. 6. Do not use graphite pencils to mark metal surfaces.

B. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals contact each other, or where metal contacts pressure-treated wood or other corrosive substrates, protect against galvanic action or corrosion by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating or by other permanent separation as recommended by sheet metal manufacturer or cited sheet metal standard.

1. Coat concealed side of uncoated-aluminum sheet metal flashing and trim with bituminous coating where flashing and trim contact wood, ferrous metal, or cementitious construction.

2. Underlayment: Where installing sheet metal flashing and trim directly on cementitious or wood substrates, install underlayment and cover with slip sheet.

C. Expansion Provisions: Provide for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim. Space movement joints at maximum of 10 feet with no joints within 24 inches of corner or intersection.

1. Form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch deep, filled with sealant concealed within joints.

2. Use lapped expansion joints only where indicated on Drawings.

D. Fasteners: Use fastener sizes that penetrate substrate not less than recommended by fastener manufacturer to achieve maximum pull-out resistance.

E. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible in exposed work and locate to minimize possibility of leakage. Cover and seal fasteners and anchors as required for a tight installation.

F. Seal joints as required for watertight construction.

1. Use sealant-filled joints unless otherwise indicated. Embed hooked flanges of joint members not less than 1 inch into sealant. Form joints to completely conceal sealant. When ambient temperature at time of installation is between 40 and 70 deg F, set joint members for 50 percent movement each way. Adjust setting proportionately for installation at higher ambient temperatures. Do not install sealant-type joints at temperatures below 40 deg F.

2. Prepare joints and apply sealants to comply with requirements in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants."

G. Soldered Joints: Clean surfaces to be soldered, removing oils and foreign matter. Pre-tin edges of sheets with solder to width of 1-1/2 inches; however, reduce pre-tinning where pre-tinned surface would show in completed Work.

1. Do not solder metallic-coated steel and aluminum sheet.



2. Do not use torches for soldering. 3. Heat surfaces to receive solder, and flow solder into joint. Fill joint completely.

Completely remove flux and spatter from exposed surfaces. 4. Stainless-Steel Soldering: Tin edges of uncoated sheets, using solder for stainless steel

and acid flux. Promptly remove acid flux residue from metal after tinning and soldering. Comply with solder manufacturer's recommended methods for cleaning and neutralization.

5. Copper Soldering: Tin edges of uncoated sheets, using solder for copper. 6. Copper-Clad Stainless-Steel Soldering: Tin edges of uncoated sheets, using solder for

copper-clad stainless steel.

3.4 ROOF-DRAINAGE SYSTEM INSTALLATION

A. General: Install sheet metal roof-drainage items to produce complete roof-drainage system according to cited sheet metal standard unless otherwise indicated. Coordinate installation of roof perimeter flashing with installation of roof-drainage system.

B. Hanging Gutters: Join sections with joints sealed with sealant. Provide for thermal expansion. Attach gutters at eave or fascia to firmly anchor them in position. Provide end closures and seal watertight with sealant. Slope to downspouts.

1. Fasten gutter spacers to front and back of gutter. 2. Anchor and loosely lock back edge of gutter to continuous cleat. 3. Anchor gutter with gutter brackets spaced not more than 24 inches apart to roof deck,

unless otherwise indicated, and loosely lock to front gutter bead. 4. Install gutter with expansion joints at locations indicated, but not exceeding, 50 feet apart.

Install expansion-joint caps.

C. Downspouts: Join sections with 1-1/2-inch telescoping joints.

1. Provide hangers with fasteners designed to hold downspouts securely to walls. Locate hangers at top and bottom and at approximately 60 inches o.c.

2. Install downspouts with seam on the side, not concealed against the building. 3. Provide elbows at base of downspout to direct water away from building. 4. Connect downspouts to underground drainage system.

3.5 ROOF FLASHING INSTALLATION

A. General: Install sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with performance requirements, sheet metal manufacturer's written installation instructions, and cited sheet metal standard. Provide concealed fasteners where possible, and set units true to line, levels, and slopes. Install work with laps, joints, and seams that are permanently watertight and weather resistant.

B. Roof Edge Flashing: Anchor to resist uplift and outward forces according to recommendations in FM Global Property Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1-49 for FM Approvals' listing for required windstorm classification.



C. Copings: Anchor to resist uplift and outward forces according to recommendations in FM Global Property Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1-49 for specified FM Approvals' listing for required windstorm classification.

D. Pipe or Post Counterflashing: Install counterflashing umbrella with close-fitting collar with top edge flared for elastomeric sealant, extending minimum of 4 inches over base flashing. Install stainless-steel draw band and tighten.

E. Counterflashing: Coordinate installation of counterflashing with installation of base flashing. Insert counterflashing in reglets or receivers and fit tightly to base flashing. Extend counterflashing 4 inches over base flashing. Lap counterflashing joints minimum of 4 inches. Secure in waterproof manner by means of snap-in installation and sealant or lead wedges and sealant unless otherwise indicated.

3.6 WALL FLASHING INSTALLATION

A. General: Install sheet metal wall flashing to intercept and exclude penetrating moisture according to cited sheet metal standard unless otherwise indicated. Coordinate installation of wall flashing with installation of wall-opening components such as windows, doors, and louvers.

3.7 ERECTION TOLERANCES

A. Installation Tolerances: Shim and align sheet metal flashing and trim within installed tolerance of 1/4 inch in 20 feet on slope and location lines indicated on Drawings and within 1/8-inch offset of adjoining faces and of alignment of matching profiles.

3.8 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. Clean exposed metal surfaces of substances that interfere with uniform oxidation and weathering.

B. Clean and neutralize flux materials. Clean off excess solder.

C. Clean off excess sealants.

D. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films as sheet metal flashing and trim are installed unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions. On completion of sheet metal flashing and trim installation, remove unused materials and clean finished surfaces as recommended by sheet metal flashing and trim manufacturer. Maintain sheet metal flashing and trim in clean condition during construction.

E. Replace sheet metal flashing and trim that have been damaged or that have deteriorated beyond successful repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures.



JANUARY 2020 ROOF SPECIALTIES – 077100 1 OF 6

SECTION 077100 - ROOF SPECIALTIES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Roof-edge drainage systems.


1. Section 061000 "Rough Carpentry for wood nailers, curbs, and blocking. 2. Section 079200 "Joint Sealants" for field-applied sealants between roof specialties and

adjacent materials.


A. General Performance: Roof specialties shall withstand exposure to weather and resist thermally induced movement without failure, rattling, leaking, or fastener disengagement due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction.


A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes.

B. Shop Drawings: For roof specialties. Include plans, elevations, expansion-joint locations, keyed details, and attachments to other work. Distinguish between plant- and field-assembled work. Include the following:

1. Details for expansion and contraction; locations of expansion joints, including direction of expansion and contraction.

2. Pattern of seams and layout of fasteners, cleats, clips, and other attachments. 3. Details of termination points and assemblies, including fixed points. 4. Details of special conditions.

C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of roof specialty indicated with factory-applied color finishes.



D. Samples for Verification: For roof-edge drainage systems made from 12-inch lengths of full-size components including fasteners, cover joints, accessories, and attachments.


A. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, for roof-edge flashings.

B. Warranty: Sample of special warranty.


A. Maintenance Data: For roofing specialties to include in maintenance manuals.



A. Do not store roof specialties in contact with other materials that might cause staining, denting, or other surface damage. Store roof specialties away from uncured concrete and masonry.

B. Protect strippable protective covering on roof specialties from exposure to sunlight and high humidity, except to extent necessary for the period of roof specialties installation.

1.9 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty on Painted Finishes: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair finish or replace roof specialties that show evidence of deterioration of factory-applied finishes within specified warranty period.

1. Fluoropolymer Finish: Deterioration includes, but is not limited to, the following:

a. Color fading more than 5 Hunter units when tested according to ASTM D 2244. b. Chalking in excess of a No. 8 rating when tested according to ASTM D 4214. c. Cracking, checking, peeling, or failure of paint to adhere to bare metal.

2. Finish Warranty Period: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 EXPOSED METALS

A. Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B 209, alloy as standard with manufacturer for finish required, with temper to suit forming operations and performance required.

1. Surface: Smooth, flat finish. 2. Mill Finish: As manufactured. 3. Exposed Coil-Coated Finishes: Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal

surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions. 4. Color Anodic Finish, Coil Coated: AAMA 611, AA-M12C22A42/A44, Class I, 0.018

mm or thicker.

B. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221, alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and finish indicated, finished as follows:

1. Exposed High-Performance Organic Finish: Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions.

2. Color Anodic Finish, Coil Coated: AAMA 611, AA-M12C22A42/A44, Class I, 0.018 mm or thicker.

2.2 CONCEALED METALS

A. Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B 209, alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and structural performance indicated, mill finished.

B. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221, alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and structural performance indicated, mill finished.


A. General: Provide materials and types of fasteners, protective coatings, sealants, and other miscellaneous items required by manufacturer for a complete installation.

B. Fasteners: Manufacturer's recommended fasteners, suitable for application and designed to meet performance requirements. Furnish the following unless otherwise indicated:

1. Exposed Penetrating Fasteners: Gasketed screws with hex washer heads matching color of sheet metal.

2. Fasteners for Aluminum: Aluminum or Series 300 stainless steel.

C. Elastomeric Sealant: ASTM C 920, elastomeric silicone polymer sealant of type, grade, class, and use classifications required by roofing-specialty manufacturer for each application.



D. Butyl Sealant: ASTM C 1311, single-component, solvent-release butyl rubber sealant; polyisobutylene plasticized; heavy bodied for hooked-type expansion joints with limited movement.

E. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187.

F. Asphalt Roofing Cement: ASTM D 4586, asbestos free, of consistency required for application.

2.4 ROOF-EDGE DRAINAGE SYSTEMS

A. Gutters: Manufactured in uniform section lengths not exceeding 12 feet, with matching corner units, ends, outlet tubes, and other accessories. Elevate back edge at least 1 inch above front edge. Furnish flat-stock gutter straps, gutter brackets, expansion joints, and expansion-joint covers fabricated from same metal as gutters.

1. Fabricate from the following exposed metal:

a. Formed Aluminum: 0.032 inch thick.

2. Gutter Profile: Ogee according to SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." 3. Corners: Factory mitered and mechanically clinched and sealed watertight. 4. Gutter Supports: Manufacturer's standard supports as selected by Architect with finish

matching the gutters.

B. Downspouts: Plain rectangular complete with mitered elbows, manufactured from the following exposed metal. Furnish with metal hangers, from same material as downspouts, and anchors.

1. Formed Aluminum: 0.032 inch thick. 2. Extruded Aluminum: 0.125 inch thick.

C. Aluminum Finish: Color anodic.

1. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

2.5 GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS

A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.

B. Protect mechanical and painted finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.

C. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, to verify actual locations, dimensions, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Examine walls, roof edges, and parapets for suitable conditions for roof specialties.

C. Verify that substrate is sound, dry, smooth, clean, sloped for drainage, and securely anchored.

D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.


A. General: Install roof specialties according to manufacturer's written instructions. Anchor roof specialties securely in place, with provisions for thermal and structural movement. Use fasteners, solder, protective coatings, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required to complete roof-specialty systems.

1. Install roof specialties level, plumb, true to line and elevation; with limited oil-canning and without warping, jogs in alignment, buckling, or tool marks.

2. Provide uniform, neat seams with minimum exposure of solder and sealant. 3. Install roof specialties to fit substrates and to result in watertight performance. Verify

shapes and dimensions of surfaces to be covered before manufacture. 4. Torch cutting of roof specialties is not permitted. 5. Do not use graphite pencils to mark metal surfaces.

B. Metal Protection: Protect metals against galvanic action by separating dissimilar metals from contact with each other or with corrosive substrates by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating or by other permanent separation as recommended by manufacturer.

C. Fastener Sizes: Use fasteners of sizes that will penetrate substrate not less than recommended by fastener manufacturer to achieve maximum pull-out resistance.

D. Seal joints with butyl sealant as required by roofing-specialty manufacturer.

E. Seal joints as required for watertight construction. Place sealant to be completely concealed in joint. Do not install sealants at temperatures below 40 deg F.

F. Soldered Joints: Clean surfaces to be soldered, removing oils and foreign matter. Pre-tin edges of sheets to be soldered to a width of 1-1/2 inchesexcept reduce pre-tinning where pre-tinned surface would show in completed Work. Tin edges of uncoated copper sheets using solder for copper. Do not use torches for soldering. Heat surfaces to receive solder and flow solder into joint. Fill joint completely. Completely remove flux and spatter from exposed surfaces.



3.3 ROOF-EDGE DRAINAGE-SYSTEM INSTALLATION

A. General: Install components to produce a complete roof-edge drainage system according to manufacturer's written instructions. Coordinate installation of roof perimeter flashing with installation of roof-edge drainage system.

B. Gutters: Join and seal gutter lengths. Allow for thermal expansion. Attach gutters to firmly anchored gutter supports spaced not more than 24 inchesapart. Attach ends with rivets and seal with sealant to make watertight. Slope to downspouts.

1. Install gutter with expansion joints at locations indicated but not exceeding 50 feetapart. Install expansion joint caps.

C. Downspouts: Join sections with manufacturer's standard telescoping joints. Provide hangers with fasteners designed to hold downspouts securely to walls and 1 inch away from walls; locate fasteners at top and bottom and at approximately 60 inches o.c.

1. Provide elbows at base of downspout to direct water away from building. 2. Connect downspouts to underground drainage system indicated.


A. Clean exposed metal surfaces of substances that interfere with uniform oxidation and weathering.

B. Clean and neutralize flux materials. Clean off excess solder and sealants.

C. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films as roof specialties are installed. On completion of installation, clean finished surfaces including removing unused fasteners, metal filings, pop rivet stems, and pieces of flashing. Maintain roof specialties in a clean condition during construction.

D. Replace roof specialties that have been damaged or that cannot be successfully repaired by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures.



JANUARY 2020 PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING – 078413 1 OF 8

SECTION 078413 - PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Penetrations in fire-resistance-rated walls. 2. Penetrations in horizontal assemblies.


1. Section 078446 "Fire-Resistive Joint Systems" for joints in or between fire-resistance-rated construction, at exterior curtain-wall/floor intersections, and in smoke barriers.





B. Product Schedule: For each penetration firestopping system. Include location and design designation of qualified testing and inspecting agency.

1. Where Project conditions require modification to a qualified testing and inspecting agency's illustration for a particular penetration firestopping condition, submit illustration, with modifications marked, approved by penetration firestopping manufacturer's fire-protection engineer as an engineering judgment or equivalent fire-resistance-rated assembly.



B. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, for penetration firestopping.




A. Installer Certificates: From Installer indicating that penetration firestopping systems have been installed in compliance with requirements and manufacturer's written instructions.


A. Installer Qualifications: A firm experienced in installing penetration firestopping similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful performance. Qualifications include having the necessary experience, staff, and training to install manufacturer's products per specified requirements. Manufacturer's willingness to sell its penetration firestopping products to Contractor or to Installer engaged by Contractor does not in itself confer qualification on buyer.


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install penetration firestopping when ambient or substrate temperatures are outside limits permitted by penetration firestopping manufacturers or when substrates are wet because of rain, frost, condensation, or other causes.

B. Install and cure penetration firestopping per manufacturer's written instructions using natural means of ventilations or, where this is inadequate, forced-air circulation.

1.9 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate construction of openings and penetrating items to ensure that penetration firestopping is installed according to specified requirements.

B. Coordinate sizing of sleeves, openings, core-drilled holes, or cut openings to accommodate penetration firestopping.

C. Notify Owner's testing agency at least seven days in advance of penetration firestopping installations; confirm dates and times on day preceding each series of installations.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics:

1. Perform penetration firestopping system tests by a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.



2. Test per testing standards referenced in "Penetration Firestopping Systems" Article. Provide rated systems complying with the following requirements:

a. Penetration firestopping systems shall bear classification marking of a qualified testing agency.

1) UL in its "Fire Resistance Directory."

2.2 MANUFACTURERS


1. Grace Construction Products. 2. Hilti, Inc. 3. Johns Manville. 4. 3M Fire Protection Products. 5. Specified Technologies, Inc. 6. Tremco, Inc.; Tremco Fire Protection Systems Group. 7. USG Corporation.

2.3 PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING SYSTEMS

A. Provide penetration firestopping that is produced and installed to resist spread of fire according to requirements indicated, resist passage of smoke and other gases, and maintain original fire-resistance rating of construction penetrated. Penetration firestopping systems shall be compatible with one another, with the substrates forming openings, and with penetrating items if any.

B. Penetrations in Fire-Resistance-Rated Walls: Provide penetration firestopping with ratings determined per ASTM E 814 or UL 1479, based on testing at a positive pressure differential of 0.01-inch wg.

1. Fire-resistance-rated walls include smoke-barrier walls and fire rated partitions. 2. F-Rating: Not less than the fire-resistance rating of constructions penetrated.

C. Penetrations in Horizontal Assemblies: Provide penetration firestopping with ratings determined per ASTM E 814 or UL 1479, based on testing at a positive pressure differential of 0.01-inch wg.

1. Horizontal assemblies include floors. 2. F-Rating: At least 1 hour, but not less than the fire-resistance rating of constructions

penetrated. 3. T-Rating: At least 1 hour, but not less than the fire-resistance rating of constructions

penetrated except for floor penetrations within the cavity of a wall.

D. Exposed Penetration Firestopping: Provide products with flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of less than 25 and 450, respectively, as determined per ASTM E 84.



E. Accessories: Provide components for each penetration firestopping system that are needed to install fill materials and to maintain ratings required. Use only those components specified by penetration firestopping manufacturer and approved by qualified testing and inspecting agency for firestopping indicated.

1. Permanent forming/damming/backing materials, including the following:

a. Slag-wool-fiber or rock-wool-fiber insulation. b. Sealants used in combination with other forming/damming/backing materials to

prevent leakage of fill materials in liquid state. c. Fillers for sealants.

2. Temporary forming materials. 3. Substrate primers. 4. Collars. 5. Steel sleeves.

2.4 FILL MATERIALS

A. Cast-in-Place Firestop Devices: Factory-assembled devices for use in cast-in-place concrete floors and consisting of an outer metallic sleeve lined with an intumescent strip, a radial extended flange attached to one end of the sleeve for fastening to concrete formwork, and a neoprene gasket.

B. Latex Sealants: Single-component latex formulations that do not re-emulsify after cure during exposure to moisture.

C. Firestop Devices: Factory-assembled collars formed from galvanized steel and lined with intumescent material sized to fit specific diameter of penetrant.

D. Intumescent Putties: Nonhardening dielectric, water-resistant putties containing no solvents, inorganic fibers, or silicone compounds.

E. Intumescent Wrap Strips: Single-component intumescent elastomeric sheets with aluminum foil on one side.

F. Mortars: Prepackaged dry mixes consisting of a blend of inorganic binders, hydraulic cement, fillers, and lightweight aggregate formulated for mixing with water at Project site to form a nonshrinking, homogeneous mortar.

G. Silicone Foams: Multicomponent, silicone-based liquid elastomers that, when mixed, expand and cure in place to produce a flexible, nonshrinking foam.

H. Silicone Sealants: Single-component, silicone-based, neutral-curing elastomeric sealants of grade indicated below:

1. Grade: Pourable (self-leveling) formulation for openings in floors and other horizontal surfaces, and nonsag formulation for openings in vertical and sloped surfaces, unless indicated firestopping limits use of nonsag grade for both opening conditions.



2.5 MIXING

A. For those products requiring mixing before application, comply with penetration firestopping manufacturer's written instructions for accurate proportioning of materials, water (if required), type of mixing equipment, selection of mixer speeds, mixing containers, mixing time, and other items or procedures needed to produce products of uniform quality with optimum performance characteristics for application indicated.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for opening configurations, penetrating items, substrates, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Surface Cleaning: Clean out openings immediately before installing penetration firestopping to comply with manufacturer's written instructions and with the following requirements:

1. Remove from surfaces of opening substrates and from penetrating items foreign materials that could interfere with adhesion of penetration firestopping.

2. Clean opening substrates and penetrating items to produce clean, sound surfaces capable of developing optimum bond with penetration firestopping. Remove loose particles remaining from cleaning operation.

3. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete.

B. Priming: Prime substrates where recommended in writing by manufacturer using that manufacturer's recommended products and methods. Confine primers to areas of bond; do not allow spillage and migration onto exposed surfaces.

C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape to prevent penetration firestopping from contacting adjoining surfaces that will remain exposed on completion of the Work and that would otherwise be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods used to remove stains. Remove tape as soon as possible without disturbing firestopping's seal with substrates.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install penetration firestopping to comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions and published drawings for products and applications indicated.



B. Install forming materials and other accessories of types required to support fill materials during their application and in the position needed to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths required to achieve fire ratings indicated.

1. After installing fill materials and allowing them to fully cure, remove combustible forming materials and other accessories not indicated as permanent components of firestopping.

C. Install fill materials for firestopping by proven techniques to produce the following results:

1. Fill voids and cavities formed by openings, forming materials, accessories, and penetrating items as required to achieve fire-resistance ratings indicated.

2. Apply materials so they contact and adhere to substrates formed by openings and penetrating items.

3. For fill materials that will remain exposed after completing the Work, finish to produce smooth, uniform surfaces that are flush with adjoining finishes.

3.4 IDENTIFICATION

A. Wall Identification: Permanently label walls containing penetration firestopping systems with the words "FIRE AND/OR SMOKE BARRIER - PROTECT ALL OPENINGS," using lettering not less than 3 inches (76 mm) high and with minimum 0.375-inch (9.5-mm) strokes.

1. Locate in accessible concealed floor, floor-ceiling, or attic space at 15 feet (4.57 m) from end of wall and at intervals not exceeding 30 feet (9.14 m).

B. Penetration Identification: Identify each penetration firestopping system with legible metal or plastic labels. Attach labels permanently to surfaces adjacent to and within 6 inches (150 mm) of penetration firestopping system edge so labels are visible to anyone seeking to remove penetrating items or firestopping systems. Use mechanical fasteners or self-adhering-type labels with adhesives capable of permanently bonding labels to surfaces on which labels are placed. Include the following information on labels:

1. The words "Warning - Penetration Firestopping - Do Not Disturb. Notify Building Management of Any Damage."

2. Contractor's name, address, and phone number. 3. Designation of applicable testing and inspecting agency. 4. Date of installation. 5. Manufacturer's name. 6. Installer's name.


A. Where deficiencies are found or penetration firestopping is damaged or removed because of testing, repair or replace penetration firestopping to comply with requirements.

B. Proceed with enclosing penetration firestopping with other construction only after inspection reports are issued and installations comply with requirements.




A. Clean off excess fill materials adjacent to openings as the Work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials that are approved in writing by penetration firestopping manufacturers and that do not damage materials in which openings occur.

B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions during and after installation that ensure that penetration firestopping is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, immediately cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated penetration firestopping and install new materials to produce systems complying with specified requirements.

3.7 PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING SCHEDULE

A. Where UL-classified systems are indicated, they refer to system numbers in UL's "Fire Resistance Directory" under product Category XHEZ.

B. Firestopping with No Penetrating Items FS-1:

1. UL-Classified Systems: C-AJ-0011, all applications. 2. F-Rating: 2 hours for all applications. 3. T-Rating: 2 hours for all applications. 4. Type of Fill Materials: As required to achieve rating.

C. Firestopping for Metallic Pipes, Conduit, or Tubing FS-2:

1. UL-Classified Systems: C-AJ-1088, Concrete. WL-1166, Gypsum Board. 2. F-Rating: 2 hours for all applications. 3. T-Rating: 0 hours for all applications. 4. Type of Fill Materials: As required to achieve rating.

D. Firestopping for Nonmetallic Pipe, Conduit, or Tubing FS-3:

1. UL-Classified Systems: C-AJ-2171, Concrete. WL2166, Gypsum Board. 2. F-Rating: 2 hours for all applications. 3. T-Rating: 0 hours for all applications. 4. Type of Fill Materials: As required to achieve rating.

E. Firestopping for Electrical Cables FS-4:

1. UL-Classified Systems: C-AJ-3236, Concrete. WL-3198 Gypsum Board. 2. F-Rating: 2 hours for all applications. 3. T-Rating: 0 hour for C-AJ-3236 and 1 hour for WL-3198. 4. Type of Fill Materials: As required to achieve rating.

F. Firestopping for Insulated Pipes FS-5:

1. UL-Classified Systems: C-AJ-5116, Concrete. WL-5087-Gypsum Board 2. F-Rating: 2 hours for all applications.



3. T-Rating: 3/4 hour. 4. Type of Fill Materials: As required to achieve rating.

G. Firestopping for Miscellaneous Electrical Penetrants FS-6:

1. UL-Classified Systems: C-AJ-6012, Concrete. R-11636-M, Gypsum Board 2. F-Rating: 2 hours for all applications. 3. T-Rating: 0 hour. 4. Type of Fill Materials: As required to achieve rating.

H. Firestopping for Miscellaneous Mechanical Penetrants FS-7:

1. UL-Classified Systems: C-AJ-7008, Concrete. WL-7006, Gypsum Board 2. F-Rating: 2 hours for all applications. 3. T-Rating: 1/2 hour for C-AJ-7008 and 1 hour WL-7006. 4. Type of Fill Materials: As required to achieve rating

I. Firestopping for Groupings of Penetrants FS-8:

1. UL-Classified Systems: C-AJ-8012, Concrete. WL-8007, Gypsum Board 2. F-Rating: 2 hours for all applications. 3. T-Rating: 0 hours for all applications. 4. Type of Fill Materials: As required to achieve rating.



JANUARY 2020 FIRE-RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEMS – 078446 1 OF 6

SECTION 078446 - FIRE-RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Joints in or between fire-resistance-rated constructions. 2. Joints at exterior curtain-wall/floor intersections.


1. Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping" for penetrations in fire-resistance-rated walls, horizontal assemblies, and smoke barriers.





B. Product Schedule: For each joint firestopping system. Include location, illustration of firestopping system, and design designation of qualified testing agency.

1. Engineering Judgments: Where Project conditions require modification to a qualified testing agency's illustration for a particular joint firestopping system condition, submit illustration, with modifications marked, approved by joint firestopping system manufacturer's fire-protection engineer as an engineering judgment or equivalent fire-resistance-rated assembly.



B. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, for fire-resistive joint systems.




A. Installer Certificates: From Installer indicating that joint firestopping systems have been installed in compliance with requirements and manufacturer's written instructions.


A. Installer Qualifications: A firm experienced in installing fire-resistive joint systems similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful performance. Qualifications include having the necessary experience, staff, and training to install manufacturer's products per specified requirements. Manufacturer's willingness to sell its fire-resistive joint system products to Contractor or to Installer engaged by Contractor does not in itself confer qualification on buyer.


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install fire-resistive joint systems when ambient or substrate temperatures are outside limits permitted by fire-resistive joint system manufacturers or when substrates are wet due to rain, frost, condensation, or other causes.

B. Install and cure fire-resistive joint systems per manufacturer's written instructions using natural means of ventilation or, where this is inadequate, forced-air circulation.

1.9 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate construction of joints to ensure that fire-resistive joint systems are installed according to specified requirements.

B. Coordinate sizing of joints to accommodate fire-resistive joint systems.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics:

1. Perform joint firestopping system tests by a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

2. Test per testing standards referenced in "Joint Firestopping Systems" Article. Provide rated systems complying with the following requirements:

a. Joint firestopping systems shall bear classification marking of a qualified testing agency.

1) UL in its "Fire Resistance Directory."



2.2 FIRE-RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEMS

A. Where required, provide fire-resistive joint systems that are produced and installed to resist spread of fire according to requirements indicated, resist passage of smoke and other gases, and maintain original fire-resistance rating of assemblies in or between which fire-resistive joint systems are installed. Fire-resistive joint systems shall accommodate building movements without impairing their ability to resist the passage of fire and hot gases.


a. Fire Trak Corp. b. Grace Construction Products. c. Hilti, Inc. d. Johns Manville. e. 3M Fire Protection Products. f. Specified Technologies, Inc. g. Tremco, Inc.; Tremco Fire Protection Systems Group. h. USG Corporation.

B. Joints in or between Fire-Resistance-Rated Construction: Provide joint firestopping systems with ratings determined per ASTM E 1966 or UL 2079.

1. Fire-Resistance Rating: Equal to or exceeding the fire-resistance rating of the wall, floor, or roof in or between which it is installed.

C. Joints at Exterior Curtain-Wall/Floor Intersections: Provide joint firestopping systems with rating determined per ASTM E 2307.

1. F-Rating: Equal to or exceeding the fire-resistance rating of the floor assembly. 2. Provide smoke seals.

D. Exposed Fire-Resistive Joint Systems: Provide products with flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of less than 25 and 450, respectively, as determined per ASTM E 84.

E. Accessories: Provide components of fire-resistive joint systems, including primers and forming materials, that are needed to install fill materials and to maintain ratings required. Use only components specified by fire-resistive joint system manufacturer and approved by the qualified testing agency for systems indicated.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for joint configurations, substrates, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.




3.2 PREPARATION

A. Surface Cleaning: Clean joints immediately before installing fire-resistive joint systems to comply with fire-resistive joint system manufacturer's written instructions and the following requirements:

1. Remove from surfaces of joint substrates foreign materials that could interfere with adhesion of fill materials.

2. Clean joint substrates to produce clean, sound surfaces capable of developing optimum bond with fill materials. Remove loose particles remaining from cleaning operation.

3. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete.

B. Priming: Prime substrates where recommended in writing by fire-resistive joint system manufacturer using that manufacturer's recommended products and methods. Confine primers to areas of bond; do not allow spillage and migration onto exposed surfaces.

C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape to prevent fill materials of fire-resistive joint system from contacting adjoining surfaces that will remain exposed on completion of the Work and that would otherwise be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods used to remove stains. Remove tape as soon as possible without disturbing fire-resistive joint system's seal with substrates.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install fire-resistive joint systems to comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions and published drawings for products and applications indicated.

B. Install forming materials and other accessories of types required to support fill materials during their application and in position needed to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths required to achieve fire ratings indicated.

1. After installing fill materials and allowing them to fully cure, remove combustible forming materials and other accessories not indicated as permanent components of fire-resistive joint system.

C. Install fill materials for fire-resistive joint systems by proven techniques to produce the following results:

1. Fill voids and cavities formed by joints and forming materials as required to achieve fire-resistance ratings indicated.

2. Apply fill materials so they contact and adhere to substrates formed by joints. 3. For fill materials that will remain exposed after completing the Work, finish to produce

smooth, uniform surfaces that are flush with adjoining finishes.



3.4 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify fire-resistive joint systems with preprinted metal or plastic labels. Attach labels permanently to surfaces adjacent to and within 6 inches of joint edge so labels will be visible to anyone seeking to remove or penetrate joint system. Use mechanical fasteners or self-adhering-type labels with adhesives capable of permanently bonding labels to surfaces on which labels are placed. Include the following information on labels:

1. The words "Warning - Fire-Resistive Joint System - Do Not Disturb. Notify Building Management of Any Damage."

2. Contractor's name, address, and phone number. 3. Designation of applicable testing agency. 4. Date of installation. 5. Manufacturer's name. 6. Installer's name.


A. Inspecting Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections according to ASTM E 2393.

B. Where deficiencies are found, or fire-resistive joint systems are damaged or removed due to testing, repair or replace fire-resistive joint systems so they comply with requirements.

C. Proceed with enclosing fire-resistive joint systems with other construction only after inspection reports are issued and installations comply with requirements.

3.6 CLEANING AND PROTECTING

A. Clean off excess fill materials adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials that are approved in writing by fire-resistive joint system manufacturers and that do not damage materials in which joints occur.

B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions during and after installation that ensure fire-resistive joint systems are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. If damage or deterioration occurs despite such protection, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated fire-resistive joint systems immediately and install new materials to produce fire-resistive joint systems complying with specified requirements.

3.7 FIRE-RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEM SCHEDULE

A. Where UL-classified systems are indicated, they refer to system numbers in UL's "Fire Resistance Directory" under product Category XHBN or Category XHDG.



B. Wall-to-Wall, Fire-Resistive Joint Systems FRJS-1:

1. UL-Classified Systems: WW-D-0040. 2. Assembly Rating: 1 and 2 hours. 3. Nominal Joint Width: ¾ inch. 4. Movement Capabilities: Class II - 17 percent compression or extension.

C. Head-of-Wall, Fire-Resistive Joint Systems FRJS-2:

1. UL-Classified Systems: HW-D-0091. 2. Assembly Rating: 1 and 2 hours. 3. Nominal Joint Width: 1 inch maximum. 4. Movement Capabilities: Class II and Class III – 25 percent compression or extension.

D. Bottom-of-Wall, Fire-Resistive Joint Systems FRJS-3:

1. UL-Classified Systems: BW-S-0001. 2. Assembly Rating: 1 and 2 hours. 3. Nominal Joint Width: ¾ inch maximum. 4. L-Rating at Ambient: Less than 1 cfm/lf. 5. L-Rating at 400 deg F: Less than 1 cfm/lf.



JANUARY 2020 JOINT SEALANTS - 079200 1 OF 10

SECTION 079200 - JOINT SEALANTS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes sealants for the following applications, including those specified by reference to this Section:

B. This Section includes sealants for the following applications:

1. Interior joints in the following vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces:

a. Perimeter joints of exterior openings where indicated. b. Perimeter joints between interior wall surfaces and frames of interior doors,

windows, and elevator entrances. c. Joints between plumbing fixtures and adjoining walls, floors, and counters. d. Other joints as indicated.


A. Provide elastomeric joint sealants that establish and maintain watertight and airtight continuous joint seals without staining or deteriorating joint substrates.

B. Provide joint sealants for interior applications that establish and maintain airtight and water-resistant continuous joint seals without staining or deteriorating joint substrates.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each joint-sealant product indicated.

B. Product Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency indicating sealants comply with requirements, based on comprehensive testing of current product formulations.

C. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section.




A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has specialized in installing joint sealants similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project and whose work has resulted in joint-sealant installations with a record of successful in-service performance.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of joint sealant through one source from a single manufacturer.


A. Deliver materials to Project site in original unopened containers or bundles with labels indicating manufacturer, product name and designation, color, expiration date, pot life, curing time, and mixing instructions for multicomponent materials.

B. Store and handle materials in compliance with manufacturer's written instructions to prevent their deterioration or damage due to moisture, high or low temperatures, contaminants, or other causes.


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants under the following conditions:

1. When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by joint sealant manufacturer.

2. When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by joint sealant manufacturer or are below 40 deg F.

3. When joint substrates are wet.

B. Joint-Width Conditions: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants where joint widths are less than those allowed by joint sealant manufacturer for applications indicated.

C. Joint-Substrate Conditions: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants until contaminants capable of interfering with adhesion are removed from joint substrates.

1.8 WARRANTY

A. General Warranty: Special warranties specified in this Article shall not deprive Owner of other rights Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents.



B. Special Installer's Warranty: Written warranty, signed by Installer agreeing to repair or replace elastomeric joint sealants that do not comply with performance and other requirements specified in this Section within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.

C. Special Manufacturer's Warranty: Written warranty, signed by elastomeric sealant manufacturer agreeing to furnish elastomeric joint sealants to repair or replace those that do not comply with performance and other requirements specified in this Section within specified warranty period.


D. Special warranties specified in this Article exclude deterioration or failure of elastomeric joint sealants from the following:

1. Movement of the structure resulting in stresses on the sealant exceeding sealant manufacturer's written specifications for sealant elongation and compression caused by structural settlement or errors attributable to design or construction.

2. Disintegration of joint substrates from natural causes exceeding design specifications. 3. Mechanical damage caused by individuals, tools, or other outside agents. 4. Changes in sealant appearance caused by accumulation of dirt or other atmospheric

contaminants.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PRODUCTS AND MANUFACTURERS

A. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the products specified in the sealant schedules at the end of Part 3.

2.2 MATERIALS, GENERAL

A. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backings, and other related materials that are compatible with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by sealant manufacturer based on testing and field experience.

B. Colors of Exposed Joint Sealants: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range for this characteristic.



2.3 ELASTOMERIC JOINT SEALANTS

A. Elastomeric Sealant Standard: Comply with ASTM C 920 and other requirements indicated for each liquid-applied chemically curing sealant in the Elastomeric Joint-Sealant Schedule at the end of Part 3, including those referencing ASTM C 920 classifications for type, grade, class, and uses.

B. Stain-Test-Response Characteristics: Where elastomeric sealants are specified in the Elastomeric Joint-Sealant Schedule to be nonstaining to porous substrates, provide products that have undergone testing according to ASTM C 1248 and have not stained porous joint substrates indicated for Project.

2.4 LATEX JOINT SEALANTS

A. Latex Sealant Standard: Comply with ASTM C 834 for each product of this description indicated in the Latex Joint-Sealant Schedule at the end of Part 3.

2.5 ACOUSTICAL JOINT SEALANTS

A. Acoustical Sealant for Exposed and Concealed Joints: For each product of this description indicated in the Acoustical Joint-Sealant Schedule at the end of Part 3, provide manufacturer's standard nonsag, paintable, nonstaining latex sealant complying with ASTM C 834 and the following:

1. Product effectively reduces airborne sound transmission through perimeter joints and openings in building construction as demonstrated by testing representative assemblies according to ASTM E 90.

B. Acoustical Sealant for Concealed Joints: For each product of this description indicated in the Acoustical Joint-Sealant Schedule at the end of Part 3, provide manufacturer's standard, nondrying, nonhardening, nonskinning, nonstaining, gunnable, synthetic-rubber sealant recommended for sealing interior concealed joints to reduce airborne sound transmission.

2.6 JOINT-SEALANT BACKING

A. General: Provide sealant backings of material and type that are nonstaining; are compatible with joint substrates, sealants, primers, and other joint fillers; and are approved for applications indicated by sealant manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing.

B. Cylindrical Sealant Backings: ASTM C 1330, of type indicated below and of size and density to control sealant depth and otherwise contribute to producing optimum sealant performance:

1. Type C: Closed-cell material with a surface skin. 2. Type O: Open-cell material. 3. Type B: Bicellular material with a surface skin.



4. Type: Any material indicated above.

C. Elastomeric Tubing Sealant Backings: Neoprene, butyl, EPDM, or silicone tubing complying with ASTM D 1056, nonabsorbent to water and gas, and capable of remaining resilient at temperatures down to minus 26 deg F. Provide products with low compression set and of size and shape to provide a secondary seal, to control sealant depth, and otherwise contribute to optimum sealant performance.

D. Bond-Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape recommended by sealant manufacturer for preventing sealant from adhering to rigid, inflexible joint-filler materials or joint surfaces at back of joint where such adhesion would result in sealant failure. Provide self-adhesive tape where applicable.


A. Primer: Material recommended by joint sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of sealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests and field tests.

B. Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of sealants and sealant backing materials, free of oily residues or other substances capable of staining or harming joint substrates and adjacent nonporous surfaces in any way, and formulated to promote optimum adhesion of sealants with joint substrates.

C. Masking Tape: Nonstaining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants and surfaces adjacent to joints.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealants, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting joint-sealant performance.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to comply with joint sealant manufacturer's written instructions and the following requirements:

1. Remove all foreign material from joint substrates that could interfere with adhesion of joint sealant, including dust, paints (except for permanent, protective coatings tested and approved for sealant adhesion and compatibility by sealant manufacturer), old joint sealants, oil, grease, waterproofing, water repellents, water, surface dirt, and frost.



2. Clean porous joint substrate surfaces by brushing, grinding, blast cleaning, mechanical abrading, or a combination of these methods to produce a clean, sound substrate capable of developing optimum bond with joint sealants. Remove loose particles remaining from above cleaning operations by vacuuming or blowing out joints with oil-free compressed air. Porous joint surfaces include the following:

a. Concrete. b. Masonry. c. Unglazed surfaces of ceramic tile.

3. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete. 4. Clean nonporous surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means that do not stain, harm

substrates, or leave residues capable of interfering with adhesion of joint sealants.

a. Metal. b. Glass. c. Porcelain enamel. d. Glazed surfaces of ceramic tile.

B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where recommended in writing by joint sealant manufacturer, based on preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests or prior experience. Apply primer to comply with joint sealant manufacturer's written instructions. Confine primers to areas of joint-sealant bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces.

C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant with adjoining surfaces that otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape immediately after tooling without disturbing joint seal.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS

A. General: Comply with joint sealant manufacturer's written installation instructions for products and applications indicated, unless more stringent requirements apply.

B. Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations of ASTM C 1193 for use of joint sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated.

C. Acoustical Sealant Application Standard: Comply with recommendations of ASTM C 919 for use of joint sealants in acoustical applications as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated.

D. Install sealant backings of type indicated to support sealants during application and at position required to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability.

1. Do not leave gaps between ends of sealant backings. 2. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear sealant backings. 3. Remove absorbent sealant backings that have become wet before sealant application and

replace them with dry materials.



E. Install bond-breaker tape behind sealants where sealant backings are not used between sealants and back of joints.

F. Install sealants by proven techniques to comply with the following and at the same time backings are installed:

1. Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates. 2. Completely fill recesses provided for each joint configuration. 3. Produce uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow

optimum sealant movement capability.

G. Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before skinning or curing begins, tool sealants according to requirements specified below to form smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated; to eliminate air pockets; and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint.

1. Remove excess sealants from surfaces adjacent to joint. 2. Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by sealant manufacturer and that do not

discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces. 3. Provide concave joint configuration per Figure 5A in ASTM C 1193, unless otherwise

indicated. 4. Provide flush joint configuration, per Figure 5B in ASTM C 1193, where indicated. 5. Provide recessed joint configuration, per Figure 5C in ASTM C 1193, of recess depth and

at locations indicated.

a. Use masking tape to protect adjacent surfaces of recessed tooled joints.

3.4 CLEANING

A. Clean off excess sealants or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of joint sealants and of products in which joints occur.

3.5 PROTECTION

A. Protect joint sealants during and after curing period from contact with contaminating substances and from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so sealants are without deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated joint sealants immediately so installations with repaired areas are indistinguishable from the original work.



3.6 ELASTOMERIC JOINT-SEALANT SCHEDULE

A. Mildew-Resistant Silicone Sealant: Where joint sealants of this type are indicated, provide products formulated with fungicide that are intended for sealing interior ceramic tile joints and other nonporous substrates that are subject to in-service exposures of high humidity and temperature extremes, and that comply with the following:

1. Products: Provide one of the following:

a. 786 Mildew Resistant; Dow Corning. b. Sanitary 1700; GE Silicones. c. NuFlex 302; NUCO Industries, Inc. d. 898 Silicone Sanitary Sealant; Pecora Corporation. e. PSI-611; Polymeric Systems, Inc. f. Tremsil 600 White; Tremco.

2. Type and Grade: S (single component) and NS (nonsag). 3. Class: 25. 4. Use Related to Exposure: NT (nontraffic). 5. Uses Related to Joint Substrates: G, A, and, as applicable to joint substrates indicated, O.

a. Use O Joint Substrates: Ceramic Tile.

6. Applications: Interior joints between plumbing fixtures and adjoining walls, floors and counters.

B. Multicomponent Nonsag Urethane Sealant: Where joint sealants of this type are indicated, provide products complying with the following:


a. Vulkem 922; Mameco International. b. Dynatrol II; Pecora Corporation. c. Flexiprene 2000; Polymeric Systems, Inc. d. Sikaflex - 2c NS; Sika Corporation. e. DYmeric 511; Tremco.

2. Type and Grade: M (multicomponent) and NS (nonsag). 3. Class: 25. 4. Additional Movement Capability: 50 percent movement in extension and 50 percent in

compression for a total of 100 percent movement. 5. Use Related to Exposure: NT (nontraffic). 6. Uses Related to Joint Substrates: M, A, and, as applicable to joint substrates

indicated, O. 7. Applications: EIFS System.



C. Medium-Modulus Neutral-Curing Silicone Sealant: Where joint sealants of this type are indicated, provide products complying with the following:


a. 795; Dow Corning. b. HiFlex 393; NUCO Industries, Inc. c. PSI-631; Polymeric Systems, Inc. d. Spectrem 2; Tremco. e. Tremsil 600; Tremco.

2. Type and Grade: S (single component) and NS (nonsag). 3. Class: 25. 4. Use Related to Exposure: NT (nontraffic). 5. Uses Related to Joint Substrates: M, G, A, and as applicable to joint substrates

indicted, O.

a. Use O Joint Substrates: Color anodic aluminum, aluminum coated with a high-performance coating, galvanized steel, granite, and limestone.

6. Stain-Test-Response Characteristics: Nonstaining to porous substrates per ASTM C 1248.

7. Applications: G.F.R.C. column covers, expansion joints, flashings, sheet metal, granite and limestone.

3.7 LATEX JOINT-SEALANT SCHEDULE

A. Latex Sealant: Where joint sealants of this type are indicated, provide products complying with the following:


a. Chem-Calk 600; Bostik Inc. b. NuFlex 330; NUCO Industries, Inc. c. LC 160 All Purpose Acrylic Caulk; Ohio Sealants, Inc. d. AC-20; Pecora Corporation. e. PSI-701; Polymeric Systems, Inc. f. Sonolac; Sonneborn Building Products Div., ChemRex, Inc. g. Tremflex 834; Tremco.

2. Applications: Interior painted surfaces.



3.8 ACOUSTICAL JOINT-SEALANT SCHEDULE

A. Acoustical Sealant for Exposed and Concealed Joints: Where joint sealants of this type are indicated, provide products complying with the following:


a. AC-20 FTR Acoustical and Insulation Sealant; Pecora Corporation. b. SHEETROCK Acoustical Sealant; USG Corp., United States Gypsum Co.

2. Applications: Interior joints at perimeters of all sound rated walls and at all acoustical barriers vertical and horizontal.



JANUARY 2020 STEEL DOORS – 081115 1 OF 5

SECTION 081115 – STEEL DOORS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Steel entrance doors including transoms and sidelites.

B. Prehung hardwood door systems.

C. Glazing.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. American Architectural Manufacturer Association (AAMA):

1. AAMA 1304 - Voluntary Specification for Forced Entry Resistance of Side-Hinged Door Systems.

B. ASTM International (ASTM):

1. ASTM E283 - Standard Test Method for Determining Rate of Air Leakage Through Exterior Doors Under Specified Pressure Differences Across the Specimen.

2. ASTM E330 - Standard Test Method for Structural Performance of Exterior Doors by Uniform Static Pressure Difference.

3. ASTM E331 - Standard Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Doors by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference.

4. ASTM E547; Standard Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Windows, Skylights, Doors, and Curtain Walls by Cyclic Static Air Pressure Difference.

C. National Fenestration Rating Council (NFRC):

1. NFRC 100 - Procedure for Determining Fenestration Thermal Properties. 2. NFRC 200 - Solar Heat Gain Coefficient and Visible Transmittance.

D. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):

1. NFPA 252 - Standard Methods of Fire Tests of Doors Assemblies.

E. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL)

1. UL 10B - Standard for Fire Test of Door Assemblies. 2. UL 10C - Standard for positive Pressure Fire Tests of Doors Assemblies.

F. Uniform Building Code Standard 7-2 (UBC):

1. UBC 7-2 - Fire Tests of Door Assemblies. (Note: Neutral pressure testing standard).



2. UBC 7-2 - Fire Test of Door Assemblies. (Note: Positive pressure testing standard).

G. Window & Door Manufacturers Association (WDMA):

1. WDMA I.S.4 - Water Repellent Preservative Non-Pressure Treatment for Millwork. 2. Sponsored Hallmark Certification Program.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including:

B. Preparation instructions and recommendations.

C. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations.

D. Installation methods.

E. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings indicating details of construction, flashings and relationship with adjacent construction.

F. Verification Samples: For each factory-finished product specified, two samples, minimum size 6 in square, representing actual finishes.

G. Quality Assurance Submittals:

H. Design Data, Test Reports: Provide manufacturer test reports indicating product compliance with indicated requirements.

I. Manufacturer Instructions: Provide manufacturer's written installation instructions.


A. Installer Qualifications: Minimum 2 years installing similar assemblies.

B. Certifications: NAMI certification label indicating assemblies meet the design requirements.

C. Mock-Up: Provide a mock-up for evaluation of installation techniques and workmanship.

1. Mock-ups shall incorporate surrounding construction, including wall assembly fasteners, flashing, and other related accessories installed in accordance with manufacturer's approved installation methods.

2. Do not proceed with remaining work until workmanship is approved by Architect. 3. Rework mock-up as required to produce acceptable work. 4. At Substantial Completion, approved mockups may become part of completed Work. 5. Demolish mockups and remove from site.

D. Pre-installation Meeting: Conduct pre-installation meeting on site two weeks prior to commencement of installation.




A. Deliver, store and handle materials and products in strict compliance with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations and industry standards.

B. Deliver and store assembly materials and components in manufacturer's original, unopened, undamaged containers with identification labels intact.

1. Protect from damage and exposure to direct sunlight during storage. 2. Store in a dry, well-ventilated area off the floor. 3. During storage, do not remove paper or cardboard placed between products for shipment. 4. Store in a humidity and temperature-controlled facility. Recommended conditions: 30 to

50 percent relative humidity and 50 to 90 degrees F (10 to 32 degrees C).

C. Handling: Handle with clean hands and equipment. Lift and carry the products when moving them. Do not drag across one another.


A. Maintain environmental conditions; temperature, humidity, and ventilation, within limits recommended by manufacturer for optimum results. Install only in vertical walls and when conditions are dry. Do not install products under environmental conditions outside manufacturer's recommended limits.

1.7 WARRANTY

A. Manufacturer's Standard Warranty: Assemblies will be free from defects in materials and workmanship from the date of manufacture for the time periods indicated below:

1. Door Slab: 10 Years. 2. Door System: 10 Years. 3. Auralast Frame: Lifetime. 4. Steel Frame: See manufacturers separate warranty.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURER

A. Basis-of-Design: JELD-WEN Incorporated; 440 South Church Street, Suite 400, Charlotte, NC 28202; Toll Free Tel: 800-535-3936; Tel: 541-850-2606; Web: http://www.jeld-wen.com/.

B. Performance Requirements:

1. Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: Meet or exceed fire-protection ratings indicated when tested in accordance with the following: NFPA 252, UL 10B, UL 10C, and CAN/ULC S104, and UBC 7-2. Provide doors complying with specified requirements, based on



testing manufacturer's doors representative of those specified: AAMA 1304, ASTM E283, ASTM E330, and ASTM E331.

C. Materials:

1. Wood Frames: Western Pine.

a. Preservative treated with AuraLast in accordance with WDMA I.S.4.

2. Steel Skins: Galvanized steel. 0.0195 in plus or minus 2 percent.

3. Steel Skins: Galvanized steel. 0.0175 in plus or minus 2 percent. 4. Stiles and Rails:

a. Wood Edge Construction: 1 in (25.4 mm) Laminated Veneer Lumber (LVL). b. Steel Edge Construction: Galvanized Steel; 0.028 in (0.7 mm) continuous roll-

formed steel.

5. Core: Custom-fitted Polystyrene. 6. Thickness: 1-3/4 in (44 mm).

2.2 PREHUNG HARDWOOD DOOR SYSTEMS

A. Jamb:

1. Material: Primed Pine. 2. Profile: Rabbeted. 3. Width: As selected by Architect.

B. Casing: As selected by Architect.

C. Hinges: Solid brass concealed-bearing.

D. Sills: Aluminum with Oil-Rubbed Bronze Finish.

2.3 GLAZING

A. Door Glazing:

1. Clear Glass: Clear Low-E.

2.4 FABRICATION

A. Construction: One-piece of polystyrene is custom fitted in standard wood stile and rail frame. Back of steel skin is coated with epoxy primer before attachment to core and frame.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Inspect doors prior to installation. Verify doors are suitable for installation

B. Inspect rough opening for compliance with door manufacturer recommendations. Verify rough opening conditions are within recommended tolerances.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install doors in accordance with manufacturer’s installation guidelines and recommendations.

B. Install Jamb Assembly:

1. Caulk sill along outside edge and 1/2 in (13 mm) in from edge of subfloor. 2. Set door unit into center of opening and tack in place. 3. Shim hinge then latch side jambs straight. Inspect jamb for square, level and plumb. 4. Shim and fasten top of unit where sidelite joins door jamb. 5. Fasten hinge side jamb to studs. 6. Verify door opens freely and weatherstrip meets door evenly. 7. Verify door sweep contacts threshold evenly. 8. Fasten latch side jamb to studs.

C. Install Transom:

1. Apply caulk on top of door head jamb. 2. Set transom jamb on door head jamb and fasten. 3. Shim transom straight. Inspect transom for square, level and plumb. 4. Fasten transom to studs.

D. Caulk outside perimeter of door unit between brickmold and wall face, along front side of threshold, and between jamb sides and threshold.

3.3 PROTECTION

A. Protect installed doors from damage.



JANUARY 2020 MOLDED COMPOSITE DOORS – 081600 1 OF 3

SECTION 081600 – MOLDED COMPOSITE DOORS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Interior Molded Doors: Passage Doors.

1.2 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS

A. Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: Fire door assemblies shall meet or exceed fire-protection ratings indicated when tested in accordance with NFPA 252.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Submit door manufacturer current product literature, including installation instruction.

B. Samples: Provide finish samples for all products.

C. Quality Assurance Submittals

D. Manufacturer Instructions: Provide manufacturer’s written installation instructions.


A. Deliver doors, materials and components in manufacturer’s original, unopened, undamaged containers with identification labels intact.

B. Store doors as recommended by manufacturer.

1.5 WARRANTY

A. Manufacturer's Standard Warranty: Assemblies will be free from defects in materials and workmanship from the date of manufacture for the time periods indicated below:

1. Door Unit: 5 years. 2. Door Frames: 1 year. 3. Factory Prefinish: 1 year.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURER

A. Basis-of-Design: JELD-WEN, Inc.; 2645 Silver Crescent Drive, Charlotte, NC 28273; Toll Free Tel: 800-535-3936; Tel: 541-850-2606; Web: http://www.jeld-wen.com.

1. JELD-WEN’s Molded Interior Doors: Carrara.

B. PASSAGE DOORS

C. Door Style:

1. Door Type: All panel. 2. Door Shape: Squared Top. 3. Surface Finish: Smooth

D. Core and Frame:

1. Solid core with Combination wood/MDF frame.

a. Thickness: 1-3/8 inch.

2. Hollow core with Combination wood/MDF.

a. Thickness: 1-3/8 inch.

E. Hardware: None.

1. Prep door for owner supplied hinge and lockset.

F. Finish: Preprimed.

2.2 PREHUNG DOORS

A. Profile:

1. System 01, Single Door. 2. System 02, Double Door.

B. Jambs:

1. Jamb Width: 4-7/8 inch. 2. Jamb Type: Split. 3. Jamb Species: Finger-Jointed Pine.

C. Hinges: SAE 1010 Carbon Steel.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL

A. Install doors in accordance with manufacturer’s installation guidelines and recommendations.

3.2 EXAMINATION

A. Inspect door prior to installation.

B. Inspect rough opening for compliance with door manufacturer recommendations. Verify rough opening conditions are within recommended tolerances.

3.3 PREPARATION

A. Prepare door for installation in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations.

B. Trim bottom of jamb sides to achieve desired distance between door bottom and finished floor height.

3.4 PASSAGE DOOR INSTALLATION

A. Place door unit into opening and level hinge side of jamb. Use shims fastened through jamb and stop to level and temporarily secure in place.

B. Level latch side of jamb. Use shims fastened through jamb and stop to level and temporarily secure in place.

C. Verify spacing between jamb and door is uniform on all sides. Adjust as necessary.

D. Shim top of jamb in center of opening and fasten with nail.

E. Re-check for square, level and even spacing around door. Nail securely in place through stop, jamb, shims and into studs every 12 inches.

F. Set nails.

G. Install trim on both sides using nails every 12 to 16 inches.



JANUARY 2020 VINYL WINDOWS – 085313 1 OF 4

SECTION 085313 - VINYL WINDOWS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes vinyl-framed windows.





B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, hardware, accessories, insect screens, operational clearances, and details of installation, including anchor, flashing, and sealant installation.

C. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color specified.


A. Product test reports.

B. Sample warranties.

1.5 WARRANTY

A. Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace vinyl windows that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period:

a. Window: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. b. Glazing Units: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 WINDOW PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Product Standard: Comply with AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440 for definitions and minimum standards of performance, materials, components, accessories, and fabrication unless more stringent requirements are indicated.

1. Window Certification: WDMA certified with label attached to each window.

B. Thermal Transmittance: NFRC 100 maximum whole-window U-factor of 0.32 Btu/sq. ft. x h x deg F.

C. Solar Heat-Gain Coefficient (SHGC): NFRC 200 maximum whole-window SHGC of 0.27.

2.2 VINYL WINDOWS

A. Basis-of-Design: ViWinTech 1150.

B. Operating Types: As indicated on Drawings.

C. Frames and Sashes: Impact-resistant, UV-stabilized PVC complying with AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440.

1. Finish: Integral color, as selected by Architect. 2. Gypsum Board Returns: Provide at interior face of frame.

D. Glass: Clear annealed glass, ASTM C 1036, Type 1, Class 1, q3.

1. Kind: Fully tempered where indicated on Drawings.

E. Insulating-Glass Units: ASTM E 2190.

1. Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type 1, Class 1, q3.

a. Tint: Clear. b. Kind: Fully tempered where indicated on Drawings.

2. Lites: Two. 3. Filling: Fill space between glass lites with argon. 4. Low-E Coating: Pyrolytic on second surface.

F. Glazing System: Manufacturer's standard factory-glazing system that produces weathertight seal.



G. Hardware, General: Provide manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant hardware sized to accommodate sash weight and dimensions.

1. Exposed Hardware Color and Finish: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

H. Hung Window Hardware:

1. Counterbalancing Mechanism: AAMA 902. 2. Locks and Latches: Operated from the inside only. 3. Tilt Hardware: Releasing tilt latch allows sash to pivot about horizontal axis.

I. Weather Stripping: Provide full-perimeter weather stripping for each operable sash unless otherwise indicated.

J. Fasteners: Noncorrosive and compatible with window members, trim, hardware, anchors, and other components.

1. Exposed Fasteners: Do not use exposed fasteners to greatest extent possible. For application of hardware, use fasteners that match finish hardware being fastened.

2.3 ACCESSORIES

A. Dividers (False Muntins): Provide divider grilles in designs indicated for each sash lite.

1. Quantity and Type: Three per sash, one permanently located between insulating-glass lites, and two permanently attached to the interior and exterior lites.

2. Material: Manufacturer's standard. 3. Pattern: As indicated on Drawings. 4. Profile: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 5. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

2.4 INSECT SCREENS

A. General: Fabricate insect screens to integrate with window frame. Provide screen for each operable exterior sash. Screen wickets are not permitted.

2.5 FABRICATION

A. Fabricate vinyl windows in sizes indicated. Include a complete system for installing and anchoring windows.

B. Glaze vinyl windows in the factory.

C. Weather strip each operable sash to provide weathertight installation.



D. Mullions: Provide mullions and cover plates, compatible with window units, complete with anchors for support to structure and installation of window units. Allow for erection tolerances and provide for movement of window units due to thermal expansion and building deflections. Provide mullions and cover plates capable of withstanding design wind loads of window units. Provide manufacturer's standard finish to match window units.

E. Hardware: Mount hardware through double walls of vinyl extrusions or provide corrosion-resistant reinforcement.

F. Complete fabrication, assembly, finishing, hardware application, and other work in the factory to greatest extent possible. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and installation. Allow for scribing, trimming, and fitting at Project site.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing windows, hardware, accessories, and other components. For installation procedures and requirements not addressed in manufacturer's written instructions, comply with installation requirements in ASTM E 2112.

B. Install windows level, plumb, square, true to line, without distortion, anchored securely in place to structural support, and in proper relation to wall flashing and other adjacent construction to produce weathertight construction.

C. Adjust operating sashes and hardware for a tight fit at contact points and weather stripping for smooth operation and weathertight closure.

D. Clean exposed surfaces immediately after installing windows. Remove excess sealants, glazing materials, dirt, and other substances.

E. Remove and replace sashes if glass has been broken, chipped, cracked, abraded, or damaged during construction period.



JANUARY 2020 GYPSUM BOARD – 092900 1 OF 8

SECTION 092900 - GYPSUM BOARD

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Interior gypsum board.



B. Samples: For the following products:

1. Trim Accessories: Full-size Sample in 12-inch- long length for each trim accessory indicated.

2. Textured Finishes: Manufacturer's standard size for each textured finish indicated and on same backing indicated for Work.


A. Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction traffic, and other potential causes of damage. Stack panels flat and supported on risers on a flat platform to prevent sagging.


A. Environmental Limitations: Comply with ASTM C 840 requirements or gypsum board manufacturer's written recommendations, whichever are more stringent.

B. Do not install paper-faced gypsum panels until installation areas are enclosed and conditioned.

C. Do not install panels that are wet, those that are moisture damaged, and those that are mold damaged.



1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape.

2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: For fire-resistance-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 119 by an independent testing agency.

B. STC-Rated Assemblies: For STC-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 90 and classified according to ASTM E 413 by an independent testing agency.

2.2 GYPSUM BOARD, GENERAL

A. Size: Provide maximum lengths and widths available that will minimize joints in each area and that correspond with support system indicated.

2.3 INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD


1. American Gypsum. 2. CertainTeed Corp. 3. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum LLC. 4. National Gypsum Company. 5. USG Corporation.

B. Gypsum Board, Type X: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M.

1. Thickness: 5/8 inch. 2. Long Edges: Tapered.

C. Gypsum Ceiling Board, Type X: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M.

1. Thickness: 5/8 inch. 2. Long Edges: Tapered.

D. Moisture and Mold-Resistant Gypsum Board: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M. With moisture- and mold-resistant core and paper surfaces.

1. Core: 5/8 inch, Type X.



2. Long Edges: Tapered. 3. Mold Resistance: ASTM D 3273, score of 10 as rated according to ASTM D 3274.

2.4 TRIM ACCESSORIES

A. Interior Trim: ASTM C 1047.

1. Material: Paper-faced galvanized steel sheet for interior applications. 2. Shapes:

a. Cornerbead. b. LC-Bead: J-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound. c. L-Bead: L-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound. d. U-Bead: J-shaped; exposed short flange does not receive joint compound. e. Expansion (control) joint. f. Curved-Edge Cornerbead: With notched or flexible flanges.

2.5 JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS

A. General: Comply with ASTM C 475/C 475M.

B. Joint Tape:

1. Interior Gypsum Board: Paper. 2. Tile Backing Panels: As recommended by panel manufacturer.

C. Joint Compound for Interior Gypsum Board: For each coat use formulation that is compatible with other compounds applied on previous or for successive coats.

1. Embedding and First Coat: For embedding tape and first coat on joints, fasteners, and trim flanges, use setting-type taping compound.

a. Use setting-type compound for installing paper-faced metal trim accessories.

2. Fill Coat: For second coat, use setting-type, sandable topping compound. 3. Finish Coat: For third coat, use setting-type, sandable topping compound. 4. Cementitious Backer Units: As recommended by backer unit manufacturer.

2.6 AUXILIARY MATERIALS

A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards and manufacturer's written recommendations.

B. Laminating Adhesive: Adhesive or joint compound recommended for directly adhering gypsum panels to continuous substrate.

1. Laminating adhesive shall have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).



C. Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 1002, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Use screws complying with ASTM C 954 for fastening panels to steel members from 0.033 to 0.112 inch thick.

2. For fastening cementitious backer units, use screws of type and size recommended by panel manufacturer.

D. Sound Attenuation Blankets: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing) produced by combining thermosetting resins with mineral fibers manufactured from glass, slag wool, or rock wool.

1. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Comply with mineral-fiber requirements of assembly. 2. Applications include all partition types indicated to be sound partitions. 3. Thickness: 3 inch blankets.

E. Acoustical Joint Sealant: Manufacturer's standard nonsag, paintable, nonstaining latex sealant complying with ASTM C 834. Product effectively reduces airborne sound transmission through perimeter joints and openings in building construction as demonstrated by testing representative assemblies according to ASTM E 90.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Accumetric LLC; BOSS 824 Acoustical Sound Sealant. b. Grabber Construction Products; Acoustical Sealant GSC. c. Pecora Corporation; AC-20 FTR. d. Specified Technologies, Inc.; Smoke N Sound Acoustical Sealant. e. USG Corporation; SHEETROCK Acoustical Sealant.

2. Acoustical joint sealant shall have a VOC content of 250 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

3. Applications include all perimeter joints, vertical and horizontal and all penetrations of partition types indicated to be sound partitions.

F. Thermal Insulation: As specified in Section 072100 "Thermal Insulation."

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and substrates including welded hollow-metal frames and framing, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance.

B. Examine panels before installation. Reject panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged.

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.



3.2 APPLYING AND FINISHING PANELS, GENERAL

A. Comply with ASTM C 840.

B. Install ceiling panels across framing to minimize the number of abutting end joints and to avoid abutting end joints in central area of each ceiling. Stagger abutting end joints of adjacent panels not less than one framing member.

C. Install panels with face side out. Butt panels together for a light contact at edges and ends with not more than 1/16 inch of open space between panels. Do not force into place.

D. Locate edge and end joints over supports, except in ceiling applications where intermediate supports or gypsum board back-blocking is provided behind end joints. Do not place tapered edges against cut edges or ends. Stagger vertical joints on opposite sides of partitions. Do not make joints other than control joints at corners of framed openings.

E. Form control and expansion joints with space between edges of adjoining gypsum panels.

F. Cover both faces of support framing with gypsum panels in concealed spaces (above ceilings, etc.), except in chases braced internally.

1. Unless concealed application is indicated or required for sound, fire, air, or smoke ratings, coverage may be accomplished with scraps of not less than 8 sq. ft. in area.

2. Fit gypsum panels around ducts, pipes, and conduits. 3. Where partitions intersect structural members projecting below underside of floor/roof

slabs and decks, cut gypsum panels to fit profile formed by structural members; allow 1/4- to 3/8-inch- wide joints to install sealant.

G. Isolate perimeter of gypsum board applied to non-load-bearing partitions at structural abutments, except floors. Provide 1/4- to 1/2-inch- wide spaces at these locations and trim edges with edge trim where edges of panels are exposed. Seal joints between edges and abutting structural surfaces with acoustical sealant.

H. Attachment to Steel Framing: Attach panels so leading edge or end of each panel is attached to open (unsupported) edges of stud flanges first.

I. STC-Rated Assemblies: Seal construction at perimeters, behind control joints, and at openings and penetrations with a continuous bead of acoustical sealant. Install acoustical sealant at both faces of partitions at perimeters and through penetrations. Comply with ASTM C 919 and with manufacturer's written recommendations for locating edge trim and closing off sound-flanking paths around or through assemblies, including sealing partitions above acoustical ceilings.

J. Install sound attenuation blankets before installing gypsum panels unless blankets are readily installed after panels have been installed on one side.

3.3 APPLYING INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD

A. Install interior gypsum board in the following locations:



1. Wallboard Type: Vertical surfaces unless otherwise indicated. 2. Type X: Vertical surfaces unless otherwise indicated. 3. Flexible Type: Apply in double layer at curved assemblies. 4. Ceiling Type: Ceiling surfaces. 5. Moisture- and Mold-Resistant Type: (walls & ceilings) All toilets, bathrooms, Laundry,

housekeeping closets and other areas subject to unconditioned, humid environments.

B. Single-Layer Application:

1. On ceilings, apply gypsum panels before wall/partition board application to greatest extent possible and at right angles to framing unless otherwise indicated.

2. On partitions/walls, apply gypsum panels vertically (parallel to framing) unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly, and minimize end joints.

a. Stagger abutting end joints not less than one framing member in alternate courses of panels.

b. At stairwells and other high walls, install panels horizontally unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly.

3. Fastening Methods: Apply gypsum panels to supports with steel drill screws.

C. Multilayer Application:

1. On partitions/walls, apply gypsum board indicated for base layers and face layers vertically (parallel to framing) with joints of base layers located over stud or furring member and face-layer joints offset at least one stud or furring member with base-layer joints, unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly. Stagger joints on opposite sides of partitions.

2. Fastening Methods: Fasten base layers and face layers separately to supports with screws.

D. Laminating to Substrate: Where gypsum panels are indicated as directly adhered to a substrate (other than studs, joists, furring members, or base layer of gypsum board), comply with gypsum board manufacturer's written recommendations and temporarily brace or fasten gypsum panels until fastening adhesive has set.

E. Curved Surfaces:

1. Install panels horizontally (perpendicular to supports) and unbroken, to extent possible, across curved surface plus 12-inch- long straight sections at ends of curves and tangent to them.

3.4 APPLYING TILING BACKING PANELS

A. Cementitious Backer Units: ANSI A108.11, at locations indicated to receive tile.

B. Where tile and solid surface shower systems backing panels abut other types of panels in same plane, shim surfaces to produce a uniform plane across panel surfaces.

3.5 INSTALLING TRIM ACCESSORIES



A. General: For trim with back flanges intended for fasteners, attach to framing with same fasteners used for panels. Otherwise, attach trim according to manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Control Joints: Install control joints according to ASTM C 840 and in specific locations approved by Architect for visual effect.

C. Interior Trim: Install in the following locations:

1. Cornerbead: Use at outside corners. 2. LC-Bead: Use at exposed panel edges. 3. L-Bead: Use where indicated. 4. U-Bead: Use at exposed panel edges. 5. Curved-Edge Cornerbead: Use at curved openings.

3.6 FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD

A. General: Treat gypsum board joints, interior angles, edge trim, control joints, penetrations, fastener heads, surface defects, and elsewhere as required to prepare gypsum board surfaces for decoration. Promptly remove residual joint compound from adjacent surfaces.

B. Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except for trim products specifically indicated as not intended to receive tape.

C. Gypsum Board Finish Levels: Finish panels to levels indicated below and according to ASTM C 840:

1. Level 1: Ceiling plenum areas, concealed areas, attics, and where indicated. 2. Level 2: Panels that are substrate for tile. 3. Level 4: At panel surfaces that will be exposed to view unless otherwise indicated.

a. Primer and its application to surfaces are specified in Section 099123 "Interior Painting."

D. Cementitious Backer Units: Finish according to manufacturer's written instructions.

3.7 PROTECTION

A. Protect adjacent surfaces from drywall compound and promptly remove from floors and other non-drywall surfaces. Repair surfaces stained, marred, or otherwise damaged during drywall application.

B. Protect installed products from damage from weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction, and other causes during remainder of the construction period.

C. Remove and replace panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged.

1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape.



2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration.

END OF SECTION


JANUARY 2020 CERAMIC TILING – 093013 1 OF 9

SECTION 093013 - CERAMIC TILING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Porcelain tile. 2. Glazed wall tile.


1. Section 092900 "Gypsum Board" for cementitious backer units.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. General: Definitions in the ANSI A108 series of tile installation standards and in ANSI A137.1 apply to Work of this Section unless otherwise specified.

B. ANSI A108 Series: ANSI A108.01, ANSI A108.02, ANSI A108.1A, ANSI A108.1B, ANSI A108.1C, ANSI A108.4, ANSI A108.5, ANSI A108.6, ANSI A108.8, ANSI A108.9, ANSI A108.10, ANSI A108.11, ANSI A108.12, ANSI A108.13, ANSI A108.14, ANSI A108.15, ANSI A108.16, and ANSI A108.17, which are contained in its "Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile."

C. Module Size: Actual tile size plus joint width indicated.

D. Face Size: Actual tile size, excluding spacer lugs.



B. Shop Drawings: Show locations of each type of tile and tile pattern. Show widths, details, and locations of expansion, contraction, control, and isolation joints in tile substrates and finished tile surfaces.

C. Samples for Initial Selection: For tile, grout, and accessories involving color selection.



D. Samples for Verification:

1. Full-size units of each type and composition of tile and for each color and finish required. 2. Stone thresholds in 6-inch lengths. 3. Metal edge strips in 6-inch lengths.


A. Qualification Data: For Installer.

B. Master Grade Certificates: For each shipment, type, and composition of tile, signed by tile manufacturer and Installer.

C. Product Certificates: For each type of product.

D. Product Test Reports: For tile-setting and -grouting products.


A. Furnish extra materials that match and are from same production runs as products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Tile and Trim Units: Furnish quantity of full-size units equal to 3 percent of amount installed for each type, composition, color, pattern, and size indicated.

2. Grout: Furnish quantity of grout equal to 3 percent of amount installed for each type, composition, and color indicated.


A. Installer Qualifications:

1. Installer is


A. Deliver and store packaged materials in original containers with seals unbroken and labels intact until time of use. Comply with requirements in ANSI A137.1 for labeling tile packages.

B. Store tile and cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location.

C. Store aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained and contamination can be avoided.

D. Store liquid materials in unopened containers and protected from freezing.




A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install tile until construction in spaces is complete and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated in referenced standards and manufacturer's written instructions.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Source Limitations for Tile: Obtain tile from single source or producer.

B. Source Limitations for Setting and Grouting Materials: Obtain ingredients of a uniform quality for each mortar, adhesive, and grout component from single manufacturer and each aggregate from single source or producer.

1. Obtain setting and grouting materials, except for unmodified Portland cement and aggregate, from single manufacturer.

C. Source Limitations for Other Products: Obtain each of the following products specified in this Section from a single manufacturer:

1. Stone thresholds. 2. Cementitious backer units. 3. Metal edge strips.

2.2 PRODUCTS, GENERAL

A. ANSI Ceramic Tile Standard: Provide tile that complies with ANSI A137.1 for types, compositions, and other characteristics indicated.

1. Provide tile complying with Standard grade requirements unless otherwise indicated.

B. ANSI Standards for Tile Installation Materials: Provide materials complying with ANSI A108.02, ANSI standards referenced in other Part 2 articles, ANSI standards referenced by TCNA installation methods specified in tile installation schedules, and other requirements specified.

C. Mounting: For factory-mounted tile, provide back- or edge-mounted tile assemblies as standard with manufacturer unless otherwise indicated.

2.3 TILE PRODUCTS

A. Ceramic Tile Type CT-1: Unglazed porcelain tile.

1. Basis-of-Design: 2. Module Size:



3. Face Size Variation: Rectified. 4. Thickness: 5. Face: Pattern of design indicated, with manufacturer's standard edges. 6. Finish: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 7. Tile Color and Pattern: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 8. Grout Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

B. Ceramic Tile Type CT-2: Glazed wall tile.

1. Basis-of-Design: 2. Module Size: 3. Face Size Variation: Rectified. 4. Thickness: 5. Face: Pattern of design indicated, with manufacturer's standard edges. 6. Finish: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 7. Tile Color and Pattern: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 8. Grout Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

C. Accessories: Provide vitreous china accessories of type and size indicated, suitable for installing by same method as used for adjoining wall tile.

1. One soap holder for each shower and tub indicated.

2.4 THRESHOLDS

A. General: Fabricate to sizes and profiles indicated or required to provide transition between adjacent floor finishes.

1. Bevel edges at 1:2 slope, with lower edge of bevel aligned with or up to 1/16 inch above adjacent floor surface. Finish bevel to match top surface of threshold. Limit height of threshold to 1/2 inch or less above adjacent floor surface.

B. Marble Thresholds: ASTM C 503/C 503M, with a minimum abrasion resistance of 10 according to ASTM C 1353 or ASTM C 241/C 241M and with honed finish.

1. Description: As selected by Architect from manufacturer’s full range of finishes and colors.

2.5 TILE BACKING PANELS

A. Cementitious Backer Units: ANSI A118.9 or ASTM C 1325, Type A, in maximum lengths available to minimize end-to-end butt joints.

1. Thickness: 1/2 inch.



2.6 SETTING MATERIALS

A. Modified Dry-Set Mortar (Thinset): ANSI A118.4.

1. Basis-of-Design: Laticrete. 2. Provide prepackaged, dry-mortar mix containing dry, redispersible, vinyl acetate or

acrylic additive to which only water must be added at Project site. 3. For wall applications, provide mortar that complies with requirements for nonsagging

mortar in addition to the other requirements in ANSI A118.4.

2.7 GROUT MATERIALS

A. Pre-Mixed Urethane Tile Grout: ANSI A118.3, with a VOC content of 65 g/L or less.

1. Basis of Design: Bostisk Trucolor grout. 2. Provide product a premium, pre-mixed, urethane, water-based grout with color

consistency and antimicrobial protection; no color fading, streaking or shading, chemical and stain resistant; and UV-stable.

B. Water-Cleanable Epoxy Grout: ANSI A118.3, with a VOC content of 65 g/L or less.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, or comparable product by one of the following:

a. Bostik, Inc. b. Laticrete International, Inc. c. MAPEL Corporation.

2. Provide product capable of withstanding continuous and intermittent exposure to temperatures of up to 140 and 212 deg F, respectively, and certified by manufacturer for intended use.


A. Trowelable Underlayments and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement-based formulation provided or approved by manufacturer of tile-setting materials for installations indicated.

B. Metal Edge Strips: Angle or L-shaped, height to match tile and setting-bed thickness, metallic or combination of metal and PVC or neoprene base, designed specifically for flooring applications; white zinc alloy exposed-edge material.

C. Tile Cleaner: A neutral cleaner capable of removing soil and residue without harming tile and grout surfaces, specifically approved for materials and installations indicated by tile and grout manufacturers.



2.9 MIXING MORTARS AND GROUT

A. Mix mortars and grouts to comply with referenced standards and mortar and grout manufacturers' written instructions.

B. Add materials, water, and additives in accurate proportions.

C. Obtain and use type of mixing equipment, mixer speeds, mixing containers, mixing time, and other procedures to produce mortars and grouts of uniform quality with optimum performance characteristics for installations indicated.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions where tile will be installed, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

1. Verify that substrates for setting tile are firm; dry; clean; free of coatings that are incompatible with tile-setting materials, including curing compounds and other substances that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone; and comply with flatness tolerances required by ANSI A108.01 for installations indicated.

2. Verify that concrete substrates for tile floors installed with thinset mortar comply with surface finish requirements in ANSI A108.01 for installations indicated.

a. Verify that surfaces that received a steel trowel finish have been mechanically scarified.

b. Verify that protrusions, bumps, and ridges have been removed by sanding or grinding.

3. Verify that installation of grounds, anchors, recessed frames, electrical and mechanical units of work, and similar items located in or behind tile has been completed.

4. Verify that joints and cracks in tile substrates are coordinated with tile joint locations; if not coordinated, adjust joint locations in consultation with Architect.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in concrete substrates for tile floors installed with thinset mortar with trowelable leveling and patching compound specifically recommended by tile-setting material manufacturer.

B. Where indicated, prepare substrates to receive waterproofing by applying a reinforced mortar bed that complies with ANSI A108.1A and is sloped 1/4 inch per foot toward drains.



C. Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations, blend tile in the field. Combined 3 to 4 boxes.

3.3 CERAMIC TILE INSTALLATION

A. Comply with TCNA's "Handbook for Ceramic, Glass, and Stone Tile Installation" for TCNA installation methods specified in tile installation schedules. Comply with parts of the ANSI A108 series "Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile" that are referenced in TCNA installation methods, specified in tile installation schedules, and apply to types of setting and grouting materials used.

1. For the following installations, follow procedures in the ANSI A108 series of tile installation standards for providing 95 percent mortar coverage:

a. Exterior tile floors. b. Tile floors in wet areas. c. Tile floors consisting of tiles 8 by 8 inchesor larger.

B. Extend tile work into recesses and under or behind equipment and fixtures to form complete covering without interruptions unless otherwise indicated. Terminate work neatly at obstructions, edges, and corners without disrupting pattern or joint alignments.

C. Accurately form intersections and returns. Perform cutting and drilling of tile without marring visible surfaces. Carefully grind cut edges of tile abutting trim, finish, or built-in items for straight aligned joints. Fit tile closely to electrical outlets, piping, fixtures, and other penetrations so plates, collars, or covers overlap tile.

D. Provide manufacturer's standard trim shapes where necessary to eliminate exposed tile edges.

E. Where accent tile differs in thickness from field tile, vary setting-bed thickness so that tiles are flush.

F. Jointing Pattern: Lay tile in grid pattern unless otherwise indicated. Lay out tile work and center tile fields in both directions in each space or on each wall area. Lay out tile work to minimize the use of pieces that are less than half of a tile. Provide uniform joint widths unless otherwise indicated.

1. For tile mounted in sheets, make joints between tile sheets same width as joints within tile sheets so joints between sheets are not apparent in finished work.

2. Where adjoining tiles on floor, base, walls, or trim are specified or indicated to be same size, align joints.

3. Where tiles are specified or indicated to be whole integer multiples of adjoining tiles on floor, base, walls, or trim, align joints unless otherwise indicated.

G. Joint Widths: Unless otherwise indicated, install tile with the following joint widths:

1. Glazed Wall Tile: . 2. Porcelain Tile: As indicated in manufacturer’s instructions.

H. Lay out tile wainscots to dimensions indicated or to next full tile beyond dimensions indicated.



I. Expansion Joints: Provide expansion joints and other sealant-filled joints, including control, contraction, and isolation joints, where indicated. Form joints during installation of setting materials, mortar beds, and tile. Do not saw-cut joints after installing tiles.

1. Where joints occur in concrete substrates, locate joints in tile surfaces directly above them.

J. Stone Thresholds: Install stone thresholds in same type of setting bed as adjacent floor unless otherwise indicated.

1. At locations where mortar bed (thickset) would otherwise be exposed above adjacent floor finishes, set thresholds in modified dry-set mortar (thinset).

K. Metal Edge Strips: Install where exposed edge of tile flooring meets carpet.

L. Floor Sealer: Apply floor sealer to cementitious grout joints in tile floors according to floor-sealer manufacturer's written instructions. As soon as floor sealer has penetrated grout joints, remove excess sealer and sealer from tile faces by wiping with soft cloth.

3.4 WATERPROOFING INSTALLATION

A. Install waterproofing to comply with ANSI A108.13 and manufacturer's written instructions to produce waterproof membrane of uniform thickness that is bonded securely to substrate.

B. Allow waterproofing to cure and verify by testing that it is watertight before installing tile or setting materials over it.


A. Remove and replace tile that is damaged or that does not match adjoining tile. Provide new matching units, installed as specified and in a manner to eliminate evidence of replacement.

B. Cleaning: On completion of placement and grouting, clean all ceramic tile surfaces so they are free of foreign matter.

1. Remove grout residue from tile as soon as possible. 2. Clean grout smears and haze from tile according to tile and grout manufacturer's written

instructions but no sooner than 10 days after installation. Use only cleaners recommended by tile and grout manufacturers and only after determining that cleaners are safe to use by testing on samples of tile and other surfaces to be cleaned. Protect metal surfaces and plumbing fixtures from effects of cleaning. Flush surfaces with clean water before and after cleaning.



3.6 PROTECTION

A. Protect installed tile work with kraft paper or other heavy covering during construction period to prevent staining, damage, and wear. If recommended by tile manufacturer, apply coat of neutral protective cleaner to completed tile walls and floors.

B. Prohibit foot and wheel traffic from tiled floors for at least seven days after grouting is completed.

C. Before final inspection, remove protective coverings and rinse neutral protective cleaner from tile surfaces.

3.7 INTERIOR CERAMIC TILE INSTALLATION SCHEDULE

A. Interior Floor Installations, Concrete Subfloor:

1. Ceramic Tile Installation: TCNA F113; thinset mortar.

a. Ceramic Tile Type: CT-1 b. Thinset Mortar: Modified dry-set mortar. c. Grout: grout.

B. Interior Wall Installations, Wood or Metal Studs or Furring:

1. Ceramic Tile Installation: TCNA W244C or TCNA W244F; thinset mortar on cementitious backer units or fiber-cement backer board.

a. Ceramic Tile Type: Insert tile-type designation. b. Thinset Mortar: Modified dry-set mortar. c. Grout: grout.



JANUARY 2020 RESILIENT TILE FLOORING – 096519 1 OF 6

SECTION 096519 - RESILIENT TILE FLOORING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Luxury vinyl floor tile.



B. Shop Drawings: For each type of floor tile. Include floor tile layouts, edges, columns, doorways, enclosing partitions, built-in furniture, cabinets, and cutouts.

1. Show details of special patterns.

C. Samples: Full-size units of each color and pattern of floor tile required.

D. Samples for Verification: Full-size units of each color and pattern of floor tile required.

E. Product Schedule: For floor tile. Use same designations indicated on Drawings.




A. Maintenance Data: For each type of floor tile to include in maintenance manuals.




A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Floor Tile: Furnish one box for every 50 boxes or fraction thereof, of each type, color, and pattern of floor tile installed.


A. Installer Qualifications: An entity that employs installers and supervisors who are competent in techniques required by manufacturer for floor tile installation and seaming method indicated.

1. Engage an installer who employs workers for this Project who are trained or certified by floor tile manufacturer for installation techniques required.


A. Store floor tile and installation materials in dry spaces protected from the weather, with ambient temperatures maintained within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 50 deg F or more than 90 deg F. Store floor tiles on flat surfaces.


A. Maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 70 deg F or more than 95 deg F, in spaces to receive floor tile during the following time periods:

1. 48 hours before installation. 2. During installation. 3. 48 hours after installation.

B. After installation and until Substantial Completion, maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 55 deg F or more than 95 deg F.

C. Close spaces to traffic during floor tile installation.

D. Close spaces to traffic for 48 hours after floor tile installation.

E. Install floor tile after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed.

1.10 SUBSTITUTIONS

A. All bid submittals must conform to the specifications in this document.

B. All test results to be in accordance with a certified independent testing laboratory.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: For resilient tile flooring, as determined by testing identical products according to ASTM E 648 or NFPA 253 by a qualified testing agency.

1. Critical Radiant Flux Classification: Class I, not less than 0.45 W/sq. cm.

2.2 LUXURY VINYL FLOOR TILE

A. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Mannington Nature’s Path, or comparable products by one of the following:

1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc. 2. Centiva 3. Mohawk: (Basis-of-Design) Mohawk LVP. 4. Shaw Contract Group.

B. Tile Standard: ASTM F 1700.

1. Class: Class III, printed film vinyl tile. 2. Type: B, embossed surface.

C. Thickness: .

D. Size: Architect / Interior Designer to select from manufacturers’ full range of sizes.

E. Patterns: Architect / Interior Designer to select from manufacturers’ full range of colors and designs.

F. Location: As indicated on document.

2.3 INSTALLATION MATERIALS

A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement based or blended hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided or approved by floor tile manufacturer for applications indicated.

B. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by floor tile and adhesive manufacturers to suit floor tile and substrate conditions indicated.

C. Floor Polish: Provide protective, liquid floor-polish products recommended by floor tile manufacturer.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

1. Verify that finishes of substrates comply with tolerances and other requirements specified in other Sections and that substrates are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits that might interfere with adhesion of floor tile.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Prepare substrates according to floor tile manufacturer's written instructions to ensure adhesion of resilient products.

B. Concrete Substrates: Prepare according to ASTM F 710.

1. Verify that substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, and hardeners. 2. Remove substrate coatings and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives and

that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using mechanical methods recommended by floor tile manufacturer. Do not use solvents.

3. Alkalinity and Adhesion Testing: Perform tests recommended by floor tile manufacturer. Proceed with installation only after substrate alkalinity falls within range on pH scale recommended by manufacturer in writing, but not less than 5 or more than 9 pH.

4. Moisture Testing: Perform test so that each test area does not exceed 1,000 sq. ft., and perform no fewer than three tests in each installation area with test areas evenly spaced in installation areas.

a. Anhydrous Calcium Chloride Test: ASTM F 1869. Proceed with installation only after substrates have maximum moisture-vapor-emission rate of 3 lb of water/1000 sq. ft.in 24 hours.

b. Relative Humidity Test: Using in-situ probes, ASTM F 2170. Proceed with installation only after substrates have a maximum 75 percent relative humidity level measurement.

C. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates with trowelable leveling and patching compound; remove bumps and ridges to produce a uniform and smooth substrate.



D. Do not install floor tiles until they are the same temperature as the space where they are to be installed.

1. At least 48 hours in advance of installation, move resilient floor tile and installation materials into spaces where they will be installed.

E. Immediately before installation, sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient floor tile.

F. Verify that required floor mounted utilities are in correct locations.

3.3 FLOOR TILE INSTALLATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing floor tile.

B. Lay out floor tiles from center marks established with principal walls, discounting minor offsets, so tiles at opposite edges of room are of equal width. Adjust as necessary to avoid using cut widths that equal less than one-half tile at perimeter.

C. Match floor tiles for color and pattern by selecting tiles from cartons in the same sequence as manufactured and packaged, if so numbered. Discard broken, cracked, chipped, or deformed tiles.

D. Scribe, cut, and fit floor tiles to butt neatly and tightly to vertical surfaces and permanent fixtures including built-in furniture, cabinets, pipes, outlets, and door frames.

E. Extend floor tiles into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, and similar openings. Extend floor tiles to center of door openings.

F. Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future cutting by repeating on floor tiles as marked on substrates. Use chalk or other nonpermanent marking device.

G. Install floor tiles on covers for telephone and electrical ducts, building expansion-joint covers, and similar items in installation areas. Maintain overall continuity of color and pattern between pieces of tile installed on covers and adjoining tiles. Tightly adhere tile edges to substrates that abut covers and to cover perimeters.

H. Adhere floor tiles to substrates using a full spread of adhesive applied to substrate to produce a completed installation without open cracks, voids, raising and puckering at joints, telegraphing of adhesive spreader marks, and other surface imperfections.

3.4 INSTALLATION OF ACCESSORIES

A. Install accessories as required by drawings and per manufacturer’s specifications.




A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and protecting floor tile.

B. Perform the following operations immediately after completing floor tile installation:

1. Remove adhesive and other blemishes from surfaces. 2. Sweep and vacuum surfaces thoroughly. 3. Damp-mop surfaces to remove marks and soil.

C. Protect floor tile from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period.

D. Floor Polish: Remove soil, adhesive, and blemishes from floor tile surfaces before applying liquid floor polish.

1. Apply coat(s) as required by manufacturer’s recommendations.

E. Joint Sealant: Apply sealant to resilient terrazzo floor tile perimeter and around columns, at door frames, and at other joints and penetrations.

F. Sealers and Finish Coats: Remove soil, visible adhesive, and surface blemishes from resilient terrazzo floor tile surfaces before applying liquid cleaners, sealers, and finish products.

G. Cover tile until Substantial Completion.



JANUARY 2020 SHEET CARPETING – 096816 1 OF 6

SECTION 096816 - SHEET CARPETING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Tufted carpet.



1. Include manufacturer's written data on physical characteristics and durability. 2. Include manufacturer's written installation recommendations for each type of substrate.

B. Shop Drawings: For carpet installation, showing the following:

1. Columns, doorways, enclosing walls or partitions, built-in cabinets, and locations where cutouts are required in carpet.

2. Carpet type, color, and dye lot. 3. Locations where dye lot changes occur. 4. Seam locations, types, and methods. 5. Type of subfloor. 6. Type of installation. 7. Pattern type, repeat size, location, direction, and starting point. 8. Pile direction. 9. Types, colors, and locations of insets and borders. 10. Types, colors, and locations of edge, transition, and other accessory strips. 11. Transition details to other flooring materials.

C. Samples: For each of the following products and for each color and texture required. Label each Sample with manufacturer's name, material description, color, pattern, and designation indicated on Drawings and in schedules.

1. Carpet: 12-inch- square Sample.



D. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of product.

1. Include Samples of exposed edge, transition, and other accessory stripping involving color or finish selection.

E. Samples for Verification: For each of the following products and for each color and texture required. Label each Sample with manufacturer's name, material description, color, pattern, and designation indicated on Drawings and in schedules.

1. Carpet: 12-inch- square Sample.

F. Product Schedule: For carpet. Use same designations indicated on Drawings.

G. Sustainable Product Certification: Provide ANSI/NSF 140 certification for carpet products.



B. Product Test Reports: For carpet, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency.

C. Sample Warranties: For special warranties.


A. Maintenance Data: For carpet to include in maintenance manuals. Include the following:

1. Methods for maintaining carpet, including cleaning and stain-removal products and procedures and manufacturer's recommended maintenance schedule.

2. Precautions for cleaning materials and methods that could be detrimental to carpet.


A. Furnish extra materials, from the same product run, that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Carpet: Full-width rolls equal to 5 percent of amount installed for each type indicated, but not less than 10 sq. yd..


A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who is certified by the International Certified Floorcovering Installers Association at the Commercial II certification level.




A. Comply with CRI's "CRI Carpet Installation Standard."

B. Deliver carpet in original mill protective covering with mill register numbers and tags attached.


A. Comply with CRI's "CRI Carpet Installation Standard" for temperature, humidity, and ventilation limitations.

B. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install carpet until spaces are enclosed and weathertight, wet-work in spaces is complete and dry, and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at levels planned for building occupants during the remainder of the construction period.

C. Do not install carpet over concrete slabs until slabs have cured, are sufficiently dry to bond with adhesive, and have pH range recommended by carpet manufacturer.

D. Where demountable partitions or other items are indicated for installation on top of carpet, install carpet before installing these items.

1.10 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty for Carpet: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of carpet installation that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty does not include deterioration or failure of carpet due to unusual traffic, failure of substrate, vandalism, or abuse.


a. More than 10 percent loss of face fiber, edge raveling, snags, and runs. b. Loss of tuft bind strength. c. Excess static discharge. d. Delamination.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 TUFTED CARPET

A. Basis-of-Design: Mohawk PM306 Fierce Competition.

B. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

C. Pattern: As selected by Architect from manufacturer’s full range.



D. Fiber Content: 100 percent nylon 6, 6.

E. Primary Backing: Manufacturer's standard material.

F. Roll Width: 12 feet.Applied Treatments:

1. Applied Soil-Resistance Treatment: Manufacturer's standard material.

G. Performance Characteristics:

1. Appearance Retention Rating: Moderate traffic, 2.5 minimum according to ASTM D 7330.

2. Critical Radiant Flux Classification: Not less than 0.22 W/sq. cm according to NFPA 253.

3. Dry Breaking Strength: Not less than 100 lbf according to ASTM D 2646. 4. Tuft Bind: Not less than 3 lbf according to ASTM D 1335. 5. Delamination: Not less than 2.5 lbf / in according to ASTM D 3936.

2.2 INSTALLATION ACCESSORIES

A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided or recommended by carpet manufacturer.

B. Adhesives: Water-resistant, mildew-resistant, nonstaining type to suit products and subfloor conditions indicated, that complies with flammability requirements for installed carpet and is recommended or provided by carpet manufacturer.

C. Seam Adhesive: Hot-melt adhesive tape or similar product recommended by carpet manufacturer for sealing and taping seams and butting cut edges at backing to form secure seams and to prevent pile loss at seams.

D. Metal Edge/Transition Strips: Extruded aluminum with mill finish of profile and width shown, of height required to protect exposed edge of carpet, and of maximum lengths to minimize running joints.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content, alkalinity range, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting carpet performance.

B. Examine carpet for type, color, pattern, and potential defects.



C. Concrete Slabs: Verify that finishes comply with requirements specified in Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete" and that surfaces are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits.

1. Moisture Testing: Perform tests so that each test area does not exceed1000 sq. ft.and perform no fewer than three tests in each installation area and with test areas evenly spaced in installation areas.

a. Anhydrous Calcium Chloride Test: ASTM F 1869. Proceed with installation only after substrates have maximum moisture-vapor-emission rate of 3 lb of water/1000 sq. ft. in 24 hours.

b. Relative Humidity Test: Using in situ probes, ASTM F 2170. Proceed with installation only after substrates have a maximum 75 percent relative humidity level measurement.

c. Perform additional moisture tests recommended in writing by adhesive and carpet manufacturers. Proceed with installation only after substrates pass testing.

D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. General: Comply with CRI's "CRI Carpet Installation Standard" and with carpet manufacturer's written installation instructions for preparing substrates.

B. Use trowelable leveling and patching compounds, according to manufacturer's written instructions, to fill cracks, holes, depressions, and protrusions in substrates. Fill or level cracks, holes and depressions 1/8 inch wide or wider, and protrusions more than 1/32 inch, unless more stringent requirements are required by manufacturer's written instructions.

C. Concrete Substrates: Remove coatings, including curing compounds, and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, without using solvents. Use mechanical methods recommended in writing by adhesive and carpet manufacturers.

D. Broom and vacuum clean substrates to be covered immediately before installing carpet.

3.3 CARPET INSTALLATION

A. Comply with CRI's "CRI Carpet Installation Standard" and carpet manufacturer's written installation instructions for the following:

1. Direct-glue-down installation. 2. Stretch-in installation.

B. Comply with carpet manufacturer's written instructions and Shop Drawings for seam locations and direction of carpet; maintain uniformity of carpet direction and lay of pile. At doorways, center seams under the door in closed position.



C. Install pattern parallel to walls and borders.

D. Install borders with mitered corner seams.

E. Do not bridge building expansion joints with carpet.

F. Cut and fit carpet to butt tightly to vertical surfaces, permanent fixtures, and built-in furniture including cabinets, pipes, outlets, edgings, thresholds, and nosings. Bind or seal cut edges as recommended by carpet manufacturer.

G. Extend carpet into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, open-bottomed obstructions, removable flanges, alcoves, and similar openings.

H. Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future cutting by repeating on carpet as marked on subfloor. Use nonpermanent, nonstaining marking device.


A. Perform the following operations immediately after installing carpet:

1. Remove excess adhesive, seam sealer, and other surface blemishes using cleaner recommended by carpet manufacturer.

2. Remove yarns that protrude from carpet surface. 3. Vacuum carpet using commercial machine with face-beater element.

B. Protect installed carpet to comply with CRI's "CRI Carpet Installation Standard."

C. Protect carpet against damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during the remainder of construction period. Use protection methods recommended in writing by carpet manufacturer and carpet adhesive manufacturer.



JANUARY 2020 GYPCRETE – 098000 1 OF 6

SECTION 098000 - GYPCRETE

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Description of Work: Work of this section includes underlayment for interior finish flooring.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. Underwriters Laboratory Fire Resistance Volume 1 www.ul.com

B. GREENGUARD Certified GREENGUARD and GREENGUARD Gold Certified www.greenguard.org

C. ASTM E336 and E1007 Field Sound Transmission Class (F-STC), Field Impact Insulation Class (F-IIC)

D. ASTM E90 and E492 Sound Transmission Class (STC), Impact Insulation Class (IIC)

E. ASTM C472M Compressive strength of gypsum concrete

F. ASTM F2170 Standard Test Method for Determining Relative Humidity in Concrete Floor Slab

G. ASTM F2419 Standard Test Method for Installation of Thick Poured Gypsum Concrete and Preparation of Surface to Receive Resilient Flooring

H. ASTM F2678 Standard Practice for Preparing Panel Underlayments, Thick Poured Lightweight Cellular Concrete

Underlayments, and Concrete Subfloors with Underlayment Patching Compounds to Receive Resilient Flooring

I. TCNA F 180 Tile Council of North America Installation Handbook www.tileusa.com

J. NWFA National Wood Flooring Association Instructions www.nwfa.org

K. Finished Floor Goods Procedures Maxxon Procedures for Attaching Finished Floor Goods to Maxxon Underlayments www.maxxon.com



1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Submit sale sheets Gyp-Crete Sales Sheet, Acousti-Mat Ultimate Sound Control Systems, Acousti-Mat Perimeter Isolation Strip Spec Sheet, Procedures for Attaching Finished Floor Goods to Maxxon Underlayments, and Maxxon’s Building Conditions Guide with project materials clearly identified for each required product or system.

B. UL Directory Fire Resistance Volume 1 – L593 1 hour fire rating.

C. Acoustical Data: Submit sound tests according to IBC code criteria ASTM E492 (IIC) and ASTM E90 (STC) or ASTM E1007 (F-IIC) and E336 (F-IIC).

1.4 SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS

A. Performance Requirements:

1. Gyp-Crete Floor Underlayment

a. Compressive strength up to 2,200 psi (up to 15.2 MPa) b. Density 110 pounds per cubic foot (1,762 kg/m3)

2. Sound Control – 2009 International Building Code: Section 1207.2 & .3

a. Minimum Sound Transmission Class, 50 STC (45 if field tested) – Section 1207.2

1) ASTM E90 and E336

b. Minimum Impact Insulation Class, 50 IIC (45 if field tested) – Section 1207.3

1) ASTM E492 and E1007


A. Performance Standards:

1. All materials, unless otherwise indicated, shall be manufactured by Maxxon Corporation and shall be installed in accordance with its current printed directions and by a Maxxon Corporation Authorized Applicator.

2. Underlayment mix shall be tested for a slump using a 2" (i.d.) x 4" (50 mm x 101 mm) cylinder resulting in a patty size of 8 1/2” (216 mm) plus or minus 1 inch (25 mm) diameter.

3. Compressive strength tested in accordance with ASTM C472M.


A. All materials shall be delivered in their original unopened packages and protected from damage and exposure from the elements. Damaged or deteriorated materials shall be removed from the premises.




A. Before, during and after installation of product, building interior shall be enclosed, with adequate ventilation and heat maintained at a temperature above 50 °F (10 °C) to allow for drying of product.

PART 2 - GENERAL

2.1 PRODUCTS AND MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturer: Maxxon Corporation, Hamel, MN. Telephone: (800) 356-7887

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Proprietary products/systems: Poured flooring underlayment and topping products, including the following:

1. Gyp-Crete Floor Underlayment.

B. Proprietary products/systems: Optional Sound Control that does not negate the fire rating and is specified in UL design. Acoustical performance is dependent on system design and construction.

1. Acousti-Mat® LP Sound Mat 2. Acousti-Mat® LPR Sound Mat 3. Acousti-Mat® I Sound Mat 4. Acousti-Mat® II Sound Mat 5. Acousti-Mat® II HP Sound Mat 6. Enkasonic® Sound Mat 7. Enkasonic® HP Sound Mat 8. Acousti-Mat® 3 Sound Mat 9. Acousti-Mat® 3 HP Sound Mat

C. Maxxon Acousti-Mat Perimeter Isolation Strips as manufactured by Maxxon Corporation, Hamel, MN

D. Maxxon Acousti-Mat Tape as manufactured by Maxxon Corporation, Hamel, MN

E. Maxxon Floor Primer:

1. Material Standard: Comply with specifications outlined in manufacturer's Design and Installation Guide for wood.

F. Mix Water:

1. Material Standard: Potable, free from impurities and from a domestic source.



G. Sand Aggregate:

1. Sand shall meet Maxxon Sand Specification 101.

H. Maxxon Overspray Primer Sealer:

1. Seal all areas that receive glue down floor goods with Maxxon Overspray according to manufacturer's specifications.

I. Maxxon Acrylic Primer Sealer (Alternate to Overspray):

1. Seal all areas that receive glue down floor goods with Maxxon Acrylic according to manufacturer’s specifications.

J. Maxxon Reinforcement or Maxxon CSM (Crack Suppression Mat):

1. Install approved reinforcement as per manufacturer recommendations. For reinforcement requirements see page 5.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Site Verification of Conditions:

1. Installation shall not begin until the building is enclosed, including roof, windows, doors, and any other apertures.

2. Wood substrate shall be structurally sound, properly fastened, and dry. Contractor shall clean subfloor to remove mud, oil, grease, and other contaminating factors before arrival of the authorized applicator.

3. Wood substrate:

a. The wood subfloor must be adequate to withstand live and dead loads with a deflection limitation of L/360.

b. Wood should be agency approved 23/32” (18 mm) T & G subfloor sheathing.

3.2 REQUIREMENTS

A. Leak Prevention:

1. Fill cracks and voids in subfloor where leakage of slurry could occur.

B. Priming subfloor:

1. Prime substrate according to manufacturer's recommendations.

C. Application:



1. Install in accordance with reference standards and manufacturer's instructions.

3.3 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS

A. Mixing Proportions:

1. General Requirements: Mix proportions and methods shall be in strict accordance with product manufacturer recommendations.

B. Application:

1. Pour floor topping to recommended thickness. Immediately spread and screed product to a smooth surface. Expansion joints in all types of work shall be brought through the underlayment.

a. Minimum Maxxon Underlayment Depth:

Substrate Depth of Pour Wood ¾” (19 mm) Acousti-Mat LP ½” (13 mm) Acousti-Mat LPR ¾” (19 mm) Acousti-Mat I ¾” (19 mm) Acousti-Mat II 1” (25 mm) Acousti-Mat II HP 1” (25 mm) Enkasonic 1” (25 mm) Enkasonic HP 1” (25 mm) Acousti-Mat 3 1 ½” (38 mm) reinforced Acousti-Mat 3 HP 1 ½” (38 mm) reinforced

C. Drying:

1. The general contractor must provide and maintain correct environmental conditions to keep the building clean and dry, and protect against infestation of moisture from a variety of potential sources. The general contractor must supply mechanical ventilation and heat if necessary to remove moisture from the area until the Gyp-Crete is dry.

2. Protection from Heavy Loads: During construction, place temporary wood planking over Gyp-Crete wherever it will be subject to heavy wheeled or concentrated loads.

3.4 PREPARATION FOR INSTALLATION OF GLUE DOWN FLOOR GOODS

A. Sealing:

1. Seal all areas that receive glue down floor goods with Maxxon Overspray or Maxxon Acrylic according to the Maxxon Corporation's specifications. Any floor areas where the surface has been damaged shall be cleaned and sealed regardless of floor covering to be used. Where floor goods manufacturers require special adhesive or installation systems, their requirements supersede these recommendations.



2. Maxxon UWR can be used over Maxxon underlayments in low traffic areas such as utility rooms, storage rooms and closets, as a protective surface.

B. Moisture Testing:

1. Follow the respective floor goods manufacturers’ recommendations for relative humidity requirements. When manufacturer does not have a relative humidity requirement, refer to Maxxon’s Procedures for Attaching Finished Floor Goods to Maxxon Underlayments brochure.

C. Finished Floor Goods:

1. There are many reference standards for the installation procedures and recommendations for finished flooring applications over gypsum underlayments. These include instructions of the manufacturers of the finished flooring, adhesives and thin-set as well as national agency reference standards. The national standards are listed below:

Flooring Type Reference StandardResilient ASTM F2419Ceramic Tile TCNA F180Wood NWFA Instructions

2. See Maxxon Corporation's Procedures for Attaching Finished Floor Goods to Maxxon

Underlayments brochure for guidelines for installing finished floor goods. This procedure is not a warranty and is to be used as a guideline only.



JANUARY 2020 EXTERIOR PAINTING – 099113 1 OF 8

SECTION 099113 - EXTERIOR PAINTING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes surface preparation and the application of paint systems on exterior substrates:

1. Steel. 2. Galvanized metal. 3. Wood.


1. Section 099123 "Interior Painting" for surface preparation and the application of paint systems on interior substrates.


A. Product Data: For each type of product. Include preparation requirements and application instructions.

1. Indicate VOC content.

B. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of topcoat product.

C. Samples for Verification: For each type of paint system and each color and gloss of topcoat.

1. Submit Samples on rigid backing, 8 inches square. 2. Label each coat of each Sample. 3. Label each Sample for location and application area.

D. Product List: For each product indicated, include the following:

1. Cross-reference to paint system and locations of application areas. Use same designations indicated on Drawings and in schedules.

2. Indicate VOC content.




A. Coating Maintenance Manual: Provide coating maintenance manual including area summary with finish schedule, area detail designating location where each product/color/finish was used, product data pages, material safety data sheets, care and cleaning instructions, touch-up procedures, and color samples of each color and finish used.



1. Paint: 1 gal.of each material and color applied.


A. Mockups: Apply mockups of each paint system indicated and each color and finish selected to verify preliminary selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.

1. Architect will select one surface to represent surfaces and conditions for application of each paint system specified in Part 3.

a. Vertical and Horizontal Surfaces: Provide samples of at least 100 sq. ft. b. Other Items: Architect will designate items or areas required.

2. Final approval of color selections will be based on mockups.

a. If preliminary color selections are not approved, apply additional mockups of additional colors selected by Architect at no added cost to Owner.

3. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations in writing.

4. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.


A. Delivery and Handling: Deliver products to Project site in an undamaged condition in manufacturer's original sealed containers, complete with labels and instructions for handling, storing, unpacking, protecting, and installing. Packaging shall bear the manufacture’s label with the following information:

1. Product name and type (description). 2. Batch date. 3. Color number.



4. VOC content. 5. Environmental handling requirements. 6. Surface preparation requirements. 7. Application instructions.

B. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in well-ventilated areas with ambient temperatures continuously maintained at not less than 45 deg F.

1. Maintain containers in clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. 2. Remove rags and waste from storage areas daily.


A. Apply paints only when temperature of surfaces to be painted and ambient air temperatures are between 50 and 95 deg F.

B. Do not apply paints in snow, rain, fog, or mist; when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; at temperatures less than 5 deg F above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces.

C. Hazardous Materials: It is not expected that hazardous materials will be encountered in the Work.

1. If suspected hazardous materials are encountered, do not disturb; immediately notify Architect and Owner.

D. Hazardous Materials: Hazardous materials including lead paint [are] [may be] present in buildings and structures to be painted. A report on the presence of known hazardous materials is on file for review and use. Examine report to become aware of locations where hazardous materials are present.

1. Do not disturb hazardous materials or items suspected of containing hazardous materials except under procedures specified.

2. Perform preparation for painting of substrates known to include lead paint in accordance with EPA Renovation, Repair and Painting Rule and additional requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Sherwin-Williams Company (The); products indicated or comparable product from one of the following:

1. Benjamin Moore & Co. 2. Farrell-Calhoun. 3. PPG Architectural Finishes, Inc.



B. Comparable Products: Comparable products of approved manufacturers will be considered in accordance with Section 016000 "Product Requirements," and the following:

1. Products are approved by manufacturer in writing for application specified. 2. Products meet performance and physical characteristics of basis of design product

including published ratio of solids by volume, plus or minus two percent.

C. Source Limitations: Obtain paint materials from single source from single listed manufacturer.

1. Manufacturer's designations listed on a separate color schedule are for color reference only and do not indicate prior approval.

2.2 PAINT, GENERAL

A. Material Compatibility:

1. Provide materials for use within each coating system that are compatible with one another and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.

2. For each coat in a coating system, provide products recommended in writing by manufacturers of topcoat for use in coating system and on substrate indicated.

3. Provide products of same manufacturer for each coat in a coating system.

B. VOC Content: For field applications that are inside the weatherproofing system, paints and coatings shall comply with VOC content limits of authorities having jurisdiction and, for interior paints and coatings applied at Project site, the following VOC content limits, exclusive of colorants added to a tint base, when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24):

1. Flat Paints and Coatings: 50 g/L. 2. Nonflat Paints and Coatings: 150 g/L. 3. Primers, Sealers, and Undercoaters: 200 g/L. 4. Anticorrosive and Antirust Paints Applied to Ferrous Metals: 250 g/L. 5. Floor Coatings: 100 g/L. 6. Shellacs, Clear: 730 g/L. 7. Shellacs, Pigmented: 550 g/L.

C. Low-Emitting Materials: Interior paints and coatings shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Service's "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Chemical Emissions from Various Sources Using Small Scale Environmental Chambers."

D. Colors: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.



2.3 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A. Testing of Paint Materials: Owner reserves the right to invoke the following procedure:

1. Owner will engage the services of a qualified testing agency to sample paint materials. Contractor will be notified in advance and may be present when samples are taken. If paint materials have already been delivered to Project site, samples may be taken at Project site. Samples will be identified, sealed, and certified by testing agency.

2. Testing agency will perform tests for compliance with product requirements. 3. Owner may direct Contractor to stop applying paints if test results show materials being

used do not comply with product requirements. Contractor shall remove noncomplying paint materials from Project site, pay for testing, and repaint surfaces painted with rejected materials. Contractor will be required to remove rejected materials from previously painted surfaces if, on repainting with complying materials, the two paints are incompatible.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility with existing finishes and primers. Where acceptability of substrate conditions is in question, apply samples and perform in-situ testing to verify compatibility, adhesion, and film integrity of new paint application.

1. Report, in writing, conditions that may affect application, appearance, or performance of paint.

B. Substrate Conditions:

1. Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates: When measured with an electronic moisture meter as follows:

a. Wood: 15 percent.

C. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility, with existing finishes and primers.

D. Proceed with coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected; application of coating indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Manual" applicable to substrates and paint systems indicated.



B. Remove hardware, covers, plates, and similar items already in place that are removable and are not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item, provide surface-applied protection before surface preparation and painting.

1. After completing painting operations, use workers skilled in the trades involved to reinstall items that were removed. Remove surface-applied protection.

C. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of paints, including dust, dirt, oil, grease, and incompatible paints and encapsulants.

1. Remove incompatible primers and reprime substrate with compatible primers or apply tie coat as required to produce paint systems indicated.

D. Steel Substrates: Remove rust, loose mill scale, and shop primer if any. Clean using methods recommended in writing by paint manufacturer, but not less than the following:

1. SSPC-SP 2, "Hand Tool Cleaning.” 2. SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning.” 3. SSPC-SP 7/NACE No. 4, "Brush-off Blast Cleaning.” 4. SSPC-SP 11, "Power Tool Cleaning to Bare Metal.”

E. Shop-Primed Steel Substrates: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint, and paint exposed areas with the same material as used for shop priming to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-primed surfaces.

F. Galvanized-Metal Substrates: Remove grease and oil residue from galvanized sheet metal by mechanical methods to produce clean, lightly etched surfaces that promote adhesion of subsequently applied paints.

G. Wood Substrates:

1. Scrape and clean knots. Before applying primer, apply coat of knot sealer recommended in writing by topcoat manufacturer for exterior use in paint system indicated.

2. Sand surfaces that will be exposed to view, and dust off. 3. Prime edges, ends, faces, undersides, and backsides of wood. 4. After priming, fill holes and imperfections in the finish surfaces with putty or plastic

wood filler. Sand smooth when dried.

3.3 APPLICATION

A. Apply paints according to manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Manual."

1. Use applicators and techniques suited for paint and substrate indicated. 2. Paint surfaces behind movable items same as similar exposed surfaces. Before final

installation, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed items with prime coat only. 3. Paint both sides and edges of exterior doors and entire exposed surface of exterior door

frames. 4. Paint entire exposed surface of window frames and sashes.



5. Do not paint over labels of independent testing agencies or equipment name, identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates.

6. Primers specified in painting schedules may be omitted on items that are factory primed or factory finished if acceptable to topcoat manufacturers.

B. Tint undercoats same color as topcoat, but tint each undercoat a lighter shade to facilitate identification of each coat if multiple coats of same material are to be applied. Provide sufficient difference in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat.

C. If undercoats or other conditions show through topcoat, apply additional coats until cured film has a uniform paint finish, color, and appearance.

D. Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in sharp lines and color breaks.

E. Painting Fire Suppression, Plumbing, HVAC, Electrical, Communication, and Electronic Safety and Security Work:

1. Paint the following work where exposed to view:

a. Equipment, including panelboards and switch gear. b. Uninsulated metal piping. c. Uninsulated plastic piping. d. Pipe hangers and supports. e. Metal conduit. f. Plastic conduit. g. Tanks that do not have factory-applied final finishes.


A. Dry Film Thickness Testing: Owner may engage the services of a qualified testing and inspecting agency to inspect and test paint for dry film thickness.

1. Contractor shall touch up and restore painted surfaces damaged by testing. 2. If test results show that dry film thickness of applied paint does not comply with paint

manufacturer's written recommendations, Contractor shall pay for testing and apply additional coats as needed to provide dry film thickness that complies with paint manufacturer's written recommendations.


A. At end of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded materials from Project site.

B. After completing paint application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paints by washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces.



C. Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct damage to work of other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by Architect, and leave in an undamaged condition.

D. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces.

3.6 EXTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE

A. Ferrous Metal, Galvanized-Metal, and Steel Substrates:

1. Single Component Acrylic Coating System:

a. Prime Coat: Primer.

1) S-W Pro Industrial Pro-Cryl Universal Primer, B66-310 Series, 5.0 to 10.0 mils wet, 2.0 to 4.0 mils dry.

b. Intermediate Coat: Pro Industrial High Performance Acrylic Coating, B66-600 Series matching topcoat.

c. Topcoat: Pro Industrial High Performance Acrylic coating, exterior, semi-gloss.

1) S-W Pro Industrial = Semi-Gloss Coating, B66-600 Series, at 2.5 to 4.0 mils dry, per coat.

B. Wood Substrates: Including exposed wood items not indicated to receive shop-applied finish.

1. Single Component Acrylic Coating System:

a. Prime Coat: Primer.

1) S-W Pro Industrial Pro-Cryl Universal Primer, B66-310 Series, 5.0 to 10.0 mils wet, 2.0 to 4.0 mils dry.

b. Intermediate Coat: Pro Industrial High Performance Acrylic Coating, B66-600 Series matching topcoat.

c. Topcoat: Pro Industrial High Performance Acrylic coating, exterior, semi-gloss.

1) S-W Pro Industrial = Semi-Gloss Coating, B66-600 Series, at 2.5 to 4.0 mils dry, per coat.



JANUARY 2020 INTERIOR PAINTING – 099123 1 OF 8

SECTION 099123 - INTERIOR PAINTING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes surface preparation and the application of paint systems on interior substrates.

1. Galvanized metal. 2. Wood. 3. Gypsum board.


1. Section 099113 "Exterior Painting" for surface preparation and the application of paint systems on exterior substrates.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Gloss Level 1: Not more than 5 units at 60 degrees and 10 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.

B. Gloss Level 2: Not more than 10 units at 60 degrees and 10 to 35 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.

C. Gloss Level 3: 10 to 25 units at 60 degrees and 10 to 35 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.

D. Gloss Level 4: 20 to 35 units at 60 degrees and not less than 35 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.

E. Gloss Level 5: 35 to 70 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.

F. Gloss Level 6: 70 to 85 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.

G. Gloss Level 7: More than 85 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.


A. Product Data: For each type of product. Include preparation requirements and application instructions.



B. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of topcoat product.

C. Samples for Verification: For each type of paint system and in each color and gloss of topcoat.

1. Submit Samples on rigid backing, 8 inches square. 2. Step coats on Samples to show each coat required for system. 3. Label each coat of each Sample. 4. Label each Sample for location and application area.

D. Product List: For each product indicated, include the following:

1. Cross-reference to paint system and locations of application areas. Use same designations indicated on Drawings and in schedules.

2. Printout of current "MPI Approved Products List" for each product category specified in Part 2, with the proposed product highlighted.

3. VOC content.



1. Paint: 5 percent, but not less than 1 gal. of each material and color applied.


A. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in well-ventilated areas with ambient temperatures continuously maintained at not less than 45 deg F.

1. Maintain containers in clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. 2. Remove rags and waste from storage areas daily.


A. Apply paints only when temperature of surfaces to be painted and ambient air temperatures are between 50 and 95 deg F.

B. Do not apply paints when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; at temperatures less than 5 deg F above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

Basis-of-Design Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Benjamin Moore & Co.



2. Farrell-Calhoun. 3. PPG Architectural Finishes, Inc. 4. Sherwin Williams Company (The), (Basis-of-Design).

2.2 PAINT, GENERAL

A. MPI Standards: Provide products that comply with MPI standards indicated and that are listed in its "MPI Approved Products List."

B. Material Compatibility:

1. Provide materials for use within each paint system that are compatible with one another and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.

2. For each coat in a paint system, provide products recommended in writing by manufacturers of topcoat for use in paint system and on substrate indicated.

C. VOC Content: Products shall comply with VOC limits of authorities having jurisdiction and, for interior paints and coatings applied at Project site, the following VOC limits, exclusive of colorants added to a tint base, when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

1. Flat Paints and Coatings: 50 g/L. 2. Nonflat Paints and Coatings: 150 g/L. 3. Dry-Fog Coatings: 400 g/L. 4. Primers, Sealers, and Undercoaters: 200 g/L. 5. Anticorrosive and Antirust Paints Applied to Ferrous Metals: 250 g/L. 6. Zinc-Rich Industrial Maintenance Primers: 340 g/L. 7. Floor Coatings: 100 g/L.

D. Colors: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

2.3 PRIMERS/SEALERS

A. Primer Sealer, Latex, Interior:

1. Sherwin Williams: B28W02600 ProMar 200 Zero VOC Interior latex primer or equal.

B. Primer, Latex, for Interior Wood:

1. Sherwin Williams: B28W08111 Premium Wall & Wood Primer or equal.

C. Wood-Knot Sealer: Sealer recommended in writing by topcoat manufacturer for use in paint systems indicated.



2.4 METAL PRIMERS

A. Primer, Acrylic, Quick Dry, for Metal:

1. Sherwin Williams: B66-3100 Series; Pro-industrial, Pro Cryl Universal Acrylic Primer or equal.

B. Primer, Galvanized, Acrylic:

1. Sherwin Williams: B66-3100 Series; Pro-industrial, Pro Cryl Universal Acrylic Primer or equal.

2.5 WATER-BASED PAINTS

A. Latex, Interior, (Gloss Level 3):

1. Sherwin Williams: B20 Series, ProMar 200 zero voc, interior latex satin sheen.

B. Latex, Interior, Semi-Gloss (Gloss Level 4):

1. Sherwin Williams: B31 Series, ProMar 200 zero voc, interior latex semi-gloss sheen.

C. Acrylic Quick Dry for Metals (Semi gloss):

1. Sherwin Williams: B66-600 Series; Pro Industrial, zero voc, acrylic semi-gloss.

2.6 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A. Testing of Paint Materials: Owner reserves the right to invoke the following procedure:

1. Owner will engage the services of a qualified testing agency to sample paint materials. Contractor will be notified in advance and may be present when samples are taken. If paint materials have already been delivered to Project site, samples may be taken at Project site. Samples will be identified, sealed, and certified by testing agency.

2. Testing agency will perform tests for compliance with product requirements. 3. Owner may direct Contractor to stop applying coatings if test results show materials

being used do not comply with product requirements. Contractor shall remove noncomplying paint materials from Project site, pay for testing, and repaint surfaces painted with rejected materials. Contractor will be required to remove rejected materials from previously painted surfaces if, on repainting with complying materials, the two paints are incompatible.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.



B. Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates: When measured with an electronic moisture meter as follows:

1. Concrete: 12 percent. 2. Masonry (Clay and CMU): 12 percent. 3. Wood: 15 percent. 4. Gypsum Board: 12 percent. 5. Plaster: 12 percent.

C. Gypsum Board Substrates: Verify that finishing compound is sanded smooth.

D. Plaster Substrates: Verify that plaster is fully cured.

E. Spray-Textured Ceiling Substrates: Verify that surfaces are dry.

F. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility with existing finishes and primers.

G. Proceed with coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

1. Application of coating indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Manual" applicable to substrates indicated.

B. Remove hardware, covers, plates, and similar items already in place that are removable and are not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item, provide surface-applied protection before surface preparation and painting.

1. After completing painting operations, use workers skilled in the trades involved to reinstall items that were removed. Remove surface-applied protection if any.

C. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of paints, including dust, dirt, oil, grease, and incompatible paints and encapsulates.

1. Remove incompatible primers and reprime substrate with compatible primers or apply tie coat as required to produce paint systems indicated.

D. Concrete Substrates: Remove release agents, curing compounds, efflorescence, and chalk. Do not paint surfaces if moisture content or alkalinity of surfaces to be painted exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's written instructions.

E. Masonry Substrates: Remove efflorescence and chalk. Do not paint surfaces if moisture content or alkalinity of surfaces or mortar joints exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's written instructions.



F. Steel Substrates: Remove rust, loose mill scale, and shop primer, if any. Clean using methods recommended in writing by paint manufacturer, but not less than the following:

1. SSPC-SP 2, "Hand Tool Cleaning." 2. SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning." 3. SSPC-SP 7/NACE No. 4, "Brush-off Blast Cleaning." 4. SSPC-SP 11, "Power Tool Cleaning to Bare Metal."

G. Shop-Primed Steel Substrates: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint, and paint exposed areas with the same material as used for shop priming to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-primed surfaces.

H. Galvanized-Metal Substrates: Remove grease and oil residue from galvanized sheet metal fabricated from coil stock by mechanical methods to produce clean, lightly etched surfaces that promote adhesion of subsequently applied paints.

I. Wood Substrates:

1. Scrape and clean knots and apply coat of knot sealer before applying primer. 2. Sand surfaces that will be exposed to view and dust off. 3. Prime edges, ends, faces, undersides, and backsides of wood. 4. After priming, fill holes and imperfections in the finish surfaces with putty or plastic

wood filler. Sand smooth when dried.

3.3 APPLICATION

A. Apply paints according to manufacturer's written instructions and to recommendations in "MPI Manual."

1. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture same as similar exposed surfaces. Before final installation, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or furniture with prime coat only.

2. Paint front and backsides of access panels, removable or hinged covers, and similar hinged items to match exposed surfaces.

3. Do not paint over labels of independent testing agencies or equipment name, identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates.

4. Primers specified in painting schedules may be omitted on items that are factory primed or factory finished if acceptable to topcoat manufacturers.

B. Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to facilitate identification of each coat if multiple coats of same materials are to be applied. Tint undercoats to match color of topcoats, but provide sufficient difference in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat.

C. If undercoats or other conditions show through topcoat, apply additional coats until cured film has a uniform paint finish, color, and appearance.

D. Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in sharp lines and color breaks.



E. Painting Fire Suppression, Plumbing, HVAC, Electrical, Communication, and Electronic Safety and Security Work:

1. Paint the following work where exposed in equipment rooms:

a. Equipment, including panelboards. b. Uninsulated metal piping. c. Uninsulated plastic piping. d. Pipe hangers and supports. e. Metal conduit. f. Plastic conduit. g. Tanks that do not have factory-applied final finishes. h. Duct, equipment, and pipe insulation having cotton or canvas insulation covering

or other paintable jacket material.

2. Paint the following work where exposed in occupied spaces:

a. Equipment, including panelboards. b. Uninsulated metal piping. c. Uninsulated plastic piping. d. Pipe hangers and supports. e. Metal conduit. f. Plastic conduit. g. Duct, equipment, and pipe insulation having cotton or canvas insulation covering

or other paintable jacket material. h. Other items as directed by Architect.

3. Paint portions of internal surfaces of metal ducts, without liner, behind air inlets and outlets that are visible from occupied spaces.


A. Dry Film Thickness Testing: Owner may engage the services of a qualified testing and inspecting agency to inspect and test paint for dry film thickness.

1. Contractor shall touch up and restore painted surfaces damaged by testing. 2. If test results show that dry film thickness of applied paint does not comply with paint

manufacturer's written recommendations, Contractor shall pay for testing and apply additional coats as needed to provide dry film thickness that complies with paint manufacturer's written recommendations.


A. At end of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded materials from Project site.

B. After completing paint application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paints by washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces.



C. Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct damage to work of other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by Architect, and leave in an undamaged condition.

D. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces.

3.6 INTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE

A. Galvanized-Metal Substrates:

1. Latex over Waterborne Primer System:

a. Prime Coat: Primer, galvanized, water based. b. Intermediate Coat: Latex, interior, matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Latex, interior, semi-gloss, (Gloss Level 5).

B. Wood Substrates: Including wood trim (paint grade trim).

1. Latex System:

a. Prime Coat: Primer, latex, for interior wood. b. Intermediate Coat: Latex, interior, matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Latex, interior, semi-gloss, (Gloss Level 5).

C. Gypsum Board Substrates:

1. Latex System:

a. Prime Coat: Primer sealer, latex, interior. b. Prime Coat: Latex, interior, matching topcoat. c. Intermediate Coat: Latex, interior, matching topcoat. d. Topcoat: Latex, interior, satin and/or semi-gloss per architect’s directions.



JANUARY 2020 PLASTIC SHOWER COMPARTMENTS – 102116 1 OF 7 Copyright © 2019 by the American Institute of Architects. Warning: This AIA MasterSpec based document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. A valid, current MasterSpec license is required for editing or use of this document.

SECTION 102116 - PLASTIC SHOWER COMPARTMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Solid-plastic compartments. 2. Shower receptors.


1. Section 055000 "Metal Fabrications" for supports that attach floor-and-ceiling-anchored compartments to the overhead structural system.

2. [Section 061000 "Rough Carpentry"] [Section 061053 "Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry"] for [blocking] [and] [overhead support of floor-and-ceiling-anchored compartments].

3. Section 102800 "Toilet, Bath, and Laundry Accessories" for grab bars, purse shelves, and similar accessories.

4. Section 224100 "Residential Plumbing Fixtures" for shower heads, valves, and controls.



1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes.

B. Shop Drawings: For shower and dressing compartments.

1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and attachment details. 2. Show locations of cutouts for compartment-mounted accessories. 3. Show locations of centerlines of drains. 4. Show[ ceiling grid, ceiling-mounted items, and] overhead support or bracing locations.

C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of compartment material indicated.

1. Include Samples of hardware and accessories for material and color selection.



D. Samples for Verification: For the following products, in manufacturer's standard sizes unless otherwise indicated:

1. Each type of material, color, and finish required for compartments, prepared on 6-inch- square Samples of same thickness and material indicated for the Work.

2. Each type of hardware and accessory. 3. Curtain Fabric: 12-inch- square swatch or larger as required to show complete pattern

repeat, from dye lot used for the Work, with specified treatments applied. Mark top and face of material.


A. Product Certificates: For each type of shower and dressing compartment.


A. Maintenance Data: For shower and dressing compartments to include in maintenance manuals.


A. Furnish extra materials[, from the same product run,] that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Door Hinges: [One] <Insert number> door hinge(s) with associated fasteners. 2. Latch and Keeper: [One] <Insert number> latch(es) and keeper(s) with associated

fasteners. 3. Clothing Hook: [One] <Insert number> clothing hook(s) with associated fasteners. 4. Door Bumper: [One] <Insert number> door bumper(s) with associated fasteners. 5. Door Pull: [One] <Insert number> door pull(s) with associated fasteners. 6. Fasteners: [10] <Insert number> fasteners of each size and type. 7. Curtain Rod: [One] <Insert number> curtain rod(s) with associated fasteners. 8. Curtain Hooks: [Five] <Insert number> curtain hooks. 9. Soap Holder: [One] <Insert number> soap holder(s) with associated fasteners. 10. Seat: [One] <Insert number> seat(s) with associated fasteners.


A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of fixtures, drains, walls, columns, ceilings, and other construction contiguous with shower and dressing compartments by field measurements before fabrication.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Fire Performance: Tested according to, and pass the acceptance criteria of, NFPA 286.

B. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with applicable provisions in [USDOJ's "2010 ADA Standards for Accessible Design"] [and] [ICC A117.1] <Insert accessibility regulation> for shower and dressing compartments designated as accessible.

2.2 SOLID-PLASTIC COMPARTMENTS <Insert drawing designation>

A. <Double click here to find, evaluate, and insert list of manufacturers and products.>

B. Configuration: [Shower compartment] [Shower and dressing compartments] [Shower compartment with two dressing compartments] [As indicated on Drawings].

C. Enclosure Style: [Overhead braced] [Floor and ceiling anchored] <Insert style>.

D. Panel and Pilaster Construction: Solid, high-density polyethylene (HDPE) panel material, not less than 1 inch thick, seamless, with eased edges and with homogenous color and pattern throughout thickness of material.

1. Integral Hinges: Configure doors and pilasters to receive integral hinges. 2. Heat-Sink Strip: Manufacturer's standard, continuous, [clear-anodized extruded-

aluminum] [or] [stainless steel] strip fastened to exposed bottom edges of solid-plastic components to hinder malicious combustion.

3. Color and Pattern: [One color and pattern] [Two colors and patterns] in each room; [as indicated by manufacturer's designations] [as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range] [match toilet compartments specified in Section 102113.19 "Plastic Toilet Compartments"] <Insert color and pattern>.

E. Door Construction: Match panels.[ Equip door and pilasters with manufacturer's standard no-sightline system.]

F. Pilaster [Shoes] [and] [Sleeves (Caps)]: Manufacturer's standard design; [solid plastic] [or] [stainless steel].

1. Plastic Color and Pattern: [Match pilaster] [Contrast with pilaster, as indicated by manufacturer's designations] [Contrast with pilaster, as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range] [Match toilet compartments specified in Section 102113.19 "Plastic Toilet Compartments"] <Insert color and pattern>.

G. Brackets (Fittings):

1. Full-Height (Continuous) Type: Manufacturer's standard design; [solid plastic or clear-anodized extruded aluminum] [solid plastic] [clear-anodized extruded aluminum] <Insert material>.



a. Plastic Color and Pattern: [Match panel] [Contrast with panel, as indicated by manufacturer's designations] [Contrast with panel, as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range] [Match toilet compartments specified in Section 102113.19 "Plastic Toilet Compartments"] <Insert color and pattern>.

2. Stirrup Type: Ear or U-brackets; [clear-anodized aluminum] [stainless steel] [chrome-plated brass].

3. Dressing-Compartment Brackets: Match toilet-compartment brackets specified in Section 102113.19 "Plastic Toilet Compartments."

2.3 SHOWER RECEPTORS

A. General: Manufacturer's standard, prefabricated, terrazzo receptor complete with integral drain.

1. Curb: Not less than 2 inches and not more than 9 inches deep when measured from the top of the curb to the top of the drain; with curb threshold not less than 1 inch below the sides and back of the receptor[; and with a ramped entrance surface for accessible compartments].

2. Floor: Finished, sloping uniformly toward the drain and not less than 1/4 unit vertical in 12 units horizontal and not more than 1/2 inch.

3. Drain Strainer: Manufacturer's standard, removable [brass strainer] [chrome strainer] [stainless steel strainer] [plastic strainer, matching the receptor] <Insert description>.

4. Drain Gasket: Manufacturer's standard gasket sized to fit waste pipe. 5. Waterstop: Manufacturer's standard, continuous [galvanized-steel flange] [or]

[rabbeted groove] to receive panels and create a waterstop when panels are in place.

B. Finish: Manufacturer's standard finish on exposed surfaces, [matching color of enclosure panels] [as indicated by manufacturer's designations] [as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range] <Insert requirement> and with slip-resistant floor surface texture.

2.4 MATERIALS

A. Aluminum Castings: ASTM B26/B26M.

B. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B221.

C. Brass Castings: ASTM B584.

D. Brass Extrusions: ASTM B455.

E. Stainless Steel Sheet: ASTM A240/A240M or ASTM A666, Type 304, stretcher-leveled standard of flatness.

F. Stainless Steel Castings: ASTM A743/A743M.



2.5 ACCESSORIES

A. Door Hardware and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard design, heavy-duty, operating hardware and accessories.[ Mount to panels with through-bolts.]

1. Material: [Clear-anodized aluminum] [Stainless steel] [Chrome-plated brass]. 2. Hinges: Manufacturer's standard, [paired, self-closing type that can be adjusted to

hold doors open at any angle up to 90 degrees] [continuous, cam type that swings to a closed or partially open position] [continuous, spring-loaded type] [integral hinge for solid-plastic doors] <Insert requirement>, allowing emergency access by lifting door.

3. Latch and Keeper: Manufacturer's standard, [recessed] [surface-mounted] latch unit designed for emergency access and with combination rubber-faced door strike and keeper. Provide units that comply with regulatory requirements for accessibility[ at each compartment, accessible or not] [ at compartments designated as accessible].

4. Clothing Hooks: Manufacturer's standard clothing hooks in each dressing compartment[; include one combination hook and rubber-tipped bumper at inswinging doors, sized to prevent door from hitting wall panel or compartment-mounted accessories].

5. Door Bumper: Manufacturer's standard, rubber-tipped bumper at outswinging doors. 6. Door Pull: Manufacturer's standard unit at outswinging doors that complies with

regulatory requirements for accessibility. Provide units on both sides of doors at compartments designated as accessible.

B. Overhead Bracing: Manufacturer's standard, continuous, extruded-aluminum headrail or cap with antigrip profile; in manufacturer's standard finish.

C. Headrail with Hooks: Manufacturer's standard, continuous, extruded-aluminum headrail or cap with curtain hooks running in concealed track; with antigrip profile; in manufacturer's standard finish.

D. Curtain Rod with Hooks: Manufacturer's standard, 1-inch- diameter, [stainless steel] <Insert material> curtain rod with matching hooks.

E. Curtain: Flame-resistant, [polyester-reinforced vinyl fabric] [manufacturer's standard fabric] <Insert fabric> that is stain resistant, self-sanitizing, antistatic, antimicrobial, and launderable to a temperature of not less than [90 deg F] <Insert temperature>.

1. Flame Resistance: Passes NFPA 701 tests when tested by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

2. Labeling: Identify fabrics with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency.

3. Curtain Grommets: Two-piece, rolled-edge, rustproof, nickel-plated brass; spaced not more than 6 inches o.c.; machined into top hem.

4. Width: Minimum [6 inches] [12 inches] wider than opening. 5. Length: Where curtain extends to a floor surface, size so that bottom hem clears finished

floor by not more than 1 inch and not less than 1/2 inch above floor surface. Where curtains extend to a shower-receptor curb, size so that bottom hem hangs above curb line and clears curb line by not more than 1/2 inch.



6. Color and Pattern: [As indicated by manufacturer's designations] [Match Architect's sample] [As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range] <Insert color and pattern>.

F. Soap Holder: [Surface-mounted] [Recessed], seamless [stainless steel] <Insert material> soap dish.

G. Seats: Manufacturer's standard, [panel-mounted] [wall-mounted] [or] [floor-mounted] benches.

1. Material: [Wood] [Solid phenolic] [Molded plastic] [Stainless steel] <Insert material>.

2. Operation: [Fixed] [Folding]. 3. Finish: [As indicated by manufacturer's designations] [Match Architect's sample]

[As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range] [Match enclosure panels] <Insert finish>.

H. Anchorages and Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard, exposed fasteners of stainless steel, chrome-plated steel, or solid brass, finished to match the items they are securing; with theft-resistant-type heads. Provide sex-type bolts for through-bolt applications. Use countersunk, flush-type bolt heads or otherwise make fasteners inconspicuous if exposed on opposite side of panel from hardware or accessory item. For concealed anchors, use stainless steel, hot-dip galvanized steel, or other rust-resistant, protective-coated steel.

2.6 FABRICATION

A. Overhead-Braced Compartments: Manufacturer's standard, corrosion-resistant supports, leveling method, and anchors at pilasters and walls to suit floor and wall conditions. Provide shoes at pilasters to conceal supports and leveling method.

B. Floor-and-Ceiling-Anchored Compartments: Manufacturer's standard, corrosion-resistant anchoring assemblies at pilasters and walls, with leveling adjustment at tops and bottoms of pilasters. Provide shoes and sleeves (caps) at pilasters to conceal anchorage.

C. Door Sizes and Swings: Unless otherwise indicated, provide 24-inch- wide, inswinging doors for standard shower and dressing compartments, and 36-inch- wide, outswinging doors with a minimum 32-inch- wide, clear opening for compartments designated as accessible.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. General: Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions. Install compartments rigid, straight, level, and plumb. Secure compartments in position with manufacturer's recommended anchoring devices.



1. Clearances for Dressing Compartments: Maximum 1/2 inch between pilasters and panels; 1 inch between panels and walls.

2. Stirrup Brackets for Dressing Compartments: Secure panels to walls and to pilasters with no fewer than [two brackets attached] [three brackets attached at midpoint and] near top and bottom of panel.

a. Locate wall brackets so holes for wall anchors occur in masonry or tile joints. b. Align brackets at pilasters with brackets at walls.

3. Full-Height (Continuous) Brackets for Dressing Compartments: Secure panels to walls and to pilasters with full-height brackets.

a. Locate bracket fasteners so holes for wall anchors occur in masonry or tile joints. b. Align brackets at pilasters with brackets at walls.

B. Overhead-Braced Compartments: Secure pilasters to floor, and level, plumb, and tighten. Set pilasters with anchors penetrating not less than 1-3/4 inches into structural floor unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written instructions. Secure continuous headrail to each pilaster with no fewer than two fasteners.[ Hang doors to align tops of doors with tops of panels, and adjust so tops of doors are parallel with overhead brace when doors are in closed position.]

C. Floor-and-Ceiling-Anchored Compartments: Secure pilasters to supporting construction, and level, plumb, and tighten.[ Hang doors and adjust so doors are level and aligned with panels when doors are in closed position.]

D. Curtains: Install curtains to specified length, and verify that they hang vertically without stress points or diagonal folds.

E. Shower Receptors: Install prefabricated shower receptors with drain gasket compression fit to OD of waste pipe.

3.2 ADJUSTING

A. Curtain Adjustment: After hanging curtains, test and adjust each track or rod to produce unencumbered, smooth operation. Steam and dress down curtains as required to produce crease- and wrinkle-free installation. Remove and replace curtains that are stained or soiled or that have stress points or diagonal folds.

B. Hardware Adjustment: Adjust and lubricate hardware according to hardware manufacturer's written instructions for proper operation. Set hinges on inswinging doors to hold doors open approximately 30 degrees from closed position when unlatched. Set hinges on outswinging doors to return doors to fully closed position.

END OF SECTION 102116.19


JANUARY 2020 TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES – 102800 1 OF 4

SECTION 102800 - TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Private-use washroom accessories.


1. Section 093000 "Tiling" for ceramic toilet and bath accessories.


A. Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions and thicknesses, dimensions, profiles, fastenings and mounting methods, specified options, and finishes for each type of accessory specified.

B. Setting Drawings: For cutouts required in other work; include templates, substrate preparation instructions, and directions for preparing cutouts and installing anchoring devices.

C. Product Schedule: Indicating types, quantities, sizes, and installation locations by room of each accessory required. Use designations indicated in the Toilet and Bath Accessory Schedule and room designations indicated on Drawings in product schedule.

D. Samples: Full size, for each accessory item to verify design, operation, and finish requirements.

1. Approved full-size Samples will be returned and may be used in the Work.


A. Warranty: Sample of special warranty.


A. Maintenance Data: For toilet and bath accessories to include in maintenance manuals specified in Division 1. Provide lists of replacement parts and service recommendations.




A. Source Limitations: For products of same manufacturer for each type of accessory unit and for units exposed to view in same area, unless otherwise approved by Architect.

B. Products Options: Accessory requirements, including those for materials, finishes, dimensions, capacities, and performance, are established by specific products indicated in the Toilet and Bath Accessory Schedule.

1. Products of other manufacturers with equal characteristics, as judged solely by Architect, may be provided.

2. Do not modify aesthetic effects, as judged solely by Architect’s approval. Where modifications are proposed, submit comprehensive explanatory data to Architect for review.

1.7 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate accessory locations with other work to prevent interference with clearances required for access by people with disabilities, and for proper installation, adjustment, operation, cleaning, and servicing of accessories.

B. Deliver inserts and anchoring devices set into concrete or masonry as required preventing delaying the Work.

1.8 WARRANTY

1. General Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Article shall not deprive Owner of other rights Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 666, Type 304, 0.031-inch minimum nominal thickness unless otherwise indicated.

B. Brass: ASTM B 19, flat products; ASTM B 16/B 16M, rods, shapes, forgings, and flat products with finished edges; or ASTM B 30, castings.

C. Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Designation CS (cold rolled, commercial steel), 0.036-inch minimum nominal thickness.

D. Galvanized-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, with G60 hot-dip zinc coating.



E. Galvanized-Steel Mounting Devices: ASTM A 153/A 153M, hot-dip galvanized after fabrication.

F. Fasteners: Screws, bolts, and other devices of same material as accessory unit and tamper-and-theft resistant where exposed, and of galvanized steel where concealed.

G. Chrome Plating: ASTM B 456, Service Condition Number SC 2 (moderate service).

H. Baked-Enamel Finish: Factory-applied, gloss-finish, backed-acrylic-enamel coating.

I. Mirrors: ASTM C 1503, Mirror Glazing Quality, clear-glass mirrors, nominal 6.0 mm thick.

J. ABS Plastic: Acrylonitrile-butadiene-styrene resin formulation.

2.2 PRIVATE -USE WASHROOM ACCESSORIES

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1. A & J Washroom Accessories, Inc. 2. American Specialties, Inc. 3. Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc. 4. Bradley Corporation. 5. GAMCO Specialty Accessories; a division of Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc. 6. McKinney/Parker Washroom Accessories Corp.

B. Grab Bar (GB):

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Bradley Corporation Model 812-2. 2. Mounting: Flanges with concealed fasteners. 3. Material: Stainless steel, 18-guage.

a. Finish: Safety Grip, finish (satin).

4. Outside Diameter: 1-1/2 inches. 5. Configuration and Length: As indicated on Drawings.

C. Mirror Unit (MR):

1. Owner provided and contractor installed. 2. Location: As indicated on Drawings. 3. Size: As indicated on Drawings.

D. Toilet Tissue Dispenser (TTD):

1. Owner provided and contractor installed. 2. Location: As indicated on drawings.

E. Towel Bar (TB):



1. Owner provided and contractor installed. 2. Locations: As indicated on drawings.

2.3 FABRICATION

A. General: One, maximum 1-1/2-inch diameter, unobtrusive stamped manufacturer logo, as approved by Architect, is permitted on exposed face of accessories. On interior surface not exposed to view or back surface of each accessory, provide printed, waterproof label or stamped nameplate indicating manufacturer’s name and product model number.

B. General: Names or labels are not permitted on exposed faces of accessories. On interior surface not exposed to view or on back surfaces of each accessory, provide printed, waterproof label or stamped nameplate indicating manufacturer’s name and product model number.

C. Surface-Mounted Toilet Accessories: Unless otherwise indicated, fabricated units with tight seams and joints, and exposed edges rolled. Hang doors and access panels with continuous stainless-steel hinge. Provide concealed anchorage where possible.

D. Keys: Provide universal keys for internal access to accessories for servicing and resupplying. Provide minimum of six keys to Owner's representative.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install accessories according to manufacturers' written instructions, using fasteners appropriate to substrate indicated and recommended by unit manufacturer. Install units level, plumb, and firmly anchored in locations and at heights indicated.

B. Secure mirrors to walls in concealed, tamper –resistant manner with special hangers, toggle bolts, or screws. Set units level, plumb, and square at locations indicated, according to manufacturer’s written instructions for substrate indicated.

C. Grab Bars: Install to withstand a downward load of at least 250 lbf, when tested according to ASTM F 446.


A. Adjust accessories for unencumbered, smooth operation. Replace damaged or defective items.

B. Remove temporary labels and protective coatings.

C. Clean and polish exposed surfaces according to manufacturer's written recommendations.



JANUARY 2020 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS – 104416 1 OF 3

SECTION 104416 - FIRE EXTINGUISHERS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes portable fire extinguishers and mounting brackets for fire extinguishers.

B. Section includes fire extinguishing systems for residential cooking ventilation equipment.


A. Product Data: For each type of product. Include rating and classification, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for fire extinguisher and mounting brackets.

B. Product Schedule: For fire extinguishers. Coordinate final fire-extinguisher schedule with fire-protection cabinet schedule to ensure proper fit and function.


A. Warranty: Sample of special warranty.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For fire extinguishers to include in maintenance manuals.

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate type and capacity of fire extinguishers with fire-protection cabinets to ensure fit and function.



1.7 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace fire extinguishers that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.


a. Failure of hydrostatic test according to NFPA 10. b. Faulty operation of valves or release levers.

2. Warranty Period: Six years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. NFPA Compliance: Fabricate and label fire extinguishers to comply with NFPA 10, "Portable Fire Extinguishers."

B. Fire Extinguishers: Listed and labeled for type, rating, and classification by an independent testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Provide fire extinguishers approved, listed, and labeled by FM Global.

2.2 PORTABLE, HAND-CARRIED FIRE EXTINGUISHERS

A. Fire Extinguishers: Type, size, and capacity for each fire-protection cabinet and mounting bracket indicated.


a. JL Industries, Inc.; a division of the Activar Construction Products Group. b. Kidde Residential and Commercial Division; Subsidiary of Kidde plc. c. Larsens Manufacturing Company. d. Strike First Corporation of America.

2. Valves: Manufacturer's standard. 3. Handles and Levers: Manufacturer's standard. 4. Instruction Labels: Include pictorial marking system complying with NFPA 10,

Appendix B, and bar coding for documenting fire-extinguisher location, inspections, maintenance, and recharging.



B. Multipurpose Dry-Chemical Type in Steel Container: UL-rated 3-A:40-B:C, 5-lb nominal capacity, with monoammonium phosphate-based dry chemical in enameled-steel container.

2.3 MOUNTING BRACKETS

A. Mounting Brackets: Manufacturer's standard galvanized steel, designed to secure fire extinguisher to wall or structure, of sizes required for types and capacities of fire extinguishers indicated, with plated or red baked-enamel finish.


a. JL Industries, Inc.; a division of the Activar Construction Products Group. b. Larsens Manufacturing Company. c. Strike First Corporation of America.

B. Identification: Lettering complying with authorities having jurisdiction for letter style, size, spacing, and location. Locate as indicated by Architect.

1. Identify bracket-mounted fire extinguishers with the words "FIRE EXTINGUISHER" in red letter decals applied to mounting surface.

a. Orientation: Horizontal.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine fire extinguishers for proper charging and tagging.

1. Remove and replace damaged, defective, or undercharged fire extinguishers.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install fire extinguishers and mounting brackets in locations indicated and in compliance with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Mounting Brackets: 54 inches above finished floor to top of fire extinguisher.

B. Mounting Brackets: Fasten mounting brackets to surfaces, square and plumb, at locations indicated.



JANUARY 2020 RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES – 113013 1 OF 3

SECTION 113013 - RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Cooking appliances. 2. Refrigeration appliances. 3. Cleaning appliances.





B. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified.


A. Product certificates.

B. Field quality-control reports.

C. Sample warranties.


A. Operation and maintenance data.

1.6 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranties: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace residential appliances or components that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Electrical Appliances: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

B. Gas-Fueled Appliances: Certified by a qualified testing agency for each type of gas-fueled appliance according to ANSI Z21 Series standards.

2.2 RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES

1. Standard package – Basis-of-Design:

a. Refrigerator – GE (energy star) #GIE18CTHBB b. Electric Range – GE #JB255DJBB c. Dishwasher – GE (energy star) #GSD3300KBB d. Washer – GE (energy star) #GTW490ACJWW e. Electric Dryer – GE #GTD42EASJWW f. Microwave – GE #JES146DSBB

2. ADA Package – Basis-of-Design:

a. Refrigerator – GE (energy star) #GIE18ETHBB b. Electric Range – GE #JB450DFBB c. Dishwasher – GE (energy star) #GLDT690JBB d. Washer – GE (energy star) #GFW400SCKWW e. Electric Dryer – GE #GFDN110EDWW f. Microwave – GE #JES146DSBB

3. Clubhouse – Basis-of-Design:

a. Refrigerator – GE (energy star) #GIE18CTHBB b. Dishwasher – GE (energy star) #GLDT690JBB c. Microwave – GE #JES146DSBB

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Built-in Equipment: Securely anchor units to supporting cabinets or countertops with concealed fasteners. Verify that clearances are adequate for proper functioning and that rough openings are completely concealed.



B. Freestanding Equipment: Place units in final locations after finishes have been completed in each area. Verify that clearances are adequate to properly operate equipment.

C. Range Anti-Tip Device: Install at each range according to manufacturer's written instructions.


A. Perform the following tests and inspections with the assistance of a factory-authorized service representative:

1. Perform visual, mechanical, and electrical inspection and testing for each appliance according to manufacturers' written recommendations. Certify compliance with each manufacturer's appliance-performance parameters.

2. Leak Test: After installation, test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest until no leaks exist. 3. Operational Test: After installation, start units to confirm proper operation. 4. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and

components.

B. An appliance will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

C. Prepare test and inspection reports.



JANUARY 2020 RESIDENTIAL CASEWORK – 123530 1 OF 4

SECTION 123530 - RESIDENTIAL CASEWORK

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes kitchen and vanity cabinets.



B. Shop Drawings: For residential casework. Include plans, elevations, details, and attachments to other work.

C. Samples: For casework and hardware finishes.


A. Product Certificates: For casework.

B. Certified by the Kitchen Cabinet Manufacturers Association to exceed or meet industry standards for construction and performance

C. Meet ANSI A161.1-1990.


A. Delivery: Delivery of countertops to sire in manufacturer’s original, unopened containers, and packaging, with labels clearly identifying product name and manufacturer.

B. Storage:

1. Store countertops in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. 2. Store in clean, dry, and well ventilated area indoors protected from direct sunlight. 3. Store flat on level, surface, a minimum of 4 inches above floor. 4. Cover to keep clean, but permit air circulation.

C. Handling: Protect countertops during handling and installation to prevent damage.

1.5 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Maintain environmental conditions before, during, and after storage and installation in accordance to manufacturer’s instructions.



1.6 WARRANTY

1. One year warranty from date of purchase against defective material and workmanship. Any defective part will be replaced. This does not include labor, installation or transportation cost. Warranty does not apply to damages due to improper handling, installation, or use.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CABINETS

A. Basis-of- Design: Mid-America Cabinets.

B. Quality Standard: Provide cabinets that comply with KCMA A161.1.

1. KCMA Certification: Provide cabinets with KCMA's "Certified Cabinet" seal affixed in a semiexposed location of each unit and showing compliance with KCMA A161.1.

C. Kitchen Cabinets: Mid-American Cabinets, Fiesta, Concord – Red Oak, Cinnamon.

1. Face frame: 3/4 inch kiln-dried oak glued and screwed for long-term strength and rigidity.

2. End panel: 1/2 inch industrial-grade particle board fastened to face frame with tongue and groove. Exposed end panels are finished with wood grain melamine to match face frame finish.

3. Back panel: 1/8 inch hardboard. 4. Top / Bottom Panels: Wall cabinets constructed of 1/4 inch dadoed into end panels and

interlocked into hanging rails for strength. Base bottom constructed of 1/2 inch industrial grade particle board.

5. Hanging rails: 3/4 inch x 2 1/2 inch hardwood on upper cabinets. 3/4 inch x 1 inch hardwood on base cabinets.

6. Base corner braces: High impact injection molded plastic. 7. Shelves: 1/2 inch industrial grade particle board. Wall shelving adjustable up to 24 inches

wide. Base cabinets 11 inch deep half-shelf. 8. Toe Kick: 1/2 inch industrial grade particle board fastened between end panels. Standard

2 1/2 inch deep and 3 1/2 inch tall. Toe base cover to match veneer finish. 9. Drawers: 7/16 inch industrial grade particle board using full box construction with 1/8

inch hardboard bottoms. Drawer fronts constructed to match cabinet door material and style.

10. Drawer guides: 100 lb rated epoxy coated drawer guides. 11. Doors: 2 inch wide x 3/4 inch thick solid perimeter. 1/4 inch flat veneer panel. Frame

members permanently joined with mortise and tenon construction. Square edge profile. 12. Hardware: semi-concealed, self closing hinges. Standard door and drawer design does not

require pulls. 13. Interior finishes: light birch wood grain melamine, providing resistance to water, alcohol,

mild acids, and household chemicals.



14. Exterior finish: Exposed wood surfaces to be finished with stain, sealer, and catalyzed varnish, providing resistance to water, alcohol, mild acids, and household chemicals.

a. Style and Finish: Concord, Red Oak, Cinnamon.

15. Handicap Requirements: All cabinets to be modified to accommodate ADA and Fair Housing specifications.

D. Bathroom Vanities: Mid-American Cabinets, Mesa, Concord – Red Oak, Cinnamon.

1. Face frame: 3/4 inch kiln-dried oak glued and screwed for long-term strength and rigidity.

2. End panel: 1/2 inch industrial-grade particle board fastened to face frame with tongue and groove. Exposed end panels are finished with wood grain melamine to match face frame finish.

3. Back panel: 1/8 inch hardboard. 4. Top / Bottom Panels: Wall cabinets constructed of 1/2 inch dadoed into end panels and

interlocked into hanging rails for strength. Base bottom constructed of 1/2 inch industrial grade particle board.

5. Hanging rails: 3/4 inch x 2 1/2 inch hardwood on upper cabinets. 3/4 inch x 1 inch hardwood on base cabinets.

6. Base corner braces: High impact injection molded plastic. 7. Shelves: 1/2 inch industrial grade particle board. Wall shelving adjustable up to 24 inches

wide. Base cabinets 11 inch deep half-shelf. 8. Toe Kick: 1/2 inch industrial grade particle board fastened between end panels. Standard

2 1/2 inch deep and 3 1/2 inch tall. Toe base cover to match veneer finish. 9. Drawers: 1/2 inch industrial grade particle board using full box construction with 1/8 inch

hardboard bottoms. Drawer fronts constructed to match cabinet door material and style. 10. Drawer guides: 100 lb rated epoxy coated drawer guides. 11. Doors: 2 inch wide x 3/4 inch thick solid perimeter. 1/4 inch flat veneer panel. Frame

members permanently joined with mortise and tenon construction. Square edge profile. 12. Hardware: semi-concealed, self closing hinges. Standard door and drawer design does not

require pulls. 13. Interior finishes: light birch wood grain melamine, providing resistance to water, alcohol,

mild acids, and household chemicals. 14. Exterior finish: Exposed wood surfaces to be finished with stain, sealer, and catalyzed

varnish, providing resistance to water, alcohol, mild acids, and household chemicals.

a. Style and Finish: Concord, Red Oak

15. Handicap Requirements: All cabinets to be modified to accommodate ADA and Fair Housing specifications



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install casework with no variations in adjoining surfaces; use concealed shims. Where casework abuts other finished work, scribe and cut for accurate fit. Provide filler strips, scribe strips, and moldings in finish to match casework.

B. Install casework without distortion so doors and drawers fit the openings, are aligned, and are uniformly spaced. Complete installation of hardware and accessories as indicated.

C. Install casework level and plumb to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 8 feet

D. Fasten casework to adjacent units and to backing.

1. Fasten wall cabinets through back, near top and bottom, and at ends not more than 16 incheso.c.

a. Fasteners: No. 10 wafer-head screws sized for not less than 1-1/2-inch penetration into wood framing, blocking, or hanging strips

E. Adjust hardware so doors and drawers are centered in openings and operate smoothly without warp or bind. Lubricate operating hardware as recommended by manufacturer.

F. Clean casework on exposed and semiexposed surfaces. Touch up as required to restore damaged or soiled areas to match original factory finish, as approved by Architect.



JANUARY 2020 PLASTIC-LAMINATE-CLAD COUNTERTOPS – 123623 1 OF 5

SECTION 123623 - PLASTIC-LAMINATE-CLAD COUNTERTOPS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes plastic-laminate-clad countertops.



B. Shop Drawings: For plastic-laminate-clad countertops.

1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and details, indicating the following:

a. Dimensions. b. Materials. c. Front Edge. d. Backsplash. e. Joints.

C. Samples: Plastic laminates in each type, color, pattern, and surface finish required.

D. Certification:

1. Submit manufacturer’s certification that countertops comply with specified requirements and are suitable for intended application.

2. Submit certification of compliance with ANSI/NEMA LD 3 from manufacturer of high-pressure decorative laminate sheets.

E. Cleaning instructions: submit manufacturer’s cleaning instructions for countertops.

F. Warranty: Submit manufacturer’s warranty.


A. Product Certificates: For the following:

1. High-pressure decorative laminate. 2. Adhesives.




A. Manufacturer’s Qualifications: Manufacturer regularly engaged, for preceding 10 years, in manufacture of high-pressured decorative laminate countertops of similar physical characteristics to those specified.

B. Installer’s Qualifications:

1. Installer regularly engaged, for preceding 5 years, in installation of similar high-pressure decorative laminate countertops to those specified.

2. Approved by manufacturer.


A. Delivery: Delivery of countertops to sire in manufacturer’s original, unopened containers, and packaging, with labels clearly identifying product name and manufacturer.

B. Storage:

1. Store countertops in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. 2. Store in clean, dry, and well-ventilated area indoors protected from direct sunlight. 3. Store flat on level, surface, a minimum of 4 inches above floor. 4. Cover to keep clean but permit air circulation.

C. Handling: Protect countertops during handling and installation to prevent damage.

1.6 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Maintain environmental conditions before, during, and after storage and installation in accordance to AWI/AWMAC/WI Architectural Woodwork Standard, Section 11 – Countertops.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURER

A. Basis-of-Design: VT. Industries, Inc., 1000 Industrial Park, PO Box 490, Holstein, Iowa 51025. www.vtindustries.com

2.2 HIGH-PRESSURE DECORATIVE LAMINATE COUNTERTOPS

A. High-Pressured Decorative Laminate Countertops Conformance: Greenguard Indoor Air Quality Certification.



B. Performance Requirements: Meet performance requirements of the following, unless otherwise specified:

1. ANSI/KCMA A161.2 2. AWI/AWMAC/WI Architectural Woodworking Standards, Section 11 – Countertops.

C. Styles:

1. “Tempo” postformed waterfall edge.

D. Types:

1. Postformed countertops with integral backsplashes.

E. Grade: Premium, in accordance with:

1. AWI/AWMAC/WI Architectural Woodworking Standards, Section 11 – Countertops. 2. Manufacturer: Wilsonart.

F. High-Pressured Decorative Laminates:

1. Conformance: ANSI/NEMA LD 3. 2. Type: Postforming (HGP).

G. Laminate Patterns and Finishes: As selected by Architect from manufacturer’s full range of color, finishes, textures, and patterns.

H. Substrates:

1. Particleboard:

a. Description: 100 percent pre-consumer recycled wood-fiber particleboard, industrial grade.

b. Conformance: ANSI A208.1, MR 10. c. Thickness: 3/4 inch.

I. Adhesives: Water-based polyvinyl acetate (PVA).

2.3 FABRICATION

A. Shop Assembly: Assemble countertops using high-pressure decorative laminate bonded by suitable adhesive to substrate material in accordance with:

1. ANSI/KCMA A161.2. 2. AWI/AWMAC/WI Architectural Woodworking Standards, Section 11 – Countertops.

B. Dimensional Tolerances: ANSI/KCMA A161.2.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine surfaces to receive countertops.

B. Notify Architect of conditions that would adversely affect installation or subsequent use.

C. Do not begin installation until unacceptable conditions are corrected.

3.2 PREPARTATION

A. Prepare surfaces to receive countertops in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

B. Verify casework and supports are plumb, level, square, and secure before installation of countertops.

C. Inspect countertops before installation to determine they are sound and free of defects and damage.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Install countertops in accordance to manufacturer’s instructions and AWI/AWMAC/WI Architectural Woodwork Standards, Section 11 – Countertops.

B. Install countertops at location indicated on Drawings.

C. Install countertops level, plumb, and square.

D. Securely anchor countertops to casework and supports.

E. Install joints to be watertight.

3.4 CLEANING

A. Clean countertops promptly after installation in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

B. Do not use harsh cleaning materials or methods that could damage surface.

3.5 PROTECTION

A. Provide Kraft paper or other suitable covering over countertop surfaces, taped to underside of countertop at a minimum of 48 inches o.c. Remove protection at Substantial Completion.



B. Protect installed countertops from damage including:

1. Damage during construction. 2. Excessive moisture. 3. Standing water. 4. Direct sunlight.


PROJECT NO.: 18036 CANNON COURTSMULTI-FAMILY HOUSING

BANGS, TX

JANUARY 2019 Common Work Results for Electrical – 26 05 00 PAGE 1 OF 5

SECTION 26 05 00 – COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL

PART I- GENERAL

1.1 GENERAL

A. The Division 26 Contractor shall provide all supervision, labor, material, tools, equipment,supplies, items, articles, and conduct or perform into operation satisfactory to the Owner andEngineers, the system described herein and shown or reasonably implied on the plans.

B. All work shall conform to the latest editions of the National Electrical Code (NEC) [NationalFire Protection Association (NFPA) 70], the Life-Safety Code (NFPA 101), the StandardBuilding Code, the International Building Code (IBC2012), the Americans with DisabilitiesAct (ADA), and all other applicable federal, state, and local codes and regulations.

C. The General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, General Requirements, Information toBidders, and all other parts of this set of Contract Documents are hereby adopted and areapplicable to the Division 26 Contractor.

1.2 DRAWINGS

A. The Contract Drawings and Documents are schematic in nature and are intended to conveythe intent of the electrical work to be performed on this project. The drawings are intended toindicate general arrangement of equipment, ducts, piping, conduit, and approximate sizes andlocations of equipment and outlets. Follow these drawings in laying out work. Consultgeneral construction drawings for general conditions affecting this work, and verify spaces inwhich work will be installed. Items not shown or specified which are required to produce acomplete, operative and finished system shall be provided. Provide all material, labor,equipment, etc., necessary to provide complete and operable electrical systems.

B. The drawings and specifications shall be considered as supplementary, one to the other, sothat materials and workmanship indicated, called for, or implied by one and not the othershall be supplied and installed as though specifically called for by both.

C. The drawings indicate the extent and general arrangement of the various systems. If anydepartures from these drawings are deemed necessary by the Contractor, detailed drawingsand descriptions of these departures and a statement of the reasons therefor shall besubmitted to the Engineer for approval as soon as practicable. No departures from thearrangements shown on the drawings shall be made without the prior written approval of theEngineer.

D. The drawings showing the extent and arrangement of the work of this particular trade mustbe used together with the drawings showing the extent and arrangement of the work of othertrades and shall be responsible for calling to the attention of the Engineer any interferencesencountered. Such interferences shall be investigated and called to the attention of theEngineer before any equipment is installed and before any material is fabricated. Relocationresulting from interferences shall be made at no additional cost to the Owner.


BANGS, TX


1.3 SCOPE OF WORK

A. Visit site prior to bid. Devise a plan for installation of complete and operable electricalsystems meeting the requirements and intent of the Contract Documents. Submission of Bidstands as evidence that the Contractor accepts the Contract Documents as sufficient andcomplete for the work to be performed. Notify the engineer at least two weeks prior to bid ofany discrepancies between the Contract Documents and actual field conditions. No changeorders will be granted due to existing conditions that could have been observed during a sitevisit.

B. Provide temporary power and lighting during construction. Coordinate with the GeneralContractor for the exact requirements.

C. Relocate, or recircuit, all electrical equipment, conduit, and circuitry conflicting with orobstructing work on this project. Where the electrical systems are owned by other entities,pay them to relocate, or recircuit, their facilities.

D. Arrange for connection of service to all electrical systems by the appropriate utilitycompany. Coordinate completely with all utility company requirements even if they aredifferent than the contract documents. If utility company requirements are different from thecontract documents, notify the engineer at least ten days prior to bid. Pay all utility companycharges necessary for installation and connection of service. If the cost of the service isunavailable at the time of bid, submit a letter to the General Contractor, signed by theappropriate utility company official, stating that the cost has not been determined. TheGeneral Contractor shall submit this letter with his bid. The cost will then become theOwner's responsibility.

E. Provide all necessary equipment, raceway, circuitry, fittings, lugs, terminations, labor, etc.and connect to all equipment and appliances requiring electrical connections furnishedherein, by the Owner, or by other Contractors. Prior to ordering electrical equipment androughing in for equipment furnished by the Owner or other Contractors, verify all connectiontypes, connection locations, connection heights, voltages, number of phases, conductor sizes,disconnecting means, breaker sizes, etc. Furnish the proper electrical equipment for theequipment actually being supplied.

1.3 SUBMITTALS AND SHOP DRAWINGS

A. Prior to beginning work, provide copies of manufacturers' cut sheets containing informationconcerning each article of electrical equipment to be finished on this project. These cutsheets shall contain sufficient information to prove compliance with the contract documents.Information addressing the requirements of the contract documents shall be highlighted.Each bound set shall bear the stamp of the Electrical Contractor as well as the GeneralContractor.

B. Coordinate with all other trades to ensure that there are no conflicts between systems. TheElectrical Contractor is responsible for resolving all conflicts between trades.

C. Submittals and Shop Drawings are reviewed to determine quality of materials. Approval ofsubmittals and shop drawings does not relieve the Contractor of meeting the requirementsand intent of the Contract Documents.


BANGS, TX


D. Outlet, light fixture, and device locations are shown in their approximate locations on thedrawings. Coordinate with Architectural drawings to get final locations. The Owner reservesthe right to relocate outlets, light fixtures, and devices a distance not to exceed twenty feetprior to the installation of outlet boxes.

PART 2- PRODUCTS

2.1 All electrical equipment and materials shall be new. All equipment and materials shall be storedon the job site in weatherproof enclosures. Electronic equipment shall be stored in facilitieswhere the temperature and humidity are controlled. In addition, comply completely with allmanufacturers' requirements for storage and handling.

2.2 All equipment shall be UL listed for the application in which it is used and shall be labeledas evidence of its UL listing.

PART 3- EXECUTION

3.1 WORKMANSHIP

A. All work shall be performed with an emphasis on neatness. The Engineer, Architect, andOwner retain the right to reject work that is, in their judgment, unsatisfactory.

B. This Contractor shall co-operate with all other Contractors on the project and shall install hiswork as fast as the progress of the balance of the work will permit.

C. This Contractor shall do all cutting and repairing of walls, floors, and ceilings necessary forthe installation of his work, but no cutting of work of other Contractors will be permittedwithout the consent of the Engineer or his representative.

D. All cutting and repairing of walls, floors and ceilings shall be subject to the supervision andapproval of the General Contractor.

E. This Contractor shall keep the building clean of his own rubbish and scrap materials at alltimes.

3.2 EXPERIENCE AND LICENSING

A. The Electrical Contractor shall have completed at least two jobs of similar size and scopewithin the past five years. The Engineer reserves the right to reject Contractors based ontheir inability to submit evidence of their experience, or based on experience with theContractor on previous projects.

B. The Electrical Contractor shall be a Licensed Electrician, and certified to perform electricalconstruction work in the State of Texas. The Electrical Contractor shall be responsible forobtaining his/her own licensing and permitting at the local level, in which this project islocated, and for coordinating work and inspections with all authorities having jurisdiction.


BANGS, TX


3.3 PERMITS

Obtain and pay for all permits required for work. Furnish the owner with Certificate ofInspection from all authorities having jurisdiction.

3.4 FIREPROOFING

A. Fireproof all penetrations through firewalls with a fireproofing compound listed to maintainthe rating of the wall through which the raceway passes.

B. The firestopping caulk shall be a one-part, intumescent, latex elastomer. The caulk shall becapable of expanding a minimum of 3 times at 1000°F. The material shall be thixotropic andbe applicable to overhead, vertical and horizontal firestops. The caulk shall be listed byindependent test agencies such as IJL or FM and be tested to, and pass the criteria of ASTMB 814 Fire Test, tested under positive pressure. It shall comply with the requirements of theNEC (NFPA-70, BOCA, ICBO, SBCCI and NFPA Code 101. Firestopping caulk shall bepaintable, but shall be non-hardening. Firestopping caullc shall be 3M Firebarrier CF orapproved equal.

C. (Where applicable) - Where cable trays are shown crossing firewalls, terminate the cable trayon each side of the wall and run the conductors through conduits installed in the wall.Fireproof around the conductors after installation.

D. Provide mineral wool packing and all other materials recommended by the manufacturer fora complete installation.

3.5 FLASHING

Provide all necessary equipment and flash all roof penetrations in such a manner to ensure thatall penetrations are completely sealed and all roof warranties remain in effect. Where there areno roof warranties, the Electrical Contractor shall guarantee the electrical penetrations againstleaking for a period of one year from project completion. Employ a professional roofingcontractor to perform all flashing.

3.6 PROTECTION

A. Keep energized equipment covered during all phases of construction. Use enclosures, doors,covers, etc., to ensure that neither personnel nor machinery contact live electrical equipment.

B. Replace electrical equipment that is damaged during construction.

3.7 DAMAGED FACILITIES

Locate all existing site equipment and utilities prior to beginning construction. Repair allequipment and utilities damaged during construction, or pay for the repair of the equipment andutilities where required by the Owner of the damaged facilities.


BANGS, TX


3.8 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL

A. Excavate in such a manner as to minimize erosion of the soil. Backfill trenches aroundconduits with fine sand that is free of rocks, clods, and debris. Fill sand a minimum of 4"over conduits. Backfill the Test of the trench in six-inch increments, wetted, and tamped.Final compaction shall be a minimum of 95% of that of the adjacent earth. Resurface thegrade with the same material as that excavated from the grade whether it be paving, concrete,sod, etc. Repair work shall be comparable to the quality of the original site prior toexcavation.

B. Provide a 3" wide plastic labeled marker tape 6" below grade over all electrical conduitsburied underground. Tapes for power circuits shall have a warning such as "Caution: BuriedElectrical Line Below." Labels on tapes for telephone, data, cable television, and otherfacilities shall adequately describe the line over which they are buried.

3.9 IDENTIFICATION

A. All Lighting and Appliance Type panelboards, and similar panelboards shall havetypewritten circuit directories. Handwritten directories shall not be allowed.

3.10 AS-BUILT DRAWINGS

Maintain one set of drawings during construction for as-built markings. Mark these drawings inred to indicate field changes. Provide these drawings to the Engineer at the end of theconstruction process. Where required under the General Conditions, Special Conditions, or otherportions of this contract, provide revised computer drawn as-built drawings to the Engineer at theend of construction.

3.11 TESTING

A. Test all systems, or pay testing agencies as required, for compliance with the requirements ofall regulatory agencies.

B. Test the electrical power service ground using the methods described in Section 26 05 26.Grounds shall meet the requirements of the NEC, or of Specification Section 26 05 26,whichever is more stringent.

C. Prior to making final equipment connections, test all service, feeder, and branch circuitconductors for continuity, phase-to-phase faults, and phase-to-ground faults using a MeggerBM100 or approved equal test instrument generating 500 Vdc. Insulation resistance shall bea minimum of 500,000 Ohms between any conductor and ground and 1,000,000 Ohmsbetween any two conductors.

D. Test other systems as required in their respective specifications.

3.12 WARRANTY

Provide the Owner a written guarantee to repair, or replace, all faulty equipment and systems fora period of one year from date of Substantial Completion. During this one-year period, arepresentative of the Contractor shall be on the site actively working on the repairs within 24hours of the Owner's telephone call. During this period of time, the Owner shall not be chargedfor any repair work or expenses related with the repair work unless the Contractor can prove thatthe Owner has damaged the equipment or system.

END OF SECTION


BANGS, TX

JANUARY 2019 Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors – 26 05 19 PAGE 1 OF 3

SECTION 26 05 19 – LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS ANDCABLES

PART 1 - GENERAL

Provide all circuitry, terminations, splices, connectors, lugs, and other equipment necessary forconnection of all equipment requiring electrical connections.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 All electrical conductors shall be soft-drawn annealed copper having 98% conductivity andan insulation rating of 600V.

2.2 Conductors shall be new and UL-listed for installation in the raceway in which they are to beinstalled. For NON-Conduit installations, where approved for use by authorities havingjurisdiction, Type NM-B Nonmetallic Sheathed 600-volt multi-conductor cable with soft-drawncopper conductors shall be used.

2.3 Conductors shall be rated 75 degrees C minimum for use in residential, commercial, industrial,and institutional facilities, and shall be listed as 105 degrees C appliance wire. Conductorsshall be listed under UL 83, UL 1063, and UL 758. If XLP or EPR insulation is used,conductors shall be listed under UL 44 and NEMA WC7.

2.4 Conductors used for branch circuits, feeders, auxiliary systems, and controls run in drylocations and where temperatures shall not exceed 75 degrees Celsius, shall have PVC insulationand a Nylon outerjacket. Conductors shall be THHW, THWN, XHHW, or THHN, THHW, orTHWN-2, XHHW-2. Other conductor types such as multi-conductor cable shall be as directed onthe project drawings.

2.5 Conductors used for branch circuits, feeders, auxiliary systems, and controls run in wetlocations shall have XLP or EPR insulation and be type XHHW or XHHW-2. Other conductortypes acceptable for wet locations and underground applications shall be as specified on thecontract drawings.

2.6 Conductors used for services shall be of the following acceptable type:a) XHHW-2 or RHW-2 for aerial services.b) USE-2 or XHHW-2 for underground services in conduit.c) Triplex 600V Secondary UD, Aluminum Conductors for direct bury single-phase services.

Other acceptable types shall be as indicated on the contract drawings.

2.7 Sizes #10 and #12 shall be solid conductors except where used for controls. All controlsconductors shall be stranded.

2.8 Conductors for branch and feeder circuits shall not be less than #12 AWG. Conductors forcontrols and auxiliary circuits shall not be less than #16 AWG, or as indicated on plans. Sizeconductors as required, using larger conductors as required to compensate for voltage dropsexceeding 3% of the system voltage, or as shown on the project drawings.

2.9 Metal-Clad cables, such as Type MC or AC are forbidden.


BANGS, TX


2.10 Conductors shall be furnished in the colors described below unless local ordinancesrequire different colors. Conductors #8 and smaller shall be furnished with coloredinsulation; conductors larger than #8 shall be taped with the appropriately colored tape fora length of at least 2" at each panelboard, junction box, pull box, load, or other exposedlocation. Grounding conductors shall be taped green for their entire exposed length.

System Voltage 208Y/120V, 3-Phase, 120/240V, 3-Phase, 480Y/277V, 3-Phase,4-Wire 4-Wire 4-Wire

Phase A Black Black BrownPhase B Red Orange OrangePhase C Blue Purple YellowNeutral White White GrayGround Green Green Green

Table-1. Conductor Color Code

2.11 Multi-Conductor Cables shall be as specified within the project contract drawings.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 Install conductors carefully using a minimum of two tradesmen - one feeding theconductors into the conduit, and the other pulling the conductors into the conduit.

3.2 Install conductors in cable trays per NEC and NEMA standards, and as directed in projectdrawings.

3.3 Join stranded conductors with appropriate mechanical or compression lugs. Wire nutsmay be used for solid conductors only.

3.3 Splices in feeder and branch conductors shall not be made.

3.4 Provide cable supports and strain relief connectors as required by the NEC.

3.5 Furnish junction boxes, pull boxes, handholes, manholes, etc. as required to ensure thatthe maximum number of bends allowed by the NEC are not exceeded and to ensure thatthe cables are not damaged during installation.

3.6 All conductors shall be tested after conductor is installed in raceway but before termination onends. Conductors shall be tested by the following methods:

1. Conductive Continuity Test (Ohm-meter)2. Conductor Insulation Resistance Test (Megger)

a) The Megger test shall conform to ANSI/NETA ATS-2009 Standards fortest voltages (Vdc) and minimum acceptable resistance values (Ohms).

END OF SECTION


BANGS, TX



BANGS, TX

JANUARY 2019 Grounding and Bonding – 26 05 26 PAGE 1 OF 1

SECTION 26 05 26 – GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 GENERAL

Ground all equipment, systems, structures, etc., per the latest edition of the National ElectricalCode (NEC).

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 Use mechanical bolted connections in dry locations that are accessible.

2.2 Use exothermic welds in wet locations and locations that will be inaccessible at the end ofconstruction.

2.3 Ground rods shall be UL Listed 3/4" x 8' copper-clad steel ground rods with a minimumcopper cladding thickness of 10 mils.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 Ground rods shall be installed with their tops no more than 6" above grade, and in thearrangement as shown on plans, to allow communication services to bond to the grounding system.

3.2 Test the grounding electrode system at the service entrance using a clamp-on ground resistance tester -Fluke 1630 or equal, or a Biddle three-terminal ground resistance tester, or approved equal. Groundresistance measurements shall meet the requirements of the NEC, or shall measure not more than 10ohms, whichever is more stringent. Ground resistance shall be tested only when the earth is dry.Additional ground rods – spaced not closer than 10’ together – and earthing conductor (see plans forconductor size) shall be provided and installed as necessary in order to achieve the desired results.

3.2 Bond ground connections to metal raceways at each end of the conduit run. Provide groundingbushings where required by the NEC.

3.3 Provide all circuits with an equipment grounding conductor sized per the NEC, or as shown on thedrawings. Circuitry shown on drawings does not include the required equipment grounding conductor.Where multiple circuits are run with a common neutral, only one equipment grounding conductor isneeded. The equipment grounding conductor shall be furnished with green insulation for conductors #8AWG and smaller; where larger than #8, the equipment grounding conductor shall be taped green forits entire exposed length.

3.4 The grounding electrode conductor(s) shall be bare or shall be colored green for its entire exposedlength.

3.5 Individual grounding conductors shall be installed in PVC conduit sized per the NEC.

3.6 Provide receptacles, luminaires, and other devices with a green conductor that bonds the receptaclegrounding screw or pigtail, the outlet box grounding screw, and the equipment grounding conductortogether.

3.7 Telephone, cable television, and other auxiliary systems shall be bonded to the building electricalservice entrance ground using a conductor no smaller than #6 AWG.

END OF SECTION


BANGS, TX

JANUARY 2019 Raceways and Boxes – 26 05 33 PAGE 1 OF 5

SECTION 26 05 33 – RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

26 05 33.13 CONDUIT FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 GENERAL

Electrical systems circuitry within apartment units and clubhouse may be sheathed cable, notcontained within raceways (except where noted otherwise), if allowed by local authorities havingjurisdiction. Contractor shall verify approvals with AHJ prior to bidding and construction.Sheathed cable shall be as specified in Specification Section 26 05 19. Electrical wiring in otherlocations shall be contained within raceways. All cable systems and raceways, where used, shallbe embedded in walls, concealed above ceilings, or as otherwise directed by project drawings.

1.2 SCOPE OF WORK

A. Provide all raceways, fittings, couplings, anchors, supports, hangers, etc. forcomplete raceway systems.

B. Use Schedule 40 (Gray) polyvinyl chloride (PVC) conduit for circuits run underground andin slabs on grade level. Provide PVC-Coated Galvanized Rigid Steel elbows and PVC-Coated Galvanized Rigid Steel Conduit (GRSC) for all vertical runs extending to a point atleast 6" above grade, or as directed by plans. Galvanized Rigid Steel Conduit coated withtwo complete coats of asphaltum or bituminous paint may be used in lieu of PVC-coatedgalvanized rigid steel conduit.

C. Use Galvanized Rigid Steel Conduit (GRSC) or Rigid Aluminum Conduit for all applicationswhere circuits are run above ground exposed to the weather. See plans for specific type.

D. Use Intermediate Metal Conduit (IMC) for all branch circuits, feeders, and auxiliarycircuits requiring conduit 1 1/4" nominal trade size or larger in dry locations.

E. Use Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT) for all branch circuits and feeders less than 1-1/4"nominal trade size in dry locations and in slabs above grade level.

F. Other types of raceway, such as HDPE conduit for underground systems, shall be asspecified on the contract drawings.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PVC conduits, fittings, couplings, adapters, and accessories shall be UL listed andapproved for use with 90 degree Celsius conductors. The UL label shall be affixed toeach ten foot length of conduit and each fitting. Conduits shall comply with NEMASpecification TC-2 and UL 651. Fittings shall comply with NEMA TC-3 and UL 514b.

2.2 PVC-coated conduits, fittings, couplings, adapters, and accessories shall be UL listed withPVC as the primary corrosion protection. They shall be hot dipped galvanized rigid steelconduit with threads hot galvanized after cutting. The conduit shall meet UL 6. The fittingsshall meet UL 51413. The PVC coating shall be uniformly applied to the interior and exterior


BANGS, TX


of all conduit and fittings. The coating shall be nominally 2 mils thick. The PVC coating shallextend one pipe diameter or two inches, whichever is less, at every male fitting except unions tofit over the joining female connection. Couplings shall contain a series of longitudinal ribs, 40mils in thickness, to protect the coating from damage by tools during installation. PVC-coatedconduit shall be Robroy Plastibond or approved equal.

2.3 GRSC conduits, fittings, couplings, adapters, and accessories shall be UL listed. They shallbe hot-dipped galvanized steel. They shall meet the safety standards of UL 6, and shallbe manufactured to ANSI C80.1. Threads shall be hot galvanized after cutting.

2.4 IMC conduits, fittings, couplings, adapters, and accessories shall be UL listed. They shallbe hot-galvanized steel. Fittings, couplings, adapters, and accessories shall be the sameas those for GRS conduit described above. IMC shall meet UL 1242 and ANSI C80.6.Threads shall be hot galvanized after cutting. The inside of the conduit shall be finishedwith a corrosion-resistant coating.

2.5 EMT conduits, fittings, couplings, adapters, and accessories shall be UL listed. They shallbe hot galvanized steel and shall be produced in accordance with UL 797 and ANSIC80.3. The inside shall be finished with a corrosion-resistant lubricating coating.

2.6 Conduit fittings used with EMT conduits may be set screw indenter type or compressiontype. All metallic fittings for IMC and Rigid conduit shall be compression type fittings.

2.7 Flexible metallic conduit shall be constructed of galvanized steel and shall be UL listed ascompliant with UL I and UL 1479.

2.8 Liquidtight flexible conduit shall be constructed of galvanized steel and shall be coatedwith a PVC jacket to resist liquids, dirt, grease, and oils. All fittings shall be designed,constructed, and installed to maintain the integrity of the liquidtight connections.Liquidtight flexible conduit shall comply with UL 360.

2.9 Conduit straps used shall be metal two-hole straps. One-hole straps shall not be allowed.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 Conduits run underground shall be buried no less than 24" deep. Services and primaryconduits feeding transformers shall be buried no less than 48" deep, or as directed on plans.

3.2 Do not install conduits with outside diameters larger than 1/3 of the slab thickness in slabs.Space conduits a minimum of 6 conduit diameters apart in slabs. Conduit crossings shalloccur no closer than 12" apart. Conduits shall be run in the center, not the bottom, of the slab.

3.3 Support and install all conduits per the latest edition of the National Electrical Code.Support groups of conduits with electrical strut supported by threaded rods anchored tothe building structure. Supports shall be designed to hold no less than twice the weight ofthe conduit and conductors to be supported plus an additional 250 pounds at midspan.

3.4 All conduits shall be grouped and run parallel to each other and to building walls.

3.5 All conduits shall be assembled according to the manufacturer's instructions.


BANGS, TX


3.6 Conduits run underground shall be assembled to be watertight.

3.7 Low-voltage wiring, including control, instrumentation, and monitoring wiring, shall not be runin the same conduit with power wiring.

3.8 Wiring from circuits of different voltages shall not be run together in the same conduit.

3.9 DC wiring shall not be run in same conduit with AC wiring.

3.10 Analog Signal wiring shall not be run in same conduit with digital signal wiring.

3.11 Cap all conduits during installation. Pull a mandrel sized for that conduit and a cleaningbrush through each conduit before installation of any conductors.

3.12 Conduits that are obviously damaged and field bends that are obviously out of round shallbe replaced.

3.13 Use strap wrenches in the installation of PVC-coated conduit in order to prevent or minimizedamage to the conduit coating during installation.

3.14 Provide final connections to equipment with flexible metallic conduit, or as directed on plans. Inwet or damp locations, use liquidtight flexible metallic conduit, or as directed on plans. Flexibleconduit shall not exceed six (6) feet in total conduit length.

3.15 Terminate conduits entering boxes with a locknut inside the box and a locknut outside thebox. Provide protective bushings on all conduit threads. Use watertight hubs, with groundingscrew, where conduit terminations are exposed to moisture - Myers or equal.

3.16 Use grounding bushings where required by the National Electrical Code.

3.17 Conduits shall be run no closer than 12" to hot water pipes.

3.18 Where conduits are run through the ceiling and are required to make connections toequipment within the room that is not located near a wall, support the conduit from thestructural ceiling and provide a flange bolted to the floor. Install a tee conduit fitting in thevertical run of conduit, and make the connection to the equipment with a piece of flexibleconduit extending from the tee conduit fitting to the equipment.

3.19 Provide expansion fittings where conduits cross building expansion joints. Providegrounding jumpers between the conduits.

3.20. Provide EMT conduit sleeves where conduits pass through walls, floors, or footings sizeda minimum of two nominal trade sizes larger than the conduit that must pass through thesleeve.

3.21 All conduits and junction boxes for Fire Alarm System wiring shall be metallic, and shallconform to size, material, voltage, and wiring type requirements as outlined within thisspecification above.

3.22 All conduits, couplings, and junction boxes for Fire Alarm System wiring, including supplypower shall be painted Red.


BANGS, TX


3.23 All raceway systems designated for Fire Alarm System wiring shall contain only wiring for theFire Alarm System.

3.24 Wiring for Safety Cutoff circuits shall be run independently of each other and of other circuitry.Each safety cutoff circuit shall be run in rigid metal conduit for its entire length. Junction boxesand device boxes for safety cutoff circuitry and devices shall be cast and watertight.

26 05 33.16 BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 Furnish and install all outlet boxes and junction boxes in accordance with this specificationand the requirements of the NEC.

1.2 Provide outlet boxes for all switches, receptacles, luminaires, telephone jacks, cable jacks,data jacks and other devices furnished in this Contract. Provide all necessary hardware including,but not limited to, additional structural support, support brackets, screws, bolts, fixturestuds, etc.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS

Outlet boxes and junction boxes shall be manufactured by Raco, Steel City, Crouse Hinds, orAppleton.

2.2 GENERAL

A. Outlet boxes and junction boxes in dry locations shall be galvanized stamped steelboxes sized per the latest edition of the National Electrical Code (NEC), but no lessthan 2" x 3" x 1-7/8" deep for outlet boxes, and 4" x 4" x 2 1/8" deep for junction boxes.The thickness of the steel shall be in compliance with the requirements of the NEC. Providestamped steel covers for all junction boxes manufactured to fit the particular box on which itis used.

B. Outlet boxes used in concrete and masonry walls and ceilings shall be of the concretetype manufactured for such applications.

C. Outlet boxes and junction boxes in wet locations shall be of cast metal constructionwith gasketed waterproof covers. All conduit connections to the boxes shall be madewatertight.

D. Wall outlet boxes shall be 2" x 3" x 1-7/8", or larger as required, with plaster ringsprovided for final flush installation.

E. Floor boxes in slabs on grade, where used, shall be deep rectangular, cast iron, fullyadjustable boxes with brass rings. Covers shall be made of brass and shall provide flip topaccess to the power or data jacks inside. Screw-on covers are not acceptable unlessa flip-top cover is unavailable for the device installed in the floor box.


BANGS, TX


Provide the box sized as required for the number of devices shown installed. Boxes shall beas follows, or equal:

1. Single-Gang Boxes: Hubbell B24362. Single-Gang Cover Plates: Hubbell 538253. Double-Gang Boxes: Hubbell 642334. Double-Gang Cover Plates: Two Hubbell S3825 Cover Plates5. Triple-Gang Boxes: Hubbell 1343336. Triple-Gang Cover Plates: Three Hubbell S3825 Cover Plates

In slabs above grade, use cast iron, semi-adjustable shallow boxes as follows, or equal:

1. Single-Gang Boxes: Hubbell 1324142. Two-Gang Boxes: Hubbell B42143. Three-Gang Boxes: Hubbell 134314

Receptacles installed in floor boxes shall be as described in the Wiring Devices Section ofthese specifications. Switches and Receptacles. Data, Telephone, or Combination Data andTelephone Outlets shall consist of Category 5 rated RJ45 jacks mounted in a Hubbell DJOIstrap for use under a 53825 flip top cover plate.

F. Size all boxes per the requirements of the latest NEC.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 All devices shall be flush mounted, unless directed otherwise by contract drawings.

3.2 For Flush-Mounted boxes in Walls: Install outlet boxes in walls, and provide plaster rings suchthat wall finish contractors finish is flush against the edge of the plaster ring. Workmanship willnot be accepted where the hole in the wall shows behind the cover plate, or the wall finish isuneven or unpainted at the edge of the cover plate.

3.3 For Flush-Mounted boxes in Ceilings: Use round or square ceiling outlet boxes as required forthe device being installed. The ceiling shall be finished flush against the box; the fixture shallcompletely cover the box and mount tight against the ceiling. Coordinate the requirements of thefixture prior to installing the box.

3.4 Provide junction boxes, pull boxes, and conduit fittings where required by the NEC to limitthe number of bends in the raceway, and where required to prevent damage to conductorsdue to long runs.

3.5 Junction boxes and pull boxes installed in the ground outside shall be QuaziteComposolite or approved equal. Mount the boxes over 24" of washed gravel fill. If splicesare to be made inside the boxes, the boxes shall be of the type furnished with a bottom,and all conduit connections shall be watertight. In addition, all conductor splices shall bemade watertight using an appropriate splice kit as manufactured by 3M, or an approvedequal.

END OF SECTION


BANGS, TX

JANUARY 2019 Panelboards – 26 24 00 PAGE 1 OF 2

SECTION 26 24 00 – PANELBOARDS

PART 1 - GENERAL

Furnish and install all panelboards, complete with their circuit breakers, phase buses, neutral buses,ground buses, structural supports, and other equipment necessary for complete systems.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL

A. Panelboards shall be designed, manufactured, and tested to be in compliance with NEMA PB 1,UL 50, UL 67, UL 489, NFPA 70, and the ASTM.

B. Circuit breakers shall be designed, manufactured, and tested to be in compliance with NEMA AB1, UL 489, and Federal Specification W-C-375B/GEN.

C. Panelboards shall be UL listed for service entrance where used for that purpose.

D. Panelboard ampere interrupting current (AIC) ratings shall equal the lowest rated device in thepanelboard. Provide panelboards with the AIC ratings shown on the Contract Drawings. ShortCircuit Current Ratings (SCCR) of panelboard buses shall be braced to withstand the AIC ratingshown on the drawings.

E. All panelboards shall be furnished with a dead-front, in addition to the cover and door.

F. All panelboards shall contain a main circuit breaker.

G. Buses shall be constructed of 98% conductivity copper, or equivalent aluminum.

H. Panelboard enclosures shall be NEMA-1 when they are to be mounted indoors, and NEMA-3Rwhen they are to be mounted outdoors. Provide special enclosures where shown on the ContractDrawings.

I. All panelboards shall be fully furnished with the branch circuit breakers shown in the panelschedules on the contract drawings, and with spares as shown.

J. All panelboards shall contain a plug-on surge protection device (SPD), which shall occupy two(2) branch spaces, and which is connected to each phase and/or leg bus, and provides protectionfrom transient voltage surges.


Panelboards shall be manufactured by Square D, Eaton, or Siemens.


BANGS, TX

JANUARY 2019 Panelboards – 26 24 00 PAGE 2 OF 2

2.3 CIRCUIT BREAKERS

A. Circuit breakers shall be thermal magnetic, molded-case with quick-make, quick-break contactaction. They shall have thermal and magnetic tripping elements on each pole. Breakers withmultiple poles shall have common tripping of all poles. Circuit breaker ampere ratings shall bestamped on the handle. Interrupting ratings of the circuit breakers shall be equivalent to thespecified AIC rating of the panelboard. Breakers handles shall reside in a position between "ON"and "OFF" after a trip condition. Breakers shall be rated HACR when used for heating, air-conditioning, and refrigeration: HID when used with High Intensity Discharge fixtures;and shall be rated SWD when used for switching duty.

B. All 15 and 20 Ampere, 120V, single-pole circuit breakers shall be type AFCI (Arc Fault CircuitInterrupter).

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 Install panelboards in complete compliance with all manufacturers' installation instructions.

3.2 Install conductors neatly in panelboards. Group and tie-wrap circuits that share a commonneutral.

3.3 Provide a typewritten circuit schedule on the inside of the panel door for each panelboard.Handwritten directories shall not be allowed.

3.4 Construct circuits as shown in the panel schedules on the contract drawings. Deviations from thecircuit schedule(s) shall make the electrical contractor completely responsible for ensuring the properbalancing of loads on the phases and/or legs of the electrical system.

END OF SECTION


BANGS, TX

JANUARY 2019 Wiring Devices – 26 27 26 PAGE 1 OF 2

SECTION 26 27 26 - WIRING DEVICES

PART 1 - GENERAL

Furnish and install all switches and receptacles in accordance with this specification and therequirements of the NEC.

PART 2- PRODUCTS

2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS:Switches and receptacles shall be manufactured by Hubbell, Cooper Wiring Devices, Leviton,or Pass & Seymour.

2.2 GENERAL

A. Switches and receptacles shall be specification grade. They shall have ampacityand voltage ratings suitable for the application in which they are used.

B. Consult architect or engineer for device colors prior to ordering devices.

C. Provide cover plates for all devices. A single cover plate shall cover all devices in one box.Consult with Architect or Owner for cover plate material type and color.

D. Light switches shall be minimum 15 Ampere, 120-277V back-wired and side-wired toggleswitches. They shall be rated up to 2 HP at 240V. Each switch shall be equipped with agrounding screw. Switches shall be Hubbell CSB series or equal.

E. Wall Switch Occupancy Sensors

1. Wall Switch Occupancy Sensors shall be of the Passive Infrared (PIR) type, capable ofdetecting infrared emissions from human presence and responding by switchingincandescent, low-voltage, and fluorescent lighting loads on. If the occupancy sensorswitch does not detect movement after a pre-set period of time, it will respond byswitching its assigned load off. The unit shall switch at the zero crossing point of the ACpower curve to ensure maximum relay contact life and compatibility with electronicballasts.

2. The wall switch occupancy sensor shall be equipped with a push-button to providemanual on/off switching. The unit shall feature adjustable delayed-OFF time andambient light override capabilities. The unit shall also provide sensitivity adjustment andintegral sliding blinders to customize the horizontal field of view. The unit shall becapable of providing optional manual-on/automatic-off operation.

3. Wall Switch Occupancy Sensors shall be line-voltage, 120/277VAC, 60Hz, with aminimum load rating of 1200VA at 120V and 2700VA at 277V for fluorescent loads,and 800W at 120V for incandescent loads, and shall be capable of switching motor loadsof up to 1/4HP at 120V.


BANGS, TX

JANUARY 2019 Wiring Devices – 26 27 26 PAGE 2 OF 2

4. Wall Timer Switches shall be a rotary-type, SPST, line-voltage, 120/277VAC, 60Hz,with a load rating of 20 amps at 120V, 10 amps at 250V, and up to 1 Hp motor load.Timer range shall be 0 – 30 minutes. Intermatic, NuTone, or equal.

F. Power receptacles shall be 20 Ampere, 125V, Duplex NEMA 5-20R, Hubbell HBL5362or approved equal.

G. Duplex GFCI, NEMA 5-20R receptacles shall be Hubbell GFR5362 or approvedequal.

H. Other receptacles and wiring devices not listed in this section shall be of type andspecifications shown on the project drawings.

I. Devices furnished in this Contract, but not listed above, shall be of the samestandard of quality as those items listed.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 Flush mount all devices unless shown otherwise on the project drawings, or specific writtenpermission is obtained from the Engineer for a particular device in a particular location.

3.2 Install all devices vertically unless the drawings specifically state that the particular deviceshould be mounted horizontally.

END OF SECTION


BANGS, TX

JANUARY 2019 Enclosed Switches & Circuit Breakers – 26 28 16 PAGE 1 OF 2

SECTION 26 28 16 – ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS

PART 1 - GENERAL

Furnish and install all disconnects and separately mounted circuit breakers as shown on thedrawings, specified herein, and required by the NEC.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL

A. Unless noted otherwise on project drawings and schedules, Disconnects shall be of thegeneral-duty type, and shall be UL listed. They shall meet or exceed the requirements ofNEMA Standard KS1. For fused disconnects, provide fuses sized to appropriately protect theload served, or as shown on project drawings. Equipment manufacturer's recommendationsshall take precedence over the Contract Drawings.

B. Fuses, where used, shall be dual element, time-delay, Class RK-1, and have an InterruptingRating of 200,000 Amps. Fuses shall be Bussman Low-Peak, Ferraz Shawmut, Littlefuse orapproved equal. Other fuse types, if used, shall be as shown on the project drawings.

C. Circuit breakers shall be thermal magnetic, molded-case with quick-make, quick-break contactaction. Breaker size 100A and greater shall have adjustable electronic trip unit (LSI). Theyshall have thermal and magnetic tripping elements on each pole. Breakers with multiple polesshall have common tripping of all poles. Circuit breaker ampere ratings shall be stamped onthe handle. Interrupting ratings of the circuit breakers shall be equivalent to the specified AICrating of the paneIboard. Breakers handles shall reside in a position between ON" and "OFF"after a trip condition. Breakers shall be rated HACR when used for heating, air-conditioning,and refrigeration; HID when used with High Intensity Discharge fixtures; and shall be ratedSWD when used for switching duty.

D. Disconnects and individually-mounted circuit breaker ampere interrupting current (AIC)ratings shall equal the rating of the panelboard from which they are fed unless otherwise noted.

E. Disconnects used as service-entrance equipment shall have a short circuit current rating(SCCR) sufficient to withstand the available short circuit current, as shown on the projectdrawings, or elsewhere in these specifications, or as provided by others. Equipmentmanufacturer’s recommendations shall take precedence over the contract documents.Disconnects used as service entrance equipment shall be service-entrance-rated, and shallcontain grounding lugs and apparatus for NEC-required grounding.

F. Buses shall be constructed of 98% conductivity copper or equivalently rated aluminum.

G. Switches shall be horsepower rated where used to serve motors.

H. Unless noted otherwise on the project drawings, enclosures shall be NEMA-1 when they areto be mounted indoors, NEMA-3R when they are to be mounted outdoors, and NEMA-4Xwhere they are subject to washdown or corrosive materials. Provide special enclosures whereshown on the Contract Drawings.


BANGS, TX

JANUARY 2019 Enclosed Switches & Circuit Breakers – 26 28 16 PAGE 2 OF 2


Disconnects and separately-mounted circuit breakers shall be manufactured by Square D, Eaton,or Siemens.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 Install disconnects and individually-mounted circuit breakers in complete compliance withall manufacturers' installation instructions. Where necessary, provide structural supportsand bracing for installation.

3.2 Disconnects are to be surface-mounted.

3.3 Individually-mounted circuit breaker enclosures are to be surface-mounted unless otherwiseshown.

END OF SECTION


BANGS, TX

JANUARY 2019 DataComm System – 27 20 00 PAGE 1 OF 2

SECTION 27 20 00 – DATA AND COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS ROUGH-IN

PART 1 - GENERAL

Provide a complete system of raceways, outlet boxes, and pull wires for the data and telephonesystems in accordance with this specification and the contract drawings. The contractor is to providerough-in for systems only. Wiring and receptacle devices are provided by others.

PART 2- PRODUCTS

2.1 Outlet boxes shall be furnished per Specification Section 26 05 33.

2.2 Raceways shall be furnished per Specification Section 26 05 33. Minimum conduit size shallbe 3/4" nominal trade size.

2.3 Provide all outlets with blank, cover plates, type and color as specified by architect or owner.

2.4 Where applicable: Communications Backboard (CBB) for Telephone and Data cabling: Wallmount a 3/4" x 4' x 6', or a 3/4" x 4’ x 8’ sheet of plywood, primed and painted with two coats offire-resistant black enamel paint, or of the color and finish selected by the Architect. Mountsecurely to wall framing members. Orient CBB per directions of owner, or as directed on plans.The bottom of the backboard shall be a minimum of 6” above the finished floor.

2.5 Where applicable: Provide a 1/4”T x 2"W x 10"L Copper Ground Bar (Erico EritechEGBA14212TES or approved equal) on each backboard.

2.6 Service Conduits: Provide two (2) 2-1/2” or size as indicated on contract drawings, Schedule-40Gray PVC conduits from the CBB to the service utility pole, or telephone company right-of-way. HDPE conduit may be used where outside and not under building slabs.

2.7 Receptacles: Telephone/Data receptacles shall be furnished and installed by telephoneand data equipment provider or by others. This contractor is to furnish and install one (1)outlet box at each outlet location, as shown on the drawings.

2.8 Cable for distribution to outlet receptacles to be furnished and installed by telephone/dataequipment provider.

PART 3-EXECUTION

3.1 Where applicable: On the Main Communications Backboard, bond a #2 AWG copper conductorto the Copper Ground Bar with a two hole compression lug and run the #2 AWG ground wire tothe electrical power system grounding electrode. Bond the #2 AWG ground wire to the powersystem grounding electrode using an exothermic weld.


BANGS, TX

JANUARY 2019 DataComm System – 27 20 00 PAGE 2 OF 2

3.2 Where applicable: Provide a #6 copper ground wire in 1/2” PVC conduit from each satelliteCommunications Backboard, if used, back to the main backboard. Bond the #6 copper groundwire to each backboard’s grounding bar.

3.3 Extend a 3/4” EMT conduit from each outlet box to a point above the nearest accessible ceiling.Terminate the conduit with a protective bushing. Provide all conduits with pullstrings.

3.4 Service Conduits: Run service conduits from the Main CBB or other determined location forservice entrance, to the service utility pole, or Tel-Co R.O.W. Coordinate the exacttermination point with the telephone/communications company. Comply completely withall utility company requirements. Provide temporary cap or seal, at each end, to prevententrance of water, dirt, etc. Use Fixed Bends. Furnish conduits with nylon pullstrings.Stub conduit up 6" above the floor at the Communications Backboard - where used - orother determined service location, or as directed on the project drawings; and cover withplastic cap. Do not glue the caps on the conduits.

END OF SECTION


BANGS, TX

JANUARY 2019 Television Cable System – 27 40 00 PAGE 1 OF 1

SECTION 27 40 00 -TELEVISION CABLE SYSTEM

PART 1 - GENERAL

Provide a complete system of raceways, outlet boxes, cable, and receptacles for a television servicesystem in accordance with this specification and the contract drawings.

PART 2- PRODUCTS

2.1 Outlet boxes shall be furnished per Specification Section 26 05 33 and shall be flush mounted.

2.2 Raceways shall be furnished per Specification Section 26 05 33. Minimum conduit size shallbe 3/4" nominal trade size.

2.3 Television Cable for distribution to outlet receptacles shall be plenum-rated, double-shielded RG6/U, #18 AWG copper with an aluminum polyester aluminum tape with100% coverage and an aluminum braid with 45% coverage.

2.4 Receptacles/Covers: Each outlet box shall contain a Type-F female coaxial connector and shallhave a cover plate - type and color as specified by architect or owner.

2.5 Service Conduits: A 2-1/2” underground service conduit for television service cable shall beprovided – see contract drawings. Satellite Systems may require otherwise. Provide and installany conduit(s) required for Satellite TV Systems. Consult with owner for direction. Thecontractor shall make provisions for TV cable service into each apartment unit within thiscontract, via conduit, or per local authorities having jurisdiction instructions.

2.6 Television Service and Service Equipment shall be furnished by service provider, inaccordance with provider’s policies and directions, unless directed otherwise bytelevision service provider, or owner.

PART 3-EXECUTION

3.1 Homerun one cable from each Type-F receptacle in each outlet box to a hub point for TVservice, as directed by the TV cable provider, and/or local AHJ.

3.2 Terminate coax cable onto each Type-F connector in each TV cable receptacle.

3.3 If any TV receptacle boxes are to be left empty, extend a 3/4” EMT conduit from the outlet boxto a point above the nearest accessible ceiling and terminate it with a protective bushing. Provideany conduits left empty with a nylon pull string.

3.4 Test all cable runs and complete TV cable installation for proper operation.

3.4 Comply completely with all Television Service Provider company requirements.

END OF SECTION


BANGS, TX

JANUARY 2019 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM – 28 46 00 PAGE 1 OF 3

SECTION 16710 - FIRE ALARM SYSTEM FOR UNIT BUILDINGS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 GENERAL

A. Furnish and install a complete and operable fire alarm system in accordance with theContract drawings and all federal, state, and local codes. Equipment on the drawingsrepresents the absolute minimum required for the project. Include costs for all otherrequired devices and equipment required for a complete and operable code compliantsystem. Notify the engineer in writing of any devices required by code, but not shown,at least ten days prior to bid.

B. Comply completely with the latest edition of alt applicable federal, state, and localcodes including, but not limited to the following:1) National Electrical Code (NFPA 70)2) Life Safety Code (NFPA 101)3) National Fire Alarm Code (NFPA 72)4) The International Building Code5) ANSI/ASME A17.1, Safety Code for Elevators and Escalators.

1.2 SCOPE OF WORK

A. Provide all enclosures, hardware, software, devices, and all other components,material, and labor required to install, configure, and test the entire system to thesatisfaction of the Engineer and all authorities.

B. All components of the system shall be manufactured by the same company. Thesystem and its components shall be approved by UL and Factory Mutual.

C. All system components shall be installed by a franchised distributor of the fire alarmsystem having a repair and service department on call 24 hours a day, seven days aweek. The repair and service department shall be located within 150 miles of theproject.

D. Submit complete shop drawings showing all devices including mounting locations andheights and terminal-to-terminal connections. A complete wiring diagram of the systemshall be provided to the local fire marshal for approval, prior to constructioncommencement.

PART 2- PRODUCTS

2.1 Provide an intelligent, fully-addressable fire alarm control panel complete with allequipment necessary to monitor and control the devices shown. The system shall sound anon-coded general alarm. Upon an alarm condition, the fire alarm control panel shallautomatically report the alarm condition to a monitoring agency. Provide all telephoneconnections, circuitry, and conduit to perform this functionality back to the telephonebackboard. [The fire alarm system shall be capable of producing voice announcementsthrough the system speakers).


BANGS, TX


2.2 Provide a NiCad battery sized to operate the control panel without normal power for 24hours, and then to alarm the panel continuously for at least five minutes. Submit batterysizing calculations with the manufacturer's cut sheets and shop drawings.

2.3 All devices shall be addressable and shall be electrically supervised.

2.4 Smoke detectors, except under raised computer floors, shall be of the ionization type.

2.5 Duct detectors shall be of the air sampling type. Furnish complete with sampling tubesand duct housings.

2.6 Smoke detectors mounted under raised computer floors shall be of the photoelectric type.They shall be UL listed for installation in plenums.

2.7 Pull stations shall be of metallic construction. They shall be furnished with lexan shieldsand warning horns.

2.8 Horns shall be rated a minimum of 85 dB at 10'.

2.9 Speakers shall be square. They shall be wall-mounted to a 4" square box. They shallproduce a minimum sound level of 85dB at 10'. They shall have adjustable taps forvolume level adjustment.

2.10 Strobes shall have a nominal rating of at least 75 Cd.

2.11 Combination horn-strobe units or speaker-strobe units shall meet the specifiedrequirements of the individual horns, strobes, and speakers.

2.12 Monitor all sprinkler system flow switches at the facility. Provide an alarm upon flowindication.

2.13 Monitor all sprinkler system tamper and supervisory switches at the facility. Provide atrouble signal upon tamper indication.

2.14 Provide duct detectors in the return duct of all air units. if a fresh air intake duct is installed,all duct detectors shall be mounted upstream of the intake duct. For air units with flowratings greater than 15,000 CFM, provide duct detectors in both the return and supplyducts.

2.15 Provide all necessary relays and circuitry, and shut down all air units upon an alarmcondition of the fire alarm system.

2.16 Provide all necessary equipment and circuitry for control of the elevator in accordance withANSI/ASME Al 7.1, Safety Code for Elevators and Escalators.

2.17 Provide all necessary equipment and circuitry to automatically release the magnetic doorlocks upon an alarm of the Fire Alarm System.


BANGS, TX


2.18 All Conductors and wiring shall be installed according to the manufacturer’srecommendations.

2.19 All wiring used on the fire alarm system shall be U.L. Listed as fire alarm protectionsignaling circuit cable per National Electrical Code, Article 760.

PART 3 – EXECUTION

3.1 All components and circuitry shall be assembled and installed per the requirements of allapplicable codes, manufacturer's recommendations, and requirements of local authoritieshaving jurisdiction.

3.2 All devices shall be mounted with their boxes flush in the walls.

3.3 All outlet boxes, junction boxes, and cover plates shall be painted red.

3.4 All circuitry shall be in concealed conduit sized per the NEC, but no less than 1/2" EMT.All fire alarm conduits shall be painted red.

3.5 The Fire Alarm System Contractor shall test all system components, including each smokedetector and duct detector prior to the pie-final inspection. All systems shall be completelyoperable prior to the request for a pre-final inspection. Fire Alarm System factory-trainedtechnicians shall be present at the pre-final inspection to test the system in the presenceof the Owner, and local AHJ.

3.6 Provide a one-year warranty for the system and all components. The warranty shall beginat the date of final acceptance of the building. During the warranty period, the systemshall be repaired or replaced as necessary at no cost to the Owner. During the warrantyperiod, a technician shall be on the job site within twenty-four hours of a problem reportfrom the Owner.

END OF SECTION


BANGS, TX

JANUARY 2019 Fire Protection Smoke Detectors – 28 46 00 PAGE 1 OF 1

SECTION 28 46 05 – FIRE PROTECTION SMOKE DETECTORSFOR CLUBHOUSE

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 GENERAL

A. Furnish and install Smoke Detectors where indicated on the contract drawings. Devicesshall be UL-Listed, and approved for use in residential and commercial buildings.

B. Placement and location of devices shall comply with all federal, state, and local codes.

C. Placement and location of devices shown on the contract drawings shall be followed,however - compliance with local fire marshal requirements and/or local codes shall takeprecedence over the drawings, if adjustments are required for compliance. The contractorshall make any required adjustments, and provide extra devices not shown on the contractdrawings, if required by local AHJ.

D. Comply completely with the latest edition of alt applicable federal, state, and localcodes including, but not limited to the following:1) National Electrical Code (NFPA 70)2) Life Safety Code (NFPA 101)3) National Fire Alarm Code (NFPA 72)4) The International Building Code

1.2 SCOPE OF WORK

A. Provide all devices shown on the contract drawings, including any other components,material, and labor required to install, configure, and test the entire system to thesatisfaction of all authorities.

B. All components of the system shall be manufactured by the same company. Thesystem and its components shall be approved by UL.

PART 2- PRODUCTS

2.1 Smoke Detector shall be a hardwired device with a 9-volt battery backup. It shall utilize anionization smoke sensor, and shall provide a minimum 85dB alarm, upon detection. Thedevice shall be tamper-resistant, and interconnectable with other units. The device shallprovide a minimum 10-year limited warranty.

2.2 Smoke Detector devices shall be: First Alert model 9120B, or equal.

END OF SECTION


JANUARY 2020 EARTHWORK FOR STRUCTURES – 312318 1 OF 4

SECTION 312318: EARTHWORK FOR STRUCTURES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Division 1 Sections

1.3 REFERENCES

ASTM D422 – Standard Test Method for Particle-Size Analysis of Soils.

ASTM D698 – Test Method for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Standard Effort (12,400 ft-lbf/ft3).

ASTM D1556 – Standard Test Method for Density and Unit Weight of Soil in Place by the Sand- Cone Method.

ASTM D6938 - Standard Test Methods for In-Place Density and Water Content of Soil and Soil- Aggregate by Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth)

ASTM D4318 – Standard Test Method for Liquid Limit, Plastic Limit, and Plasticity Index of Soils.

1.4 DEFINITIONS

A. Granular Subbase: Fill directly beneath slabs-on-grade.

B. Backfill: Fill immediately behind foundation elements or retaining walls.

C. Structural Fill: Fill under the structure other than the granular subbase.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Upon request, submit soil test reports performed by the Structural Testing/Inspection Agency.



1.6 SURVEY

A. Prior to construction, have structure location staked and certified by a licensed surveyor. If discrepancies between actual lines and elevations exist, notify Architect/Structural Engineer before proceeding with layout of structure.

1.7 SUBSURFACE CONDITIONS

A. Copies of a subsurface investigation of the site will be made available upon request. The data is not intended as a representation or warranty of the continuity of such conditions. Owner will not be responsible for interpretation or conclusions drawn by the Contractor. The data is made available for the convenience of the Contractor and is not guaranteed to represent all conditions that may be encountered.

B. Contractor may examine the site and make his own subsurface explorations at no additional cost to the Owner. Notify Owner prior to making any subsurface explorations.

1.8 EXISTING UTILITIES

A. Locate existing underground utilities by careful hand excavation. If utilities are to remain in place, provide protection from damage during construction operations.

B. Cooperate with Owner and utility companies in keeping respective services and facilities in operation. Do not interrupt existing utility service facilities occupied and used by Owner or others, unless written permission is given by the Architect and then only after temporary utility services have been provided.

C. Should uncharted or incorrectly charted piping or other utilities be encountered during excavation, consult the Architect immediately for directions.

D. Repair damaged utilities to satisfaction of utility owner.

1.9 NOTICE

A. Notify the Architect/Structural Engineer 48 hours prior to the beginning of any excavation work.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GRANULAR SUBBASE

A. Granular Subbase: Clean, fine-graded material with at least 10 to 30 percent of particles passing a No. 100 sieve but not contaminated with clay, silt, or organic material. The material shall have a uniform distribution of particle sizes ranging from No. 4 to the No. 200 sieve. Refer to ASTM C 33, Table 1, for limitation of deleterious material finer than No. 200 sieve. Unwashed size No. 10 per ASTM D 448 and manufactured sand from a rock-crushing operation is acceptable.



2.2 BACKFILL

A. Backfill: Sound and free-draining, such as sand, gravel or crushed stone with less than 10% passing the 200 sieve. Maximum diameter shall be 1-1/2 inches.

2.3 STRUCTURAL FILL

A. Structural Fill: Select lean clay or clayey sand materials with plasticity index of 8 to 18

B. Structural Fill shall be free of organics, debris and deleterious materials.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 STRIPPING

A. Strip vegetation, topsoil, roots, and other unsuitable material to a depth determined by the Structural Testing/Inspection Agency but not less than one foot, nor less than 10 feet outside the perimeter of the structure.

B. Stockpile sufficient amounts of topsoil as required to cover areas to be landscaped with a minimum of six inches of material.

3.2 EXCAVATION

A. Excavation shall be considered unclassified. Excavations shall comply with U.S. Department of Labor, Occupation Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) regulations.

B. Perform excavation to the depths and limits on the Drawings and as specified herein.

C. Do not excavate to full depth when there is probability of frost forming or ground freezing in excavation before concrete is placed.

D. Under-cut the entire building area to 1.5-foot below the bottom of slab-on-grade and extending 1- ft outside perimeter walls of all structures at the base of the cut.

E. Ground water may be encountered during the foundation excavation. Provide a system for controlling the ground water to a level at least three feet below the lowest point of the excavation.

F. Keep excavations dry by sloping ground away from holes and trenches.

3.3 PROOFROLLING

A. After stripping or excavation and before any fill placement, fill areas shall be proofrolled with a minimum of two coverages of a loaded dump truck or scraper in each of two perpendicular directions.



B. Areas found to be soft or pumping shall have the soft soil removed and replaced with structural fill and compacted as outlined herein.

3.4 PLACEMENT OF STRUCTURAL FILL

A. Do not place structural fill on subgrade that contains frost, mud or is frozen.

B. Structural fill shall be placed and compacted in eight-inch thick loose layers.

C. Compact structural fill to 95 percent of the maximum dry density as measured by Standard Proctor, ASTM D698.

3.5 PLACEMENT OF BACKFILL

A. Backfill behind wall shall be placed in layers of four inches.

B. Compact backfill behind walls to 95 percent of the maximum dry density as measured by Standard Proctor, ASTM D698.

3.6 PLACEMENT OF GRANULAR SUBBASE

A. Do not place granular subbase on subgrade that contains frost, mud or is frozen.

B. Compact granular subbase to 95 percent of the maximum dry density as measured by Standard Proctor, ASTM D698.

3.7 CLEAN UP

A. Remove excess excavated materials from job site and upon completion leave site in clean condition.

END OF SECTION


JANUARY 2020 TERMITE CONTROL – 313116 1 OF 3

SECTION 313116 - TERMITE CONTROL

PART 1 - GENERAL


Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes soil treatment for termite control.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. General: Submit the following according to Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections.

B. Product data and application instructions.

C. Certification that products used comply with U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA)

regulations for termiticides.


A. In addition to requirements of these specifications, comply with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations for preparing substrate and application.

B. Engage a professional pest control operator who is licensed according to regulations of

governing authorities to apply soil treatment solution.

C. Use only termiticides that bear a federal registration number of the EPA and are approved by local authorities having jurisdiction.

1.5 JOB CONDITIONS

A. Restrictions: Do not apply soil treatment solution until excavating, filling, and grading operations are completed, except as otherwise required in construction operations.

B. To ensure penetration, do not apply soil treatment to frozen or excessively wet soils or during

inclement weather. Comply with handling and application instructions of the soil toxicant manufacturer.



1.6 WARRANTY

A. Warranty: Furnish written warranty, executed by Applicator and Contractor, certifying that applied soil termiticide treatment will prevent infestation of subterranean termites. If subterranean termite activity is discovered during warranty period, Contractor will re-treat soil and repair or replace damage caused by termite infestation.

B. Warranty Period: 5 years from date of Substantial Completion.

C. The warranty shall not deprive the Owner of other rights the Owner may have under other

provisions of the Contract Documents and will be in addition to and run concurrent with other warranties made by the Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SOIL TREATMENT SOLUTION

A. Termiticide: EPA-Registered termiticide acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, in an aqueous solution formulated to prevent termite infestation.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with the requirements, provide products by one of

the following: a. BASF Corporation. b. Bayer Environmental Science. c. Syngenta.

B. Other solutions may be used as recommended by Applicator if approved for intended application

by local authorities having jurisdiction. Use only soil treatment solutions that are not harmful to plants.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 APPLICATION

A. Surface Preparation: Remove foreign matter that could decrease treatment effectiveness on areas to be treated. Loosen, rake, and level soil to be treated, except previously compacted areas under slabs and foundations. Toxicants may be applied before placing compacted fill under slabs if recommended by toxicant manufacturer.



B. Application Rates: Apply soil treatment solution as follows:

1. Under slab-on-grade structures, treat soil before concrete slabs are placed, using the following application rates:

2. Apply 4 gallons of chemical solution per 10 linear feet to soil in critical areas under slab, including entire inside perimeter of foundation walls, along both sides of interior partition walls, around plumbing pipes and electric conduit penetrating slab, and around interior column footings.

3. Apply 1 gallon of chemical solution per 10 sq. ft. as an overall treatment under slab and attached slab areas where fill is soil or unwashed gravel. Apply 1-1/2 gallons of chemical solution to areas where fill is washed gravel or other coarse absorbent material.

4. Apply 4 gallons of chemical solution per 10 linear feet of trench for each foot of depth from grade to footing, along outside edge of building.

5. At hollow masonry foundations or grade beams, treat voids at rate of 2 gallons per 10 linear feet, poured directly into the hollow spaces.

6. At expansion joints, control joints, and areas where slabs will be penetrated, apply at rate of 4 gallons per 10 linear feet of penetration.

7. Post signs in areas of application to warn workers that soil termiticide treatment has been applied. Remove signs after areas are covered by other construction.

8. Reapply soil treatment solution to areas disturbed by subsequent excavation, landscape grading, or other construction activities following application.

END OF SECTION


JANUARY 2020 LANDSCAPE DEVELOPMENT – 329000 1 OF 8

SECTION 329000 – LANDSCAPE DEVELOPMENT

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

A. Furnish all plants and related materials, labor, equipment and services necessary to perform all required operations related to the planting and installation of trees, shrubs, groundcovers and other materials in compliance with the specifications and the applicable drawings.

1.2 STANDARDS

A. American Joint Committee on Horticultural Nomenclature, “Standard Plant

Names”, latest edition.

B. American Association of Nurserymen, Inc., “American Association for Nursery Stock”, latest edition.

C. Mississippi Department of Agriculture and Commerce, “Mississippi Fertilizer Law”, rules and regulations.


A. Plant materials shall comply with state and federal laws pertinent to

inspection for disease and insect infestation.

B. Plants will be subject to inspection and approval at the place of growth, or upon delivery to the site, for quality, size and variety. Such approval will not impair the right of inspection and rejection at the site during progress of the work, or after completion, for size, condition and form of balls and roots, latent defects or injury. Rejected plants will be removed from the site and replaced.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Certificate of inspection of plant material as required by state and federal

authorities.

B. Manufacturer’s or vendor’s certified analysis for soil amendments and fertilizers.

C. Testing laboratory’s analysis of existing and imported soil materials and recommendations.

1.5 DELIVERY

A. Provide notification of delivery schedule in advance so that plant material

may be inspected upon arrival to job site.



B. Protect and package plant materials during shipping to job site to guard against climatic and breakage injury during transit. Protect tops of plants and trees to prevent wind whipping and drying.

C. Where practical, do not deliver more plant material to the site than can be planted in one day unless adequate storage and protection is provided.

D. Plants that cannot be installed immediately upon arrival to job site shall be kept in a protected area to guard against excessive sun exposure, drying winds, freezing and other inclement weather conditions or other construction operations.

1.6 PACKAGED MATERIALS

A. Deliver all packaged material to the site in the original, unopened containers

bearing the manufacturer’s guaranteed chemical analysis, trademark and conformance to state law.

B. Protect materials from deterioration during delivery and while stored at site. 1.7 HANDLING

A. Handle all plants so that the roots are adequately protected at all times.

B. Plants shall not be bound with rope or wire at any time so as to damage, break branches or otherwise alter the form of the plant.

C. Do not pick up container or balled plants by the stems or trunk unless the container or ball is otherwise supported. Plants handled solely by the stem or trunk may be considered damaged and rejected for use.

D. Handle packaged materials with care so as not to accidentally open containers or otherwise contaminate them before time of use.

1.8 JOB CONDITIONS

A. Conduct planting operations under favorable weather conditions, following

procedures which are seasonably normal for such work and is accepted by local trade practice.

B. Determine location of underground utilities and perform work in a manner to avoid possible conflicts. Hand excavate as needed in these areas to avoid disturbances.

C. If adverse conditions detrimental to plant growth are encountered, such as rubble fill, poor drainage or fixed obstructions, provide notification before proceeding.



1.9 WARRANTY

A. Warranty new plant material for a period of 365 calendar days, beginning with date of final acceptance:

1.10 PLANT REPLACEMENT

A. Any plant not found in a healthy growing condition at the end of the warranty

period shall be removed from the site and replaced, pending optimum weather conditions.

B. Replacement plants shall be of the same type and size as specified in the plant list, at no additional cost to the Owner.

C. Inspection at the end of the warranty period will be on planting, construction and all other incidental work pertaining to the contract. Any replacement or repair required will be subject to the same warranty requirements as outlined in paragraph 1.9/A.

1.11 SCHEDULING

A. Where required, coordinate work with other trades and professions on the

job site. Do not begin if there is a danger of conflict or damage to work by other trades in the normal pursuit of their duties.

B. Install plant material and other items as indicated on the drawings. Provide notification of any on-site conditions not shown on plans which may require planting adjustments.

C. Plant trees, shrubs and groundcovers after final grades are established and prior to any lawn plantings unless otherwise approved. If such planting occurs after lawn establishment, protect these areas as needed and repair any damage immediately.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.1 PLANT MATERIALS

A. All plant materials shall be well-formed and shaped, true to natural form and

conform to the measurements indicated in the plant list. Plants that meet the requirements but do not possess a normal balance between height and spread, or lack shape and form characteristic of its habit and growth, will not be accepted.

B. All plants shall be freshly dug (where applicable), healthy, vigorous, well- branched and free of disease and insect egg and larvae. Do not prune plants prior to delivery.



C. Plants shall be nursery grown, unless otherwise specified, and grown under similar climatic conditions to those of project local. Plants larger than those specified may be used providing they meet the specified criteria and will not increase the contract price.

D. Substitutions will be permitted only if proof is submitted that specified plants and/or sizes are unobtainable. Proposals will be considered for nearest equivalent size or variety with equitable adjustment of contract price.

E. Plants shall be labeled with durable, legible tags and marked in weather- resistant ink with the plant name as specified in the plant list. Plant names and labels shall conform to the current edition of the Standard Plant Names as adopted by the American Joint Committee on Horticulture Nomenclature. Remove labels upon final acceptance.

F. Specimen plants will be selected for shape and branching habit that, at maturity, will produce a strong, well shaped, full-foliaged example of its species. The initial planting should represent these characteristics.

G. All plant material shall comply with American Nursery Stock Standards. 2.2 BALLED AND BURLAPPED PLANTS

A. Dig plants with firm, natural balls of soil and of sufficient size to encompass

the fibrous and feeding roots of the plant. Do not install B&B plant material if the ball is cracked or broken unless otherwise approved.

B. Wrap ball securely with burlap or strong biodegradable fabric and bind tightly with rope or wire.

C. Container grown plants may be accepted as balled and burlapped provided the plant has been growing on a container for at least one full season prior to delivery and that containers are sized adequately to accommodate the developing root system of the plant.

D. In hot weather, maintain plant material in shade house for a minimum of one week to allow plants to recover from digging shock.

E. Minimum size of earth ball shall equal that required for the next larger size of nursery grown stock.

2.3 CONTAINER GROWN STOCK

A. Plant material shall be healthy, vigorous, well-rooted and established in the

container in which it is grown. Tops shall be of good quality, spread and in a healthy growing condition.

B. Containers shall be sufficiently rigid to hold the ball shape protecting the root mass during transit.



C. Plants shall be established in their containers long enough for the fibrous root systems to have sufficiently developed so that the root mass will retain its shape and hold together when removed from the container.

D. Root bound plants will not be accepted. 2.4 TOPSOIL

A. All on-site and imported soils will be tested by an independent testing

laboratory to determine nutrient makeup and requirements necessary to provide a habitable environment for the proposed plantings.

B. In general, topsoil should be a natural, well drained, fertile, friable soil of loamy character capable of sustaining vigorous plant growth. It shall be free of sticks, stones, lumps, foreign plants and seeds, roots, obnoxious weeds and grasses, and other inert matter. It should be of uniform consistency; not excessively alkaline or acid, nor containing substances harmful to plant growth. Existing on-site soil may be utilized in planting mixture if of good quality to promote a healthy root environment as determined by the testing laboratory.

2.5 PLANTING SOIL

A. Pending additional requirements by the testing laboratory, all planting beds

and pits shall be well drained and have the following soil mixture: (3) part approved topsoil, (1) part sharp masonry sand (no river sand) and (1) part pine bark soil conditioner. Mix all materials to provide a homogenous blend. Apply an approved pre-emergent herbicide to all planting and mulched areas, thoroughly incorporating into bed areas prior to installation of plants or mulch. Apply at manufacturer’s recommended rates.

2.6 FERTILIZER

A. Commercial fertilizer, uniform composition, dry and free flowing. Use 13-13-

13 formula (13% nitrogen, 13% phosphoric acid, 13% potassium) unless otherwise recommended by testing laboratory.

B. Do not apply commercial, fast-acting fertilizers during dormant season (September 21 to March 21). For dormant season plantings apply Fertilome Root Stimulator or approved equal at manufacturer’s recommended rates and procedures.

2.7 MULCH

A. As noted in drawings.



2.8 TREE PROTECTION

A. Wrapping: Double thick crepe paper cemented together with a bituminous or equivalent binder; 4 inches wide, minimum and secured with a lightly tarred medium or coarse sisal yarn.

B. Staking: As shown in drawings.

2.9 WATER

A. Water for plantings, prior to activation of the irrigation system, will be the

responsibility of the contractor and provided through his own means or by permission of the Owner to utilize existing on-site facilities. Regular watering maintenance will be required until final acceptance of all work required under this contract.

PART 3 – EXECUTION

3.1 INSPECTION

A. Verify site conditions prior to beginning work. Inspect plants for injury and

insect infestation.

B. Examine site and soil conditions to determine if project area is clean and free of objectionable materials or rubbish, poses no conditions that would prove to be harmful to plant growth, or prohibits work from being performed in a timely manner.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Stake out locations for plants and outline of planting beds. Do not begin

planting until layout is approved by the owner‘s representative.

B. Changes in plant material placement due to conflicts with overhead or underground utilities must be approved prior to continuing work in these areas.

C. Topsoil, sand and soil conditioners may either be pre-mixed or mixed in- place by spreading all materials evenly over bed area and roto-tilled thoroughly with existing soil until a homogenous mixture is achieved to full depth of bed as required.

D. Pits and beds should be dug and soil prepared prior to moving plants to their respective locations for planting to ensure that they will not be unnecessarily exposed to drying conditions or physical damage.



3.3 EXCAVATION FOR PLANTINGS

A. Shrub pit planting (only where noted specifically): Make plant pits circular in outline with vertical sides and flat bottoms. Prepare all pits 6 inches deeper than ball or container size. Shrub pits shall be a minimum of 16 inches in depth and tree pits a minimum of 20 inches. Shrub pits should be a minimum of 2 times greater in diameter than plant ball. Tree pits should be a minimum of 12 inches greater in diameter than balls for trees up to 3 inch caliper and a minimum of 18 inches greater for trees over 3 inch caliper.

B. Prepare all shrub and groundcover beds to a min. depth of 12” below existing grade incorporating a well drained organic soil mix with the existing soil. Apply a minimum of 1 cubic yard of soil mix per 100sf of bed area.

C. Shrub beds incorporating mass plantings shall be uniformly prepared to the required depth. No such beds with mass plantings will be prepared by digging individual pits unless otherwise noted on drawings.

D. Planting beds should always be mounded for positive surface drainage away from buildings or structures and toward drainage provisions.

3.4 PLANTING

A. Center plant in pit or place as required in prepared bed and face for best

effect. Place sufficient planting soil under plant as required to raise plant 1 ½ to 2 inches above existing surrounding grade so that, after settlement, it bears the same relationship to finished grade that it bore prior to planting.

B. Set plant plumb and hold firmly in position until soil has been placed and tamped solidly around root ball.

C. Backfill beds and pits with planting soil mixture in 2 inch layers, each carefully tamped in place to avoid injury to roots or disturbing position of plant.

D. When backfilled approximately 2/3 of required depth, fill pit or bed with water to settle soil around roots. After soil settles, fill remainder of pit or bed with planting soil, water in, and tamp lightly to finished grade. Rake out to achieve proper drainage.

E. Balled plants should be planted in pits on planting soil material that has been firmly tamped prior to placing plants. Set plumb and straight 1 ½ inches above surrounding grade. Cut burlap or fabric, ropes, wire or other wrapping material and remove from top 1/3 of ball. Do not pull wrapping from under ball. Do not plant if ball is broken before or during planting process.

F. For container grown plants, cut cans on two sides, taking care not to damage root ball. After removing plant, scarify edge roots on 3 sides. Place as required.



G. Build 4-inch-high saucer continuous around all plants or trees which stand alone and are not in larger, mulched beds. Construct saucer of planting soil mix and equal to the diameter of the planting pit as a minimum, or greater if indicated on drawings.

H. Fertilize all plants prior to mulching, if required, at rates recommended by the manufacturer or by the testing laboratory. Water thoroughly after fertilization.

3.5 MULCHING

A. Mulch all planting pits and beds immediately after planting, covering the entire planting area to the depth required. Water in thoroughly after mulching.

3.6 STAKING AND WRAPPING

A. Stake trees immediately after planting to stand taut and plumb for a period of

one year.

B. Wrap trees promptly after planting, spirally to a height reaching to just above the main branches. Overlap 2 inches.

3.7 PRUNING

A. Prune trees and shrubs in accordance with standard horticultural practice to

protect and enhance the natural character of the plant. Perform pruning with clean, sharp sterilized tools.

B. Prune materials to remove injured twigs and branches, dead or dying wood and suckers.

3.8 MAINTENANCE

A. Provide watering, cultivating, spraying, tightening cables, mulching, weeding

and other operations necessary to ensure a healthy growing environment for all plantings until final acceptance has been made.

B. As planting operations proceed, all bindings, wrappings, empty containers, branches and other objectionable debris shall not be allowed to accumulate and shall be removed daily to keep the site neat and clean at all times.

END OF SECTION


JANUARY 2020 SODDING – 329200 1 OF 6

SECTION 329200 - SODDING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 DESCRIPTION

A. Provide sodded lawns as shown and specified. The work includes:

1. Soil preparation. 2. Sodding lawns and other indicated areas. 3. Maintenance.


1. Division 31 Section "Site Clearing" for topsoil stripping and stockpiling. 2. Division 31 Section "Site Earthwork" for excavation, filling and backfilling, and rough

grading.


A. Sod: Comply with American Sod Producers Association (ASPA) classes of sod materials.

B. Provide and pay for materials testing. Testing agency shall be acceptable to the Landscape Architect. Provide the following data:

1. Topsoil:

a. pH factor. b. Mechanical analysis. c. Percentage of organic content. d. Recommendations on type and quantity of additives required to establish satisfactory

pH factor and supply of nutrients to bring nutrients to satisfactory level for planting.

C. Installer’s qualifications: Minimum of 3 years experience installing sod. The Contractor shall purchase from and maintain liability insurance and a performance bond in a company or companies lawfully authorized to do business in the jurisdiction in which the Project is located.



1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit sod growers certification of grass species. Identify source location.

B. Submit soil test report(s).

C. Upon sodded lawn acceptance, submit written maintenance instructions recommending procedures for maintenance of sodded lawns.


A. Cut, deliver, and install sod within 24-hour period.

1. Do not harvest or transport sod when moisture content may adversely affect sod survival. 2. Protect sod from sun, wind and dehydration prior to installation. 3. Do not tear, stretch or drop sod during handling and installation.


A. Work notification: Notify Landscape Architect at least 3 working days prior to start of sodding operations.

B. Protect existing utilities, paving, and other facilities from damage caused by sodding operations.

C. Perform sodding work only after planting and other work affecting ground surface has been completed.

D. Restrict traffic from lawn areas until grass is established.

E. Erect signs and barriers as required.

F. Provide hose and lawn-watering equipment as required.

1.7 WARRANTY

A. Warrant all sodding for a period of one year after the date of acceptance against defects including death and unsatisfactory growth in the opinion of the Landscape Architect.

B. Replace in accordance with the drawings and specifications, all sod that is dead or, as determined by the Landscape Architect, is in an unhealthy or unsightly condition. The cost of such replacement (s) is at Contractor's expense. Warrant all replacement sod for 1 year after installation.

C. Warranty shall not include damage or loss of sodding caused by fires, floods, freezing rains, lightning storms, or winds over 75 miles per hour, winter kill caused by extreme, cold and sever winter conditions not typical of planting area; acts of vandalism or negligence on the part of the Owner.



D. Replacements: Replacements are subject to all requirements stated in this specification and subject to inspection by the Landscape Architect.

E. Repair grades, lawn areas, paving and any other damage resulting from replacement sodding operations, at no additional cost to the Owner.

F. Inspect job site monthly during warranty period to determine what changes, if any, should be made in the maintenance program. Submit all recommended changes in writing to the Landscape Architect and the Owner.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

A. Sod: Certified nursery grade “Tifway 419” Bermuda Grass as specified on drawings. Provide sod free of grassy or broadleaf weeds.

B. Provide well-rooted, healthy sod, free of diseases, nematodes and soil borne insects. Provide sod uniform in color, leaf texture, density, and free of weeds, undesirable grasses, stones, roots, thatch, and extraneous material; viable and capable of growth and development when planted.

1. Furnish sod machine stripped in square pads or strips not more than 3'-0" long; uniformly 1" to 1-1/2" thick with clean-cut edges. Mow sod before stripping.

2. Roll sod may be used, in lieu of square pads/strips.

C. Topsoil for Sod Areas: Fertile, friable, natural topsoil of loamy character, without admixture of subsoil material, obtained from a well-drained arable site, reasonably free from clay, lumps coarse sands, stones, plants, roots, sticks, and other foreign materials, with acidity range of between pH 6.0 and 6.8.

1. Identify source location of topsoil proposed for use on the project. 2. Topsoil which exists on the project site, including that which has been stripped and

stockpiled during construction, will be acceptable if it meets the requirements of this specification, and if approved in writing by Landscape Architect.

3. Provide topsoil free of substances harmful to the plants that will be grown in the soil.

D. Fertilizer:

1. Granular, nonburning product composed of not less than 50% organic slow acting, guaranteed analysis professional fertilizer.

a. Type A: Starter Fertilizer, formula in accordance with approved laboratory soil test report(s) and time of application.

b. Type B: Top Dressing Fertilizer, formula in accordance with approved laboratory soil test report(s) and time of application.

E. Ground Limestone - Limestone shall contain no less than 85 percent calcium carbonate by weight. It shall be crushed so that at least 50% will pass a 10-mesh sieve and 90% will pass through a 20-mesh sieve. The application of limestone shall be in accordance with approved laboratory soil test report(s).



F. Stakes - Use where sod slopes greater than 3:1 or in drainage swales.

1. Softwood, 3/4" dia. x 8" long or, 2. Steel, tee shaped pins, 4" head x 8" leg.

G. Water: Free of substance harmful to sod growth. Hoses or other methods of transportation furnished by Contractor.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSPECTION

A. Examine finish surfaces, grades, topsoil quality and depth. Do not start sodding work until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Limit preparation to areas which will be immediately sodded.

B. Loosen topsoil of lawn areas to minimum depth of 4". Remove stones over 1" in any dimension and sticks, roots, rubbish and extraneous matter.

C. Grade lawn areas to smooth, free draining and even surface with a loose, uniformly fine texture. Roll and rake; remove ridges and fill depressions as required to drain.

D. Apply limestone at rate determined by the soil test, to adjust pH of topsoil. Distribute evenly by machine and incorporate thoroughly into topsoil.

E. Apply fertilizer at the approved rates. Apply fertilizer by mechanical rotary or drop type distributor, thoroughly and evenly incorporated with the soil to a depth of 3" by discing or other approved methods. Fertilize areas inaccessible to power equipment with hand tools and incorporate it into soil.

F. Dampen dry soil prior to sodding.

G. Restore prepared areas to specified condition if eroded, settled, or otherwise disturbed after fine grading and prior to sodding.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Sodding:

1. Time of Sodding: Tifway 419 Bermuda Grass: anytime except when soil is wet, muddy, or frozen.



2. Lay sod to form a solid mass with tightly fitted joints. Butt ends and sides of sod strips. Do not overlay edges. Stagger strips to offset joints in adjacent courses. Remove excess sod to avoid smothering of adjacent grass. Provide sod pad top 1” below adjacent curbs, sidewalks, and flush with drains and seeded areas.

3. Where sod is installed adjacent to existing lawn areas, new sod shall be recessed so that a level and flush condition exists between existing and new lawn areas.

4. Install initial row off sod in a straight line, beginning at bottom of slopes, perpendicular to direction of the sloped area. Place subsequent rows parallel to and lightly against previously installed row.

5. Peg/pin sod on slopes greater than 3 to 1 to prevent slippage at a rate of 2 stakes per yd. of sod.

6. Water sod thoroughly with a fine spray immediately after laying. 7. Roll with light lawn roller to ensure contact with sub-grade.

3.4 MAINTENANCE

A. Maintain sodded lawns until completion and acceptance of the entire project or not less than 30 days after completion and acceptance of sodding operations.

B. Maintain sodded lawn areas, including water, spot weeding, mowing, application of herbicides, fungicides, insecticides and resodding until a full, uniform stand of grass free of weed, undesirable grass species, disease, and insects is achieved and accepted by the Landscape Architect.

1. Water sod thoroughly every 2 to 3 days, as required to establish proper rooting. 2. Repair, rework and resod all areas that have washed out or are eroded. Replace undesirable

or dead areas with new sod. 3. Mow lawn areas as soon as lawn top growth reaches a 4" height. Cut back to 3" height.

Repeat mowing as required to maintain specified height. Not more than 40% of grass leaf shall be removed at any single mowing.

4. Apply Type B fertilizer to lawns approximately 30 days after sodding at recommended rate in soil test report(s). Apply evenly with a mechanical rotary of drop type distributor. Thoroughly water into soil.

5. Apply herbicides as required to control weed growth or undesirable grass species. 6. Apply fungicides and insecticides as required to control diseases and insects. 7. Remove sod pegs (if used).

3.5 CLEAN UP AND PROTECTION:

A. During sodding work, keep pavements clean and work area in an orderly condition.

B. Upon completion of work, clear grounds and all paved areas (affected by operations) of debris, superfluous materials and all equipment. Remove from site to satisfaction of Landscape Architect.

C. Protect sodding work and materials from damage due to landscape operations, operations by other contractors and trades and trespassers. Maintain protection during installation and maintenance periods. Treat, repair or replace damaged sodding work as directed, at no additional cost to the Owner.



3.6 INSPECTION AND ACCEPTANCE

A. Inspection to determine acceptance of sodded lawn will be made by the Landscape Architect, at the time of Substantial Completion for the entire project. The Contractor shall provide notification at least five (5) working days before requested inspection date.

1. Sodded areas will be acceptable provided all requirements, including maintenance, have been complied with, and a healthy, even-colored viable lawn is established, free of weeds, undesirable grass species, disease, and insects.

2. If the date of Substantial Completion occurs in the dormant season, lawn areas will be reviewed at the beginning of the next growing season for compliance with this specification.

B. Upon Substantial Completion and acceptance of lawn areas, and at the end of the Contractor’s maintenance period, the Owner will assume lawn maintenance.

END OF SECTION